CONTROL-M Parameter Guide

CONTROL-M Parameter Guide
Supporting
CONTROL-M/Enterprise Manager version 6.4.01
CONTROL-M/Desktop 6.4.01
CONTROL-M/Forecast version 6.3.01
CONTROL-M/Server version 6.3.01
CONTROL-M/Agent version 6.3.01
CONTROL-M/CM for SAP version 6.3.01
BMC CONTROL-M/CM for Oracle E-Business Suite version 6.2.01
CONTROL-M/CM for Advanced File Transfer version 6.3.01
CONTROL-M/CM for PeopleSoft version 6.1.02
CONTROL-M/CM for Microsoft Windows version 6.3.01
CONTROL-M Business Process Integration Suite 6.3.01
BMC Batch Impact Manager version 6.3.01
September, 2008
www.bmc.com
Contacting BMC Software

You can access the BMC Software website at http://www.bmc.com. From this website, you can obtain information
about the company, its products, corporate offices, special events, and career opportunities.
United States and Canada

Address
BMC SOFTWARE INC

2101 CITYWEST BLVD
HOUSTON TX 77042-2827
USA
Telephone
713 918 8800 or

800 841 2031
Fax
(01) 713 918 8000
Fax
713 918 8000
Outside United States and Canada

Telephone
(01) 713 918 8800
Copyright 2008 BMC Software, Inc.

BMC, BMC Software, and the BMC Software logo are the exclusive properties of BMC Software, Inc., are registered with the U.S. Patent
and Trademark Office, and may be registered or pending registration in other countries. All other BMC trademarks, service marks, and
logos may be registered or pending registration in the U.S. or in other countries. All other trademarks or registered trademarks are the
property of their respective owners.
DB2 is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation.
ITIL is a registered trademark, and a registered community trademark of the Office of Government Commerce, and is registered in the
U.S. Patent and Trademark Office, and is used here by BMC Software, Inc., under license from and with the permission of OGC.
Linux is the registered trademark of Linus Torvalds.
SAP, SAP R/3, and SAP NetWeaver are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and in several other
countries.
Oracle is a registered trademark of Oracle Corporation.
UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group.
BMC Software considers information included in this documentation to be proprietary and confidential. Your use of this information is
subject to the terms and conditions of the applicable End User License Agreement for the product and the proprietary and restricted
rights notices included in this documentation.
Restricted rights legend

U.S. Government Restricted Rights to Computer Software. UNPUBLISHED -- RIGHTS RESERVED UNDER THE COPYRIGHT LAWS OF
THE UNITED STATES. Use, duplication, or disclosure of any data and computer software by the U.S. Government is subject to
restrictions, as applicable, set forth in FAR Section 52.227-14, DFARS 252.227-7013, DFARS 252.227-7014, DFARS 252.227-7015, and
DFARS 252.227-7025, as amended from time to time. Contractor/Manufacturer is BMC SOFTWARE INC, 2101 CITYWEST BLVD,
HOUSTON TX 77042-2827, USA. Any contract notices should be sent to this address.
Customer support
You can obtain technical support by using the BMC Software Customer Support website or by contacting Customer
Support by telephone or e-mail. To expedite your inquiry, see Before contacting BMC.
Support website
You can obtain technical support from BMC 24 hours a day, 7 days a week at http://www.bmc.com/support_home.
From this website, you can
read overviews about support services and programs that BMC offers
find the most current information about BMC products
search a database for issues similar to yours and possible solutions
order or download product documentation
download products and maintenance
report an issue or ask a question
subscribe to receive proactive e-mail alerts when new product notices are released
find worldwide BMC support center locations and contact information, including e-mail addresses, fax numbers, and
telephone numbers
Support by telephone or e-mail

In the United States and Canada, if you need technical support and do not have access to the web, call 800 537 1813 or
send an e-mail message to [email protected]. (In the subject line, enter SupID:<yourSupportContractID>,
such as SupID:12345). Outside the United States and Canada, contact your local support center for assistance.
Before contacting BMC

Have the following information available so that Customer Support can begin working on your issue immediately:
product information
product name
product version (release number)
license number and password (trial or permanent)
operating system and environment information
machine type
operating system type, version, and service pack or other maintenance level such as PUT or PTF
system hardware configuration
serial numbers
related software (database, application, and communication) including type, version, and service pack or
maintenance level
sequence of events leading to the issue
commands and options that you used
messages received (and the time and date that you received them)
product error messages

messages from the operating system, such as file system full
messages from related software
Contents
About this book
15
How this book is organized . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Related Documentation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Online and printed books. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Chapter 1
Introduction
19
Defining job processing parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Job parameter and variable access. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Language support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Abbreviations and conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Conventions for parameter descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
20
21
23
23
24
Chapter 2
25
General parameters
Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Application Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Application Version. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Author . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AutoEdit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control Module (CM) Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CONTROL-M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Doc Lib. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Doc Mem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Embedded Scripts/JCL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
File Name/Mem Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Form Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Job Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Job Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Over Lib . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Owner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Path/Mem Lib . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PIPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Scheduling Table Lib . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Task Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contents
27
29
31
33
35
39
41
42
43
45
47
48
51
54
56
58
60
62
64
65
69
72
73
75
Chapter 3
Scheduling parameters
81
Active . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Adjust Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
And/Or . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Confcal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Dates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Days . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Days Calendar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Minimum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Months . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
PDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Relationship. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Retro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
SAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Scheduling Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Statistics Calendar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Statistics Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Time Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Week Days . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Weeks Calendar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Chapter 4
Execution parameters
143
Confirm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Critical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Cyclic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Due Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Max Wait . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Maximum Reruns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Multi Agent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Node ID/Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Prevent NCT2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Request NJE Node . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Rerun From . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Rerun Member . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Scheduling Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
System Affinity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Time From, Time Until . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Chapter 5
Condition parameters
197
In Condition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Out Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Chapter 6
Resource parameters
211
Control Resources. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

6
Quantitative Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

Chapter 7
Post-processing parameters
219
CTB Step . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Do AutoEdit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Do Cond. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Do CTBRule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Do Forcejob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Do If Rerun . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Do Mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Do NOTOK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Do OK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Do Remedy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Do Rerun . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Do Shout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Do Stop Cyclic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Do Sysout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
On statement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
z/OS and non-z/OS jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Jobs running on computers other than z/OS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Jobs running in z/OS environments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reten Days . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reten Gen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Step Range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
221
224
227
230
233
236
240
243
245
247
248
250
252
253
256
256
256
268
280
282
284
Chapter 8
289
Job Output parameters
Auto-Archive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Shout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
SYSOUT Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Chapter 9
Status parameters
311
Status parameters summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311

Chapter 10
SAP parameters
313
ABAP Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Activate Traces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Archive ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Archive Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Archiving Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Authorization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Background Job Name. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Check Sessions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Check Variant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Copy From Step . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Copy Spool To . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contents
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
7
Delete After Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331

Department . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Detect Spawned Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Document Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Event Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
External Command. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
External Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
InfoPackage Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
InfoPackage RNR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
InfoPackage Tech. Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Information Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Job Class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Job Count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Job Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Job Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Job Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Job Waiting for External Termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Layout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Log External Errors in Joblog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Log External Output to Joblog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
New Job Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
New Spool Request . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Number of Copies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
Object Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Operating sys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
OS Cover Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Output Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Output Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Owner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Print Archive Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Print Expiration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Process Chain Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Process Chain ID. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Process Chain Log ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
QID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Recipient. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Rerun Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Rows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
SAP-BW Business Process Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
SAP Cover Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
SAP Job Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
SAP Spool Recipient Attribute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Selection Cover Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
Session Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Spool List Recipient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Spool List Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Start Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Step Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Target Group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Target Host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Target Server (1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Target Server (2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Time of Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Use ABAP Program Default . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Variant Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
381
382
383
384
385
386
387
388
389
390
391
392
Chapter 11
393
Oracle E-Business Suite parameters
Advanced Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Application Instance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Application Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Application Short Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Include Child Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Include Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Include Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Notifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Output Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parameter Validation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Phase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Request ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Request Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Responsibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Security Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Upon completion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
User Name. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wait Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
395
396
397
398
399
400
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
412
413
416
417
418
419
420
421
Chapter 12
423
Advanced File Transfer parameters
Account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Additional Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
After the completion of a successful file transfer the source file is. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Allocation Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Binary/ASCII . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Block Size. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contents
427
428
429
430
431
432
433
9
Continue on Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434

DBCS Encoding. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
Encryption Algorithm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
File Transfer Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
Host Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
Host1 pre command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Host1 first pre command parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
Host1 second pre command parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
Host1 post command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
Host1 first post command parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
Host1 second post command parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
Host2 pre command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
Host2 first pre command parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
Host2 second pre command parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
Host2 post command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
Host2 first post command parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
Host2 second post command parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
If a file of the same name as the destination file already exists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
Logical Record Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
Number of File Transfers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
Number of Retries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
OS Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
Primary Allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
Record Format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
Recursive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
Rename Destination file. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
Rerun from Point of Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
Secondary Allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
Template Name. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
Temporary File Prefix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
Trailing blanks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
Transfer Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
Translate Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466
Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
Use Configuration Default . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
User Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
Chapter 13
PeopleSoft parameters
471
Connection Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472

Email Subject . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
Email Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
Email With Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
Process Name (I) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
Process Name (II) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
Process Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
Rerun From Step . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480
Run Control ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
10
Server Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
User ID. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Userdef1/2/3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
482
483
484
485
Chapter 14
487
Microsoft Windows parameters
Job Execution Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Job Memory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Max Work Set Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Min Work Set Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Priority Class. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Process Execution Time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Process Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Scheduling Class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
488
489
490
491
492
493
494
495
Chapter 15
497
AutoEdit facility
AutoEdit variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Job submission variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CONTROL-M system variables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
User-defined variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Variable lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AutoEdit Expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Elementary expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Numeric expressions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
String Expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AutoEdit functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Expressions for %%LDA [iSeries (AS/400) only] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
499
499
504
508
511
513
513
514
516
518
520
Chapter 16
521
CONTROL-M Business Process Integration Suite parameters
Account (CONTROL-M/CM for BPI Java Applications) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Account (CONTROL-M/CM for BPI Web Services) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Account (CONTROL-M/CM for BPI Messaging). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Add SOAP Header From File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Array Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Assign Job Output to the following AutoEdit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Assign Job Output to the following file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Business . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Destination queue/Topic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exclude Job Output (CONTROL-M/CM for BPI Java Applications) . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exclude Job Output (CONTROL-M/CM for BPI Web Services) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exclude Job Output (CONTROL-M/CM for BPI Messaging). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Expiration Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Method. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
No Sysout Banner (CONTROL-M/CM for BPI Java Applications) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
No Sysout Banner (CONTROL-M/CM for BPI Web Services) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
No Sysout Banner (CONTROL-M/CM for BPI Messaging) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contents
524
525
526
527
528
529
530
531
532
533
534
535
536
537
538
539
540
541
11
Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543
Output parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544
Parameter Alias. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545
Parameter Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546
Parameter Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 547
Priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 548
Property Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 549
Property Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550
Reply Queue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552
Time to Wait . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553
Use Parameters from Input File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554
Use Free Text Message. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 555
Use Predefined Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 556
Wait for Reply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557
WSDL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558
Index
12
559
Tables
Access to job parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
General parameters summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Scheduling parameters summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Execution parameters - summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Max Wait parameter values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Node ID and Node Group parameter descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Format - Rerun From Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Conditions parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Resource parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Job statuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Post-processing parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Format - Do NOTOK Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Operating system completion code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Describing formatting of statements from SYSOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
PGMST step values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
PROCST step values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Code values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Qualifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Job Output parameters summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Shout subparameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
SYSOUT Handling formatting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Status parameters summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
SAP panel parameters summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Add ABAP window parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Add external program window parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Add external command window parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
SAP panel for data archiving parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
SAP-BW General panel parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
SAP-BW panel, Process Chain parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
SAP-BW panel, InfoPackage parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
OAP parameters summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
Request Set subparameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
Single Request subparameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
FILE_TRANS panel parameterssummary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
FILE_TRANS panel parametersnotification purposes only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
FILE_TRANS panel - Advanced window parametersgeneral . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
FILE_TRANS panel - Advanced window parametersOpenSystems/OS400 . . . . 424
FILE_TRANS panel - Advanced window parametersMVS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
FILE_TRANS panel - Advanced window parameterssecurity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
FILE_TRANS panel - Advanced window parametersFTP Commands . . . . . . . . . 425
Tables
13
PeopleSoft panel parameters summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471

Microsoft Windows parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
Parameters that accept AutoEdit variables and expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498
General job submission variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500
OpenVMS job submission parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500
iSeries (AS/400) job submission parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500
UNISYS job submission parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502
Tandem job submission parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503
CONTROL-M system variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504
Post-processing system variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
Variable Prefixes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509
AutoEdit Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518
JAVA panel parameters summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521
WS panel parameters summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522
MSG panel parameters summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522
14
About this book

This book contains detailed information about parameters and variables that can be
used in CONTROL-M job processing definitions.
Use this book to determine usage and syntax of job parameters and variables for the
latest version of all CONTROL-M products.
How this book is organized

This book is organized as follows. In addition, an index appears at the end of the
book.
Chapter
Description
Chapter 1
Introduction
Introduces the various types of job parameters and AutoEdit
variables described in the rest of the book.
Chapter 2
General parameters
Parameters that identify the job and describe its function.
Chapter 3
Parameters that enable you to specify when and how often a job
should be scheduled for submission to CONTROL-M/Server.
Chapter 4
Parameters that enable you to specify runtime characteristics of the
job, pertaining to reruns of the job, in particular.
Chapter 5
Parameters that enable you to specify interdependent relationships
between jobs, using prerequisite conditions.
Chapter 6
Resource parameters
Parameters that enable you to make the availability of system
resources a prerequisite for job submission to CONTROL-M/Server.
Chapter 7
Specify how the jobs results should be analyzed and what
subsequent actions should be taken.
Chapter 8

Describes actions that CONTROL-M and CONTROL-M/EM
perform when the job has finished running.
About this book
15
Related Documentation
Chapter
Description
Chapter 9
Status parameters
Describes runtime information about the job.
Chapter 10
SAP parameters
Describes the parameters used to create and run a SAP job.
Chapter 11

Describes the parameters used to create and run an Oracle Business
Suite job.
Chapter 12

Describes the parameters used to create and run an FTP job.
Chapter 13
Describes the parameters used to create and run a PeopleSoft job.
Chapter 14

Describes the parameters used to create and run a Microsoft
Windows 2000 job.
Chapter 15
AutoEdit facility
Describes special variables and functions that can be used to make
job processing definitions more dynamic.
Chapter 16
CONTROL-M Business Process Integration Suite parameters

Describes the parameters used to create and run a CONTROL-M BPI
Suite job (Java Applications, Web Services or Messaging).
Chapter 17
BMC Batch Impact Manager parameters

Describes the parameters used to create and run BMC Batch Impact
Manager jobs for defining critical batch services.
Related Documentation
The following list describes other BMC publications that are relevant to the
parameters and variables described in this book.
16
CONTROL-M User Guide describes CONTROL-M/EM concepts, features,

facilities, and operating instructions. In addition, it describes CONTROLM/Desktop used to define and manage CONTROL-M job processing definitions,
scheduling tables, and calendars. It can be used as a learning guide as well as a
reference guide.
CONTROL-M Administrator Guide describes the tasks that the

CONTROL-M/EM administrator must perform to define, monitor, and maintain
the CONTROL-M/EM environment.
CONTROL-M Utility Guide describes the utilities used for creating and managing
objects in the job production environment and maintaining various aspects of
CONTROL-M/Enterprise Manager.
Online and printed books
CONTROL-M Administrator Guides are supplied for servers, agents, and Control
Modules for various CONTROL-M computers (for example, UNIX, iSeries
(AS/400) and Microsoft Windows). These guides describe setup, security, and
utilities.
CONTROL-M Installation Guide describes the installation processes for

implementing CONTROL-M/EM and CONTROL-M/Server environments on
Microsoft Windows and UNIX computers.
CONTROL-M for z/OS User Guide is a complete guide to the CONTROL-M

Production Control System in a mainframe environment.
CONTROL-M/Enterprise Manager API Developers Guide describes how to enable

your applications to submit requests to CONTROL-M/EM.
CONTROL-M Business Service Management Solution User Guide describes BMC

Batch Impact Manager, BMC CONTROL-M/Forecast, and BMC Batch Discovery
concepts, features, facilities, installation, and operating instructions. It can be used
as a learning guide, as well as a reference guide.
CONTROL-M/Control Module for ORACLE E-Business Suite Administrator

Guide explains how to define and monitor jobs using the Oracle E-Business Suite
Panel of the Job Editing form.
CONTROL-M/Control Module for PeopleSoft Administrator Guide explains how

to define and monitor jobs using the PS8 Panel of the Job Editing form.
CONTROL-M/Control Module for SAP Administrator Guide describes BMC

Softwares batch management solution for SAP.
CONTROL-M Messages Manual describes messages that are displayed on the

server computer as well as those recorded in the CONTROL-M log.

The books that accompany BMC Software products are available online and in
printed format. You can view online books with Acrobat Reader from Adobe
Systems. The reader is provided at no cost, as explained in Access online books.
You can also obtain additional printed books from BMC Software, as explained in
Request additional printed books.
About this book
17
Access online books
Online books are provided as Portable Document Format (PDF) files. You can view
them, print them, or copy them to your computer by using Acrobat Reader 4.0 or
later. You can access online books from the documentation compact disc (CD) that
accompanies your product or from the World Wide Web.
In some cases, installation of Acrobat Reader and downloading the online books is an
optional part of the product-installation process. For information about downloading
the free reader from the Web, go to the Adobe Systems site at http://www.adobe.com.
To view any online book that BMC Software offers, visit the support page of the BMC
Software Web site at http://www.bmc.com/support.html. Log on and select a product
to access the related documentation. (To log on, first-time users can request a user
name and password by registering at the support page or by contacting a BMC
Software sales representative.)
Request additional printed books
BMC Software provides a core set of printed books with your product order. To
request additional books, go to http://www.bmc.com/support.html.
18
Chapter
Introduction
In the CONTROL-M job scheduling environment, jobs are tasks that can be
performed by a computer. These tasks are handled according to parameters. The
parameters specified for a particular job are collectively referred to as a job processing
definition.
NOTE
The term job as used in this manual refers to any task that can be performed by a script or
command that is handled by CONTROL-M/Server.
Job processing parameters only need to be defined once for each job. CONTROL-M
uses the job processing definition each time a job is ordered. Definitions can be
modified at any time using various CONTROL-M/EM facilities.
These definitions are created using CONTROL-M/Desktop and are stored in
scheduling tables (job directories) according to various criteria that you determine.
The scheduling tables are uploaded to CONTROL-M/EM. When the scheduling
criteria of the table are met, the jobs are passed to the CONTROL-M/Server database.
Job parameters are composed primarily of static information. However, a job
processing definition may need to include information that is subject to change or
was not available when the definition was created (such as the time at which a job
was submitted, or the name of the batch queue to which the job was submitted.).
CONTROL-M/EM enables you to replace that data with AutoEdit variables. You can
use both pre-defined AutoEdit variables and those that you create.
Chapter 1
Introduction
19
Defining job processing parameters
Defining job processing parameters

This guide assumes that your primary point of access for creating job processing
definitions is the Job Editing form. Nonetheless, information is also provided for
creating definitions using other CONTROL-M components.
Job processing definitions can be created using any of the following methods:
CONTROL-M/Desktop. Use the Job Editing form or the Mass Creation facility to
create definitions offline. You can then upload the jobs to the CONTROL-M/EM
database.
CONTROL-M/EM. Use the Job Editing form to modify parameters for jobs that
have already been scheduled for submission on the current day. For more
information about the Job Editing form, see the CONTROL-M User Guide.
CONTROL-M/EM. Use various CONTROL-M/EM utilities to define or modify

job processing definitions. For more information, see the CONTROL-M Utility
Guide.
CONTROL-M/Server, CONTROL-M for z/OS, and CONTROL-M/Agent. Use

CONTROL-M batch utilities or the online facility [z/OS or iSeries (AS/400)] to
define or modify job processing definitions.
If you are using CONTROL-M batch utilities and want to use a special character,
such as >, <, or |, when setting the value of a job parameter, you must enclose the
entire expression in double quotation marks, for example ">9".
NOTE
All job processing definitions are stored in the CONTROL-M/EM database and are uploaded
to the CONTROL-M/Server database.
The parameters of job processing definitions can also be used as selection criteria
20
To determine the content of the ViewPoints that indicate which nodes are
displayed in the CONTROL-M/Desktop window and the CONTROL-M/EM flow
diagram
To determine which jobs are included in a report created using the Reporting
facility
Job parameter and variable access

The Job Editing form is divided into panels, as shown in Table 1. Each panel contains
parameters that have similar functions.
The division of the chapters in this book reflects the division of the job processing
parameters in the CONTROL-M/EM Job Editing form. For example, to learn about a
parameter that is displayed on the General panel of the Job Editing form, see
Chapter 2, General parameters.
Table 1
Access to job parameters and variables (part 1 of 2)
Panel
Contents
General Panel
Contains General parameters. These parameters provide information

about the job and explain what the job does. In addition, they include
miscellaneous parameters that relate to how the job is executed and
preparations that are performed before the job is executed.
For more information, see Chapter 2, General parameters.
Scheduling Panel
Contains Scheduling parameters. These parameters determine the time

period (days, months, and hours) during which the job can be
submitted for execution. If a job is a candidate for execution, it is placed
in the Active Jobs file.
For more information, see Chapter 3, Scheduling parameters.
Note: For more information about original scheduling dates, see the
description of using system parameters in the CONTROL-M
Administrator Guide.
Application Panel Contains parameters for the specified application on which the job runs
(for example, SAP or Oracle E-Business Suite).
The title and content of the Application panel change depending on
which application is specified.
For more information, see Chapter 10, SAP parameters, Chapter 11,
Oracle E-Business Suite parameters, and Chapter 14, Microsoft
Windows parameters.
Execution Panel
Contains Execution parameters. These parameters determine where,

how often, and with what priority the job is executed, after it has been
submitted for processing.
For more information, see Chapter 4, Execution parameters.
Chapter 1
Introduction
21
Table 1
Access to job parameters and variables (part 2 of 2)
Panel
Contents
Conditions Panel
Contains Condition parameters. These parameters specify information

about the time period (days, months, and hours) which must be
satisfied before determining when the job can be submitted for
execution. These parameters also determine whether conditions are to
be added or deleted after the job run is successfully completed.
For more information, see Chapter 5, Condition parameters.
Resources Panel
Contains Resource parameters. These parameters specify information

about physical and logical requirements that must be met before the job
can be submitted for execution.
For more information, see Chapter 6, Resource parameters.
Set Panel
Contains facilities for defining and specifying AutoEdit variables.

AutoEdit variables are used to insert dynamic information into the
values of job processing parameters.
For more information, see Chapter 15, AutoEdit facility.
Steps Panel
Contains Post Processing parameters. These parameters specify actions

that should be performed by CONTROL-M when the job is finished
executing or has failed to run.
For more information, see Chapter 7, Post-processing parameters.
PostProc Panel
Contains Job Output parameters. These parameters specify actions that

CONTROL-M and CONTROL-M/EM perform that are a direct result
of the output of the job.
For more information, see Chapter 7, Post-processing parameters.
Active Panel
Contains Status parameters. These parameters describe scheduling,

status, and statistical information that was collected during job runtime.
The values for these parameters are supplied by CONTROL-M.
The Active panel is displayed only in the CONTROL-M/EM Job
Editing form, because the data displayed in it is based on previous runs
of the job.
For more information, see Chapter 9, Status parameters.
AutoEdit variables are also described in this guide.
22
Language support
Language support
Western European language special characters can be specified for most parameters
in which free text can be entered. A list of all parameters that can contain these
characters is provided in the CONTROL-M Language Customization Guide.
In this guide, the term non-English characters in the Invalid Characters section of
each parameter description indicates that the parameter only supports Western
characters.
The following characters are not supported for any parameter under any
circumstances:
Abbreviations and conventions

The following abbreviations are used in this guide:
Abbreviation
Description
CONTROL-M/EM
CONTROL-M/Enterprise Manager
CONTROL-M/CM
CONTROL-M Control Module
The following conventions are used in this guide:

key
When describing keystrokes, boldface type is used for the

name of a key (for example, F1). When two keys are joined
with + as in Shift+F1, hold down Shift while pressing F1.
Menu => Option
This represents an option selection sequence. For example,

Users and Groups => Groups => Add
means that you first select Users and Groups from the menu
bar. Select the Groups option from the submenu. Finally,
select the Add option from the Groups submenu.
{ } (braces)
Braces indicate that at least one of the enclosed elements is

required. For example:
{fileName | deviceName| mediaType}
means that you must specify one of the variables.
Chapter 1
Introduction
23
Conventions for parameter descriptions
{Option A|Option B}
The vertical bar is used to separate choices. For example:

{AND|OR} means that you specify either AND or OR.
[Option]
Square brackets are used to enclose parameters that are

optional.
Code Samples
Format syntax, operating system terms, examples, and JCL

scripts are presented in this typeface.
Messages
Messages are presented in this typeface.
Boldface
In instructions, boldface type highlights information that

you enter. File names, directory names and paths, parameter
names, and options are also in boldface.
Option Symbol
A vertical bar ( | ) separating items indicates that you must

choose one item. In the following example, you would
choose a, b, or c:
a|b|c
Conventions for parameter descriptions

The following terms are used to describe the format of parameters in this guide:
Usage
Indicates whether a parameter is mandatory or optional.
Some parameters are mandatory only when CONTROL-M is installed on a certain
computer. Some parameters are mandatory only when a related parameter is
specified (for example, PDS and Minimum must be specified together).
Case sensitive
Indicates that CONTROL-M differentiates between values specified using various
combinations of uppercase and lowercase letters.
For example, the prerequisite condition JOB_ENDED_OK is different from the
prerequisite condition Job_Ended_OK. A job waiting for JOB_ENDED_OK is not
submitted if only Job_Ended_OK is found.
24
Invalid Characters
Indicates, when specifying the parameter, whether
there are any special characters that cannot be used
embedded blanks (spaces) can be used
Trailing blanks (after the specified value) are ignored.
AutoEdit Support
Indicates whether AutoEdit variables can be included in the value of the specified
parameter.
Chapter
General parameters
The parameters described in this chapter contain basic information that identifies the
job, describes what it does, and gives the location of the job script.
Table 2
General parameters summary (part 1 of 2)
Parameter
Description
Application
Name of the application to which the jobs group belongs. Used as a

descriptive name for related groups of jobs.
Application Type
Indicates the type of external application (for example, SAP or Oracle

E-Business Suite) on which the job runs.
Application Version
Indicates the version of the external application (for example, SAP or

Oracle E-Business Suite) on which the job runs.
Author
CONTROL-M/EM user who defined the job. This parameter is used

by the CONTROL-M security mechanism.
AutoEdit
Used to assign values to user variables to be referenced in the job

script or in other parameters of the job. It is also called Set Var.
Command
Operating system command line to be issued. This parameter can be

specified only when Command is specified for the Task Type
parameter.
Control Module
(CM) Version
Indicates the version of the external application (for example, SAP or

Oracle E-Business Suite) Control Module (CM) that is installed in
the CONTROL-M installation (that is, that runs the job).
CONTROL-M
Name of the CONTROL-M/Server to which the job belongs.
Description
Free text description of the job.
Doc Lib
Name of a library or directory containing the job documentation file.
Doc Mem
Name of the file containing job documentation.
Embedded
Scripts/JCL
A scheduled script that is part of the job definition.
File Name/Mem
Name
Name of the file that contains the job script, or (for z/OS jobs only)
name of a member that contains one of the following in relation to
the job to be executed:
the JCL of the job
the started task procedure
warning messages
Chapter 2
General parameters
25
Table 2
General parameters summary (part 2 of 2)
Parameter
Description
Form Name
Type of form used for entering external application data.
Group
Name of the group to which the job belongs.
Job Name
Name of the job.
Job Type
Generally, an identifier name indicating the type of external

application (for example, SAP...). In this case, the parameter
represents a combination of the following parameters: Application
Type, Application Version, CM Version, and Form Name.
Jobs not belonging to an external application have a job type of either
CONTROL-M BIM (for Batch Impact Manager jobs), or OS (for all
other jobs).
26
Over Lib
Name of an alternate library/directory. CONTROL-M searches for

the file specified in the File Name parameter in the Over Lib library
before searching for it in the Path library.
Owner
Owner (user ID) associated with the job. This parameter is used by
the CONTROL-M security mechanism.
Path/Mem Lib
Name of the directory in which the job script resides, or (for z/OS
jobs only) name of the library in which the member described in the
Mem Name parameter is located.
PIPE
Indicates a data set to be replaced by a pipe with the same name.

Displayed only if MAINVIEW Batch Optimizer is installed. [For
z/OS jobs only.]
Scheduling Table
Lib
Name of the library that contains the scheduling table. [For z/OS
jobs only.]
Table
Name of the scheduling table to which the job belongs.
Task Type
Type of the job (task) to be performed by CONTROL-M.
Application
Application
Provides a logical name for sorting groups of jobs. This parameter is used to supply a
common descriptive name to a set of related groups of jobs.
Format
Usage
Mandatory
z/OS: Optional
Default
None
Length
1-20 characters
Case Sensitive
Yes
Invalid
Characters
AutoEdit
Support
Blanks
Single quotation marks.
No. An AutoEdit variable or expression cannot be specified as all or part

of the value for this parameter. However, the value of Application can be
specified using the %%APPL and %%APPLIC AutoEdit variables.
Related parameters
Parameter
Description
Group
Group is also a logical name. Both the Application and Group

parameters can be used to create logical groupings of jobs. Neither
parameter has a direct effect on job execution.
General information
The Application parameter facilitates more convenient and orderly management of
groups of production jobs.
The value assigned to the Application parameter can be used to determine the
placement of jobs in the CONTROL-M flow diagram. It can also be used as a criterion
for building a ViewPoint.
Chapter 2
General parameters
27
Application
Aliases in other CONTROL-M components

Alternate names for the Application parameter are listed below.
Component
Parameter Name
CONTROL-M/EM Utilities
APPLICATION
Reporting Facility
APPLICATION
CONTROL-M/Server Utilities
-application
CONTROL-M for z/OS
APPL
CONTROL-M/EM API
application
Example: Identifying jobs by business department

To identify all jobs created by the accounting department:
Application: ACCT
28
Application Type
Application Type
Indicates the application (for example, SAP or Oracle Applications) that runs the job.
NOTE
In the job editing form prior to CONTROL-M/EM version 6.3.01, the Application Node
Group parameter was tightly linked to the Application Type parameter. Beginning with
CONTROL-M/EM version 6.3.01, you select the application node group in the Node
ID/Group field (in the Execution tab of the job editing form).
Format
Usage
Optional
Default
OS (Indicates that the job is run by the operating system.)
Length
1-10 characters
Case Sensitive
No
Invalid Characters
Blanks; single quotation marks
AutoEdit Support
No. An AutoEdit variable or expression cannot be specified as all or

part of the value for this parameter.
Related parameters
Parameter
Description
Application Version
Indicates the version of the application that is specified with the

Application Type parameter.
Control Module
(CM) Version
Indicates the version of the Control Module (CM) that is used to run
the job.
Form Name
Job Type
Identifier name indicating the type of external application (for

example, SAP...). This parameter represents a combination of the
following parameters: Application Type, Application Version, CM
Version, and Form Name.
Node ID/Group
Name of a CONTROL-M/Agent computer, remote host computer, or

node group to which the job should be submitted.
General information
The control module of the application specified in this parameter must be installed in
the Node Group where the job will run.
Chapter 2
General parameters
29
Application Type
Availability
This parameter is supported by CONTROL-M/Server versions 6.1.xx and later, and
CONTROL-M for z/OS versions 6.2.xx and later.

Alternate names for the Application Type parameter are listed below.
Component
Parameter Name
APPL_TYPE
e-Trigger
Application Type
-appltype
CONTROL-M/EM API
application_type
Example: Submit a job to an Oracle E-Business Suite

Specify the following information in the CONTROL-M/Server ctmcreate utility to
schedule CONTROL-M/Agent everest to submit a job to Oracle E-Business Suite
(OEBS).
ctmcreate -tasktype external
-application ORACLE
-nodegrp everest
-appltype OAP
30
Application Version
Application Version
Indicates the version of the application (for example, SAP or Oracle E-Business Suite)
on which the job runs.
Format
Usage
Optional
Length
1-10 characters
Default
None
Case Sensitive
Yes
Invalid Characters
Blanks; single quotation marks; non-English characters
AutoEdit Support

Availability
Related parameters
Parameter
Description
Application
Type
The type of application whose version is specified by the Application

Version parameter.
Control Module Control Module for the application that runs the job.
(CM) Version
Form Name
Job Type
Identifier name indicating the type of external application (for example,

SAP ...). This parameter represents a combination of the following
parameters: Application Type, Application Version, CM Version, and
Form Name.
Node ID/Group Name of a CONTROL-M/Agent computer, remote host computer, or

General information
For a list of supported versions, see the Administrator Guide for the appropriate
CONTROL-M/Control Module.
Chapter 2
General parameters
31
Application Version

Alternate names for the Application Version parameter are listed below.
32
Component
Parameter Name
APPL_VER
e-Trigger
Application Version
-applver
CONTROL-M/EM API
application_version
Author
Author
Indicates the CONTROL-M/EM user who defined the job.
NOTE
This parameter is not relevant in z/OS environments.
Format
Usage
Mandatory.
Default
Name of the CONTROL-M/EM user that created the job.
Length
1-30 characters
Case Sensitive
Yes
Invalid Characters
AutoEdit Support

NOTE
Depending on the value of the AuthorSecurity system variable, this parameter may be
disabled.
General information
The CONTROL-M/EM user specified by this parameter must possess a valid user ID
registered in the CONTROL-M installation. Authority to perform actions is verified
by CONTROL-M/Server security exits.
This parameter is used by the CONTROL-M/Server for verifying if the owner of the
job has authorization to submit the job processing definition during the submission of
jobs by the New Day Procedure. If the AuthorSecurity system parameter is set to
author security mode 2 or 3 (restricted), you cannot edit the Author field unless you
are a CONTROL-M/EM administrator and are online (that is, connected to a GUI
server). For more information, see the Security chapter and the description of the
AuthorSecurity system parameter in the CONTROL-M Administrator Guide.
Computer-specific information
For more information, see the Security chapter of the CONTROL-M Administrator
Guide for the appropriate computer.
Chapter 2
General parameters
33
Author

Alternate names for the Author parameter are listed below.
34
Component
Parameter Name
AUTHOR
Reporting Facility
AUTHOR
-author
AutoEdit
AutoEdit
Assigns a value to an AutoEdit variable. AutoEdit variables can be used to pass
values to job submission parameters or to control other aspects of job submission. It is
also called Set Var.
Format
Usage
Optional
Format
The format for each AutoEdit is:

%%variable-name=value
variable-name has the following characteristics:
Length
Up to 40 characters (including the %% prefix).
Case Sensitive Yes

Invalid
Characters
Blanks and the following characters:

< > [ ] { } ( ) = ; ~ | : ? . + - */ & ^# @ ! , " '
AutoEdit
Support
Yes. An AutoEdit variable or expression can be specified as

all or part of the value for this parameter.
value has the following characteristics:

Length
Up to 4,000 characters.
Case Sensitive Yes

Invalid
Characters
Embedded blanks (leading blanks are valid)
AutoEdit
Support

z/OS: AutoEdit (and both variable-name, and value) have the following
characteristics:
Length
The total length of AutoEdit must not exceed 55 characters,

including the %% prefix, variable-name, value, and the =
sign.
Case Sensitive Yes

Invalid
Characters
Blanks
AutoEdit
Support

Chapter 2
General parameters
35
AutoEdit
Related parameters
Do AutoEdit
Indicates an AutoEdit expression that depends on how the job ended (OK or
NOTOK) and can be used to influence other jobs, or subsequent runs of the
current job.
General information
AutoEdit variables are special variables that have a prefix of %%. They can be used to
pass parameters to, or influence the environment of a job when it is submitted

define variables to be used in Shout messages or in Do AutoEdit parameters when
the job terminates
Parameters that accept AutoEdit variables

AutoEdit variables can be specified as values for any of the following job processing
parameters. These variables are resolved to actual values at time of job submission.
Command
Do Mail (the To and Message fields)
Do Shout (the Destination and Message fields)
Do Sysout (Prm field)
File Name
In Condition (system variables can be specified as the entire value)
Mem Lib
Mem Name
Out Condition (system variables can be specified as the entire value)
Over Lib
Path
Quantitative Resource (system variables can be specified as the entire value)
Shout (the Destination and Message fields)
Step Range
Sysout (Prm parameter)
NOTE
CONTROL-M/CM fields can also contain AutoEdit variables.
For more information about AutoEdit variables and how they can be used, see
Chapter 15, AutoEdit facility.
36
AutoEdit

Alternate names for the AutoEdit parameter are listed below.
Component
Parameter Name
AUTOEDIT
Reporting Facility
Setvar
-autoedit
CONTROL-M for z/OS
SET VAR
CONTROL-M/EM API
autoedit_assignment
Alternate formats in other CONTROL-M components

Alternate formats for the AutoEdit parameter are listed below.
Component
Format
CONTROL-M/EM
Utilities
The value of the AUTOEDIT parameter is contained in the EXP

subparameter.
Example: <AUTOEDIT EXP="%%PARM1=%%TIME"/>
Example 1: OpenVMS
An OpenVMS job has the following job processing parameters and values:
Parameter
Value
File Name (Mem Name)
MTJOB.COM
Path (Mem Lib)
DUA0:[SALARY.JAN]
AutoEdit
%%PARM1=%%CALCDATE %%ODATE -2
%%PARM2=TRacct124
If %%ODATE is 051203 (for December 3, 2005), the parameters described above

would cause CONTROL-M to invoke the command file using the following
OpenVMS command:
SUBMIT DUA0:[SALARY.JAN]MTJOB.COM/ PARAM = (051201, TRacct124)
NOTE
To submit a DCL file that uses logical names that should be translated before submission,
define a job (with Task Type parameter Command) that performs the required ASSIGN or
DEFINE command (OpenVMS command).
Chapter 2
General parameters
37
AutoEdit
Example 2: UNIX
A UNIX job has the following job processing parameters:
Parameter
Value
File Name
(Mem Name)
mtjob.sh
Path (Mem Lib)
$HOME/jobs
AutoEdit
Assignment
%%PARM1=%%CALCDATE %%ODATE -2
%%PARM2=TRacct124
If %%ODATE is 051203 (for December 3, 2005), the parameters described above would
cause CONTROL-M to invoke the script using the following UNIX command:
$HOME/jobs/mtjob.sh 051201 "TRacct124"
Example 3: iSeries (AS/400)

An iSeries (AS/400) job has the following job processing parameters:
Parameter
Value
Job Name
EODJOB
File Name
(Mem Name)
EODJOB
Path (Mem Lib)
ACCOUNTING
AutoEdit
%%PARM1=%%ODATE
%%PARM2=%%TIME
%%LDA_1_6=%%ODATE
%%LDA_7_2=%%ODAY
%%SWS=00000001
%%LIBL=QTEMP ACCLIB
If %%ODATE is 060127 (for Jan. 27, 2006), the parameters described above would
cause CONTROL-M to submit the job using the following iSeries (AS/400)
commands:
CHGDTAARA *LDA(1 6) VALUE(060127)
CHGDTAARA *LDA(7 2) VALUE (27)
SBMJOB JOB (EODJOB) RQSDATA (CALL PGM (ACCOUNTING/EODJOB)
PARM (060127 110312)) SWS (00000001) INLLIBL (QTEMP ACCLIB))
38
Command
Command
Indicates an operating system command line entry to be submitted as a job.
NOTE
This parameter is not relevant in z/OS environments.
Format
Usage
This parameter can be used only if the Task Type parameter is

Command. In this case, the Command parameter is required.
Length
1 through 512 characters
Case Sensitive
Microsoft Windows: No
UNIX: Yes
Invalid Characters None

AutoEdit Support
Yes. An AutoEdit variable or expression can be specified as all or part of

the value for this parameter.
General information
Use this parameter to specify an operating system command to be executed by
CONTROL-M. The command should be specified exactly as it would be specified in a
terminal for the specific computer.
CONTROL-M creates a temporary file that contains the command. This file is
submitted for execution, and is monitored and analyzed in the same manner as a
regular job.
The command can include any combination of text and AutoEdit variables. However,
the length of the command after resolution of AutoEdit variables must not exceed 999
characters. For more information about AutoEdit variables, see Chapter 15,
AutoEdit facility.
Commands submitted to a UNIX computer are executed using the Bourne shell.
For CONTROL-M for iSeries (AS/400) version 2.1.3, commands must not include
single quotation marks ( ). If quotation marks are necessary, use double quotation
marks ( ) only.
Chapter 2
General parameters
39
Command

Alternate names for the Command parameter are listed below.
Component
Parameter Name
CONTROL-M/EM
Utilities
CMDLINE
Reporting Facility
CMD LINE
CONTROL-M/Server
Utilities
-cmdline
CONTROL-M/EM API
command
Example 1: OpenVMS
BACKUP DUA0:[000000...] MUA0:MONBKP/SAVE
Example 2: UNIX
tar cvf /dev/rmt0 -c /home

SAVLIB LIB(LIB_1 LIB_2) DEV(TAP02)
Example 4: Using AutoEdit variables in a command

The command in this job uses the CONTROL-M ctmcontb utility to delete all
prerequisite conditions that are more than five days old.
AutoEdit
%%A=%%CALCDATE %%DATE -365
Assignment
%%B=%%CALCDATE %%DATE -5
Command
ctmcontb deletefrom %%A %%B
NOTE
For Windows agents: When specifying AutoEdit variables in the CMDLINE or COMMAND
parameters on CONTROL-M/Agent for Windows, the AutoEdit prefix must be specified as
%%%% instead of %%.
40
Control Module (CM) Version
Control Module (CM) Version

Indicates the version number of the Control Module (CM) that is used to run the job.
Format
Usage
Optional
Length
1-10 characters
Default
None
Case Sensitive
No
Invalid
Characters
AutoEdit
Support

of the value for this parameter.
Availability
This parameter is not supported by CONTROL-M versions earlier than 6.1.00.

This parameter is not supported by CONTROL-M for z/OS.

Alternate names for the CONTROL Module Version parameter are listed in the table
below.
Component
Parameter Name
CM_VER
-cmver
Reporting Facility
CM VER
e-Trigger
CM Version
CONTROL-M/EM API
application_cm_version
Chapter 2
General parameters
41
CONTROL-M
CONTROL-M
Name of the CONTROL-M installation that processes the job.
Format
Usage
Mandatory
Length
Default
None
Case Sensitive
Yes
Invalid Characters
AutoEdit Support
No. An AutoEdit variable or expression cannot be specified as all

or part of the value for this parameter.
General information
CONTROL-M names are specified for each data center when creating the
CONTROL-M definition in CONTROL-M/EM and CONTROL-M/Desktop. The
name should describe the specified CONTROL-M installation and be easily
recognized by users.
In the Job Editing form, select the CONTROL-M installation instance from the list.

Alternate names for the CONTROL-M parameter are listed below.
42
Component
Parameter Name
CONTROL-M/EM
Utilities
DATACENTER
Reporting Facility
DATA CENTER
CONTROL-M/Server
Utilities
Not supported. Jobs created with a CONTROL-M/Server utility

are submitted to the local CONTROL-M/Server installation.
CONTROL-M for z/OS
When a job is created, it is submitted to the local CONTROL-M

for z/OS installation.
CONTROL-M/EM API
control-m
Description
Description
Provides a description of the job in free text.
Format
Usage
Optional
Length
1-4,000 characters
Case sensitive
Yes
Invalid
Characters
None
AutoEdit
Support

General information
The Description parameter is used to describe the job. A well written description can
help you determine why the job was defined and how it fits into your business
environment.
NOTE
Special characters, such as single quotation marks, double quotation marks, left or right
brackets ([ ]), left or right parentheses(( )), and asterisks(*), should not be used in the
description text string.
CONTROL-M for z/OS
For conversion customers prior to version 6.0.00, if the current job was converted
from another job scheduling product, such as CA-7, the SCHEDULE-PREV-DAY or
SCHEDULE-PREV-ONLY string may appear in the DESC field for the job group. This
string causes all scheduled runs of the job to be shifted back one day. (For version
6.0.00 and later, the SAC parameter is used instead.)
Chapter 2
General parameters
43
Description

Alternate names for the Description parameter are listed below.
Component
Parameter Name
CONTROL-M/EM
Utilities
DESCRIPTION
Reporting Facility
DESCRIPTION
CONTROL-M/Server
Utilities
-description
CONTROL-M for z/OS
DESC
CONTROL-M/EM API
description
Example: Description of a job for producing a yearly report

The description of a report detailing the years revenues and expenditures.
Yearly Financial Report for 2005
44
Doc Lib
Doc Lib
Name of the library/directory containing the job documentation file (specified in the
Doc Mem parameter).
Format
Usage
Length
Optional
Microsoft Windows and UNIX: 1-255 characters

iSeries (AS/400): 1-21 characters
OpenVMS: 1-60 characters
z/OS: 1-44 characters
Case Sensitive
Yes
Invalid Characters
z/OS: Non-English characters
AutoEdit Support

Related parameters
Parameter
Description
Doc Mem
Name of the file containing job documentation. This file is located in the
library specified in the Doc Lib parameter.
General information
The library or directory specified by this parameter, and the file specified in the Doc
Mem parameter, do not have to exist when the job processing parameters are defined.
If you specify this parameter, you must also specify a value for the Doc Mem
parameter.
NOTE
To access the documentation, the user must be defined and have authorization on the
CONTROL-M where the documentation resides.
Chapter 2
General parameters
45
Doc Lib
Computer
Format
UNIX
Specify the name of the directory and subdirectories (if any). One of the
following symbols can be used in place of or as part of the directory or
subdirectory name (these symbols are resolved at the time the job is
ordered or forced):
$HOME resolves to the home directory of the job owner.

~<username> resolves to the home directory of the specified UNIX
user.
iSeries (AS/400) You must specify one of the following:

Name of an iSeries (AS/400) library
Library / File
*LIBL (library list)
*CURLIB (current library)
OpenVMS
The directory can be specified as the physical path or as an OpenVMS

logical name.

Alternate names for the Doc Lib parameter are listed below.
Component
Parameter Name
DOCLIB
Reporting Facility
DOC LIB
-doclib
CONTROL-M for z/OS
DOCLIB
CONTROL-M/EM API
doc_lib
Example 1: OpenVMS
DUA0:[ACCOUNT.DOC],
Example 2: UNIX
$HOME/ctm/account/doc
46
ACCDOC$DIR
Doc Mem
Doc Mem
Name of the file in which the job documentation is stored.
Format
Usage
Optional
Length
1-64 characters
Case Sensitive
Yes
Invalid
Characters
AutoEdit
Support
Blanks

of the value for this parameter
Related parameters
Parameter
Description
Doc Lib
Provides the name of the library or directory in which a member

described in the Doc Mem parameter is located.
General information
The Doc Mem parameter is normally specified together with the Doc Lib parameter.
NOTE
To access the documentation, the user must be defined and have authorization on the
CONTROL-M where the documentation resides.
iSeries (AS/400)
Doc Mem indicates the name of the member in the Libl file. On this computer, the
Doc Mem parameter is optional even if a value is supplied for Doc Lib. If a library
and file name are specified in Doc Lib but no value is specified for Doc Mem, the
*FILE default member name is used (for example, the member name is the same as
the file name).
Chapter 2
General parameters
47
Embedded Scripts/JCL

Alternate names for the Doc Mem parameter are listed below.
Component
Parameter Name
DOCMEM
Reporting Facility
DOCMEM
-docmem
CONTROL-M for z/OS
DOCMEM
CONTROL-M/EM API
doc_member
A scheduled script that is part of the job definition.
Format
Usage
Optional
Default
None
Length
Script size: 64000 B

z/OS: 62 KB
Case Sensitive
Yes
Auto Edit
Support

of the value for this parameter. Instead %%PARM can be used to pass
parameters to the embedded script. See Job submission variables on
page 499.
Subparameters
Use Embedded
Script/JCL
48
Check box:
Selected - The job will be submitted from the embedded
script./JCL
Clear - The job will be submitted from the file
name/member specified in the Path/Mem Lib
parameter.
Related parameters
Parameter
Description
File Name/Mem File name extension determines how the script will run.
Name
Path/Mem Lib
The Path field is ignored when attaching an embedded script.

z/OS: Indicates the name of the library where the member containing JCL
required for the job is located.
Over Lib
This field is ignored when attaching an embedded script.
General information
The Use Embedded JCL, previously called In-Stream JCL, is relevant only for jobs
running in CONTROL-M for z/OS version 6.2.00 or later. It enables you to create and
edit a JCL stream. This stream is saved as part of the job scheduling definition. When
the job runs, the stream is submitted from the job scheduling definition, without
having to retrieve the JCL from the member identified in the MEMLIB parameter.
The Use Embedded Script s relevant only for jobs running on non CONTROL-M for
z/OS platforms. It enables the script to be manually entered or copied from the local
file system and saved in the job definition. After loading the script, if a file name has
not already been selected, the selected scripts file name appears in the File Name
field. If an embedded script has been selected, the Path and Over Lib fields are
ignored.
In Windows, the files extension determines how the embedded script runs. In UNIX,
the script runs according to the interpreter entered in the first line of the embedded
script. Examples of an interpreter shell are Bourne Shell (/bin/sh), Korn Shell
(/bin/ksh), and C-Shell (/bin/csh).
Chapter 2
General parameters
49

Alternate names for the Use Embedded Script/JCL (flag) parameter are listed below.
Component
Parameter Name
USE_INSTREAM_JCL
Reporting Facility
Use In-stream Jcl
(none)
CONTROL-M for z/OS
INSTREAM JCL
CONTROL-M/EM API
use_instream_jcl
Alternate names for the Embedded Script/JCL parameters are listed below.
50
Component
Parameter Name
INSTREAM_JCL
Reporting Facility
In-stream Jcl
embedded_script
CONTROL-M for z/OS
INSTREAM JCL
CONTROL-M/EM API
instream_jcl
File Name/Mem Name
File Name/Mem Name

Indicates the name of a file containing the control language statements for the job (or
detached process) to be executed.
Format
Usage
Length
Mandatory if Task Type is Job or Detached or External

Microsoft Windows, UNIX, OpenVMS: 1-64 characters
Case Sensitive
Invalid
Characters
AutoEdit
Support
Yes
Blanks

Related parameters
Parameter
Description
Path/Mem Lib
Indicates the name of the library or directory in which the file described
in the File Name parameter is located.
Over Lib
Provides the name of an alternate library or directory. CONTROL-M

searches for the file specified in the File Name parameter in the Over
Lib directory before searching for it in the Path library.
Task Type
Specifies the type of task of the job performs. Determines the value of
the Mem Name (MEMNAME) parameter for z/OS jobs.
General information
The File Name parameter should contain only the name of the file, not the full path.
The Path parameter is used to specify the remainder of the path.
The File Name can be the same as or different from the job name. Each member
contains only one job.
The File Name may appear in the job node displayed in the CONTROL-M/EM
window (depending on options specified in the CONTROL-M/EM Options dialog
box).
The File Name extension determines how an Embedded Script/JCL runs. For more
information, see Embedded Scripts/JCL on page 48.
Chapter 2
General parameters
51
File Name/Mem Name
NOTE
Character masks are not supported (for example, a job with a FR*.EXE File Name value is not
executed).
The command must conform to the following conventions:
Computer
Information
Microsoft
Windows
Name of a command file or an executable file.
UNIX
Name of a UNIX shell script file.
OpenVMS
Name of the command file. It can be specified using one of the

following formats:
Without file extension (for example, JOBFILE): CONTROL-M adds

the appropriate extension according to the Task Type parameter:
.COM for job (batch job), .EXE for Detached (detached process).
When the file name is specified without a version specification, the
last version of the file is executed.
With full file extension, including the version specification (for

example, JOBFILE.COM;2 or JOBFILE.EXE;5).
Note: Using the full file extension format, it is possible to select a

specific file extension and version of the command file or detached
process to be executed.
iSeries (AS/400)
An executable program object.
z/OS
Name of a member whose contents are determined by the Task Type

parameter.
52
JCL of the job

Started task procedure
Warning messages
File Name/Mem Name

Alternate names for the File Name parameter are listed below.
Component
Parameter Name
MEMNAME
Reporting Facility
MEMNAME
-memname
CONTROL-M for z/OS
MEMNAME
CONTROL-M/EM API
mem_name
Example 1: Microsoft Windows

myjob.bat, myjob.cmd, myjob.exe
Example 2: UNIX
myjob
Example 3: OpenVMS
MYJOB, MYJOB.COM, MYJOB.COM;2, MYJOB.EXE, MYJOB.EXE;4.

MYJOB
Chapter 2
General parameters
53
Form Name
Form Name
Format
Usage
Mandatory for External Application jobs
Length
1-30 characters
Case Sensitive
Yes
Invalid Characters
AutoEdit Support

Related parameters
Parameter
Description
Application Type
Indicates external application server types communicating with

CONTROL-M/Agent.
Application
Version
Indicates the version of the external application server communicating

with CONTROL-M/Agent.
Control Module
(CM) Version
Indicates the version of Control Module (CM) supported by

CONTROL-M/Agent.
Job Type
Identifier name indicating the type of external application (for example,

SAP ...). This parameter represents a combination of the following
parameters: Application Type, Application Version, CM Version, and
Form Name.
Node ID/Group

General information
Beginning with CONTROL-M/EM versions 6.3.01, this parameter is no longer used
in the job editing form, but is used in other locations such as utilities. (In the job
editing form, the Job Type field determines which application type, version and CM
Version are used, and which form is displayed as a job editing form tab.)
Availability
54
Form Name

Alternate names for the Form Name parameter are listed below.
Component
Parameter Name
CONTROL-M/EM
Utilities
APPL_FORM
CONTROL-M/Server
Utilities
-applform
CONTROL-M/EM API
application_form
Example 1: Default form for SAP job

Default SAP 4.6
Example 2: Alternate form for SAP job

SAP 4.7
Chapter 2
General parameters
55
Group
Group
Indicates the name of the group to which the job belongs.
Format
Usage
Mandatory
Length
1-64 characters
Case Sensitive
Yes
Invalid
Characters
AutoEdit
Support

Related parameters
Parameter
Description
Application
Application is also a logical name. Both the Application and Group

parameters can be used to create logical groupings of jobs. Neither
parameter has a direct effect on job execution.
General information
The Group parameter facilitates more convenient and orderly management of groups
of production jobs.
The value assigned to the Group parameter determines the jobs placement in the
structure of the CONTROL-M/EM network ViewPoint displayed in the
CONTROL-M/EM flow diagram. This window is described in the CONTROL-M User
Guide.
56
Group

Alternate names for the Group parameter are listed below.
Component
Parameter Name
CONTROL-M/EM
Utilities
GROUP
Reporting Facility
GROUP NAME
CONTROL-M/Server
Utilities
-group
CONTROL-M for z/OS
GROUP
CONTROL-M/EM API
group
Example 1: Accounting department groups

ACCOUNTING
Example 2: Group of jobs run at the end of the day

END_OF_DAY
Example 3: Group name for associated jobs that create

sales reports
SALES_REPORT
Chapter 2
General parameters
57
Job Name
Job Name
Name of the job.
Format
Usage
Mandatory
Length
1-64 characters
Case Sensitive
Yes
Invalid Characters
AutoEdit Support
Blanks
Single quotation marks
If the job runs on any version of Microsoft Windows 2000,
prohibited filename characters (such as \, /, or *)

General information
The Job Name parameter appears along with the File Name parameter in various job
definition and job tracking windows.
The Job Name can also be displayed in the job node displayed in the
CONTROL-M/EM window (depending upon options specified in the Display Net
window).
This parameter is used when ordering or forcing a job, either using the Do Forcejob
parameter or when using the Order/Force windows. You can define a job without a
job name in ctmcreate and ctmdefine.
The Job Name parameter does not have to be unique in the scheduling table.
Accessing/modifying the Job Name in AutoEdit expressions

The value of the Job Name parameter can be accessed using the %%JOBNAME
AutoEdit variable. For example, this name can be included in a messages that is sent
using the Do Shout or Do Mail parameters.
The job name parameter can also be overridden when the job is ordered, for example,
by using the following statement in the command line of the ctmorder utility for
CONTROL-M/Server.
-autoedit %%JOBNAME newjobname
58
Job Name
Parameter
Information
z/OS
The Job Name parameter must be unique in the scheduling table.
iSeries (AS/400) The value specified for this parameter is the actual job name to be used by
iSeries (AS/400). It is part of the job submission command.
Note: For jobs on an iSeries (AS/400) computer, the value specified for the
Job Name parameter must conform to iSeries (AS/400) conventions for job
names.

Alternate names for the Job Name parameter are listed below.
Component
Parameter Name
JOBNAME
Reporting Facility
JOB NAME
-jobname
CONTROL-M for z/OS
JOB NAME
CONTROL-M/EM API
job_name
Chapter 2
General parameters
59
Job Type
Job Type
Generally, an identifier name indicating the type of external application (for example,
SAP ...). In this case, the parameter represents a combination of the following
parameters: Application Type, Application Version, CM Version, and Form Name.
Jobs not belonging to an external application have a job type of either CONTROL-M
BIM (for Batch Impact Manager jobs), or OS (for all other jobs).
Format
Usage
Mandatory for jobs that run on external applications such as SAP or

Oracle. Note: The relevant Control Module must be installed and the
relevant form must be imported.
Format
Select the required value from the list.
Related parameters
Parameter
Description
Application Type
The type of application whose version is specified by the Application

Version parameter.
Application Version
Indicates the version of the application that is specified with the

Application Type parameter.
Control Module
(CM) Version
Indicates the version of the Control Module (CM) that is used to run
the job.
Form Name
Node ID/Group

General information
For jobs running under external applications, the appropriate job type must be
selected in the job editing form. Job type identifies the relevant form for the particular
application type, application version and Control Module (CM) version.
The Control Module must be installed and the relevant form must be imported:
60
For a list of application types, application versions, and Control Module versions,
available in the CONTROL-M/Server, click Load next to the Node Id/Group field, in
the job (or template) editing form. (Click Load to also include the Node Group in
the list.)
Job Type
To import Application forms, choose Tools => Import Application Form and browse
to and select the form.
When you select an external job type, a tab with relevant parameters is automatically
added as the second tab in the job editing form.
For more information on importing application forms or filling in the application
form parameters in the job editing form, see the relevant Control Module
documentation.
Availability
This parameter is supported in the job editing form only, beginning with CONTROLM/EM version 6.3.01.
Chapter 2
General parameters
61
Over Lib
Over Lib
Name of an alternate library or directory for the file specified with the File Name
parameter. CONTROL-M searches for the file specified in the File Name parameter in
the Over Lib directory before searching for it in the Path library.
Format
Usage
Optional
Length
Microsoft Windows, UNIX, OpenVMS: 1 through 255 characters

iSeries (AS/400): 1 through 10 characters
z/OS: 1 through 44 characters
For additional formatting information, see Format on page 65.
Case Sensitive
Yes
Invalid
Characters
AutoEdit
Support
Blanks.
If the job runs on any version of Microsoft Windows 2000, prohibited

filename characters (such as \, /, or *)
z/OS: Non-English characters.The contents of this field must not

begin with the following strings:
GENERAL
USER=

Related parameters
Parameter
Description
Path/Mem Lib
Indicates the name of the library or directory in which the file described
in the Path parameter is located.
File Name/Mem
Name
Indicates the name of a file containing the control language statements

for the job (or detached process) to be executed.
General information
The Over Lib parameter enables the user to submit a temporarily-modified job script
file without changing the original script file in the Path library and without changing
the scheduling order of a table.
62
Over Lib
When to use
The library containing the jobs regular script file is specified in the Path parameter.
When temporary modifications are required, the modified script file is placed in the
location indicated by the Over Lib parameter.
If the file specified by the File Name parameter is found in the Over Lib location, this
file is submitted instead of the job script file with the same name that resides in the
Path location.
Cancelling override
The override can be canceled by one of the following methods:
Delete the file specified in the File Name parameter from the Over Lib location. If
the job script file is not found in Over Lib, it is automatically taken from the Path
location.
-orDelete the Over Lib specification from the job definition.
NOTE
For a description of the values allowed with this parameter, see Computer-specific
information on page 66.
AutoEdit support
As of this version, the Over Lib value can be extracted and passed to another part of
the job processing definition using the %%OVERLIB parameter.

Alternate names for the Over Lib parameter are listed below.
Component
Parameter Name
OVERLIB
Reporting Facility
OVER LIB
-overlib
CONTROL-M for z/OS
OVERLIB
CONTROL-M/EM API
over_lib
Chapter 2
General parameters
63
Owner
Owner
Identifies the owner (user name) for whom the job is executed. This parameter is used
by the CONTROL-M security mechanism.
Format
Usage
Mandatory
Default
User name of the current CONTROL-M/EM user
Length
1-30 characters
Case Sensitive Yes

Invalid
Characters
AutoEdit
Support
Blanks
Computers other than z/OS: Single quotation marks
No. An AutoEdit variable or expression cannot be specified as all or part of

General information
The Owner parameter is used by the CONTROL-M internal security mechanism to
determine operations that each user is authorized to perform. For more information,
refer to the Security chapter in the CONTROL-M Administrator Guide for the
appropriate computer.

Alternate names for the Owner parameter are listed below.
64
Component
Parameter Name
OWNER
Reporting Facility
OWNER
-owner
CONTROL-M for z/OS
OWNER
CONTROL-M/EM API
owner
Path/Mem Lib
Path/Mem Lib
Indicates the name of the directory or library in which the file described in the Path
parameter is located.
Format
Usage
This parameter is mandatory if the specified Task Type is Job or Detached

or External.
Note: The format for this parameter depends on the job computer. For more
information, see Computer-specific information on page 66.
Length
Microsoft Windows, UNIX, OpenVMS: 1-255 characters

Case Sensitive Yes

Invalid
Characters
AutoEdit
Support
Blanks
If the job runs on any version of Microsoft Windows 2000, prohibited
filename characters (such as \, /, or *)
Yes. An AutoEdit variable or expression can be specified as all or part of the

value for this parameter.
Related parameters
Parameter
Description
File Name/Mem Name of the job script file kept in the directory or library specified in
Name
Path/Mem Lib.
Over Lib
Name of an alternate library for the file specified in the File Name
parameter. The original copy of the file is kept in the directory specified in
Path.
General information
The library or directory specified in the Path parameter and the accompanying File
Name file do not have to exist when the job processing parameters are defined.
CONTROL-M searches for them only before actual submission of the job.
Chapter 2
General parameters
65
Path/Mem Lib
Computer
Information
Microsoft
Windows
The Path parameter indicates the drive ID, and the names of the directory
and subdirectories (if any).
UNIX
The Path parameter indicates the names of the directory and

subdirectories (if any).
One of the following symbols can be used in place of or as part of the
directory and sub-directory names (these symbols are resolved at the time
the job is ordered or forced):
OpenVMS
$HOME resolves to the home directory of the job owner.

~<username> resolves to the home directory of the specified UNIX
user.
The Path parameter contains the (device:[directory]) that can be

specified as the physical path or as an OpenVMS logical name.
iSeries (AS/400) Specify one of the following:

Name of an iSeries (AS/400) library
*LIBL (library list)
*CURLIB (current library)
z/OS
Format of the parameter depends on whether the job processing definition

applies to a job (or warning messages) or a started task:
Job
Valid values: a valid data set name of 1-44 characters or

one of the following reserved values:
DUMMY - for dummy jobs
USER= name - for user-defined libraries
GENERAL - specifies the library referenced by DD
statement DALIB in the CONTROL-M procedure.
Started Task
Any of the following formats can be used for the value

of Mem Lib:
*. taskid, where taskid is the ID of the task

The started task is activated in the computer in
which the CONTROL-M monitor is active.
cpuid, stcparms, where:

cpuid is the ID of the computer in which the
started task is to be activated
stcparms is started task parameters
cpuid, where cpuid is the ID of the computer in

which the started task is to be activated.
Valid values for cpuid are:
66
* The computer where the CONTROL-M monitor

is active.
Path/Mem Lib
Computer
Information
z/OS
(Continued)
Started Task
(Continued)
Under JES2
Nn where n is the JES/NJE node ID.

Mm where m is the computer ID.
NnMm where n is the JES/NJE node ID, and m is
the computer ID.
Under JES3
Lname where name is the logical JES name of the
computer, that is, the name as used in the JES3
command *T, not the SMF system ID.
AutoEdit support
As of version 6.1.03, the Path value can be extracted and passed to another part of the
job processing definition using the %%MEMLIB parameter.

Alternate names for the Path parameter are listed below.
Component
Parameter Name
MEMLIB
Reporting Facility
MEM LIB
-memlib
CONTROL-M for z/OS
MEMLIB
CONTROL-M/EM API
mem_lib

Alternate formats for the Path parameter are listed in Computer-specific
information on page 66.
Example 1: Microsoft Windows

D:\ACCOUNT\SALARY
Example 2: UNIX
$HOME/ctm/salary
Chapter 2
General parameters
67
Path/Mem Lib
Example 3: OpenVMS
DUA0:[SALARY.JAN.ARCH], SALARY$DIR

MYLIB
Example 5: z/OS
GENERAL
68
PIPE
PIPE
Indicates a data set to be replaced by a pipe with the same name. Displayed only if
MAINVIEW Batch Optimizer is installed.
NOTE
The PIPE parameter is used only with jobs run in CONTROL-M for z/OS installations in
which MAINVIEW Batch Optimizer (MVBO) is installed.
Format
Usage
Optional
Format
Each time a data set or pipe name is specified and Enter is pressed, a
new empty line is displayed to enable specification of an additional
data set or pipe name.
Length
1 - 44 characters
Case Sensitive
No
Invalid Characters
AutoEdit Support
Blanks
Non-English characters

General information
NOTE
PIPE can be modified only by using CONTROL-M for z/OS directly. This parameter is not
available from the CONTROL-M/EM GUI or utilities.
Pipes are storage buffers that are used to replace data sets. Pipes are defined in, and
used by, MAINVIEW Batch Optimizer to replace sequential processing with parallel
processing.
For example, normally (without pipes) if JOB1 writes to data set DS1 and then JOB2
reads data set DS1, JOB2 waits until JOB1 is terminated before reading the data set.
However, if a pipe is used to replace data set DS1, then as JOB1 writes data to pipe
DS1, JOB2 can use the data without waiting for termination of JOB1.
Each pipe and its relevant parameters are defined in a MAINVIEW Batch Optimizer
rule. Each pipe must be defined with the same name as the data set it is replacing.
Chapter 2
General parameters
69
PIPE
When a job is to use a pipe instead of a data set, the name of the data set or pipe must
be specified in the Pipe parameter of the CONTROL-M job processing definition for
the job.
For more information about Pipe processing, see the CONTROL-M for z/OS User
Guide.
Example: Two job processing definitions

This example consists of two job scheduling definitions.
In job CTLIVPWR and job CTLIVPRD, the CTL.IVP.FILE data set is replaced by a
pipe of the same name. Jobs of this type are called a Collection because they are
participants in the same pipe.
Figure 1
PIPE parameter example job CTLIVPWR
JOB: CTLIVPWR LIB CTMT.PROD.SCHEDULE

TABLE: CTLIVP
COMMAND ===>
SCROLL===> CRSR
----------------------------------------------------------------------------MEMNAME CTLIVPWR
MEMLIB
CTM.IVP.JCL
OWNER
E02A
TASKTYPE JOB
PREVENT-NCT2
DFLT N
APPL
GROUP
DESC
CONTROL-M/WORKLOAD VERIFICATION - WRITER JOB
OVERLIB
SET VAR
CTB STEP AT
NAME
TYPE
DOCMEM CTLIVPWR
DOCLIB
CTMT.PROD.DOC
===========================================================================
DAYS
DCAL
AND/OR
WDAYS
WCAL
MONTHS 1- Y 2- Y 3- Y 4- Y 5- Y 6- Y 7- Y 8- Y 9- Y 10- Y 11- Y 12- Y
DATES
CONFCAL
SHIFT
RETRO N MAXWAIT 00 D-CAT.
MINIMUM
PDS
===========================================================================
IN
CTLIVPWR-IN
ODAT
CONTROL
RESOURCE
PIPE
CTL.IVP.FILE ESOURCE
PIPE
TIME: FROM
UNTIL
PRIORITY
DUE OUT
SAC
CONFIRM
COMMANDS: EDIT, DOC, PLAN, JOBSTAT
13.18.25
70
PIPE
Figure 2
PIPE parameter example job CTLIVPRD
JOB: CTLIVPRD LIB CTMT.PROD.SCHEDULE TABLE: CTLIVP

COMMAND ===> SCROLL===> CRSR
----------------------------------------------------------------------------MEMNAME CTLIVPRD MEMLIB CTM.IVP.JCL
OWNER E02A TASKTYPE JOB PREVENT-NCT2 DFLT N
APPL GROUP
DESC CONTROL-M/WORKLOAD VERIFICATION - READER JOB
OVERLIB
SET VAR
CTB STEP AT NAME TYPE
DOCMEM CTLIVPRD DOCLIB CTMT.PROD.DOC
===========================================================================
DAYS DCAL
AND/OR
WDAYS WCAL
DATES
CONFCAL SHIFT RETRO N MAXWAIT 00 D-CAT
MINIMUM PDS
===========================================================================
IN CTLIVPWR-OUT ODAT
CONTROL
RESOURCE
PIPE CTL.IVP.FILE
PIPE
TIME: FROM UNTIL PRIORITY DUE OUT SAC CONFIRM
COMMANDS: EDIT, DOC, PLAN, JOBSTAT 13.22.07
Chapter 2
General parameters
71
Scheduling Table Lib

Name of the library that contains the jobs scheduling table.
NOTE
This field is displayed only for z/OS jobs.
Format
Usage
Mandatory
Length
1-44 characters
Case Sensitive
No
Invalid Characters
Blanks
AutoEdit Support


Alternate names for the Scheduling Table Lib parameter are listed below.
72
Component
Parameter Name
TABLE_DSN
CONTROL-M for z/OS
Scheduling Library
CONTROL-M/EM API
table_library
Table
Table
Name of the scheduling table to which the job belongs.
NOTE
For CONTROL-M for z/OS jobs, this parameter is displayed as Scheduling Table Name in the
CONTROL-M/EM GUI.
Format
Usage
Mandatory, if values are specified for the Job Name and Date parameters.
Length
1-64 characters
Case Sensitive
Yes
Invalid
Characters
AutoEdit
Support
Blanks
Single quotation marks

General information
Together with the CONTROL-M JOBNAME parameter, the Table parameter
determines the position of the job in the CONTROL-M Scheduling Table hierarchy.

Alternate names for the Table parameter are listed below.
Component
Parameter Name
TABLE_NAME
Reporting Facility
TABLE_ID
-schedtab
CONTROL-M for z/OS
TABLE NAME
CONTROL-M/EM API
table_name
Chapter 2
General parameters
73
Table
Example 1: Scheduling table name including a userassigned serial number.

SchTbl03
Example 2: Scheduling table name including a time period.

SeptOctTbl2
74
Task Type
Task Type
Specifies the type of task of the job performs.
Format
Usage
Usage is computer-dependent. For more information, see

Computer-specific information on page 76.
Format
Specific terms are valid for each CONTROL-M computer. For more
information, see Computer-specific information on page 76.
Invalid
Characters
Blanks; Single quotation marks; non-English characters
AutoEdit
Support

General information
Each Task Type can be defined as cyclic or non-cyclic (regular). For more information,
see Cyclic on page 150.
For z/OS jobs, the specified task type is combined with the values of the Cyclic and
Emergency parameters.
NOTE
In CONTROL-M/EM versions earlier than version 6.1.00, the format for TASKTYPE
contained critical and cyclic information also. CONTROL-M/EM version 6.1.03 can still run
jobs whose TASKTYPE is specified in the old format. However, BMC Software recommends
that you specify this type of information using the CYCLIC and CRITICAL parameters when
creating new job processing definitions.
Chapter 2
General parameters
75
Task Type
Computer
Microsoft
Windows
UNIX
OpenVMS
Task Types
Job
A regular job submitted to CONTROL-M for

execution as a background process. The results of the
job (the output) are analyzed by the post-processing
subsystem.
Detached
This type is similar to Job but also includes .EXE type

files.
Command
Operating system command (defined in the

Command parameter) sent to the operating system to
be executed as a job. For more information, see
Command on page 39.
Dummy
CONTROL-M internal job. This is a dummy job

which is not executed, but that can be used to execute
the Out Conditions and Shout post-processing
actions. Its completion status is always OK.
External
Enables CONTROL-M to track jobs whose status

changes are determined outside CONTROL-M (that
is, jobs run on external applications).
Job
A regular job submitted to the operating system

batch queue. The job results in the job log are
analyzed by the CONTROL-M/Server
post-processing subsystem.
Note: For the purposes of the following discussion,
node refers to an individual computer in an
OpenVMS cluster.
In a OpenVMS cluster environment, a job with the
Job Task Type parameter can be executed on a node
other than the node on which CONTROL-M is
running. To do this, assign the %%QUEUE variable
of the job a queue name that is a regular queue on
another node of the cluster.
To let OpenVMS select the node on which to run the
job, use the Generic queue mechanism:
1. Define a generic batch queue on the node running
CONTROL-M.
2. On each of the other nodes, initialize (create)
regular batch queues, and associate each queue
with the generic batch queue referred to above.
3. Assign the generic queue name to the
%%QUEUE variable for that job.
76
Task Type
Computer
Task Types
OpenVMS,
continued
Job, continued
Tracking is exactly the same as if the job were

executing on a local queue. The jobs log file can be
found in the same location as if the job executed on
the local node.
Detached
A detached process that is executed directly by the

operating system (without passing through the
operating system batch queue).
The results of the Detached task are not analyzed by
the post-processing subsystem.
The detached task has the following properties:
Although the process is not executed by the

operating system batch queue, the process is
executed asynchronously as a OpenVMS
detached process.
It can only be executed on the LOCAL node,

where it is also tracked.
A detached process is always assumed to have

terminated successfully.
If a program to be executed as a detached process
requires input (or parameters supplied through the
CONTROL-M/Server SYS$INPUT default). You can
supply these as regular parameters. If the program
requires parameters as part of the execution
command statement (such as the RUN interactive
command), it cannot be run as a detached process.
Instead, use Task Type: Command.
Command

Command on page 39.
Dummy
CONTROL-M internal job. This is a dummy job that

is not executed, but that can be used to execute the
post-processing actions Out Conditions and Shout.
Its completion status is always OK.
Chapter 2
General parameters
77
Task Type
Computer
Task Types
iSeries (AS/400)
Job
A job submitted to an operating system job queue.

After submission, the job may start executing
immediately or wait in the queue. The log is analyzed
by the post-processing subsystem.
Detached
A detached job is submitted to a no-wait job queue

and is executed immediately by the operating
system. The results of a detached job are analyzed by
the post-processing subsystem. Although the job is
not executed by the operating system batch queue,
the job is executed asynchronously.
Command

Command on page 39.
Dummy
CONTROL-M internal job. This is a dummy job that

is not executed, but that can be used to execute the
post-processing actions Out Conditions and Shout.
Its completion status is always OK.
JOB
Batch job. Default.
STC
Started task.
z/OS

Alternate names for the Task Type parameter are listed below.
Component
Parameter name
TASKTYPE
Reporting Facility
TASK_TYPE
-tasktype
CONTROL-M for z/OS
TASKTYPE
CONTROL-M/EM API
task_type

Alternate formats for the Task Type parameter are listed below.
78
Task Type
Component
Format
CONTROL-M/EM
Utilities
Example
TASKTYPE=Detached/>
Valid values are:
For non-z/OS computers:
Job
Detached
Command
Dummy
External
For z/OS (as of version 6.1.03):
Job
Started_Task
These values are used in conjunction with the values specified in
the Cyclic and Critical parameters.
Reporting Facility
String.
CONTROL-M/
Server Utilities
Valid values:
JOB
DETACHED
COMMAND
DUMMY
DETACHED
EXTERNAL
GROUP (for group scheduling tables, only)
Example: Creating a SAP job with the CONTROL-M/Server

ctmcreate utility
ctmcreate -tasktype job -application SAP -nodegrp chef1 -appltype SAP
-memlib ddd -memname fff -autoedit %%SAPR3-ACCOUNT DV1 -autoedit
%%SAPR3-JOBNAME SAPCM -autoedit %%SAPR3-JOBCOUNT 09495501 -autoedit
%%SAPR3-JOB_MODE EXTERNAL -applver 46C/46D -applform "SAP R3" -cmver
610 -jobname xxxx.
Chapter 2
General parameters
79
Task Type
80
Chapter
The parameters in this chapter determine when and/or how often a job should be
scheduled for submission.
Table 3
Scheduling parameters summary (part 1 of 2)
Parameter
Description
Active
Date range during which the job or group scheduling table can be
ordered or the Scheduling Tag can be used.
Adjust Condition
Indicates whether to ignore prerequisite conditions normally set by

predecessor jobs if the relevant predecessor jobs are not scheduled.
This parameter is relevant only for jobs in a group scheduling table.
And/Or
Indicates the relationship between specified Days values and Weekdays

values.
Confcal
Use to specify a that is used to validate all specified days and dates on
which to schedule the job.
Dates
Specific dates on which to order the job.
Days
Days of the month on which to order the job.
Days Calendar
Name of a user-defined calendar used to specify a set of days (for

example, working days).
Minimum
Minimum number of free partitioned data set tracks required by the

library specified for the PDS parameter.
Months
Months in which to order the job.
PDS
Name of a partitioned data set (PDS) to be checked for free space.
Relationship
The relationship (And/Or) between the specified Scheduling Tag

criteria and the jobs own basic scheduling criteria.
Retro
Whether the job should be scheduled for possible execution after its
original scheduling date (odate) has passed.
Chapter 3 Scheduling parameters
81
Table 3
Scheduling parameters summary (part 2 of 2)
Parameter
Description
SAC
Whether to adjust the logical date for a job converted from a scheduling
product other than CONTROL-M.
This parameter is relevant only for jobs running in CONTROL-M for
z/OS version 6.2.00 or later.
Scheduling Tag
Identifier for a set of scheduling criteria in a group scheduling table.

One or more Scheduling Tags can be specified in each job processing
definition in a group scheduling table.[z/OS]
Statistics Calendar Name of the CONTROL-M periodic calendar in which statistics

relating to the job are collected.
Statistics Period
Identifier of the actual days within the CONTROL-M periodic calendar

in relation to which statistics relating to the job are calculated.
82
Time Zone
Indicates the global time zone used to calculate the interval for
time-related conditions.
Week Days
Days of the week on which to order the job.
Weeks Calendar
Indicates the name of a calendar to be used to validate specified

weekdays on which to order the job.
Active
Active
Date range during which the job or group scheduling table can be ordered or the
Scheduling Tag can be used. During the period that the job or group scheduling is
outside the active range (that is, inactive), it is not eligible to be ordered.
Format
Usage
Optional
Format
Dates, in yyyymmdd format.
AutoEdit
Support

Related parameters
Parameter
Description
Dates
Other scheduling criterion. Indicates specific dates (month and day) on

which the job should be scheduled.
Days Calendar
Indicates the name of a CONTROL-M calendar that is used to validate

specified days. This parameter may be mandatory for certain Days
value formats.
Also known as: DCAL and dayscal
And/Or

values.
Week Days
Indicates days of the week on which the job should be scheduled.
Weeks Calendar

specified weekdays.
Confcal

scheduling dates. A specified shift value can be used to indicate how to
handle jobs that are scheduled for a non-working day in the calendar.
Months
Indicates the months in which the job should be scheduled. Only days
in the specified months are considered valid for scheduling the job.
Dates
Indicates specific dates on which the job can be scheduled.

Note: This parameter cannot be specified if a value has been specified
for the Days parameter.
Scheduling Tag
Identifies a set of scheduling criteria defined for a group. This

parameter is only relevant to jobs in a group scheduling table.
83
Active
General information
The Active parameter allows you to define a date range during which a job or group
scheduling table can be ordered or a Scheduling Tag can be used.
You can use the Active parameters to define either of the following:
An active period. The dates before this period and the dates after this period each
constitute an inactive period:
(inactive-period1 > defined-active-period > inactive-period2)
An inactive period. Technically you define two active periods, an earlier active
period, and a later active period, and everything in-between is the inactive period:
(active-period1 > defined-inactive-period > active-period2)
You can use this parameter with multiple copies of a job or group scheduling table
definition to create date ranges during which the job or group scheduling table
definition is run with alternate values, to eliminate the necessity of making lastminute changes to a job processing definition for a fixed period of time.
NOTE
The Active parameter appears as a single parameter with several subparameters in the job
editing form and the group editing form in CONTROL-M/Desktop. In all other CONTROL-M
components, the Active parameter appears as two separate parameters that function together
the Active From Date parameter, and the Active To Date parameter. Despite this difference
in appearance, which is only a user interface issue, the processing functionality remains the
same in all CONTROL-M components.
Defining an Active period

For a defined period to be an Active period, the From date must be less than or equal
to the To date.
In the job editing form or group editing form in CONTROL-M/Desktop:

1. In the first Active field, select From.
2. In the accompanying define the From and To fields, select the date range. Ensure
that the From date is less than or equal to the To date.
84
In all other CONTROL-M components, ensure that the Active From Date is less than
or equal to the Active To Date.
Active
No matter which component you use to define the Active period, you can leave either
the From date or the To date blank:
If only a From date is specified, the job can be scheduled on or after that date.
If only a To date is specified, the job can be scheduled on or before that date.
Defining an Inactive period

As noted earlier, when you define an inactive period, it is preceded by an active
period and followed by an active period (active-period1 > defined-inactive-period >
active-period2).
When you define an Inactive period:
the To date identifies the last date of the earlier active period (active-period1)
the From date identifies the first date of the later active period (active-period2)
Therefore, the To date must be less than the From date.

When using the job editing form or group editing form, the Active subparameters are
Until (instead of Active To Date) and And From (instead of Active From Date).
In the job editing form or group editing form in CONTROL-M/Desktop:

1. In the first Active field, select Until.
2. In the accompanying define the Until and And From fields, select the date range.
Ensure that the Until date is less than or equal to the And From date.
In all other CONTROL-M components, ensure that the Active To Date is less than
the Active From Date.
When defining an inactive period, you must specify both parameters in the date
range; you cannot either of them blank.
85
Active

Alternate names for the Active From Date parameters are listed below.
Component
Parameter Name
ACTIVE_FROM_DATE
-DATEFROM <YYYYMMDD>
Example:
-DATEFROM 20060315
CONTROL-M for z/OS
DEFINITION ACTIVE FROM

or
SCHEDULE TAG ACTIVE FROM
CONTROL-M/EM API
active_from
Alternate names for the Active To Date parameters are listed below.
Component
Parameter Name
ACTIVE_To_DATE
-DATEUNTIL <YYYYMMDD>
Example:
-DATEUNTIL 20050315
CONTROL-M for z/OS
DEFINITION ACTIVE UNTIL

or
SCHEDULE TAG ACTIVE UNTIL
CONTROL-M/EM API
active_till
or
active_until

Alternate formats for the Active From Date parameters are listed below.
Component
Format
String for date. According to site standard (ddmmyyyy,

mmddyyyy, yyyymmdd).
Example: <ACTIVE_FROM=15032006/>
CONTROL-M for z/OS
86
6-integer string for date. According to site standard

(ddmmyy, mmddyy, yymmdd).
Active
Alternate formats for the Active To Date parameters are listed below.
Component
Format
String for date. According to site standard (ddmmyyyy,

mmddyyyy, yyyymmdd).
Example
<ACTIVE_TILL=15032006/>
CONTROL-M for z/OS
6-integer string for date. According to site standard

(ddmmyy, mmddyy, yymmdd).
Default: blank.
Example: Seasonal changes

JOB_A is a job processing definition for scheduling food shipments.
In the summer, the company ships on Mondays and Wednesdays.

In the fall, the company ships only on Mondays.
In winter, the company ships on Mondays, Wednesdays, and Fridays.
In the spring, the company ships on Mondays and Wednesdays.
Four copies of the JOB_A job processing definition are created. The Days parameter
must be changed seasonally to allow for variations in shipping frequency. Different
Active From Date and Active To Date parameters are used in each definition to
specify the season in which the job is active. Other job processing criteria remain
unchanged.
Job_A, Copy_1: Summer
Days: 1, 3
Active From Date: June 1, 2005
Active To Date: August 31, 2005
Job_A, Copy_2: Fall

Days: 1
Active From Date: September 1, 2005
Active To Date: November 30, 2005
Job_A, Copy_3: Winter

Days: 1, 3, 6
Active From Date: December 1, 2005
Active To Date: March 1, 2006
87
Active
Job_A, Copy_4: Spring

Days: 1, 3
Active From Date: March 2, 2006
Active To Date: May 30, 2006
88
Adjust Condition
Adjust Condition
Indicates whether to ignore prerequisite conditions normally set by predecessor jobs
if the relevant predecessor jobs are not scheduled.
NOTE
This parameter is relevant only for group scheduling tables.
Format
Usage
Optional
Format
Valid values are:

Yes Ignore relevant prerequisite conditions.
No Do not ignore relevant prerequisite conditions.
Dummy
[CONTROL-M for z/OS as of version 6.2.xx only]. Order as a
PSEUDO job any job with scheduling criteria that are not satisfied
on the current ODATE, with the MEMLIB parameter of the job set to
DUMMY. For more information, see ADJUST CONDITIONS in the
job production parameters chapter in the CONTROL-M for z/OS
User Guide.
[CONTROL-M/Server] The CTM_GROUP_ADJUST_DUMMY
configuration parameter controls the creation of dummy jobs that
run in place of unscheduled prerequisite jobs. This parameter is
relevant only when Adjust Condition is set to Y.
Note: The CONTROL-M/Server CTM_ADJUST_COND_SCOPE
configuration parameter controls whether jobs in the Group Scheduling
table must ignore conditions set by jobs in the active jobs file that are not
scheduled, or to ignore conditions set by jobs in the Group Scheduling
table that are not scheduled. In the latter case, the missing conditions are
removed from the job at order time. This parameter is relevant only when
Adjust Condition is set to Y.
Invalid
Characters
AutoEdit
Support

General information
The Adjust Condition parameter is applied to all jobs in a group scheduling table. It
defines job dependencies in the group as being either conditional or absolute.
89
Adjust Condition
Conditional and absolute dependencies
Absolute job dependency

Each job in a group scheduling table runs only after all the predecessor jobs in the
group have run. All prerequisites In conditions for a job must exist in the
Conditions/Resources table before the job can run.
Select No in the Adjust Condition list in the CONTROL-M/EM Job Editing form.
Conditional job dependency

Each job in the group waits for its predecessor jobs to run only if the predecessor
jobs in the group are scheduled. Prerequisite condition requirements are ignored
and the successor job runs if a predecessor job is not scheduled. The other runtime
scheduling criteria for the job must be satisfied.
Select Yes in the Adjust Condition list in the CONTROL-M/EM Job Editing form.

Alternate names for the Adjust Condition parameter are listed below.
Component
Parameter Name
ADJUST_COND
Reporting Facility
ADJUST CONDITION
-adjust_cond
CONTROL-M for z/OS Utilities
Adjust Conditions
CONTROL-M/EM API
adjust_condition

Alternate formats in other CONTROL-M components are listed below.
Component
Format
CONTROL-M/EM
Utilities
String. Example: <ADJUST_COND=Y/>
CONTROL-M/Server
Utilities
CONTROL-M for z/OS
90
Y ignore the relevant prerequisite conditions

N utilize prerequisite conditions normally set by
predecessor jobs. Default.
Y ignore the relevant prerequisite conditions
N utilize prerequisite conditions normally set by
predecessor jobs. Default.
And/Or
And/Or
Indicates the relationship between specified Days parameter values and Weekdays
parameter values.
Format
Usage
Optional
Format
Valid values are:

and
or (default)
Invalid
Characters
AutoEdit
Support

Related parameters
Parameter
Description
Confcal

Dates
Indicates specific dates (month and day) on which the job should be
scheduled.
Date From
Indicates the start of a period of time during which the job or group
scheduling table can be ordered or the Scheduling Tag can be used.
Date Until
Indicates the end of a period of time during which the job or group
Days
Days Calendar
Indicates the name of a calendar containing a list of working days on

which the job can be scheduled for execution.
Week Days
Indicates the days of the week on which the job should be scheduled for
processing.
Weeks Calendar
Indicates the name of a calendar to be used to validate specified

weekdays on which to order the job.
General information
If And is specified, both the Days/Days Calendar criteria and
Week Days/Weeks Calendar criteria must be satisfied for a job to be scheduled.
91
And/Or
If Or is specified, either the Days/Days Calendar criteria or

Week Days/Weeks Calendar criteria must be satisfied for a job to be scheduled.

Alternate names for the And/Or parameter are listed below.
92
Component
Parameter Name
DAYS_AND_OR
Reporting Facility
DAYS_AND_OR
-cal_andor
CONTROL-M for z/OS
And/Or
CONTROL-M/EM API
and_or
Confcal
Confcal
Indicates the name of a CONTROL-M calendar that is used to validate scheduling
dates. A shift value can be used to indicate how to handle jobs that are scheduled for
a non-working day in the calendar.
Format
Usage
Optional
Length
Valid calendar name, up to 30 characters in length.

Case Sensitive
Yes
Invalid
Characters
AutoEdit
Support
Blanks

Related parameters
Parameter
Description
Active
And/Or
The relationship between specified Days parameter values and

Weekdays parameter values.
Days
Days Calendar
The name of a calendar containing a list of working days on which the

job can be scheduled for execution.
Minimum
Minimum number of free partitioned data set tracks required by the

library specified for the PDS parameter.
Months
Name of a partitioned data set (PDS) to be checked for free space. If the
PDS has fewer than the minimum number of required free tracks (as
specified for the Minimum parameter), the job is executed.
Week Days
The days of the week on which the job should be scheduled for
processing.
Weeks Calendar
The name of a calendar to be used to validate specified weekdays on

which to order the job.
NOTE
The Confcal parameter cannot be specified together with the DATES parameter.
93
Confcal
Subparameter
Subparameter
Description
Shift
Determines when to schedule the job if the current day is not a

valid working in the specified calendar. Optional.
Shift Num
Determines how many days to shift the job if the current day is not
a valid working day.
NOTE
For z/OS jobs: The Confcal parameter cannot be specified together with the PDS and
Minimum parameters.
General information
The Calendar specified for Confcal must be a regular Calendar (not a periodic
calendar). This calendar is used for:
Validating scheduling dates

Determining the scheduled work day.
Jobs to be scheduled on a given day are checked against the Confcal calendar:
If the day is a working day in the Confcal calendar, the job is scheduled on that
day. (This day is referred to as the original scheduling date.)
If the day is not a working day in the Confcal calendar, the Shift and Shiftnum
parameters are checked. Depending on the Shift value, the job may be scheduled
on an earlier day, a later day, on the original scheduling date, or it may be
cancelled.
If the jobs scheduling criteria also include the day to which it is shifted, it runs only once
on that date (not once for regular scheduling, and once to make up for the shifted day).
NOTE
If no Confcal calendar is specified, no value can be specified for the Shift subparameter, and
this field has no effect on job scheduling.
94
Confcal

Alternate names for the Confcal parameter are listed below.
Component
Parameter Name
CONFCAL
Reporting Facility
CONF_CAL
-confcal
CONTROL-M for z/OS
CONFCAL
CONTROL-M/EM API
conf_cal

Alternate formats for the Confcal parameter are listed below.
Component
Format
CONTROL-M/EM
Utilities
String. SHIFT and SHIFTNUM are included as related

parameters (not as subparameters of CONFCAL).
Example
<CONFCAL=Cal1/>
SHIFT
Valid values:
CONTROL-M/Server
equivalent:
IGNOREJOB
NEXTDAY
PREVDAY
NOCONFCAL
No value
>
<
@
For more information,

seeSHIFT on page 96.
SHIFTN Number from -62 to 62.
UM
Reporting Facility
String. SHIFT and SHIFTNUM are included as related

parameters (not as subparameters of CONF_CAL).
SHIFT
Valid values:
Ignore Job
Next Day
Prev Day
No Confcal
SHIFTN String. Number from -62 to 62.

UM
95
Confcal
Component
Format
CONTROL-M/Server
Utilities
SHIFT is specified as a separate parameter (not a subparameter

of CONFCAL). Do not specify this parameter unless you want
to shift the scheduling of a job. SHIFT has up to four characters
(xyyy). If you specify SHIFT, you must specify a value for x, or a
value for yyy, or values for both x and yyy.
SHIFT
The first character (x) indicates how to shift

scheduling of the job if the original scheduling day of
the job is not a working day in the CONFCAL
calendar. Valid values are:
No value (for x) No shifting occurs, unless a

value is inserted for yyy. Default.
> Job scheduling is shifted to the next working
day in the CONFCAL calendar. Additional
shifting may be performed, depending on the yyy
value, described below.
< Job scheduling is shifted to the previous
working day in the CONFCAL calendar.
Additional shifting may or may not be
performed, depending on the yyy value,
described below.
@ Tentatively schedule the job for the current
day, even if the current day is not a working day
in the CONFCAL calendar. Additional shifting
may or may not be performed, depending on the
yyy value, described below.
The remaining three characters (yyy) shift scheduling of

the job forward or backward the specified number of
working days, as defined in the CONFCAL calendar.
Valid values are:
No value (for yyy) Only the shifting specified

by the x value occurs.
-nn or +nn shifts the job forward or backward nn
working days in the CONFCAL calendar. nn can
be any value from 0 to 62.
Note the following points:
96
If the result of shifting by yyy days is a day that is

not allowed (-n was entered for that day in the
DAYS parameter), the job is shifted to the next
working day (for a forward shift), or to the
previous working day (for a backward shift).
Confcal
Component
Format
CONTROL-M/Server
Utilities
continued
CONTROL-M for z/OS
If the original scheduling day of the job is a

working day in the CONFCAL calendar, the x
value is ignored and the yyy value determines
when the job is scheduled.
If the original scheduling day of the job is not a
working day in the CONFCAL calendar, job
scheduling is shifted according to the x value and
then shifted again according to the yyy value (if
specified) to determine when the job is
scheduled.
If the original scheduling day of the job is not a
working day in the CONFCAL calendar, and no
value (blank) is specified for the x value, the job is
not scheduled, and the yyy value (if specified) is
ignored.
Confcal and Shift parameters are applied to a
scheduling date only if that date already satisfies
the Basic Scheduling criteria as specified in the
Days, Months, Dates, and Weekdays parameters.
1-8 character string. SHIFT is specified as a separate parameter

(not a subparameter of CONFCAL).
SHIFT
4-character value including the Shift Num value. For

more information, see the CONTROL-M for z/OS User
Manual.
97
Dates
Dates
Indicates specific dates (month and day) on which the job should be scheduled.
Format
Usage
Optional
Note: The Dates parameter cannot be used together with the Days
parameter.
Format
The Dates parameter is specified in either mmdd or ddmm format,

depending on the site standard.
Multiple values can be expressed, separated by commas, in any order

(for example, 1211,1212).
Invalid
Characters
AutoEdit
Support

General information
The job is scheduled for execution only on the dates specified in the dates list.
In z/OS environments, only 12 days can be specified for the Dates parameter. To
specify more than twelve dates for one job, the dates should be defined in a calendar,
and the calendar specified in the Days Calendar parameter.
The Dates parameter should be used with:
-MONTH ALL N
You can use the CTMRPLN utility to generate a report describing when the job runs
based on its currently specified scheduling dates. For more information, see the
description of this utility in the CONTROL-M Administrator Guide for your computer.
The Dates parameter cannot be specified together with the Weeks Calendar
parameter.
98
Dates

Alternate names for the Dates parameter are listed below.
Component
Parameter Name
DATE
Reporting Facility
DATES_STR
-date
CONTROL-M for z/OS
DATES
CONTROL-M/EM API
dates
Example: Schedule a job to run on a specific date

The following examples presume that the site standard for specifying dates is mmdd:
Schedule a job for the 4th of April:

Dates 0404
Schedule a job for the 21st of December and the 21st of June:
Dates 1221,0621
99
Days
Days
Format
Usage
Optional
Note: The Days parameter cannot be used together with the Dates
parameter.
Length
1-160 characters
Invalid
Characters
AutoEdit
Support

Valid formats for the Days parameter vary depending on whether a periodic calendar
is specified as the Days Calendar. Formats for non-periodic and periodic calendars
are specified separately below. (For more information about Calendar types, see the
CONTROL-M User Guide.)
NOTE
The term working days in the following format descriptions refers to days marked in the
calendar specified for the Days Calendar parameter.
Non-periodic (regular) calendar format

Format
Rules
Description
Values
100
n is any integer from 1 to 31.

Multiple values can be expressed (separated by commas) in any order.
ALL, All days of the month.
n, Specific days of the month.
+n, Specific days of the month in addition to working days in the
Days Calendar.
Days
Format
Values cont.
Description
-n, Days of the month on which the job should not run, even if they are
working days in the Days Calendar.
>n, Order the job on the indicated day if it is a working day; otherwise,
order the job on the next working day. This format is frequently used for
holiday handling.
<n, Order the job on the indicated day if it is a working day; otherwise,
order the job on the closest preceding working day. This format is
frequently used for holiday handling.
Dn, Order the job on the nth working day from the beginning of the
month.
-Dn, Order the job on all working days except the nth working day from
the beginning of the month.
Ln, Order the job on the nth calendar day (or nth working day, if the
Days Calendar parameter is specified) from the end of the month. L1
represents the last day of the month (or last working day of the month if
a Days Calendar is specified).
-Ln, Order the job on all days except the nth calendar day from the end of
the month. If the Days Calendar parameter is specified, order the job on
all working days except the nth working day from the end of the month.
Note: A calendar must be specified for the Days Calendar parameter if the
+n, -n, >n, <n, Dn or -Dn format is used for the Days parameter.
Periodic calendar format

Format
Description
Rules
In the following periodic scheduling formats:

n is any integer from 1 through 255.
i is any valid period identifier. Valid values are:
any integer from 1 through 9
any uppercase letter except N and Y
* (asterisk) all periods
If the number of days between periods with the same identifier is more
than 33 (this value can be changed by the administrator), it is considered
a new period.
The name of a periodic calendar must be specified in the Days Calendar.
A maximum of eight periodic values (separated by commas) can be
designated in any order.
Chapter 3
101
Days
Format
Values
Description
DnPi, Order the job on the nth day of period i from the beginning of the
period. An * can be specified as the value of
n to represent all days
I to represent all periods
-DnPi, Order the job on all days of period i except the nth day of period i
from the beginning of the period. An * can be specified as the i value to
represent all periods.
LnPi, Order the job on the nth day of period i counting backward from
the last day of the period. An * can be specified as the i value to represent
all periods.
-LnPi, Order the job on all days of period i except the nth day of period i
counting backward from the last day of the period. An * can be specified
as the i value to represent all periods.
Related parameters
CONTROL-M combines the value of the Days parameter with certain other
parameters in order to determine the scheduling days for the job.
Days
Calendar

specified days. This parameter may be mandatory for certain Days value
formats.
And/Or

values.
Week Days
Weeks
Calendar

specified weekdays.
Confcal

Months
Indicates the months in which the job should be scheduled. Only days in the
specified months are considered valid for scheduling the job.
General information
The job is ordered only on the days marked in the Days list and in the months
specified in the Months parameter.
Rules
102
When ALL is specified, no other values should be specified for the Days
parameter.
Days
Negative values take precedence over positive values when determining whether a
job should be scheduled on a certain date. If a negative value (-n, -Dn, -Ln, DnPi,
or -LnPi) in either the Days or Week Days parameter prevents a job from being
scheduled on a date, the job is not scheduled on that date.
Identical negative and positive values (for example, -Dn, Dn) cannot be specified
together.
If periodic and non-periodic values are mixed when specifying Days, processing
depends on the calendar type specified in parameter Days Calendar.
If a non-periodic calendar is specified in Days Calendar, only non-periodic values

are processed; periodic values are ignored.
If a periodic calendar is specified in Days Calendar, all periodic values and all
negative non-periodic values (for example, -n) are processed; non-negative nonperiodic values are ignored.
For z/OS environments, the Months parameter is ignored when periodic values
are specified for the Days parameter.
NOTE
If the And option is selected (Month Days and Weekdays), and no criteria are specified for
either the Month Days or the Week Days parameter, CONTROL-M/EM assumes that ALL
has been specified for the empty parameter. For example, if Monday is selected, and no days
of the month are selected, the job is scheduled on all Mondays of the month.
Use with the CONTROL-M/Server CTMRPLN Utility

based on its currently-specified scheduling dates. For more information, see the
Computer-specific information for z/OS

The Months parameter is ignored when periodic values are specified for the Days
parameter.
Chapter 3
103
Days

Alternate names for the Days parameter are listed below.
Component
Parameter Name
DAYS
Reporting Facility
DAY_STR
-days
CONTROL-M for z/OS
DAYS
CONTROL-M/EM API
month_days
Example 1: Schedule a job on the 1st of March and the 1st

of September
Example 2: Schedule a job on both the 1st and 15th day of

each month
Example 3: Schedule a job on every day in December
104
Days
Example 4: Complex scheduling using a periodic calendar

Schedule the job on the 1st day of period A, and on all days, except the 2nd day, of
period B. Do not schedule the job on the 5th day of the month.
Days -5,D1PA,-D2PB
Days Calendar PERIDAYS
Periodic calendar PERIDAYS contains the following definitions:
The job is scheduled on the following days:

3rd, 10th, 14th, 17th, 21st, 24th, 27th, 31st.
Chapter 3
105
Days Calendar
Days Calendar
Indicates the name of a calendar containing a list of working days on which the job
can be scheduled for execution.
Format
Usage
Optional
Note: The Days Calendar parameter cannot be used together with the
Dates parameter.
Length
1-30 characters
z/OS: 1-8 characters, or the asterisk (*) character
Case Sensitive
Yes
Invalid
Characters
AutoEdit
Support
Computers other than z/OS: Blanks; single quotation marks

z/OS: Blanks

Related parameters
And/Or

values.
Confcal

Days
Indicates the Days of the month on which to order the job.
Months
Indicates the months in which the job should be scheduled. Months must be
indicated when the Days Calendar parameter is used.
Week Days
Weeks
Calendar

specified weekdays. Also known as: WCAL and weekscal
General information
A calendar contains a list of user-defined days that can be used as a basis for
scheduling jobs. For example, the days included in the calendar can be working days,
accounting days, or holidays.
106
Any number of calendars can be defined, where each one corresponds to a

different set of dates.
Days Calendar
Calendars are usually defined for the entire installation, though each user can
define calendars according to personal preference. One calendar can be shared by
many job processing definitions.
The calendar does not have to exist when the job processing parameters are
defined. Its existence is checked during New Day Processing.
How this parameter works
If no values are specified for the Days parameter, all working days in the specified
Days Calendar are considered valid for job scheduling.
If no Days Calendar is specified, all specified Days values are considered valid
working days.
When the Days Calendar parameter is specified with the Days parameter, the job is
scheduled for execution only if all the indicated Days are also marked in the
calendar.
If the Days Calendar parameter is specified with a Days parameter that includes
the + symbol, the job is scheduled for execution on those dates marked with a + (in
the Days parameter), in addition to the dates marked in the calendar.
If the Days Calendar parameter is specified with a Days parameter that includes
the symbol, the job is not scheduled for execution on those dates even if the date
is marked in the calendar.
The appropriate Months parameters must be checked.
The and/or relationship between Days and Weekdays is analyzed. For more
information about And/Or, see the description on page 91.
based on its currently specified scheduling dates. For more information, see the
NOTE
The following examples presume that the first day of the week at your site is defined as
Sunday.
Chapter 3
107
Days Calendar

Alternate names for the Days Calendar parameter are listed below.
Component
Parameter Name
DAYSCAL
Reporting Facility
DAYS_CAL
CONTROL-M/Server
Utilities
-dayscal
CONTROL-M for z/OS
DCAL
CONTROL-M/EM API
days_cal
Example 1: Schedule the job on all workdays throughout

the year
Example 2: Schedule the job on all workdays in July
Example 3: Schedule the job on every Monday in July and

August that is a workday
108
Days Calendar
Example 4: Schedule a job on a regular basis

Schedule the job on every Monday in July, regardless of whether it is a workday, and
each Tuesday in July that is a workday.
Example 5: Complex scheduling

Schedule the job on the 1st of June, July and August, regardless of whether it is a
banking day, and on every banking day in June, July and August:
Example 6: Schedule the job on every Friday in June, July

and August that is a half day
Chapter 3
109
Minimum
Minimum
Minimum number of free partitioned data set tracks required by the library specified
for the PDS parameter.
NOTE
This parameter is available for z/OS jobs only.
Format
Usage
Mandatory, if a value is specified for the PDS parameter.
Format
A positive 3-digit number (leading zeros are required)
AutoEdit
Support

Related parameters
Confcal
Confcal and Minimum cannot be specified together.
Dates
Dates and Minimum cannot be specified together.
Days
Days and Minimum cannot be specified together.
Months
Months and Minimum cannot be specified together.
PDS
Name of a partitioned data set (PDS) to be checked for free space. If the
PDS has fewer than the minimum number of required free tracks (as
specified for the Minimum parameter), the job is executed. When PDS is
specified, Minimum is mandatory.
Retro
Retro and Minimum cannot be specified together.
Week Days
Week Days and Minimum cannot be specified together.
Weeks Calendar
Weeks Calendar and Minimum cannot be specified together.
General information
The PDS parameter specifies a library, and the Minimum parameter specifies the
minimum number of free tracks required by that library.
The Minimum and PDS parameters are always used together and are never used with
other Basic Scheduling parameters (For more information, see Related parameters
on page 110).
110
Minimum
When to use
The Minimum and PDS parameters are intended for use in jobs and started tasks that
compress, clean, and/or enlarge libraries. They are also specified for tasks that issue a
warning message to the IOA Log file if the minimum number of free tracks is not
available.
If Minimum and PDS parameters are defined for a job, the scheduling of the job is not
related to or depends on any date criteria. Instead, the job is scheduled if the actual
number of free tracks available in the specified library is below the specified
minimum at time of daily job ordering. The job or started task can then compress,
clean, or enlarge the library (or issue the appropriate warning).
NOTE
Minimum does not work with PDSE-type libraries because they always appear to be 100
percent full. Minimum only checks current extents.

Alternate names for the Minimum parameter are listed below.
Component
Parameter Name
MIN
Reporting Facility
MIN PDS TRAC
CONTROL-M for z/OS
MINIMUM
CONTROL-M/EM API
min_pds_tracks
Chapter 3
111
Months
Months
Indicates the months during which the job can be scheduled for processing.
Format
Usage
Optional
Format
A check box is displayed corresponding to each month of the year. When

selected, the job is scheduled for that month.
Default: The job is scheduled for all months.
Invalid
Characters
AutoEdit
Support

Related parameters
Dates
You cannot specify a value for Months when a value is specified for the
Dates parameter.
General information
The Months parameter cannot be used together with the Dates parameter.
On CONTROL-M/Server
To see a jobs schedule plan, run the CTMRPLN report. This report indicates when
selected jobs in a selected scheduling table are scheduled to run. For more
information regarding CTMRPLN, see the utility section of the CONTROL-M
Administrator Guide for your computer.
112
Months

Alternate names for the Months parameter are listed below.
Component
Parameter Name
Indicate the specific month:

JAN
FEB
MAR
APR
MAY
JUN
JUL
AUG
SEP
OCT
NOV
DEC
Reporting Facility
Specify the specific month:

MONTH_1 (January)
MONTH_2 (February)
and so on...
MONTH_12 (December)
-month
CONTROL-M for z/OS
MONTHS
CONTROL-M/EM API
Indicate the specific month:

JAN
FEB
MAR
APR
MAY
JUN
JUL
AUG
SEP
OCT
NOV
DEC
Chapter 3
113
Months

Alternate formats for the Months parameter are listed below.
Component
Format
Indicate for each month.
0 (Do not schedule for this month. Default)

1 (Schedule for this month.)
Example
<JAN=1/>
Examples
For examples that use the Months parameter, see the Days Calendar (page 106) and
Days parameters (page 100).
114
PDS
PDS
Name of a partitioned data set (PDS) to be checked for free space. If the PDS has
fewer than the minimum number of required free tracks (as specified for the
Minimum parameter), the job is executed.
NOTE
This parameter is available for z/OS jobs only.
The PDS and Minimum parameters must be specified together.
Format
Usage
Mandatory, when a value is specified for the Minimum parameter
Length
1-44 characters
Case Sensitive
No
Invalid
Characters
Blanks; non-English characters
AutoEdit
Support

Related parameters
Confcal
Confcal and PDS cannot be specified together.
Dates
Dates and PDS cannot be specified together.
Days
Days and PDS cannot be specified together.
Minimum
Number of available tracks. When PDS is specified, Minimum is

mandatory.
Months
Months and PDS cannot be specified together.
Retro
Retro and PDS cannot be specified together.
Week Days
Week Days and PDS cannot be specified together.
Chapter 3
115
PDS
General information
The data set must be cataloged, and it must be a partitioned data set.
Parameters Minimum and PDS are always used together and are never used with
other Scheduling parameters.
The PDS parameter identifies a library. The Minimum parameter specifies the
minimum number of free tracks required by that library.
These parameters are intended for use (that is, definition) in jobs or started tasks that
compress, clean and/or enlarge libraries, or which issue a warning message to the
IOA Log file.
If the Minimum and PDS parameters are defined for a job, the scheduling of the job is
not related to or depends on any date criteria. Instead, the job is scheduled if the
actual number of free tracks available in the specified library is below the specified
minimum when the New Day procedure is run.
The job or started task can then compress, clean, or enlarge the library (or issue the
appropriate warning).
NOTE
This parameter is not supported for PDSE-type libraries because they always appear to be 100
percent full.

Alternate names for the PDS parameter are listed below.
116
Component
Parameter Name
PDSNAME
Reporting Facility
PDS Name
CONTROL-M for z/OS
PDS
CONTROL-M/EM API
pds
Relationship
Relationship
Indicates the relationship (AND/OR) between Scheduling Tag criteria and basic
scheduling criteria in the job processing definition (that is, whether either set of
criteria, or both sets of criteria, must be satisfied).
NOTE
This parameter is relevant only to the job processing definitions of jobs that are in group
scheduling tables.
Format
Usage
For jobs that are in group scheduling tables.
Format
Option buttons.
When or is selected, if either set of criteria (a specified Scheduling Tag

or the jobs basic scheduling criteria) is satisfied, the job is scheduled.
Default.
When and is selected, both a specified Scheduling Tag and the jobs
basic scheduling criteria must be satisfied for the job to be scheduled.
Invalid
Characters
AutoEdit
Support

Related parameter
Scheduling Tag Identifies a set of scheduling criteria defined for a group. If the
Relationship parameter value is AND and no Scheduling tag is defined,
the job is not scheduled.
General information
For jobs in group scheduling tables, two types of basic scheduling criteria can be
specified:
Scheduling Tags. Pointers to sets of scheduling criteria defined in the group

scheduling table.
Basic Scheduling Criteria. Defined in each job processing definition.
Chapter 3
117
Relationship
In some cases, both sets of criteria must be satisfied for the job to be scheduled. In
other cases, it is sufficient if either set of criteria is satisfied. The AND-OR option
enables you to specify the required combination:
When either set of criteria is sufficient choose OR.

When both sets of criteria are required, choose AND.
NOTE
If an AND relationship is specified and no Scheduling Tags are defined in the job, the job is
not scheduled.

Alternate names for the Relationship parameter are listed below.
118
Component
Parameter Name
TAG_RELATIONSHIP
Reporting Facility
TAG_RELATIONSHIP
-relationship
CONTROL-M for z/OS
RELATIONSHIP
CONTROL-M for z/OS

Utilities
RELATION
CONTROL-M/EM API
tag_relationship
Retro
Retro
Indicates if the job should be scheduled for possible execution after its original
scheduling date has passed (retroactively).
Format
Usage
Optional
Format
Check box
Select the Retro check box to indicate that the job should be scheduled
retroactively. Clear the check box to indicate that the job should not be
scheduled retroactively.
Default: Clear
Invalid
Characters
AutoEdit
Support

Related parameters
Minimum
Minimum cannot be specified together with Retro.
PDS
PDS cannot be specified together with Retro.
General information
The Retro parameter is used to control situations where the computer has not been
working for a day or more (for example, due to a weekend, a holiday or a hardware
failure). The Retro parameter indicates to the New Day procedure or User Daily if the
job should be retroactively scheduled for days the computer (or CONTROL-M) was
inactive.
If Retro is specified, CONTROL-M/Server places job orders in the Active Jobs file
for all days that the job should have been scheduled. The scheduling dates for
which job orders are issued range from the day following the last running date of
the New Day procedure or User Daily to the current working date, provided that
those dates satisfy criteria specified in one of the scheduling parameters (Days,
Days Calendar, and so on). Each job order placed in the Active Jobs file uses a date
in the range as its original scheduling date.
If Retro is not specified, the job is scheduled only for the current working date
(provided that this date satisfies the jobs scheduling criteria).
Chapter 3
119
Retro
For more information, see the description of the Date Control Record (UDLAST) in
the overview chapter of the CONTROL-M Administrator Guide.
If Retro is specified for a User Daily Job, only the last (most recent) order of the User
Daily Job actually orders jobs. It also performs Retro ordering for all included jobs. As
a general rule, there is no need to specify Retro in the job processing definition of a
User Daily job.
You can use the ctmrplan CONTROL-M/Server utility to determine when selected
jobs in a scheduling table are scheduled to run. For more information, see the Utilities
chapter in the CONTROL-M Administrator Guide.
NOTE
Retro cannot be used with the Minimum and PDS parameters.
No group scheduling tables support

The Retro parameter is not supported for group scheduling tables. If this parameter is
selected for a group scheduling table (in the Group Editing form), it is ignored.
The Retro parameter can be selected for individual jobs in a group scheduling table.

Alternate names for the Retro parameter are listed below.
Component
Parameter Name
RETRO
Reporting Facility
RETRO
CONTROL-M/Server
Utilities
-retro
CONTROL-M for z/OS
RETRO
CONTROL-M/EM API
retro

Alternate formats for the Retro parameter are listed below.
120
Retro
Component
Format
CONTROL-M/EM
Utilities
RETRO has two possible values:

0 (No) Do not allow scheduling of the job after its original
scheduling date has passed. Default.
1 (Yes) Allow scheduling of the job after its original
scheduling date has passed.
Example
<RETRO=1/>
CONTROL-M/Server
Utilities
RETRO has two possible values:

N (No) Do not allow scheduling of the job after its original
scheduling date has passed. Default.
Y (Yes) Allow scheduling of the job after its original
scheduling date has passed.
Example 1: Schedule a job on a specific day of the month

Schedule the job on specific days in the month. If the day has passed, do not schedule
the job.
Days 15, 16, 18, 19, 20
Retro No
Assume the computer was down from the 16th to (and including) the 18th. The 15th
is the last date on which the job was scheduled for execution. Today is the 19th.
Therefore, the job is only scheduled for execution on the 19th.
Example 2: Schedule a job for every workday

Schedule the job for every workday, whether the computer is active:
Days Calendar WORKDAYS
Retro Yes
Given the following circumstances
the Work Days calendar contains the dates 15, 16, 18, and 19
the computer was down from the 16th up to (and including) the 18th
the 15th was the last date that the job was scheduled for execution
today is the 19th
The job is scheduled three times with the original scheduling dates: 16, 18, and 19
(that is, three job orders are added to the Active Jobs file).
Chapter 3
121
SAC
SAC
Whether to adjust the logical date for a job converted from a scheduling product
other than CONTROL-M.
NOTE
This parameter is relevant only for jobs running in CONTROL-M for z/OS version 6.2.00 or
later.
Format
Usage
Optional
Format
The following options are available:
Blank No adjustment is made. The group and all the jobs in it are
scheduled according to the regular criteria. This is the default.
P (Previous) The operation of this value depends on whether it is in a

group or a job scheduling definition.
If this value is set for a group, the group is scheduled both on the
day indicated by the regular scheduling criteria and on the day
preceding that day.
If this value is set for a job, the job is scheduled on the day
preceding that indicated by the regular scheduling criteria.
N (Next) The operation of this value depends on whether it is in a

group or a job scheduling definition.
If this value is set for a group, the group is scheduled both on the
day indicated by the regular scheduling criteria and on the day
following that day.
If this value is set for a job, the job is scheduled on the day following
that indicated by the regular scheduling criteria.
AutoEdit
Support
122
+ (Plus) [For group scheduling definitions only] The scheduling of

the group is adjusted to the next logical date.
- (Minus) [For group scheduling definitions only] The scheduling of

the group is adjusted to the previous logical date.

SAC
General information
Use this parameter if one of the following is true:
You have migrated to CONTROL-M/EM from another job scheduling product

that did not enable you to select the New Day time.
You have selected a New Day time that is different from the time at which the
logical date changed under your old product.
In such circumstances, jobs may be scheduled at a time that falls between the time at
which the logical date changed under your former product and the CONTROL-M
New Day time. This may cause jobs to be scheduled on the wrong date. The SAC
parameter enables the logical date to be automatically adjusted in the case of such
jobs, so that they run on the required date.

Alternate names for the SAC parameter are listed below.
Component
Parameter Name
PREV_DAY
Reporting Facility
Prev Day
(none)
CONTROL-M for z/OS
SAC
CONTROL-M/EM API
sac
Example 1
In the MIXEDGRP group, the JOBA, JOBB, and JOBC jobs in a group have the SAC
parameter set to P and the JOBX, JOBY, and JOBZ jobs have the SAC parameter left
blank. In such a case, the group must be scheduled on both the regular scheduling
day for the group and on the previous day, so that both types of jobs can run.
Set the SAC parameter of the MIXEDGRP group to P.
Example 2
In the ONEVAL group, all the jobs have the SAC parameter set to P. In such a case,
the group must be scheduled on the day preceding the regular scheduling day only.
Set the SAC parameter of the ONVAL group to -.
Chapter 3
123
Scheduling Tag
Scheduling Tag
Identifies a set of scheduling criteria defined for a group. This parameter only
appears for jobs in group scheduling tables. The scheduling criteria referenced by
each Scheduling Tag are defined in the group scheduling table.
Format
Usage
Optional
Note: Only relevant to jobs in a group scheduling table.
Length
1 through 20 alphanumeric characters
Format
This parameter must contain either the name of a Scheduling Tag that is
defined for the group scheduling table, or an asterisk (*), indicating all
Scheduling Tags.
Case Sensitive
Yes
Invalid
Characters
Blanks
Computers other than z/OS: Single quotation marks.
z/OS: The following characters must not be used in Scheduling Tag
definitions in group scheduling tables:
* (asterisk)
? (question mark)
AutoEdit
Support

Subparameter
Active
Related parameters
124
Parameter
Description
Relationship
Indicates the relationship (AND/OR) between Scheduling Tag criteria

and basic scheduling criteria in the job processing definition (that is,
whether either set of criteria, or both sets of criteria, must be satisfied).
Scheduling Tag
General information
Each group scheduling table contains one or more sets of basic scheduling criteria
that can be applied to job processing definitions of jobs in the table. Each set of basic
scheduling criteria is assigned a unique name, specified in the Scheduling Tag field,
which is used for referencing that set of criteria.
To apply a set of scheduling criteria in a group scheduling table to a job processing
definition, specify the Scheduling Tag name of the desired criteria in the Scheduling
Tag field of the Job Processing form.
If multiple Scheduling Tag names are specified in the job processing definition, the
tags are checked sequentially (according to the order in which they are defined for the
group scheduling table) during job scheduling to determine if the criteria are
satisfied. The first set of Scheduling Tag criteria that is satisfied is applied to the job.
Subsequent Scheduling Tags specified for the job are not checked.
If an asterisk (*) is specified as a Scheduling Tag name, all Scheduling Tags in the
group scheduling table are applied to the job.
Each job processing definition can have its own basic scheduling criteria defined,
independent of the Scheduling Tag criteria in the group scheduling table.
Scheduling jobs in a group scheduling table

Jobs in a group scheduling table are eligible for scheduling on a particular day only if
at least one Scheduling Tag in the group scheduling table is satisfied.
If a group scheduling table is eligible for scheduling on a particular day, a job in the
table is scheduled in either of the following cases:
The value of the Relationship parameter is OR. The basic scheduling criteria of the
job or a specified Scheduling Tag (or both) are satisfied.
The value of the Relationship parameter is AND. Both the basic scheduling criteria
of the job and a specified Scheduling Tag are satisfied.

Alternate names for the Scheduling Tag parameter are listed below.
Chapter 3
125
Scheduling Tag
Component
Parameter Name
TAG_NAME
CONTROL-M/Server
Utilities
-tag
CONTROL-M for z/OS
SCHEDULE TAG
CONTROL-M/EM API
sched_tag

Alternate formats for the Scheduling Tag parameter are listed below.
Component
Format
CONTROL-M/EM
Utilities
TAG_NAME parameters are contained in the TAG_NAMES

parameter. The TAG_NAME value is a string. TAG_NAMES
cannot have a value.
Example
<TAG_NAMES TAG_NAME=T1 TAG_NAME=T2/>
Example: Two sets of scheduling tags

Group scheduling table ACCOUNTS for group ACCOUNTS_GROUP contains two
sets of scheduling criteria Scheduling Tags).
One set is identified by the ALL_DAYS Scheduling Tag, and the other set is identified
by the SUNDAYS Scheduling Tag.
The following information is specified for ALL_DAYS Scheduling Tag:
Week DaysALL
The following information is specified for SUNDAYS Scheduling Tag:

Week Days1
For jobs that should run on any day, specify:

Schedule TagALL-DAYS
For jobs that should only run on Sundays, specify:

Schedule TagSUNDAYS
126
Statistics Calendar
Statistics Calendar
Name of the CONTROL-M periodic calendar within which statistics relating to the
job are collected.
NOTE
later.
Format
Usage
Optional
Format
A valid period calendar name consisting of from 1 through 8

alphanumeric characters.
Case Sensitive
Yes
Invalid
Characters
AutoEdit
Support
Blanks

Related parameters
Parameter
Description
Statistics Period
The 1-character identifier of the actual days within the CONTROL-M

periodic calendar in relation to which statistics relating to the job are
calculated.
General information
As part of the post-processing for each job, CONTROL-M for z/OS determines the
elapsed run time of the job. All accumulated information regarding job execution,
including the elapsed run time, is written to the IOA Log file.
Periodically, a statistics utility may be used to scan and analyze the IOA Log file. This
utility gathers information about the start time of each job, its elapsed run time, CPU
utilization time, and so on. The utility places this information in the Statistics file,
where averages of these values can be maintained for each job.
If the Statistics Calendar parameter is not used to specify a periodic calendar, the
statistics relating to a job are based on all run times of the job.
Chapter 3
127
Statistics Calendar
The Statistics Calendar parameter identifies the periodic calendar that is used to
gather average runtime statistics for the job. The information displayed in the
Statistics Period field identifies the specific days within that calendar that are used as
the basis of the runtime statistics.
By using the Statistics Calendar parameter together with the information displayed in
the Statistics Period field, you can obtain more precise statistical information about
the running of the job, as shown in the following example.
Example
Assume that a job runs daily, weekly, and monthly, and that the Statistics Calendar
parameter identifies a periodic calendar that contains a number of months each
specified in a manner similar to the following:
-----S--------------S-------------S-------------S-------------S-------------S--1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 + 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 + 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 +
09
D D W D
D D D D W D
D D D D W D
D D D D W D
D D D M
In this example, the job runs daily in Period D, weekly in Period W, and monthly in
Period M.
If the job runs on the 3rd of the month, its statistics are collected for Period W. If it
runs on the 6th of the month, its statistics are collected for Period D, and so on.

Alternate names for the Statistics Calendar parameter are listed below.
128
Component
Parameter Name
STAT_CAL
Reporting Facility
Stat Calendar
(none)
CONTROL-M for z/OS
STAT CAL
CONTROL-M/EM API
statistic_cal
Statistics Period
Statistics Period
Identifier of the actual days within the CONTROL-M periodic calendar in relation to
which statistics relating to the job are calculated.
NOTE
later.
Format
Format
1 alphabetic character, display only
Related parameters
Parameter
Description
Statistics Calendar Name of the CONTROL-M periodic calendar within which statistics
relating to the job are collected.
General information
This parameter provides more precise statistical information relating to z/OS jobs.
For full information, see Statistics Calendar on page 127.
Chapter 3
129
Time Zone
Time Zone
Indicates the time zone according to which the job should be scheduled.
Format
Usage
Optional
Format
Threecharacter value
The following values are supplied with CONTROL-M:
HNL
Honolulu
GMT-10.00
HAW
Hawaii
GMT-10:00
Note: HAW is maintained for backward compatibility

purposes
130
ANC
Anchorage Standard Time
GMT-09:00
PST
Pacific Standard Time
GMT-08:00
MST
Mountain Standard Time
GMT-07:00
CST
Central Standard Time
GMT-06:00
EST
Eastern Standard Time
GMT-05:00
ATL
Atlantic Standard Time
GMT-04.00
RIO
Rio de Janeiro
GMT-03.00
GMT
Greenwich Mean Time
GMT+00:00
WET
Western European Time
GMT+01:00
CET
Central European Time
GMT+02:00
EET
Eastern European Time
GMT+03:00
DXB
Abu Dhabi
GMT+04.00
KHI
Karachi
GMT+05.00
DAC
Dacca
GMT+06.00
BKK
Bangkok
GMT+07.00
HKG
Hong Kong
GMT+08:00
Time Zone
TYO
Tokyo
GMT+09.00
TOK
Tokyo
GMT+09:00
Note: TOK is maintained for backward compatibility purposes

SYD
Sydney
GMT+10.00
MEL
Melbourne
GMT+10:00
NOU
Noumea
GMT+11.00
AKL
Auckland
GMT+12.00
If necessary, these default values can be modified, and new values can be
defined. For more information, see the description of time zone support in
the maintenance chapter of the CONTROL-M Administrator Guide.
Default
If no value is specified for this parameter, the job runs with the time zone
of the CONTROL-M/Server that ordered the job.
Invalid
Characters
AutoEdit
Support
No. AutoEdit variables or expressions cannot be specified as values for this

parameter.
General information
Newly defined jobs with specified time zones must be saved at least 48 hours
before their intended execution dates (in order to ensure that they are ordered
automatically by the appropriate New Day Procedure or User Daily).
If they must run today they should be ordered manually (for example, using the
ctmorder utility).
Specified Odates are calculated according to the working date (not the actual date).
This means that if a job is defined as working on the 5th of the month at 3:00 A.M.,
and the working day begins at 5:00 A.M., then the job is actually run at 3:00 A.M. on
the morning of the 6th (which is still part of the working day of the 5th).
In addition to time zones, you can also order a job that is intended for execution on
a future date. For more information, see the odate and odate_option parameters in
any of the following CONTROL-M/Server utilities:
ctmudly
ctmudchk
ctmorder
ctmcreate
For more information about these utilities, see the CONTROL-M Administrator
Guide.
Chapter 3
131
Time Zone
BMC Software recommends that you do not combine jobs that have time zone
specifications with jobs that do not specify a time zone in the same scheduling
table or group scheduling table.
When a job is considered for ordering by the New Day procedure, it is ordered if
its scheduling date occurs within the next 48 hours. When a job is ordered by a
User Daily job, it is ordered only if its scheduling criteria are satisfied for the
current working date. For this reason, BMC Software recommends that you
arrange the jobs for each time zone in a separate table. For more information, see
the description of time zone support in the maintenance chapter of the CONTROLM Administrator Guide.

Alternate names for the Time Zone parameter are listed below.
Component
Parameter Name
TIMEZONE
CONTROL-M/Server
Utilities
-timezone
CONTROL-M for z/OS
TIMEZONE
CONTROL-M/EM API
time_zone
Example
Use the following parameters to schedule a job that runs at 5 P.M. Tokyo time:
Tasktype job
time from 17:00
Time Zone TOK
132
Week Days
Week Days
Indicates the days of the week on which the job should be scheduled for processing.
Format
Usage
Optional
Format
In the Job Editing form, this parameter can be specified using either a
series of check boxes or a text box immediately below these check boxes.
The information below is relevant for entry of Week Days information in
the text box.
The number used to represent each weekday depends upon a
CONTROL-M system parameter that specifies whether
1= Sunday, or 1= Monday. Consult your CONTROL-M administrator to
determine which standard is used at your site.
Note: All examples shown below assume that 1=Sunday, 2=Monday, and
so on, at your site.
Note: The term working days in the following format descriptions refers to
days marked in the calendar specified for the Weeks Calendar parameter.
Valid formats for the Week Days parameter vary depending on whether a
periodic calendar is specified as the Weeks Calendar.
Formats for each type of calendar are specified separately, as described in
Periodic calendar format on page 134 and Non-periodic (regular)
calendar Format on page 135.
Length
1-50 characters
Case sensitive
Yes
Invalid
Characters
AutoEdit
Support

Chapter 3
133
Week Days
Periodic calendar format

Format
Description
Rules
In the following periodic scheduling formats:
Values
134
n is any integer from 0 through 6.
i is any valid period identifier. Valid values are:

any integer from 1 through 9
any uppercase letter except N and Y
* (asterisk) all periods
Week Days periodic identifiers are counted on a week-by-week basis.

Calculations do not cross week boundaries (unlike Days periodic
boundaries, which can cross month boundaries).
The name of a periodic calendar must be specified in the Weeks

Calendar.
A maximum of eight periodic values can be designated, in any desired

order:
DnPi,... Order the job on the nth day of period i in each week from the
beginning of the week. An * can be specified as:
the n value to represent all days
the i value to represent all periods
-DnPi,... Order the job on all days of period i except the nth day of
period i in each week from the beginning of the week. An * can be
specified as the i value to represent all periods.
LnPi,... Order the job on the nth day of period i in each week counting
backward from the last periodic day of the week. An * can be specified as
the i value to represent all periods.
-LnPi,... Order the job on all days of period i except the nth day of
period i in each week counting backward from the last periodic day of
the week. An * can be specified as the i value to represent all periods.
Week Days
Non-periodic (regular) calendar Format

Format
Rules
Values
Description
n Any integer from 0 through 6, representing the days of the week.
Multiple values can be expressed in any order (separated by commas).
ALL All days of the week. Do not specify any other value with ALL.
n,... Specific days of the week.
+n,... Specific day of the week in addition to working days.
-n,... Days of the week on which a job cannot be ordered, even if they
are working days.
>n, Order the job on the indicated day if it is a working day; otherwise,
order the job on the next working day. This format is frequently used for
holiday handling.
<n, Order the job on the indicated day if it is a working day; otherwise,
order the job on the previous working day. This format is frequently
used for holiday handling.
In the following Week Days formats, n represents a number of working days.

n can be any integer from 0 through 6.
Dn, Order the job on the nth working day from the beginning of the
week.
-Dn, Order the job on all working days except the nth working day
from the beginning of the week.
Ln, Order the job on the nth working day from the end of the week (L1
represents the last working day of the week).
-Ln, Order the job on all working days except the nth working day
from the end of the week (L1 represents the last working day of the
week).
DnWm, (Where m is any integer from 1 through 6) If Weeks Calendar

is defined, order the job on the nth working day of the mth week (partial
or full) of the month. If Weeks Calendar is not defined, order the job on
the mth occurrence of weekday n during the month. A maximum of
11DnWm specifications can be designated.
Note: A calendar must be specified for the Weeks Calendar parameter if the
+n, -n, >n, <n, Dn, -Dn, Ln, or -Ln format is used for the Week Days
parameter.
Chapter 3
135
Week Days
Related parameters
Parameter
Description
Active
Days
Days Calendar

value formats.
And/Or

values.
Weeks Calendar

specified weekdays.
Confcal

Months
General information
The job is ordered only on the days of the week marked in the list, and in the months
specified in the Months parameter.
Negative values take precedence over positive values when determining whether a
job should be scheduled on a certain date. If a negative value (-n, -Dn, -L, DnPi, or LnPi) in either the Days or Week Days parameter prevents a job from being
scheduled on a date, the job is not scheduled on that date even if a positive value (for
example, Ln) would otherwise result in the job being scheduled on that date.
Identical negative and positive values (for example, -Dn, Dn) cannot be specified
together.
NOTE
If the And option is selected (Month Days and Week Days), and no criteria are specified for
either the Month Days or the Week Days parameter, CONTROL-M/EM assumes that ALL
has been specified for the empty parameter. For example, if Monday is selected, and no days
of the month are selected, the job is scheduled on all Mondays of the month.
If periodic and non-periodic values are mixed when specifying Week Days,
processing depends upon the type of calendar specified in the Weeks Calendar
parameter.
136
If a non-periodic calendar is specified in the Weeks Calendar parameter, only nonperiodic values are processed; periodic values are ignored.
Week Days
If a periodic calendar is specified in Weeks Calendar parameter, all periodic values

and all negative non-periodic values (for example, -n) are processed; non-negative
non-periodic values are ignored.
NOTE
You can use the CTMRPLN utility to generate a report describing when the job runs based on
its currently specified scheduling dates. For more information, see the description of this
utility in the CONTROL-M Administrator Guide for your computer.

The Months parameter is ignored when periodic values (values containing a P
character) are specified in parameter Week Days.

Alternate names for the Week Days parameter are listed below.
Component
Parameter Name
WEEKDAYS
Reporting Facility
W_DAY_STR
CONTROL-M/Server
Utilities
-weekdays
CONTROL-M for z/OS
WDAYS
CONTROL-M/EM API
week_days
NOTE
The following examples assume that the first day of the week in the installation is Sunday.
Example 1: Job scheduled on each Monday in March and

September
Chapter 3
137
Week Days
Example 2: Job scheduled on every Saturday and Sunday of

each month
Example 3: Schedule a job on each day in December
Example 4: Alter scheduling for different user-defined

periods (z/OS format)
Each week, schedule the job on the first day of period A, and on all days, except the
2nd day, of period B, in that week.
Week Days D1PA, -D2PB

Weeks Calendar PERIDAYS
Periodic calendar PERIDAYS contains the following definitions:

---S-------------S-------------S-------------S-------------S-1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 + 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 + 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 + 1
B C A A B
B C A A B
B C A A B
B C A A B
B
The job is scheduled on the days of the month indicated by an asterisk:

---S-------------S-------------S-------------S-------------S-1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 + 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 + 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 + 1
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
138
Weeks Calendar
Weeks Calendar
Indicates the name of a calendar to be used to validate specified weekdays on which
to order the job.
Format
Usage
Optional
Length
1-30 characters
Case sensitive Yes

Invalid
Characters
AutoEdit
Support
Computers other than z/OS: Blanks; single quotation marks

z/OS: Blanks

Related parameters
Parameter
Description
Active
Days Calendar

value formats.
And/Or

values.
Months
General information
A calendar contains a list of days that can be used as a basis for scheduling jobs. For
example, the days in the calendar can be working days, accounting days, or holidays.
Any number of calendars can be defined, where each one corresponds to a

different set of dates.
Calendars are usually defined for the entire installation, though each user can
define calendars for his/her own use. One calendar can be shared by many job
processing definitions.
The calendar does not have to exist when the job processing parameters are
defined. Its actual existence is checked during New Day Processing.
Chapter 3
139
Weeks Calendar
NOTE
The Weeks Calendar parameter cannot be used together with the Dates parameter.
How this parameter works
If no values are specified for the Week Days parameter, all working days in the
specified Weeks Calendar are considered valid for job scheduling.
If no Weeks Calendar is specified, all specified Week Days values are considered
valid working days.
When the Weeks Calendar parameter is specified with the Week Days parameter,
the job is scheduled for execution only if all the indicated Week Days are also
marked in the calendar.
If the Weeks Calendar parameter is specified with a Week Days parameter that
includes the + symbol, the job is scheduled for execution on those dates marked
with a + (in the Week Days parameter), in addition to the dates marked in the
calendar.
If the Weeks Calendar parameter is specified with a Week Days parameter that
includes the symbol, the job is not scheduled for execution on those dates even if
the date is marked in the calendar.
The appropriate Months parameters must be checked.
The And/Or relationship between Days and Weekdays is analyzed.
You can use the CONTROL-M CTMRPLN utility to generate a report describing
when the job runs based on its currently specified scheduling dates. For more
information, see the description of this utility in the CONTROL-M Administrator Guide
for your computer.

Alternate names for the Weeks Calendar parameter are listed below.
140
Component
Parameter Name
WEEKSCAL
Reporting Facility
WEEKS_CAL
CONTROL-M/Server
-weekcal
CONTROL-M for z/OS
WCAL
CONTROL-M/EM API
weeks_cal
Weeks Calendar
Example 1: Schedule the job on every Monday in July and

August that is a workday
NOTE
The following examples presume that the first day of the week is defined as Sunday at your
site.
Example 2: Schedule the job on every Monday in July,

whether it is workday, and each Tuesday in July that is a
workday
Example 3: Schedule the job on every Friday in June, July

and August that is a half day
Chapter 3
141
Weeks Calendar
142
Chapter
The parameters in this chapter are related to the execution of the job and the
processes that accompany execution.
Table 4
Execution parameters - summary (part 1 of 2)
Parameter
Description
Confirm
A job in which the Confirm parameter is checked is not considered for

submission until manually confirmed by the CONTROL-M/EM user.
Critical
When selected, indicates that the job is a critical-path job in

CONTROL-M.
Cyclic
Indicates that the job will run at a designated time or interval of time.
Due Out
Time by which the job must finish executing.

+ num Days The day by which the job must finish executing.
The + num Days subparameter is relevant only for jobs running in
CONTROL-M for z/OS version 6.2.00 or later.
Max Wait
Specifies the number of extra days (beyond the original scheduling

date) that the job is allowed to remain in the Active Jobs file awaiting
execution.
Maximum Reruns Specifies the maximum number of reruns that can be performed for the
job.
Multi Agent
Specifies that job submission details be broadcast to all agents within a

defined Node Group.
Node Group
Host name of a node group to which the job should be submitted. For
more information, see Node ID/Group below.
Node ID
Name of a CONTROL-M/Agent or remote host computer to which a

job was submitted. For more information, see Node ID/Group below.
Node ID/Group

This parameter is used only for installations in which
CONTROL-M/Agent technology is implemented.
Note: Node groups can be specified only for certain CONTROL-M
computers with CONTROL-M version 2.2.0 and later.
Chapter 4
143
Table 4
Execution parameters - summary (part 2 of 2)
Parameter
Description
Prevent NCT2
Performs data set cleanup before the original job run.
Priority
Indicates CONTROL-M job priority.
Request NJE Node Identifies the node in the JES network on which the job is to execute.
Rerun From
Indicates whether the interval between further runs of a cyclic job is

counted from the start or the end of the previous job run.
Rerun Member
Name of the JCL member to use when the job is automatically rerun.
Scheduling
Environment
Indicates the JES2 workload management scheduling environment that

is to be associated with the job.
System Affinity
Indicates the identity of the system in which the job must be initiated
and executed (in JES2).
Indicates the identity of the processor on which the job must execute (in
JES3).
144
Time From, Time

Until
From sets the earliest date and time for submitting the job.
Until sets the latest date and time for submitting the job.
Units
Specifies a unit of time for the numerical value indicated by the Interval
parameter.
Confirm
Confirm
Specifies whether user confirmation is required before the job is submitted for
execution.
Format
Usage
Optional
Format
Select the Confirm check box to indicate that confirmation is required.

The jobs submission criteria are not evaluated until CONTROL-M receives
manual confirmation from the user (using the Confirm/Restart option in
the CONTROL-M/EM window).
Clear the check box to indicate that confirmation is not required. The jobs
submission criteria are evaluated when the job is placed in the Active Jobs
file, without the need for user confirmation.
Invalid
Characters
AutoEdit
Support

General information
If Confirm is selected, a status of WAIT USER is assigned to the job when it is placed
in the Active Jobs file. When you confirm the job, it is submitted after the remaining
submission criteria are satisfied.

Alternate names for the Confirm parameter are listed below.
Component
Parameter Name
CONFIRM
-confirm
CONTROL-M for z/OS
CONFIRM
CONTROL-M/EM API
confirm_flag
Chapter 4
145
Confirm

Alternate formats for the Confirm parameter are listed below.
146
Component
Format
Valid values:
0 - No confirmation required. Default
1 - Confirmation required.
Example
<CONFIRM=1/>
Valid values:
N - No confirmation required. Default
Y - Confirmation required.
CONTROL-M for z/OS
Valid values:
N - No confirmation required. Default
Y - Confirmation required.
Critical
Critical
When selected, indicates that the job is a critical-path job in CONTROL-M.
Format
Usage
Optional
Format
Check box
Selected job is critical
Cleared job is not critical
Invalid Characters
Related parameters
Priority
The Critical parameter takes precedence over the Priority parameter,

when both are specified.
General information
For non-z/OS computers
Defining a job as critical ensures that a job that requires resources is submitted as
soon as possible after all its In Conditions parameters are satisfied. As a result of a job
being defined as critical, any Quantitative resources or Control resources that the job
requires exclusively are reserved for the job as they become available.
The preferential treatment given to a critical job is applied only after all the jobs In
Conditions parameters are satisfied.
The Critical parameter takes precedence over the Priority parameter (a low-priority
job defined as critical is given preferential treatment over a non-critical high-priority
job). However, if two critical jobs are awaiting execution at the same time, the higherpriority job receives resources before the lower-priority job.
Critical path priority applies to contention between Quantitative resources and
between Control resources with Exclusive status. The critical path priority does not
apply to contention with Control resources with Shared status.
For more information about the Priority parameter, see Priority on page 174.
For z/OS computers
The Critical parameter check box is replaced with a check box labeled Emergency.
When selected, this marks the z/OS job as an Emergency job task type.
Chapter 4
147
Critical
NOTE
[For z/OS jobs] The Emergency check box is marked if the job definition is created as a result
of a CONTROL-M/EM utility and the Critical parameter was set to 1 (see below).
Availability
For non-z/OS computers, critical is available for jobs whose statuses are not
Executing when editing details in the active environment.

Alternate names for the Critical parameter are listed below.
Component
Parameter Name
CRITICAL
Reporting Facility
CRITICAL
-critical
CONTROL-M/EM API
critical
Alternate formats for other CONTROL-M components

Alternate formats for the Critical parameter are listed below.
Component
Format
Valid values:
1 - Job is critical.
0 - Job is not critical. Default.
Example
<CRITICAL=1/>
Valid values:
Y - Job is critical.
N - Job is not critical. Default.
Example 1: Resource availability overrides critical status

If one tape drive is available, neither job is submitted. When two tape drives become
available, job EBDUPDT is submitted.
Job EBDUPDTs priority level is 50, Critical is selected, and it requires two tape
drives.
148
Critical
Item
Value
Mem Name
EBDUPDT
Quantitative Resources
TAPE 0002
Priority
50
Critical
Job EBDEXECs priority level is 04, and it requires one tape drive. It is not a Critical
job.
Item
Value
Mem Name
EBDEXEC
TAPE 0001
Priority
04
Critical
Example 2: Resource availability determines job submission

If one or two tape drives are available, neither job is submitted. When three tape
drives become available, job EBDBKP is submitted.
Job EBDBKPs priority level is 8A, Critical is selected, and it requires three tape
drives.
Item
Value
Mem Name
EBDBKP
TAPE 0003
Priority
8A
Critical
Job EBDMAINTs priority level is 70, Critical is selected, and it requires one tape
drive.
Item
Contents
Mem Name
EBDMAINT
TAPE 0001
Priority
70
Critical
Chapter 4
149
Cyclic
Cyclic
Indicates that the job will run at a designated time or interval of time.
Format
Usage
Optional
Format
Check box
Selected job is cyclic
Clear job is not cyclic
Subparameters
Parameter
Description
Run Interval
Fixed interval values to rerun a job:

Minutes: 0-64,800
Hours: 0-1080
Days: 0-45
Interval Sequence List of time intervals (e.g. +30M,+2h,+1D) up to 4000 characters

including commas.
Value range:
Minutes: 0-64,800
Hours: 0-1080
Days: 0-45
Specific Times
A list of specific times, separated by commas, for the job to run

(e.g. 0700,0945,1005,2300).
4000 characters including commas
Note: This parameter supports time synonym.
Tolerance
Maximum delay in minutes permitted for a late submission when

selecting a specific time (e.g. 5 minutes). Valid range: 0-999
Related parameters
150
Parameter
Description
Cyclic Type
Determines the type of cyclic job:

Rerun Interval
Interval Sequence
Specific Times
Rerun From
Determines from where the interval is counted when rerunning a cyclic

job.
Do Stop Cyclic
Do Stop Cyclic overrides the Cyclic specification.
Cyclic
Parameter
Description
Maximum Reruns Determines the maximum number of runs that are performed. This
value overrides the number of runs specified in the Interval Sequence
and Specific Times fields. For example, if the specific times are 07:00,
11:30, and 21:30, and the maximum rerun is 2, the job runs only twice.
Max Wait
Determines the maximum number of days a cyclic job can wait for
submission.
Task Type
In z/OS environments, Cyclic is a value of the Task Type parameter,

not a unique parameter.
General information
A non-cyclic job is a job that, if its scheduling criteria are satisfied, is ordered once by
CONTROL-M on a given day (discounting reruns caused by a Do Rerun parameter or
manual reruns).
A cyclic job is rescheduled after execution for an additional possible execution.
The job executes again only when the following circumstances occur:
The first run has completed.

The runtime schedule and execution parameters are still satisfied.
A specified number of minutes has elapsed since the last completion of the job or
the next specified runtime has been reached.
The cyclic job runs at the time designated according to the time or time intervals
selected. The Specific Time and the Tolerance parameters can be set to enable a job to
run after the specified time. If the job being executed runs over the proceeding jobs
specified time, the proceeding jobs execution time window is extended to the
number of minutes set in the Tolerance field. For example, if the Tolerance field is set
to 15 minutes, the proceeding job can still be executed 0-15 minutes after the specified
time. If the tolerance time interval has passed, the proceeding job will not be
performed.
NOTE
The Specific Time option is relevant for one odate only. Specific times are sorted from each
new day time to the next.
Ordering a cyclic job as non-cyclic

The %%CYCLIC AutoEdit variable can be used to override the Cyclic parameter for a
job, or for all jobs in a scheduling table.
This variable is normally used when ordering a cyclic job for a single run.
Chapter 4
151
Cyclic
EXAMPLE
To indicate that all jobs ordered by the ctmorder utility (in CONTROL-M/Server) should run
as non-cyclic jobs, include the following statement in the command line of the ctmorder
utility.
-autoedit %%CYCLIC N
Maximum number of days to wait for submission

The CYCLIC_MAXWAIT parameter for CONTROL-M/Server determines when
cyclic jobs, which have executed at least once, should be removed from the Active
Jobs file by the New Day procedure.
Valid values are:
KEEP Jobs are removed from the Active Jobs file when MAXWAIT days have
passed regardless of whether the job ended OK. Default.
NOT_KEEP Jobs (non-cyclic and cyclic) are removed from the Active Jobs file at
the next run of the New Day procedure. Cyclic jobs are not removed if they are
executing when the New Day procedure begins. Instead, they are removed at the
run of the following New Day procedure.
For more information about CONTROL-M/Server parameters, see the CONTROL-M

Special care should be taken when specifying a cyclic job. If not defined appropriately
it may cause an endless loop in which the job is continually resubmitted for
execution.
If a cyclic job is executing when the New Day procedure is run, the job is changed to
non-cyclic and an appropriate message is written to the CONTROL-M log. It is the
users responsibility to review these messages and handle them accordingly.
Terminating a cyclic job

You can prevent subsequent iterations of a cyclic job by using the Do Stop Cyclic
parameter. For more information, see Do Stop Cyclic on page 252.
If a cyclic job is terminated by a Do Stop Cyclic parameter, the View Details screen
displayed by option Z in the ctmpsm utility contains Cyclic:T where T indicates
Terminated.
152
Cyclic
Availability
For z/OS jobs
Cyclic jobs cannot contain Do Rerun parameters or Shout When Rerun parameters.

Alternate names for the Cyclic parameter are listed below.
Component
Parameter Name
CONTROL-M/EM
Utilities
CYCLIC
Reporting Facility
CYCLIC
CONTROL-M/Server
Utilities
-cyclic
CONTROL-M for z/OS
Cyclic is a Task Type parameter value, not a unique parameter.

For more information, see Task Type on page 75.
CONTROL-M/EM API
cyclic
Chapter 4
153
Due Out
Due Out
Sets the time by which, and the day by which, the job must finish executing.
Format
Usage
Optional
Format
A 4-digit number in the format hhmm, where

hh is the hour the job is due out, based on the 24-hour clock
mm is the minute the job is due out
AutoEdit Support

Subparameter
+ num Days sets the number of days that job execution can be extended after the
ODAT. In this subparameter, num is a 3-digit number from 0 through 120, or is blank.
NOTE
The + num Days subparameter is relevant only for jobs running in CONTROL-M for z/OS
version 6.2.00 or later.
General information
If two jobs with the same priority are available for submission, CONTROL-M submits
the job with the earlier Due Out date and time first.
If the Due Out field is left blank, and + num Days is not used to set an offset date, the
default Due Out time is the last minute of the working day.
If + num Days is used to set an offset date and the Due Out field is left blank, the
default Due Out time is the last minute of the working day of the offset date.
Examples
1. Assume the following:
154
The original scheduling date (Odate) is January 20.

The Due Out field is blank.
The + num Days field is blank.
Due Out
The job must finish executing by the last minute before the New Day procedure runs
at the end of the January 20 working day.
The Odate is January 20.

Due Out is set to 1700.
+ num Days is blank.
The job must finish executing by 5 P.M. on January 20.

The Odate is January 20

Due Out is set to 1700
+ num Days is set to + 3 days.
The job must finish executing by 5 P.M. on January 23.
Chapter 4
155
Interval
Interval
Specifies the length of time to wait between reruns of a job or between cyclic runs of a
job.
Format
Usage
Optional
Note: When defining a cyclic job with an Interval parameter with the
default value of 0, if the default is not changed, the job runs continuously
when submitted for execution.
Format
Valid values:
0 to 64800 (for minutes)
0 to 1080 (for hours)
0 to 45 (for days)
Default: 0
Note: The unit of measurement is determined by the Units parameter,
described on page 194. If no Units parameter value is specified, the default
is Minutes.
Case sensitive
No
Invalid
Characters
AutoEdit
Support

Related parameters
Cyclic
Indicates if the job is cyclic (to be rerun at regular intervals).
Units
Indicates units of measurement (minutes, hours, and days) the amount of

which is determined by the Interval parameter.
General information
A From field can be included in the Interval specification. This field indicates if the
time for the next run of the job should be calculated from the beginning or from the
end of the previous run of the job.
156
Interval
A job can be run more than once from a given job order when
the jobs completion status was set to Rerun using a Do Rerun parameter
-or the job is defined as Cyclic
CONTROL-M waits at least the number of minutes specified by the Interval
parameter before it attempts the next rerun of the job or before the next run of a cyclic
job.
The Interval period can be calculated from either the start or the end of the previous
job run, as determined by the Rerun From parameter. For more information, see
Rerun From on page 179.
The job is re-submitted after
the specified number of minutes have elapsed from the last rerun, or from the start
or end of the last run of a cyclic job
-andall submission criteria are satisfied
Availability
For CONTROL-M/Server version 2.2.4 and 2.2.5 Jobs
Interval is relevant only when Cyclic is selected. However a value can be specified
in CONTROL-M/EM and CONTROL-M/Desktop for the Interval parameter even
for non-cyclic jobs. In this case, the interval is ignored.
The From subparameter not displayed in CONTROL-M/EM or CONTROLM/Desktop.
For z/OS version 6.0.0x, and 6.1.03 jobs
The From subparameter is relevant

for cyclic jobs
for non-cyclic jobs with a MAXRERUN parameter specified
For z/OS version 5.1.4x jobs
The From subparameter is not displayed in CONTROL-M/EM or CONTROLM/Desktop.
Chapter 4
157
Interval

Alternate names for the Interval parameter are listed below.
Component
Parameter Name
INTERVAL
Reporting Facility
INTERVAL
-interval
CONTROL-M for z/OS
INTERVAL
CONTROL-M/EM API
rerun_interval

Alternate formats for the Interval parameter are listed below.
Component
Format
CONTROL-M for z/OS
INTERVAL combines the functionality of the Interval, Rerun

From, and Units parameters.
<interval-number>
Valid values:
0 to 64800 (for minutes)
0 to 1080 (for hours)
0 to 45 (for days)
<interval-type>
A single character describing the type of data specified in the
INTERVAL field.
Valid values are:
D - (Days) Maximum INTERVAL value is 45.
H - (Hours) Maximum INTERVAL value is 1080.
M - (Minutes) Maximum INTERVAL value is 64800.
Default.
FROM
Similar to the Rerun From parameter.
Valid values.
STRT Measures the interval from the start of the current
job run. Default.
END Measures the interval from the end of the current job
run.
TRGT Measures the interval before the next cycle of the
job from when the current job run is scheduled.
158
Max Wait
Max Wait
Specifies the number of extra days (beyond the original scheduling date) that the job
is allowed to remain in the Active Jobs file awaiting execution. If the job still has not
run after the specified number of days, the job is removed from the Active Jobs file.
Format
Usage
Optional
Format
An integer from 0 through 98 (days), or 99 (no limit)

For more information, see Table 5 on page 160.
Default
AutoEdit
Support

General information
The Max Wait parameter is used to handle the following types of occurrences:
For non-cyclic jobs
A job that is scheduled for execution on a specific day is not always submitted that
same day. This may be due to any number of reasons, such as a heavy production
workload, a problem in one of the jobs predecessors causing a process to stop, or a
hardware failure. When Max Wait is assigned a value greater than zero, the job is
retained in the Active Jobs file up to the specified number of days, allowing the job
additional opportunities to be submitted.
A job that ends NOTOK during the night can be deleted from the Active Jobs file
during the execution of the New Day procedure the next morning. Using the Max
Wait parameter, the user can retain an overnight job that ends NOTOK in the
Active Jobs file for a number of days, allowing the operator an opportunity to
correct the problem and rerun the job without the need to re-order the job.
For cyclic jobs
If CYCLIC_MAXWAIT (CONTROL-M parameter) is set to KEEP (default), the

Max Wait parameter does not depend on whether the job ended OK or NOTOK.
Cyclic jobs are only deleted from the Active Jobs file after the expiration of the Max
Wait parameter.
Chapter 4
159
Max Wait
If CYCLIC_MAXWAIT is NOT_KEEP, Cyclic jobs are removed from the Active

Jobs file at the next run of the New Day procedure, unless they are executing when
the New Day procedure begins. In this case, they are removed at the run of the
following New Day procedure.
Max Wait parameter effects

The effect of the value specified for the Max Wait parameter is described in Table 5:
Table 5
Max Wait parameter values
Max Wait 0
The job is deleted from the Active Jobs file if it did not execute on its
scheduling date.
Max Wait n
The job is retained in the Active Jobs file for the stated number of
additional days beyond its original scheduling date (Odate) or until
submitted for execution (and execution ends OK).
(n = 1-98)
Max Wait 99
The job remains in the Active Jobs file indefinitely (or until it is manually
deleted), even if it finishes executing.

If a non-cyclic job that was run on a CONTROL-M installation on an z/OS computer
was rerun by the operator and ended NOTOK, it is deleted from the Active Jobs file
when the New Day procedure runs, regardless of the value specified in the Max Wait
parameter.

Alternate names for the Max Wait parameter are listed below.
Component
Parameter Name
MAXWAIT
Reporting Facility
MAX WAIT
-maxwait
CONTROL-M for z/OS
MAXWAIT
CONTROL-M/EM API
max_wait
Example 1: Retain job until resources available

Retain a scheduled job indefinitely, until the runtime resources required for the job
are available:
Max Wait 99
160
Max Wait
Example 2: Retain job beyond original scheduling date

Retain a job for an extra three days beyond its original scheduling date:
Days 02,04,06
Max Wait 03
Assume that the job does not run due to the absence of the required runtime
resources. The job that is scheduled for day 2 of the month waits from the second
through the fifth to be executed.
On the sixth of the month, CONTROL-M gives up, and the job that was originally
scheduled for day 2 is deleted. The jobs scheduled for days 4 and 6 wait until as late
as days 7 and 9 respectively to be executed.
Example 3: Schedule a job for periods when the computer

is inactive
Schedule the job for every working day, whether the computer is active. Allow each
scheduled job three extra days to execute:
Days Calendar WORKDAYS
Retro Y
Max Wait 03
Given the following circumstances:
The WORKDAYS calendar, specified in the Days Calendar parameter, contains the
values 15, 16, 17, and 19.
The computer was off-line from day 15 up to and including day 18.
When the computer is brought back online on day 19, the job is scheduled four times,
with original scheduling dates (Odate) of the 15, 16, 17 and 19, respectively. Each
scheduled job that does not execute successfully (, either not submitted or did not end
OK) is handled as follows by CONTROL-M:
The job with Odate 15 is retained on day 19 and deleted from the Active Jobs file
on day 20 even though the Max Wait period of three days has already passed since
each job with Retro Y is given at least one day to run.
The job with Odate 16 is deleted on day 20 since day 19 is the last day of the Max
Wait period of three days.
Chapter 4
161
Max Wait
The job with Odate 17 is deleted on day 21 since day 20 is the last day of the Max
Wait period of three days.
The job with Odate 19 is deleted on day 23 since day 22 is the last day of the Max Wait
period of three days.
162
Maximum Reruns
Maximum Reruns
Specifies the maximum number of reruns that can be performed for the job.
Format
Usage
Optional
Length
An integer from 0 through 99.

z/OS: There is a difference between cyclic jobs and regular jobs:
Cyclic jobs an integer from 0 through 9999
Regular jobs an integer from 0 through 255.
Default
AutoEdit Support

Related parameters
Do Remedy
Specifies when a job is to be rerun.
Cyclic
Indicates that the job is rerun on a regular basis.
General information
When the jobs completion status is set to Rerun using the Do Rerun parameter,
CONTROL-M checks the number of reruns specified in the Maximum parameter.
If the number in the Maximum parameter is greater than the number of reruns that
have already been performed for the job, a rerun (automatic rerun) process is
performed for the job.
NOTE
This parameter cannot be specified for a cyclic job running on a version of CONTROL-M
earlier than 6.1.00. This parameter can be specified for a cyclic job running on CONTROL-M
When a job is assigned Rerun status, the job is not rerun if either
maximum = 0
-orthe number of reruns specified in this parameter has already been performed
CONTROL-M waits at least the number of minutes specified by the Interval

parameter before it attempts the next rerun of the job.
Chapter 4
163
Maximum Reruns
The job is re-submitted after
The specified number of minutes has elapsed from the last rerun
-andall submission criteria are satisfied
A rerun counter is displayed on the Active panel of the Job Editing form, indicating
how many times the job has been rerun from the current job order.

When a job is first run, the MAXRERUN field in the Active environment, that is, in
the Zoom screen, contains the same value as the MAXRERUN parameter in the job
scheduling definition. However, in the Active environment MAXRERUN works as a
reverse-counter of automatic reruns. Each time the job is automatically rerun, the
value is decreased by one until the field contains a value of zero.
The automatic rerun process works as follows:
1. CONTROL-M determines that automatic rerun is possible only if the job ENDS
NOTOK and a specified DO RERUN statement is activated during postprocessing. If the monitor determines that automatic rerun is possible, it sets the
status of the job to ENDED NOTOK RERUN NEEDED.
2. The monitor then checks the value of MAXRERUN in the Active environment. If
the value is zero, automatic rerun is not possible and the job is not submitted for
rerun. If the value is greater than zero, rerun is possible and the monitor submits
the job for rerun when all runtime criteria are satisfied.
3. The JCL for the rerun job is taken from the member specified in the RERUNMEM
parameter. If no RERUNMEM value is specified, the JCL for the rerun is taken
from the regular JCL member of the job that is specified in the MEMNAME
parameter.
MAXRERUN applies only to automatic reruns. The MAXRERUN counter is not
affected by reruns performed manually using the Rerun option in the CONTROL-M
for z/OS Active Environment screen.
If a job is defined as cyclic, the MAXRERUN parameter can be used to specify the
number of iterations. This number excludes the initial run of the job.
164
Maximum Reruns
Availability
For CONTROL-M/Server version 2.2.4, 2.2.5, 6.0.05 and z/OS version 5.1.4x jobs
The Maximum (MAXRERUN) parameter is available for non-cyclic jobs only in

both CONTROL-M/EM and CONTROL-M/Desktop.

Alternate names for the Maximum parameter are listed below.
Component
Parameter Name
MAXRERUN
Reporting Facility
MAX RERUN
-maxrerun
CONTROL-M for z/OS
MAXRERUN
CONTROL-M/EM API
rerun_max
Chapter 4
165
Multi Agent
Multi Agent
Specifies that job submission details be broadcast to all agents within a defined Node
Group. All available agents in the Node Group run an identical job, and each such job
has a unique Order ID.
NOTE
Multi Agent cannot be specified for z/OS jobs.
Format
Usage
Optional
Default
No
Format
Check box
Selected Multi Agent job
Cleared Not a Multi Agent job
Invalid
Characters
AutoEdit
Support

Related parameters
Parameter
Description
Node Group
Specifies the CONTROL-M/Agent node group to which the job is

submitted. The job is submitted to only one agent in the specified node
group, instead of submitting it to all agents in the node group (as when
Multi Agent is selected).
Node ID/Group
Specifies the CONTROL-M/Agent node ID or node group to which the

job is submitted. The job is submitted to only the specified node ID or
one agent in the specified node group, instead of submitting it to all
agents in the node group (as when Multi Agent is selected).
General information
The job is processed by all the agents specified for the Node ID/Group parameter or
the Node group parameter (in the Active environment, only). A node group must be
specified for the Node ID/Group parameter or the Node Group parameter. For more
details, see Node ID/Group on page 168.
166
Multi Agent
For example, you can run a job that detects the amount of disk space available on the
computer on which the job was run. By specifying Yes Multi Agent, the job checks the
available disk space on every agent computer in the specified Node Group.
Computer-specific issues
This parameter does not work with z/OS jobs.

Alternate names for the Multi Agent parameter are listed below.
Component
Parameter Name
CONTROL-M/EM
Utilities
MULTY_AGENT
Reporting Facility
MULTY AGENT
CONTROL-M/Server
Utilities
-multiagent
CONTROL-M/EM API
multiagent
Example: Submit a job to all agents in a node group

Specify the following parameter in CONTROL-M/Server ctmcreate utility to submit
a job for processing by all agents in the Group PRODUCTION.
ctmcreate -tasktype job
-multiagent y
-nodegrp PRODUCTION
Chapter 4
167
Node ID/Group
Node ID/Group
Name of a CONTROL-M/Agent computer, remote host computer, or node group to which
the job should be submitted.

This parameter is used only for installations in which CONTROL-M Agent
technology is implemented, for certain computers with CONTROL-M version 2.2.0 or
later. It is not relevant in z/OS environments.
NOTE
In the job editing form prior to CONTROL-M/EM version 6.3.01, the Application Node
Group parameter was tightly linked to the Application parameter. Beginning with
CONTROL-M/EM version 6.3.01, you select the application node group in the Node
ID/Group field (in the Execution tab of the job editing form).
Format
Usage
Optional
Note: If this parameter is left blank, the job is submitted for execution on
the CONTROL-M/Server computer.
Length
Case Sensitive
No
Invalid
Characters
Blanks; single quotation marks.
AutoEdit
Support

General information
To submit the job to CONTROL-M/Agent or remote host on a specific computer,

specify the host name of the computer.
To submit the job on the server computer, leave this parameter blank.
To submit the job using the load balancing mechanism, specify the group name
representing the collection of computers that are capable of executing the job.
The group name must be defined in the installation.
NOTE
Node groups can be specified only for certain CONTROL-M computers with CONTROL-M
version 2.2.0 and later.
168
Node ID/Group
NOTE
When moving from primary to secondary server or from secondary to primary server, jobs
that are in executing state on the default local agent are not recognized by the other server. If
there are jobs without an owner, both the primary and the secondary server must have the
same account name.
To avoid this situation from occurring, define a specific nodeid for a job. For more information
about failover, see the CONTROL-M Administrator Guide.
Node ID/Group in the active environment

The Node/ID/Group parameter is divided into two separate parameters in the Job
Editing form in the CONTROL-M/EM GUI. These parameters are Node ID and Node
Group.
Table 6
Node ID and Node Group parameter descriptions
Parameter
Description
Node ID
Displays the name of the node on which the job was most recently run.
This field is not user-configurable.
Node Group
Name of the node or node group on which following iterations of a job is

run.
Note: This feature is available only in the active environment.
NOTE
The Node ID and Node Group parameters are not available for jobs on CONTROL-M for
z/OS.

Alternate names for the Node ID/Group parameter are listed below.
Component
Parameter Name
NODEID
Reporting Facility
NODE_ID
NODEGROUP
-nodegrp
CONTROL-M/EM API
node_group
Chapter 4
169
Prevent NCT2
Example: Enable CONTROL-M/Server to determine the most

suitable agent
Assuming that a node group called UNIX_group contains agent computers bill and
diana.
The following parameter causes CONTROL-M/Server to determine which of the two
agent computers in the group is best suited to execute the job when it is submitted for
execution:
Node ID/Group
UNIX_group
Prevent NCT2
Performs data set cleanup before the original job run.
NOTE
For z/OS jobs only.
Format
Usage
Optional
Format
Select one of the following from the Prevent NCT2 list box:
AutoEdit Support
170
Blank Do not perform data set cleanup before the original job
run. Default.
N (No) Do not perform data set cleanup before the original job
run.
Y (Yes) Perform data set cleanup before the original job run.
This value is not valid for started tasks.
L (List) Do not perform data set cleanup before the original job
run; but generate the messages that would be required for GDG
adjustment during restart.
F (Flush) Halt processing of the job if any data set cleanup error
is detected (even if z/OS would not have stopped processing the
job).

Prevent NCT2
General information
If a job tries to create a data set that already exists, the job may fail with a
DUPLICATE DATA SET ON VOLUME error. If a job tries to create a data set whose
name is already cataloged, the job may fail with an error message that indicates a
reason of NOT CATLGD for reason code 2 (the CONTROL-M/Restart term
PREVENT-NCT2 is derived from this error situation).
These problems can be avoided by performing data set cleanup. During data set
cleanup, CONTROL-M/Restart does the following:
Deletes and uncatalogs the old data sets. This prevents DUPLICATE DATSET ON
VOLUME and NOT CATLGD 2 errors.
Performs Generation Dataset (GDG) Adjustment, which is described in the

CONTROL-M/Restart User Manual.
CONTROL-M/Restart automatically performs data set cleanup prior to restarts and

reruns. However, it may be desirable to perform data set cleanup before the original
job run, because data sets accessed by the job can have file-related errors that were
generated by an entirely different job.
When data set cleanup is performed as part of the original job request, it is called
PREVENT-NCT2 processing.
The site-defined default in parameter NCT2 in member CTRPARM determines
whether data set cleanup is to be performed before the original job run.
The Prevent NCT2 parameter can be used to override this default to determine what
data set cleanup instructions are provided to the original job run. Possible values, and
their effects, are described below:
When N is specified, No special action is taken by CONTROL-M/Restart. Data set

cleanup is not performed.
When Y is specified, CONTROL-M/Restart performs data set cleanup before the

original job run. It deletes and uncatalogs all data sets that can cause NCT2 and
duplicate data set errors during execution, and performs GDG adjustment if
necessary.
When L is specified, data set cleanup is not performed for the original run, but
messages that would be required for GDG adjustment during restart are
generated. Without these messages, GDG adjustment might not be properly
performed during restart. In addition to the GDG adjustment messages, the same
messages that are generated during simulation of data set cleanup are also
generated.
Chapter 4
171
Prevent NCT2
When F is specified, If a file catalog error is detected, processing is halted (even if

normal z/OS processing would not handle the problems as a fatal error) and an
appropriate error message is generated.
NOTE
If you would normally specify N (that is, CONTROL-M/Restart processing is not desired for
the original run), but the JCL requires GDG processing, BMC Software recommends that you
specify value L instead of value N.
If a value of Y, L, or F is specified (that is, if some kind of special NCT2 processing is

desired), a CONTROLR step is automatically added as a first step of the submitted
job.
The PREVENT NCT2 parameter has no impact on restarts, because
CONTROL-M/Restart automatically performs data set cleanup prior to restarts.

Alternate names for the Prevent NCT2 parameter are listed below.
Component
Parameter Name
PREVENTNCT2
Reporting Facility
PREVENT NCT2
CONTROL-M for z/OS
PREVENT-NCT2
CONTROL-M/EM API
prevent_nct2

Alternate formats for the Prevent NCT2 parameter are listed below.
172
Component
Format
CONTROL-M/EM
Utilities
Valid values:
0 - No. Does not prevent data set cleanup.
1 - Yes. Prevents data set cleanup.
Example
<PREVENTNCT2=1/>
Prevent NCT2
Component
Format
CONTROL-M for
z/OS
PREVENT-NCT2 is composed of two parameters:

PREVENT-NCT2
Valid values:
N - No
Y - Yes
L - List
F - Flush
These values are described in Format on
page 170.
DFLT
Protected field indicating the

PREVENT-NCT2 default value for the
CONTROL-M for z/OS site. The default is set
in parameter NCAT2 in the CTRPARM
member in the IOA PARM library. A value
specified in the PREVENT-NCT2 parameter
overrides the site default.
Example: Prevent NOT CATLGD 2 errors for job PRDKPL01

JOB: PRDKPL01 LIB CTM.PROD.SCHEDULE TABLE: PRODKPL
+----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
MEMNAME PRDKPL01 MEMLIB CTM.PROD.JCL
OWNER SYS1 TASKTYPE JOB PREVENT-NCT2 Y DFLT N
APPL KPL GROUP PROD-KPL
DESC DAILY PRODUCTION - START OF APPL-PROD-KPL
OVERLIB
SET VAR
DOCMEM PRDKPL01 DOCLIB CTM.PROD.DOC
====================================================================
=======
DAYS 01 DCAL
AND/OR
WDAYS WCAL
DATES
CONFCAL SHIFT RETRO Y MAXWAIT 00 D-CAT
MINIMUM PDS
====================================================================
=======
IN START-DAILY-PROD-KPL ODAT
CONTROL DB2-MAIN-FILE E
RESOURCE INIT 0001 CARTRIDGE 0001
Chapter 4
173
Priority
Priority
Indicates CONTROL-M job priority.
Usage
Optional
Format
2 alphanumeric characters
Default
Blank, which is the lowest priority
Case Sensitive
No.
Invalid Characters
Single quotation marks; non-English characters
AutoEdit Support

General information
Priority determines the order of job processing by CONTROL-M in the Active Jobs
file.
Priority order is such that 9 > 0 > Z > A. The characters are not case sensitive.
The value for the priority parameter is a 2-character string. AA is the lowest
priority. 99 is the highest. If a single character is specified, the uppercase letter A is
automatically inserted as the first character. For example, priority 1 is treated as
priority A1.
The next line shows priority values from the lowest (on the left) to the highest (on
the right):
AA-A9 ... ZA-Z9, 0A-0Z, 01-09, 1A-19 ... 9A-99
If a job that is waiting to be submitted because Quantitative resources are not

available, has a higher priority than a job that has all the Quantitative resources
available, the lower priority job is submitted. However, by defining a job as critical,
the user can force CONTROL-M to reserve resources for the job, thus assuring that it
is submitted as soon as possible (for additional details, see Critical on page 147.).
Consult authorities at your installation for information about your priority usage
standards.
For z/OS computers
A job may be so important that lower priority jobs must not be submitted until the
important job has executed. Such a job is called a critical path job. If the first character
of Priority in z/OS jobs is set to * (Asterisk), the job is marked as a critical path job.
There is no relationship between the Critical parameter and the Priority parameter.
174
Priority

Alternate names for the Priority parameter are listed below.
Component
Parameter Name
PRIORITY
Reporting Facility
PRIORITY
-priority
CONTROL-M for z/OS

Utilities
PRIORITY
CONTROL-M/EM API
priority
Example
The priority level of the job named RNDIN001 is 08; the priority level of the job
named RNDIN002 is 04. Each job requires 60% of the CPU.
Mem Name
Quantitative
Resources
Priority
Mem Name
Quantitative
Resources
Priority
RNDIN001
CPU
60
08
RNDIN002
CPU
04
60
The two jobs cannot run simultaneously. Therefore, the job named RNDIN001 is
submitted first because it has a higher priority.
Chapter 4
175
Request NJE Node
Request NJE Node

Specifies the node in the JES network on which the job is to execute.
NOTE
This field is relevant only for z/OS jobs.
Format
Usage
Optional
Length
1-8 characters
Case Sensitive
No
Invalid
Characters
AutoEdit
Support

General information
The Request NJE Node parameter is used to specify the node in the JES network on
which the job is to execute.
If a value is specified for the Request NJE Node parameter, a JCL statement is
generated. The precise form of the statement depends on whether CONTROL-M is
running under JES2 or JES3.
NOTE
If a value is specified for the Request NJE Node parameter, it does not override any node
name specified in the job statement unless the OVERJCLM parameter in the CTMPARM
library is set to Y.
Under JES2
If CONTROL-M is running under JES2, the Request NJE parameter generates the
following JCL statement:
/*ROUTE XEQ node_name
176
Request NJE Node
Under JES3
If CONTROL-M is running under JES3, the JCL statement generated by the Request
NJE parameter differs slightly, taking the following form:
//*ROUTE XEQ node_name

Alternate names for the Request NJE Node parameter are listed below.
Component
Parameter Name
CONTROL-M for z/OS
NJE NODE
CONTROL-M/EM API
request_nje
Example1: Under JES2

The following values are entered to the job processing definition:
DESC
OVERLIB
SCHENV SYSTEM ID NJE NODE OS35
The following statement is added to the JCL of the job:

/*ROUTE XEQ OS35
The job is executed at node OS35.
Chapter 4
177
Request NJE Node
Example 2: Under JES3

DESC
OVERLIB
SCHENV SYSTEM ID NJE NODE OS35

//*ROUTE XEQ OS35
The job is executed at node OS35.
178
Rerun From
Rerun From
Indicates whether the interval between runs of a cyclic job or until the start of a rerun
job is measured from the start or the end of the previous job run.
Table 7
Format - Rerun From Parameter
Usage
Optional
Format
List box
Valid values:
Start (Default)
End
Target
Invalid Characters Non-English characters

AutoEdit Support

General information
The interval between job runs is specified in the Interval parameter.
When the value of Rerun From is Start, the time until the next job run is counted
from the moment that the current job run begins.
When the value of Rerun From is End, the time until the next job run is counted
from the moment that the current job run is complete.
When the value of Rerun From is Target, the interval is measured from the
scheduling time of the current job run.

Alternate names for the Rerun From parameter are listed below.
Component
Parameter Name
IND_CYCLIC
Reporting Facility
IND CYCLIC
CONTROL-M/Server
-intervalfrom
(Default value: START)
Utilities
CONTROL-M/EM API
count_cyclic_from
Chapter 4
179
Rerun From
Example 1: Calculate the interval between cyclic jobs when

Rerun From is Start
Job_A is a cyclic job. The value specified for Interval is 60 seconds. The Rerun From
value is Start.
If Job_A job run takes 15 seconds, the next run of Job_A begins 45 seconds after the
first run is complete.
Example 2: Calculate the interval between cyclic jobs when

Rerun From is End
Job_B is a cyclic job. The value specified for Interval is 60 seconds. The Rerun From
value is End.
When the Job_B job run is complete, the next run of Job_B begins 60 seconds after the
first run is complete. The length of time that it takes to run Job_B does not affect the
period of time between job runs.
180
Rerun Member
Rerun Member
Name of the JCL member to use when the job is automatically rerun.
NOTE
Format
Usage
Optional.
Length
1-8 characters
Case Sensitive
Yes
Invalid Characters
AutoEdit Support

Related parameters
Do Forcejob
The Do Forcejob parameter is a more flexible alternative to the Rerun

Member parameter.
Do If Rerun
CONTROL-M/Restart users can restart a failed job using the Do If

Rerun parameter instead of Rerun Member. Do If Rerun and Rerun
Member cannot be specified together.
File Name/Mem
Name
When specified, the Rerun Member value overrides the Mem Name
value.
General information
Although the Rerun Member parameter can be used to specify the name of a JCL
member to use for automatic rerun, note the following points:
The Do Forcejob parameter provides a more flexible alternative to the Rerun

Member parameter.
CONTROL-M/Restart users can use the Do If Rerun parameter to restart the failed
job instead of using the Rerun Member parameter to rerun the job.
Chapter 4
181
Rerun Member
The automatic rerun process works as follows:
CONTROL-M determines that automatic rerun is possible only if the job ends
NOTOK and a specified Do Rerun statement is activated during post-processing.
If CONTROL-M determines that automatic rerun is possible, it sets the jobs status
to ended NOTOK RERUN NEEDED.
CONTROL-M then checks the value of MAXRERUN in the Active environment. If

the value is zero (or no MAXRERUN value was specified), automatic rerun is not
possible and the job is not submitted for rerun. If the value is greater than zero,
rerun is possible and the monitor submits the job for rerun when all runtime
criteria are satisfied. Runtime criteria include not only the Runtime Scheduling
parameters, but also the Interval parameter, which specifies the minimum
allowable interval between runs of the same job.
The JCL for the rerun job is taken from the member specified in the Rerun Member
parameter. If no Rerun Member value is specified, the JCL for the rerun is taken
from the jobs regular JCL member specified in the Mem Name parameter.
Rerun Member has additional characteristics:
The member name can be the same as, or different from, the job name.
The member specified in the Rerun Member parameter must be in the library
specified in the Mem Lib parameter.
The Rerun Member parameter overrides the Mem Name parameter value in the
JCL, and the Mem Name parameter value becomes irrelevant for reruns.
Availability
182
This parameter is relevant only for z/OS jobs.
The Do If Rerun and Rerun Member parameters cannot be specified together.
The Rerun Member parameter cannot be specified for cyclic jobs and cyclic started
tasks.
Rerun Member

Alternate names for the Rerun Member parameter are listed below.
Component
Parameter Name
RERUNMEM
Reporting Facility
RERUN MEM
CONTROL-M for z/OS

Utilities
RERUNMEM
CONTROL-M/EM API
rerun_member
Chapter 4
183
Scheduling Environment
Indicates the JES2 workload management scheduling environment that is to be
associated with the job.
NOTE
Format
Usage
Optional
Length
Case Sensitive
Yes
Invalid
Characters
AutoEdit
Support

General information
The Scheduling Environment parameter can only be used when CONTROL-M is
running under JES2. If CONTROL-M is running under JES3, any value specified for
the Scheduling Environment parameter is ignored.
If a value is specified for the Scheduling Environment parameter, the JCL job
statement is modified by the addition of a statement in the following form:
// SCHENV=schedule_environment
NOTE
If a value is specified for the Scheduling Environment parameter, it does not override any
scheduling environment specified in the job statement unless the OVERJCLM parameter in
the CTMPARM library is set to Y.
184

Alternate names for the Scheduling Environment parameter are listed below.
Component
Parameter Name
CONTROL-M/EM
Utilities
SCHEDULING_ENVIRONMENT
Reporting Facility
SCHEDULE ENV
CONTROL-M for z/OS
SCHENV
CONTROL-M/EM API
schedule_environment
Example: Specifying a scheduling environment

If the scheduling environment of job ACCT01 is to be SCHD2, specify the following:
DESC
OVERLIB
SCHENV SCHD2 SYSTEM ID NJE NODE
The job statement is modified as follows:

//ACCT01 JOB ,PROD1,CLASS=A,MSGCLASS=X,
// MSGLEVEL=(1,1),
// SCHENV=SCHD2
Chapter 4
185
System Affinity
System Affinity
Indicates the identity of the system in which the job must be initiated and executed
(in JES2).
Indicates the identity of the processor on which the job must execute (in JES3).
NOTE
Format
Usage
Optional
Length
1-4 characters
Case Sensitive No
Invalid
Characters
AutoEdit
Support

General information
The System Affinity parameter has different effects, depending on which release of
JES is in use.
NOTE
If a value is specified for the System Affinity parameter, it does not override any system
identity specified in the job statement unless the OVERJCLM parameter in the CTMPARM
Under JES2
If CONTROL-M is running under JES2, the System Affinity parameter is used to
specify the JES2 system on which the job is to be initiated and executed.
If a value is specified for the System Affinity parameter, the following JCL statement
is generated:
/*JOBPARM SYSAFF=sys_id
186
System Affinity
Under JES3
If CONTROL-M is running under JES3, the System Affinity parameter is used to
specify the JES3 processor that is to execute the job.
If a value is specified for the System Affinity parameter, the following JCL statement
is generated:
//*MAIN SYSTEM=processor_id

Alternate names for the System Affinity parameter are listed below.
Component
Parameter Name
CONTROL-M/EM
Utilities
SYSTEM_AFFINITY
Reporting Facility
SYS AFFINITY
CONTROL-M for z/OS
SYSTEM ID
CONTROL-M/EM API
system_affinity

DESC
OVERLIB
SCHENV SYSTEM ID SYS3 NJE NODE

/*JOBPARM SYSAFF=SYS3
The job is executed on the JES2 system SYS3.

DESC
OVERLIB
SCHENV SYSTEM ID PRC3 NJE NODE
Chapter 4
187
System Affinity

//*MAIN SYSTEM=PRC3
The job is executed on processor PRC3.
188
Time From, Time Until

Sets time limits (From and Until) for submitting the job.
Format
Usage
Optional
Format
If not left blank, the From and Until subparameters must contain valid
times expressed in 24-hour format (hh:mm). By default, valid times are
from 00:00 through 23:59. However, if Time Synonym (in Tools/Options)
is checked, valid times are from New Day time until New Day Time plus
23:59. For example, if New Day time is 8:00 A.M., the range of valid times
is from 08:00 until 31:59.
Alternatively, if From contains a valid time value, Until can contain the >
character. For more information, see below.
The From value can be specified without an Until value. The opposite is
also true.
AutoEdit
Support

Subparameter
+ num days is an optional subparameter, valid only for CONTROL-M for z/OS
version 6.2.xx, that enables you to set a range of days after the original scheduling
date of the job during which the job can be submitted. From + num days defines the
beginning of the range and Until + num days defines the end of the range, where the
variable num is a number of days after the Odate (original scheduling date) of the job.
Valid values for num are any number from 1 through 120.
Defining a From + num days value makes the job eligible for submission anytime
after num days following the Odate.
Defining an Until + num days value makes num days after the Odate the last date on
which the job is eligible for submission.
If values are set for the From + num days subparameter, or the Until + num days
subparameter, or both, but no value is set for the related Time From or Time Until
parameters, CONTROL-M uses the New Day time on the relevant day as the default.
For more information on the use of this subparameter, see the information and
examples below.
Chapter 4
189
General information
CONTROL-M submits the job only during the time range defined in the Time
parameter. The job is only submitted from (but not before) the time specified by the
From parameter time and before the Until time.
CONTROL-M ignores seconds when determining the time range. For example, a job
with a time range of 20:00 to 21:00 could be submitted at 21:00:58.
If you do not set a value for either the From parameter or Until parameter, the default
is the New Day time (the start time of the new work day) as specified in
CONTROL-M system parameters.
NOTE
Operation of CONTROL-M is suspended while the New Day procedure in running. If a job is
limited by the From and Until parameters to the time that the New Day procedure is running,
the job is never ordered.
If the From field contains a valid time value, you can enter a > character in the Until
field. This character is used to indicate that once the From time has passed, if
CONTROL-M has not yet submitted the job by New Day time, it should try to submit
the job as soon as possible after the New Day procedure is run (without waiting for
the From time to arrive again). CONTROL-M continues to ignore the From time either
until the job is submitted or until the Max Wait period expires.
If identical values are specified for the From and Until parameters, the job is
scheduled immediately (regardless of the specified time value). For example, if the
value of From is 0900 and that of Until is 0900, and the job is ordered at 0700, the job is
submitted for execution at 0700.
Batch jobs are frequently scheduled for submission overnight. Therefore, if the times
set for the From and Until parameters in a job are such that the New Day procedure
processing time intervenes between these times, CONTROL-M treats the job as
eligible for submission during both the following periods:
between the From time and the New Day procedure processing time
between the New Day procedure processing time and the Until time
You can set a value for num in From + num days without setting a value for num in
Until + num days. The effect is that the job cannot be executed before the date and time
specified in the From fields, but can be executed at any time on any day thereafter.
Do not set a value for num in Until + num days that is smaller than the value set for
num in From + num days. If you do, the job is never executed.
190

Alternate names for the Time From and Time Until parameters are listed below.
Component
Parameter Name
TIMEFROM, TIMETO
Reporting Facility
FROM TIME, TO TIME
CONTROL-M/Server
-timefrom, -timeuntil
Utilities
CONTROL-M for z/OS
Utilities
TIME FROM, TIME UNTIL
CONTROL-M/EM API
time_from
time_until
Examples
Example 1
Submit the job between 9 A.M. and 6 P.M.
Time From 09:00 +
days
Until 18:00 +
days
Example 2
Submit the job at any time after 6 P.M.
Time From 18:00 +
days
Until >
days
In this example, the job can be submitted at any time after 6 P.M. on the day of
submission. If the job has not yet been submitted when the New Day time at the site
arrives, it is submitted as soon as possible, even at a later date, until the period set by
the MAXWAIT parameter expires.
Example 3
The New Day time at the site is 6:00 A.M. Submit the job after the New Day time, but
no later than 7:30 A.M.
Time From
days
Until 07:30 +
Chapter 4
days
191
In this example, the job can only be submitted between 6:00 A.M. and 7:30 A.M. If the
job is still on the Active Jobs file on the following day, it will again be submitted
between 6:00 A.M. and 7:30 A.M. on that day.
Example 4
The New Day time at the site is 6:00 A.M. Submit the job at any time between
midnight and the New Day time.
Time From 00:00 +
days
Until
days
In this example, the job can only be submitted between midnight and 6:00 A.M.
Example 5
11:00 P.M. and 6:00 A.M.
Time From 23:00 +
days
Until 06:00 +
days
In this example, the job is eligible for submission between 11:00 P.M. and 1:00 A.M.,
and between 1:00 A.M. and 6:00 A.M.
Example 6
The New Day time at the site is 1:00 A.M. and the Odate is September 6. Submit the
job at any time between 11:00 P.M. on September 9, and 6:00 A.M. on the sixth day
after the Odate of the job
Time From 23:00 + 003 days
Until 06:00 + 006 days
Example 7
11:00 P.M. on the third day after the Odate of the job, and the New Day time on the
sixth day after the Odate of the job
Time From 23:00 + 003 days
Until
+ 006 days
In this example, the job is eligible for submission between 11:00 P.M. on the third day
after the Odate of the job and 1:00 A.M. on the sixth day after the Odate of the job.
192
Example 8
11:00 P.M. on the third day after the Odate of the job, and 1:00 A.M. on the sixth day
Time From
+ 003 days
Until 06:00 + 006 days
In this example, the job is eligible for submission between 1:00 A.M. on the third day
after the Odate of the job and 6:00 A.M. on the sixth day after the Odate of the job.
Example 9
1:00 A.M. on the third day after the Odate of the job, and 1:00 A.M. on the sixth day
Time From
+ 003 days
Until
+ 006 days
In this example, the job is eligible for submission at any time between 1:00 A.M. on
the third day after the Odate of the job and 1 A.M. at the end of the sixth working day
after the Odate of the job.
Example 10
The New Day time at the site is 8:00 A.M., and the Time synonym option in Tools/Options
is checked. Submit the job at any time from one hour after the start of the New Day
until one hour before the next New Day.
Time From 09:00 +
days
Until 31:00 +
days
In this example, the job is eligible for submission between 9:00 A.M. until 7:00 A.M.
the next morning. Because the Time Synonym option is checked, 7:00 A.M. the next
morning is indicated as the sum of (24:00 + 7:00) = 31:00.
Chapter 4
193
Units
Units
Specifies a unit of time for the numerical value indicated by the Interval parameter.
Format
Usage
Mandatory when a value is specified for the Interval parameter
Format
List box
Valid values:
Minutes (Default)
Hours
Days
Invalid
Characters
AutoEdit
Support

Related parameters
Cyclic
Values must be specified for the Interval and Units parameters when a job
is cyclic.
Interval
A value must be specified for Units when Interval is specified.
General information
The Units parameter indicates the unit of measure in which the numerical value of
the Interval parameter is expressed.
This parameter is used together with the Interval parameter.

Alternate names for the Units parameter are listed below.
Component
Parameter Name
CONTROL-M/Server
Utilities
The Units value is contained in the -interval parameter.

Alternate formats for the Units parameter are listed below.
194
Units
Component
Parameter Name
CONTROL-M/Server
Utilities
Valid values:
d - Days
h - Hours
m - Minutes (Default)
Format: <interval_amount><unit>
Example for 24 hours: 24h
Chapter 4
195
Units
196
Chapter
The parameters in this chapter enable you to create dependencies between jobs in
your network.
Table 8
Conditions parameters
Parameter
Description
In Condition
Prerequisite conditions required for a job to execute.
Out Condition
Prerequisite conditions to be added or deleted after the job

completes with a completion status of OK.
Chapter 5 Condition parameters
197
In Condition
In Condition
Specifies prerequisite conditions that must be satisfied before the job is submitted for
execution.
Format
Usage
Optional
Format
The In Condition parameter is composed of the Name, Date, and

And/Or subparameters. These subparameters are described below.
AutoEdit Support
Yes. AutoEdit system variables (but not other types of AutoEdit

variables) can be specified as the entire value for this parameter.
Subparameters
Parameter
Description
Name
Name of the In Condition.

Note: Beginning with version 6.1.03, the square bracket characters [ and
] can be used in Condition names.
Length
Condition names for CONTROL-M versions prior

to 6.0.01 can be from 1 through 20 characters.
Condition names for CONTROL-M version 6.0.0x
can be from 1 through 39 characters.
Condition names for CONTROL-M version 6.1.0.x
can be from 1 through 255 characters. (z/OS: Not
more than 39 characters)
Note: Conditions with long names are not passed to
earlier versions of CONTROL-M.
Case sensitive
Yes.
However, if the Uppercase Only check box was
selected in the Add CONTROL-M Definition
window, you cannot use lowercase characters.
Invalid
Characters
Computers other than z/OS: Blanks; single quotation

marks; ) and ( (parentheses); | (pipe)
z/OS: Blanks; ) and ( (parentheses); | (pipe)
198
In Condition
Parameter
Description
Date
A 4-character date reference associated with the condition.

date
A 4-digit date reference in the format mmdd or

ddmm, depends on the site standard.
offset
For CONTROL-M for z/OS as from version 6.2.00

only:
+ or - followed by a number from 0 through 999,
indicating the number of days in the future (+), or in
the past (-), relative to the actual order date.
ODAT
Variable that is automatically replaced by the jobs

original scheduling date (that is, the date on which
the job was ordered).
Note: Beginning with version 6.1.03 of
CONTROL-M/EM and CONTROL-M/Server, ODAT
can also be specified when modifying details of a job
in the Active Jobs file.
PREV

previous scheduling date.
Note: PREV cannot be specified when modifying
details of a job in the Active Jobs file.
**** (or $$$$)
Any scheduling date. The Condition parameter is

satisfied if any prerequisite condition with the same
name exists, regardless of its associated date.
STAT
Condition is not date-dependent.

Note: This value is valid only for
CONTROL-M/Server version 6.0.01 and later or for
CONTROL-M for z/OS.
And/Or
List box, used to specify the logical relationship between In Conditions.

If more than one Condition parameter is specified, an And/Or
parameter must be specified for each Condition parameter.
Parentheses
Parentheses are used to isolate groups of In Conditions in a longer list

of conditions to indicate logical relationships that are resolved before
the entire condition statement is resolved. For more information, see
Logical relationships between conditions on page 200.
Notes: Pairs of parentheses cannot be nested.
blank
Indicates no special relationship between the current

and following condition.
Beginning of a comparison between successive

conditions.
End of a comparison between successive conditions.
A(
Indicates a logical AND between two IN conditions.
O(
Indicates a logical OR between two IN conditions.
199
In Condition
General information
The In Conditions parameter makes the submission of the job dependent on the
existence of one or more prerequisite conditions.
NOTE
A maximum of 99 prerequisite conditions can be specified for the In Condition parameter.
Logical relationships between conditions

The logical relationship (And/Or) used when two or more prerequisite conditions
are specified determines whether all or only some of the prerequisite conditions must
exist in order for the job to be submitted.
Expressions in parentheses are resolved first.

Pairs of parentheses cannot be nested.
AND operations are resolved prior to the resolution of OR operations.
AND conditions do not need to be grouped together before OR conditions.
For a detailed explanation of prerequisite conditions, see Out Condition on

page 206.
Time stamp
Inserting the @HHMMSS code into an In condition name includes a time stamp (in
hours, minutes, and seconds) that is resolved to the time that the job is entered in the
Active Jobs file.
Future and past dates

You can use the Days Offset field to set a future or past date for an In condition. Valid
values for this field are a + (plus) or - (minus) sign, followed by a number from 0
through 999. The value in the field represents the number of days in the future, or in
the past, relative to the actual order date.
200
In Condition

Alternate names for the In Condition parameter are listed below.
Component
Parameter name
INCOND
Reporting Facility
CONDITION
CONTROL-M/Server
Utilities
-incond
CONTROL-M/EM API
in_condition
CONTROL-M for z/OS
IN

Alternate formats for the In Condition parameter are listed below.
Component
Format
CONTROL-M/EM
Utilities
INCOND is composed of the NAME. ODATE, AND_OR, and

OP subparameters. The OP value is a right or left parenthesis.
Used to isolate portions of the In condition expression.
CONTROL-M/EM
Utilities continued
Example
<INCOND NAME=Cond1 ODATE=ODAT
AND_OR=AND OP=)>
Reporting Facility
Condition name.
CONTROL-M for z/OS
Each specified prerequisite condition consists of the mandatory

cond_name and dateref subparameters.
Example 1: Schedule a job that depends on the successful

completion of another job
Schedule JOB_B to execute after the successful completion of JOB_A (regardless on
what day JOB_A was run):
Job Name
Out Conditions
Job Name
In Conditions
JOB_A
JOB_A_OK
JOB_B
JOB_A_OK
Date
ODAT
Date
****
If JOB_A completes with a termination status of OK, prerequisite condition

JOB_A_OK is created (with JOB_As original scheduling date). JOB_B, that is waiting
for prerequisite condition JOB_A_OK, is submitted for execution as soon as the
prerequisite condition is created.
201
In Condition
Example 2: Daily jobs

JOB_A and JOB_B are daily jobs. JOB_B should be submitted only after the successful
completion of JOB_A. JOB_B must not be mistakenly submitted based on the
successful completion of JOB_A from a previous day.
Job Name
Out Conditions
Job Name
In Conditions
JOB_A
JOB_A_OK Date ODAT
JOB_B
JOB_A_OK
Date
ODAT
Assuming that the scheduling date is May 5:

If JOB_A completes with a termination status of OK, prerequisite condition
JOB_A_OK is created (with the date 0505). JOB_B, that is waiting for prerequisite
condition JOB_A_OK with date 0505, is submitted for execution as soon as the
prerequisite condition is created.
The In Conditions parameter of JOB_B is not satisfied by the JOB_A_OK condition
with a date of 0504 (created the previous day).
Example 3: Schedule a job that depends on the completion

of multiple jobs
Schedule the job that produces the salary statistics report for top management after
the set of jobs that calculates the salaries ends OK:
Mem Name EBDRPT1A
Days 01,15
In Conditions SALARY-OK
When the set of jobs that calculates the salaries ends OK, it creates prerequisite
condition SALARY-OK.
The report is produced twice a month, for the 1st and for the 15th. The report for the
15th is produced only if its prerequisite condition SALARY-OK exists (signifying that
the 15ths salary job ended OK). The existence of the prerequisite condition for the 1st
SALARY-OK does not enable the submission of the report for the 15th.
202
In Condition
The report for the 1st does not necessarily run on the 1st of the month. Suppose the
salary jobs only finish executing on the 3rd; only then is the prerequisite condition
SALARY-OK for the 1st created. This is because the prerequisite condition is always
associated with a scheduling date, and not with the actual running date. Therefore, a
date reference should be added to the condition:
Mem Name EBDRPT1A
Days 01,15
In Conditions SALARY-OK
Date ODAT
Example 4: Job scheduling that depends on previous job

runs and a generic date reference
Consider a similar example: a monthly total report must be produced based on data
from the last two runs. Also, the job must run when communication channels to a
remote site are active:
Days 01,15
Retro Y
Max Wait 06
In Conditions SALARY-OK Date: ODAT And/Or: A
SALARY-OK Date: PREV And/Or: A
COMM-ACTIVE Date: **** And/Or: A
The job is submitted only if the jobs for the 1st and the 15th have finished.
Prerequisite condition COMM-ACTIVE is based on a generic date reference that
exists only when communication is active.
The communication process itself can be monitored by CONTROL-M. When
communication is not active, CONTROL-M deletes prerequisite condition COMMACTIVE, preventing abends of jobs that depend on active communication.
Example 5: Maintain order of job runs

Assume a group of jobs runs every day of the week, except Saturday and Sunday. It is
very important that some of the jobs scheduled for the various days of the week do
not run in parallel. The order of these jobs must be maintained even in cases of
delays:
Week Days 2,3,4,5,6
Retro Y
Max Wait 8
In Conditions DEPOSITS Date: PREV
203
In Condition
The job is submitted only if the prerequisite condition DEPOSITS of the previous
scheduling date exists. The prerequisite condition DEPOSITS is created only after the
group of jobs called DEPOSITS finishes.
Example 6: Job scheduling that depends on site conditions

Suppose a Database master data set exists, and that it is accessed by many programs.
Unfortunately, the contents of the Database are often destroyed or damaged because
of bugs in old programs. When, and if, it is discovered that the contents of the
Database are corrupted, submission of all the jobs that access the file must be
prevented:
Dates 0201, 0403, 1101
Retro Y
Max Wait 06
In Conditions MASTER-FILE-OK Date: ****
It has been discovered that the Database contents are indeed bad. At this point,
prerequisite condition MASTER-FILE-OK must be deleted, either manually from
CONTROL-M/EM, or automatically by the job or process that made the discovery.
When the Database is restored to its normal state, the prerequisite condition is added
again and execution proceeds as planned.
Example 7: Job scheduling when a failure has occurred

A detached process, LOGCLOSE, is to begin whenever a certain communication
process crashes because of a boot operation, or as a result of an operators
cancellation:
Retro Y
Max Wait 0
In Conditions COMM-CANCELED Date: ****
The detached process LOGCLOSE starts executing whenever prerequisite condition

COMM-CANCELED is active. The prerequisite condition is added by CONTROL-M
when the communication process is canceled by an operator or after a computer
crash.
204
In Condition
Example 8: Date reference

The following example provides a further explanation of the concept of the
scheduling date reference:
Mem Name EBDRPT6D
Days 01,15,20
Months 1-N 2-N 3-N 4-N 5-N 6-N 7-Y 8-N 9-Y 10-N 11-N 12-N
In Conditions EBD-REPORTS-READY Date: ****
Today is the 15th of September. The date reference values resolved in this job are
written in mmdd date format:
ODAT 0915
PREV 0901
**** Any date reference
Example 9: Condition including terms isolated with

parentheses
ctmcreate -tasktype command -cmdline ls -jobname cond_600 -incond
cond_21 ODAT AND -incond '('cond_22 ODAT OR -incond cond_23')' ODAT
AND -incond cond_24 ODAT OR
Example 10: Out condition name including a time stamp

ctmdefine -tasktype command -cmdline date -application app -group grp
-table time_cond -days ALL -month ALL Y -outcond a@HHMMSS ODAT ADD
-jobname counter -memname counter
The resulting Out condition statement:

*CONDITION a101028
0113 ADDED
205
Out Condition
Out Condition
Specifies prerequisite conditions to be added or deleted after the job completes with a
completion status of OK.
Format
Usage
Optional
Format
The Out Condition parameter is composed of the Name, Date, and

Sign subparameters. These subparameters are described below.
AutoEdit Support
Yes. AutoEdit system variables (but not other types of AutoEdit

variables) can be specified as the entire value for this parameter.
Subparameters
Parameter
Description
Name
Name of the Out Condition.

Note: Beginning with version 6.1.03, the square bracket characters [ and ]
can be used in Condition names.
Length
Condition names for CONTROL-M versions prior to

6.0.01 can be from 1 through 20 characters.
Condition names for CONTROL-M version 6.0.0x can

be from 1through 39 characters.
Condition names for CONTROL-M version 6.1.0.x

can be from 1 through 255 characters. (z/OS: Not
more than 39 characters)
Note: Conditions with long names are not passed to

earlier versions of CONTROL-M.
Case sensitive Yes.
However, if the Uppercase Only check box was selected
in the Add CONTROL-M Definition window, you cannot
use lowercase characters.
Invalid
Characters

206
Out Condition
Parameter
Description
Date
A four-character date reference associated with the condition.

date
A 4-digit date reference in the mmdd or ddmm format,

depending on the site standard.
offset
For CONTROL-M for z/OS from version 6.2.00:

+ or - followed by a number from 0 through 999,
indicating the number of days in the future (+), or in the
past (-), relative to the actual order date.
ODAT.

original scheduling date (that is, the date on which the
job was ordered).
Note: Beginning with version 6.1.03 of
CONTROL-M/EM and CONTROL-M/Server, ODAT
can also be specified when modifying details of a job in
the Active Jobs file.
PREV

previous scheduling date.
Note: PREV cannot be specified when modifying details
of a job in the Active Jobs file.
NEXT
Variable that is automatically replaced by the jobs next

scheduling date.
Note: NEXT cannot be specified when modifying details
of a job in the Active Jobs file.
**** (or $$$$)
Any scheduling date. The Condition parameter is

satisfied if any prerequisite condition with the same
name exists, regardless of its associated date.
STAT
Condition is not date-dependent.

Note: This value is valid only for CONTROL-M/Server
version 6.0.01 and later or for CONTROL-M for z/OS.
Sign
Indicates whether the specified condition is to be added (created) or

deleted.
+ Adds (creates) the prerequisite condition. Default.
Deletes the prerequisite condition.
If the value of ODAT is $$$$ or ****, + cannot be selected.
General information
The In Conditions parameter makes the submission of the job dependent on the
existence of one or more prerequisite conditions.
NOTE
A maximum of 99 prerequisite conditions can be specified for the Out Conditions parameter.
207
Out Condition
If the job completion status is OK, then, according to the option specified, the
prerequisite conditions are added to or deleted from the Conditions/Resources
table.The Out Conditions parameter is performed before the Do Cond parameter.
Therefore, the Out Conditions parameter can be overridden by those of the Do Cond
parameter. For examples, see Do Cond on page 227.
Prerequisite conditions
A prerequisite condition is a user-defined entity whose existence can be tested to
determine whether a job should be submitted for execution.
You can specify that a prerequisite condition be added (that is, created) or deleted as
part of the post-processing treatment of a job (using the Out Condition parameter and
the Do Cond parameter). A prerequisite condition can also be added or deleted
manually by the operator using the Prerequisite Conditions window.
Prerequisite conditions are used to define and implement job execution
dependencies. A job containing an In Condition definition is not submitted for
execution unless the specified In conditions exist. This permits job-to-job
dependencies or job dependencies based on successful completion of a manual task
(such as a file creation or a restore operation).
When created, each prerequisite condition is associated with a specific date. A date is
also specified when testing for the existence of a prerequisite condition. Thus, the
submission of a job can be made contingent upon the existence of a prerequisite
condition created on a specific date. This enables you to specify jobs, for example, that
depend on conditions created on the same day and that ignore conditions created on
previous days.
A prerequisite condition can represent any user-specified situation. The following
represent the kind of self-explanatory conditions for which a job may need to test:
JOB-EJGH12-FINISHED
SALARY-INPUT-READY
CHECKS-PUNCHED
WEEKEND
COMM-ACTIVE
Time stamp
Inserting the @HHMMSS code into an Out condition name includes a time stamp (in
hours, minutes, and seconds) that is resolved to the time that the job is entered in the
Active Jobs file.
208
Out Condition
Future and past dates

You can use the Days Offset field to set a future or past date for an Out condition.
Valid values for this field are a + (plus) or - (minus) sign, followed by a number
from 0 through 999. The value in the field represents the number of days in the
future, or in the past, relative to the actual order date.

Alternate names for the Out Condition parameter are listed below.
Component
Parameter Name
OUTCOND
Reporting Facility
CONDITION
CONTROL-M/Server
-outcond
Utilities
CONTROL-M for z/OS
OUT
Utilities
CONTROL-M/EM API
out_condition
Examples
For examples of prerequisite conditions, see In Condition on page 198.
209
Out Condition
210
Chapter
Resource parameters
The parameters in this chapter specify the resources that must be available before a
job can be run.
Table 9
Resource parameters
Parameter
Description
Control Resources
List of resources and type of usage (exclusive or shared)

required.
List of Quantitative resources required by the job, and the

quantity of each resource.
Chapter 6 Resource parameters
211
Control Resources
Control Resources
Indicates the resources required by the job during execution and the type of control
(shared or exclusive) the job requires over each resource.
Format
Optional
Usage
Note: A maximum of 99 Control Resources can be specified for a job.

Length
1-64 characters
Case Sensitive
Yes.
However, if the Uppercase Only check box was selected in the Add
CONTROL-M Definition window, you cannot use lowercase
characters.
Invalid Characters
Blanks

AutoEdit Support
Subparameters
Name
Name of the Control resource.

The following special suffixes can be appended to the specified resource
name:
$ represents any single character.

For example, TAPE$ can represent TAPE1 or TAPE2.
However, if the job requires two TAPE$ units, it can only use two TAPE1
units or two TAPE2 units, not one of each. (The $ can only assume value
1 or 2 for the job; it cannot represent both.)
@ identifies a Quantitative resource used for load balancing.
Length
From 1 through 64 characters
Case Sensitive
Yes.
Invalid Characters
212
Control Resources
Control
Valid values are:
On Fail
Shared
Exclusive
Whether to keep a Control resource tied to a job if the job does not end OK.
Valid values are:
Keep The resource is kept tied to the job until one of the following
occurs:
the job ends OK
the job is deleted
the job is forced OK
Release The resource is not kept tied to the job. This is the default.
General information
The Control resource parameter is used to control parallel execution of jobs.
Control resources are defined using the CONTROL-M/EM Control Resources
window.
If a job requires exclusive use of a Control resource, only that job can use the Control
resource. If another job requests the same resource in exclusive or shared state, this
second job is not submitted by CONTROL-M until the resource is released by the first
job.
If a job requires a Control resource in shared state, that job can run in parallel with
other jobs that request the same resource in shared state.
Aliases for other CONTROL-M components

Alternate names for the Control Resource parameter are listed below.
Component
Parameter Name
CONTROL
Reporting Facility
RESOURCE
CONTROL-M/Server
-control
CONTROL-M for z/OS
CONTROL
CONTROL-M/EM API
control_resource
213
Control Resources

Alternate format Approved.s for the Control Resource parameter are listed below.
Component
Format
Reporting Facility The Control Resource parameter is composed of the subparameters

below.
RESOURCE
Name of the resource. String.
TYPE
Type of Control resource:

E - Exclusively owned by a job
S - Shared by any number of jobs
Example 1: Scheduling a job using an exclusive resource

Job R1 (which reorganizes a disk) cannot run in parallel with job B1 (which backs up
the same disk) or job B2 (which reads data from the disk). Jobs B1 and B2 do not
interfere with each other and can be executed in parallel.
Job R1 is defined as follows:
Mem Name = R1
Control Resources: VS01 = E
Job B1 is defined as follows:

Mem Name: B1
Control Resources: VS01 = S
Job B2 is defined as follows:

Mem Name: B2
Control Resources = VS01 = S
Jobs B1 and B2 can run simultaneously since they both use resource VS01 in shared
mode. Job R1 requests VS01 for exclusive use and therefore cannot run in parallel
with either job B1 or B2.
If either job B1 or B2 is running, CONTROL-M does not submit job R1.

If job R1 is running CONTROL-M does not submit job B1 or B2.
CONTROL-M submits job B1 if job B2 is running, and vice-versa.
214
Indicates the name and quantity of Quantitative resources required by the job.
Format
Usage
Optional.
Format
Each Quantitative resource is specified using the mandatory

subparameters described below.
Case Sensitive
Yes.
However, if the Uppercase Only check box was selected in the Add
CONTROL-M Definition window, you cannot use lowercase characters.
Invalid
Characters
Blanks
Yes. AutoEdit system variables (but not other types of AutoEdit variables)
can be specified as the entire value for this parameter.
AutoEdit
Support
Subparameters
Name
Name of the Quantitative resource.

The following special suffixes can be appended to the specified resource
name:
$ represents any single character.

For example, TAPE$ can represent TAPE1 or TAPE2.
However, if the job requires two TAPE$ units, it can only use two TAPE1
units or two TAPE2 units, not one of each. (The $ can only assume value
1 or 2 for the job; it cannot represent both.)
@ identifies a Quantitative resource used for load balancing.
Length
From 1 through 64 characters
Case Sensitive
Yes.
Invalid Characters
Quantity
Amount of the resource that is required. Valid values for this field are from 1
through 9999.
215
On Fail
Whether to keep a Quantitative resource tied to a job if the job does not
end OK. Valid values are:
On OK
Keep the resource is kept tied to the job until one of the following
occurs:
the job ends OK
the job is deleted
the job is forced OK
Release the resource is not kept tied to the job. This is the default.
Whether to keep a Quantitative resource tied to a job if the job ends OK.
Valid values are:
Release The resource is not kept, and is returned to the total quantity
available for other jobs. This is the default.
Discard The resource is not reusable, meaning that the quantity of the
resource is permanently removed from the total quantity available for
other jobs.
General information
When a Quantitative resource is specified for a job, CONTROL-M determines
whether a sufficient quantity of the specified resource is available before submitting
the job. When the job is submitted, the specified quantity of resource is assigned to
that job and is not available to other jobs. When the job finishes executing, the
resource is made available to other jobs.
NOTE
A maximum of 99 Quantitative resources can be specified for a job.
The Quantitative Resources parameter is used to control the use of Quantitative

resources in the installation (for example, tape drives, CPU utilization).
For load balancing, Quantitative resources are used to specify the resources that must
be available on the agent computer selected by CONTROL-M to execute the job.
NOTE
Load balancing is available for certain computers with CONTROL-M version 2.2x or later.
216

Alternate names for the Quantitative Resource parameter are listed below.
Component
Parameter Name
QUANTITATIVE
Reporting Facility
RESOURCE
CONTROL-M/Server
-quantitative
CONTROL-M for z/OS
RESOURCE
CONTROL-M/EM API
quantitative_resource
Example 1: Specifying two tape drives

A CONTROL-M installation has 10 tape drives available for production. A job that
requires the use of two tape drives is defined with a Quantitative Resources
parameter specifying the number of tape drives required:
TAPE
CONTROL-M determines whether two tape drives are available. If the drives are
available, and all other submission criteria for the job have been satisfied, the tape
drives are allocated to the job, and the job is submitted for execution. The total
number of free tape drives is now eight. When the job finishes executing, the two tape
drives are returned to the pool of available resources.
Example 2: Quantitative resource requirement that cannot

be fulfilled
Given the following situation:
Several jobs that require tape drives are currently executing.

Only one tape drive is currently available.
Job A requires two tape drives and contains the following parameter (all other
submission criteria for the job have been satisfied):
Quantitative Resources TAPE
As long as two tape drives are not available, Job A is not submitted for execution.
If another tape drive is released by a different job, or if an authorized user increases
the number of existing tape drives so that two are available, CONTROL-M submits
the job for execution.
217
Example 3: Defining a quantitative resource with a mask

character
A CONTROL-M installation is defined as having the following Quantitative
resources: three units of TAPE1 and three units of TAPE2. A job requiring three tape
drives contains the following parameter:
Quantitative Resources TAPE$
The job is submitted for execution when three units of the same type are available
(that is, either three units of TAPE1 or three units of TAPE2) since the mask character
$ can only represent a single value for a given job.
Example 4: Defining multiple quantitative resources with

mask characters
A job requires two tape drives and a printer:
Quantitative Resources TAPE$
2 PRINT$
Two units of TAPE1 and one unit of PRINT2 are available. However, the job is not
submitted until a unit of PRINT1 becomes available since the mask character $ can
only represent a single value for a given job. In this instance, $ represents the
number 1.
Example 5: Load balancing

A job to be submitted by the load-balancing mechanism requires 10 units of the
Quantitative resource CPU:
Quantitative Resources CPU@
10
The job is submitted to an agent computer possessing at least 10 available units of the
specified resource.
218
Chapter
Post-Processing parameters are used to describe:
Actions to be performed if the job is not submitted.

Actions to be performed after the job has finished executing.
Handling of the jobs log (SYSOUT).
Notification messages to various users.
Rerun conditions.
Based on the jobs execution status codes, CONTROL-M automatically assigns a

completion status:
Table 10
Job statuses
Status
Description
OK
Job ended OK. The job finished executing with a successful operating system
completion status. This status can be overridden with the Do NOTOK
parameter (as a result of an On Statement/Code evaluation).
NOTOK
Job did not end OK. The job finished executing with an unsuccessful
operating system completion status or due to a submission failure (for
example, queue does not exist). This status can be overridden with the Do OK
parameter (as a result of an On Statement/Code evaluation).
For group scheduling tables:

Steps parameters can also be defined for group scheduling tables.
Actions to be performed if a group finished OK are performed only if all the jobs in
the group finished OK.
Actions to be performed if a group finished NOTOK are performed only if one or

more jobs in the group finished NOTOK.
Chapter 7 Post-processing parameters
219
Post-processing of a group occurs when the last job in the group ends. A group may
become active again after the post-processing has been completed, if one or more jobs
are rerun, or if a new job is added to the group and submitted. In this case, when the
last job in the group ends again, the completion status of the group is rechecked and
the appropriate post-processing actions are performed.
For more information about group scheduling tables, see the CONTROL-M User
Guide.
Table 11
220
Parameter
Description
CTB Step
Adds CONTROL-M/Analyzer steps as the first and/or last step of the

jobs execution.
Do AutoEdit
Assigns a value to an AutoEdit variable.
Do Cond
Specifies prerequisite conditions to be added or deleted.
Do CTBRule
Invokes a CONTROL-M/Analyzer rule to be executed during the

processing of a specific program step.
Do Forcejob
Forces a job or all jobs in a scheduling table to be ordered under

CONTROL-M regardless of the scheduling criteria.
Do If Rerun
Job steps to be executed during restart of a job. Available only at sites

utilizing CONTROL-M/Restart.
Do Mail
Specifies a message to be sent to one or more email addresses.
Do NOTOK
Sets the jobs completion status to NOTOK regardless of how the job
actually ended.
Do OK
Sets the jobs completion status to OK regardless of how the job actually
ended.
Do Remedy
Opens a ticket in the Remedy Help Desk regarding the critical service.
Do Rerun
Causes the job to be rerun according to the parameters specified in the

Rerun parameter.
Do Shout
Specifies messages to be sent (shouted) to specified destinations on

various occasions.
Do Stop Cyclic
Prevents future iterations of a cyclic job.
Do Sysout
Specifies how the jobs log/output should be handled.
On statement
Job processing step and code event criteria that determine whether the
accompanying DO statements are performed.
Reten Days
Number of days to retain the job in the History Jobs file. [z/OS only]
Reten Gen
Maximum number of generations of the job to keep in the History Jobs file.
[z/OS only]
Step Range
Specifies a range of steps in the steps of an On PGMST statement.
CTB Step
CTB Step
Adds CONTROL-M/Analyzer steps as the first and/or last step of the jobs
execution.
NOTE
For CONTROL-M for z/OS installations in which CONTROL-M/Analyzer is installed.
Format
Usage
Optional
Availability
This parameter is accessed from the CONTROL-M for z/OS interface,

only.
Format
CTB Step is composed of the AT, NAME, TYPE, and ARGUMENTS

subparameters, described below.
Invalid
Characters
AutoEdit
Support

Subparameters
Parameter
Description
AT
Indicates where to place the CONTROL-M/Analyzer step in the job.

Mandatory.
Valid values:
NAME
S (Start) The indicated CONTROL-M/Analyzer step must

become the first step of the job.
E (End) The indicated CONTROL-M/Analyzer step must become

the last step of the job.
Name of the CONTROL-M/Analyzer entity. Must be a valid name of a

CONTROL-M/Analyzer rule or mission. Mandatory.
Length
Case Sensitive
Yes
Invalid Characters
221
CTB Step
Parameter
Description
TYPE
Type of CONTROL-M/Analyzer entity. Mandatory. Valid values:

R (Rule) Entity is a CONTROL-M/Analyzer rule.
M (Mission) Entity is a CONTROL-M/Analyzer mission.
ARGUMENTS
Arguments to be passed to the CONTROL-M/Analyzer step. Optional.

Length
Case Sensitive
Yes
Invalid Characters
General information
A maximum of two CTB STEP statements (that is, one START statement and one
END statement) can be specified.
Multiple arguments must be separated by a comma without a space because they are
automatically passed to the CONTROL-M/Analyzer step as a PARM=<arguments>
parameter in the steps JCL.
CONTROL-M uses the status returned by CONTROL-M/Analyzer as it would use
the return status of any job step.
If CONTROL-M/Analyzer returns a status of OK or TOLER (within accepted

tolerances), CONTROL-M considers the step as having ended OK.
If CONTROL-M/Analyzer returns a status of NOTOK or ABEND, CONTROL-M

considers the job step as having ended NOTOK.

Alternate names for the CTB Step parameter are listed below.
222
Component
Parameter Name
CONTROL-M/EM API
ctb_step
CTB Step
Example: Check results and set a condition

After successfully performing salary calculations, job SACALC01 invokes rule
CHKCALC to ensure that the results are reasonable, and then sets OUT condition
SALARY-OK.
JOB: SACALC01 LIB CTM.PROD.SCHEDULE TABLE: SALARY
+--------------------------------------------------------------------------+
MEMNAME SACALC01 MEMLIB GENERAL
OWNER SYS1 TASKTYPE JOB PREVENT-NCT2 DFLT N
APPL SAL GROUP SALARY
DESC SALARY CALCULATIONS
OVERLIB
SCHENV SYSTEM ID NJE NODE
SET VAR
CTB STEP AT END NAME CHKCALC TYPE RULE
ARGUMENTS %%ODATE
DOCMEM SACALC01 DOCLIB CTM.PROD.DOC
===========================================================================
DAYS 01,15 DCAL
AND/OR
WDAYS WCAL
DATES
CONFCAL SHIFT RETRO Y MAXWAIT 00 D-CAT
MINIMUM PDS
DEFINITION ACTIVE FROM UNTIL
===========================================================================
IN
CONTROL
RESOURCE
PIPE
TIME ZONE:
===========================================================================
OUT SALARY-OK ODAT +
223
Do AutoEdit
Do AutoEdit
The Do AutoEdit variable assigns a value to an AutoEdit variable for use in a rerun of
the job when the On Statement/Code criteria are satisfied.
Format
Usage
Optional
Format
Name and Value text boxes in the CONTROL-M/EM Job Editing form.
Enter the AutoEdit variable name in the Name text box, and the
expression in the Value text box.
Application-specific job parameters may not be specified in AutoEdit
variable values. The names of application-specific job parameters are
prefixed by two percent signs, the applications abbreviation and a
hyphen (%%SAPR3- for SAP, %%OAP- for Oracle, and so on).
Length
Computers other than z/OS:
The AutoEdit variable name Name can be up to 40 characters long

(including the %% prefix).
The AutoEdit expression Value can be up to 214 characters long.
z/OS:
The total length of Do AutoEdit, including the %% prefix, variable-name,
value, and the = sign, must not exceed 55 characters.
Case Sensitive
Yes
Invalid
Characters
Computers other than z/OS: The following characters cannot be included

as part of variable-name in a User-defined AutoEdit variable: < > [ ] { } ( ) =
; ~ | : ? . + - * / & ^ # @ ! , " '.
In value the only invalid characters are embedded blanks. Leading blanks
are valid.
z/OS: Blanks
AutoEdit
Support
224

Do AutoEdit
Subparameters
Parameter
Description
Name
Name of the AutoEdit variable. The %% prefix is entered automatically.

1-38 character string (following the %% prefix).
Value
AutoEdit expression. 1-214 character string.

Application-specific job parameters may not be specified in AutoEdit
variable values. The names of application-specific job parameters are
prefixed by two percent signs, the applications abbreviation and a
hyphen (%%SAPR3- for SAP, %%OAP- for Oracle, and so on).
Related parameters
AutoEdit
AutoEdit Assignment assigns values to a variable for use in the current job
run. Whereas, Do AutoEdit assigns a value to be used in the subsequent
run of the job.
General information
AutoEdit variables are resolved (replaced) at the time a job is submitted.
The Do AutoEdit parameter can be used to assign a value to an AutoEdit variable for
use in a rerun of the job. When a job is rerun, statements specified in Do AutoEdit are
evaluated after statements specified in AutoEdit Assignment.
Unless it is assigned a value in the AutoEdit Assignment parameter, an AutoEdit
variable that is assigned a value in a Do AutoEdit parameter does not have any value
during the first submission of the job.

Alternate names for the Do AutoEdit parameter are listed below.
Component
Parameter Name
DOAUTOEDIT
CONTROL-M/Desktop
Do Set var
-doautoedit
CONTROL-M/EM API
do_autoedit
225
Do AutoEdit

Alternate formats for the Do AutoEdit parameter are listed below.
Component
Format
CONTROL-M/EM
Utilities
The value for the DOAUTOEDIT parameter is contained in the EXP

subparameter.
Example
<DOAUTOEDIT EXP=%%PARM1=%%TIME/>
EXP
226
String containing both the variable and the

expression, presented as an equation.
Do Cond
Do Cond
The Do Cond parameter specifies a prerequisite condition to be added or deleted
when the On Statement/Code criteria are satisfied.
Format
Usage
Optional
Format
Each Do Cond parameter consists of three subparameters, described

below.
AutoEdit
Support

Subparameters
Parameter
Description
Condition
Descriptive name of a prerequisite condition.

Length

CONTROL-M for z/OS versions prior to 6.0.00: 1
through 20 characters
Case Sensitive
Yes. However, if the Uppercase Only check box was

selected in the Add CONTROL-M Definition window,
you cannot use lowercase characters.
Invalid
Characters

227
Do Cond
Parameter
Description
Date
Date (four characters long) for the prerequisite condition.
date. Specific date (mmdd or ddmm format).
ODAT. Automatically replaced by the jobs original scheduling date

when the job is ordered.
PREV Automatically replaced by the jobs previous scheduling date

when the job is ordered (or for a forced job, ODAT-1).
NEXT Automatically replaced by the jobs next scheduling date

when the job is ordered (or for a forced job, ODAT+1).
**** (or $$$$) Any condition date. For deleting a prerequisite

condition, only. When specified, all prerequisite conditions with the
specified condition name are deleted, regardless of their dates.
STAT Condition is not date-dependent. Note that this value is valid

only for CONTROL-M/Server version 6.0.01 and later.
Note: PREV and NEXT cannot be specified when modifying details of a

job in the Active Jobs file. A date reference is required for each condition.
However, beginning with version 6.1.03 of CONTROL-M/Server, ODAT
can be specified when modifying details of a job in the Active Jobs file.
Sign
A pair of option buttons that indicate if the condition should be added

(created) or deleted.
+ Adds (creates) the condition

Deletes the condition
If the value of ODAT is $$$$ or ****, + cannot be selected.
General information
The Do Cond parameter is optional. However, each Condition parameter specified
must have a Date reference and a Sign specification.
When the criteria specified in the On Statement/Condition parameter are satisfied,
the designated prerequisite condition(s) are added or deleted from the CONTROL-M
Conditions List.
If parameters Do Cond and Out Conditions perform opposing actions on the same
prerequisite condition and date, the Do Cond parameter overrides the Out
Conditions parameter.
For more information on the Out Conditions parameter, see Out Condition on
page 206.
228
Do Cond
NOTE
A maximum of 99 prerequisite conditions can be specified for the Do Cond parameter.

Alternate names for the Do Cond parameter are listed below.
Component
Parameter Name
DOCOND
-docond
Reporting Facility
Parameter not included.
CONTROL-M for z/OS
DO COND
CONTROL-M/EM API
do_cond

Alternate formats for the Do Condition parameter are listed below.
Component
Format
CONTROL-M/EM
Utilities
DOCOND contains the following subparameters:

NAME
Name of the condition. String.
ODATE
Date (four characters long) for the prerequisite

condition. String. Default: ODAT.
SIGN
Valid values:
ADD (Default)
DEL
229
Do CTBRule
Do CTBRule
Invokes a CONTROL-M/Analyzer rule to be executed during the processing of a
specific program step.
NOTE
This parameter is available only for CONTROL-M for z/OS jobs at sites using
CONTROL-M/Analyzer.
Format
Usage
Format
Optional
AutoEdit
Support
CONTROL-M/EM Job Editing form: Select CTBRule from the Do list

box. Specify values in the Name and Arg fields.
CONTROL-M: Type CTBRULE in the DO field and press Enter.

Subparameters
Parameter
Description
name
Text box.
Name of the CONTROL-M/Analyzer rule that is to be executed. The
CONTROL-M/Analyzer rule contains all balancing specifications to be
performed. Mandatory.
Length
Case Sensitive Yes

Invalid
Characters
ARG
Text box.
Arguments that are passed to the CONTROL-M/Analyzer rule. Separate
multiple arguments by commas. Optional.
Length
Case Sensitive Yes

Invalid
Characters
230
Do CTBRule
General information
When Do CTBRule is specified, balancing is performed by the CONTROLM/Analyzer Runtime environment according to the specified rule definition and
using the specified arguments. The CONTROL-M/Analyzer Runtime environment is
invoked once for each Do CTBRule statement in the job scheduling definition.
NOTE
If DO CTBRULE is specified under ON PGMST ANYSTEP, the CONTROL-M/Analyzer
Runtime environment is invoked only once.
When CONTROL-M calls a CONTROL-M/Analyzer rule, CONTROL-M/Analyzer

System variable SYSOPT contains the value CTMWORK. This variable can then be
tested within the CONTROL-M/Analyzer rule definition to determine if CONTROLM invoked the CONTROL-M/Analyzer Runtime environment.
When the CONTROL-M/Analyzer Runtime environment is invoked by
CONTROL-M, that is, CONTROL-M/Analyzer System variable SYSOPT is set to
CTMWORK, CONTROL-M/Analyzer can analyze and balance SYSDATA. For more
information about invoking CONTROL-M/Analyzer rules from CONTROL-M job
scheduling definitions, see the discussion of the interface to CONTROL-M in the
CONTROL-M/Analyzer User Guide.

Alternate names for the Do CTBRule parameter are listed below.
Component
Parameter Name
DOCTBRULE
Reporting Facility
CONTROL-M for z/OS
DO CTBRULE
CONTROL-M/EM API
do_ctbrule
231
Do CTBRule

Alternate formats for the Do CTBRule parameter are listed below.
Component
Format
CONTROL-M/EM
Utilities
DOCTBRULE contains the following subparameters.

NAME
Name of the CONTROL-M/Analyzer rule

that is to be executed.
PAR
Arguments.
Example: Execute a CONTROL-M/Analyzer rule when a job

ends OK
If the job ends OK, execute CONTROL-M/Analyzer balancing rule GOVTBAL.
JOB: GOVTREPT LIB CTM.PROD.SCHEDULE TABLE: BACKUP
+--------------------------------------------------------------------------+
TIME ZONE:
===========================================================================
OUT FINANCE-GOVTREPT-OK ODAT +
AUTO-ARCHIVE Y SYSDB Y MAXDAYS MAXRUNS
RETENTION: # OF DAYS TO KEEP 030 # OF GENERATIONS TO KEEP
SYSOUT OP (C,D,F,N,R) FROM
MAXRERUN RERUNMEM INTERVAL FROM
STEP RANGE FR (PGM.PROC) . TO .
ON PGMST ANYSTEP PROCST CODES OK A/O
DO CTBRULE = GOVTBAL ARG DOREPORT,10,%%ODATE
DO
ON PGMST PROCST CODES A/O
DO
SHOUT WHEN NOTOK TO TSO-M44 URGN R
MS JOB GOVTREPT ENDED "NOT OK"
SHOUT WHEN TO URGN
MS
======= >>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>> END OF SCHEDULING PARAMETERS <<<<<<<<<<<<<<< ======
232
Do Forcejob
Do Forcejob
The Do Forcejob parameter forces an individual job or all jobs in a scheduling table to
be placed in the Active Jobs file (regardless of each jobs Scheduling criteria) when the
On Statement/Code criteria are satisfied.
Format
Usage
Optional
Format
In the CONTROL-M/EM Job Editing form:

Select Force-job from the Do list box. The SCD Table, Job Name, and Date
text boxes are displayed.
Enter the subparameter values in these text boxes.
These subparameters are described below.
AutoEdit
Support

Subparameters
Parameter
Description
SCD Table
Name of the job scheduling table
Job Name
Length
Invalid
Characters

OS/900: Non-English characters
Job name. If this field is blank, all jobs in the specified table are forced.
Length
Invalid
Characters
Computers other than z/OS: 1 through 20

characters.
z/OS: 1 through 8 characters.
Blanks (embedded); single quotation marks
233
Do Forcejob
Parameter
Description
Date
Value to be used as the original scheduling date for the job. Valid values
are:
ODAT
Resolves to the original scheduling date of the job

resulting in the execution of this parameter (default).
Note: As of CONTROL-M/Server version 6.1.03, ODAT
can also be specified when modifying details of a job in
the Active Jobs file.
date
A date reference, 4 or 6 characters long (either mmdd,

ddmm, yymmdd, or yyddmm format, depending on
the site standard).
z/OS: Only the yymmdd or yyddmm format can be
used
General information
Do Forcejob causes the specified job to be placed immediately in the Active Jobs file.
The job is submitted for execution as soon as all its submission criteria are satisfied.
NOTE
When Do Forcejob forces a job that belongs to a group, it treats it as a regular job and forces it
alone (that is, without a Group Entity).

Alternate names for the Do Forcejob parameter are listed below.
Component
Parameter Name
DOFORCEJOB
CONTROL-M/Server
-doforcejob
CONTROL-M for z/OS
DO FORCEJOB
CONTROL-M/EM API
do_forcejob

Alternate formats for the Do Forcejob parameter are listed below.
234
Do Forcejob
Component
Format
CONTROL-M/EM
Utilities
DOFORCEJOB consists of the DSN, TABLE_NAME, NAME,

and ODATE subparameters. The value of DSN is the
scheduling table Library name, which must be specified for
z/OS jobs.
Example
<DOFORCEJOB DSN=z/OS.TBL TABLE_NAME=Tbl1
JOB=Job3 ODATE=DATE/>
CONTROL-M for z/OS
DO FORCEJOB consists of the TABLE, NAME, and LIBRARY

subparameters. The value of DSN is the scheduling table
Library name, which must be specified for z/OS jobs.
235
Do If Rerun
Do If Rerun
Job steps to be executed during restart of a job.
NOTE
This parameter is available only if CONTROL-M/Restart is installed on a CONTROL-M for
z/OS site.
Format
Usage
Optional
Format
Select IFRerun from the Do list box in the Job editing form. From and To text
boxes and a Confirm check box are displayed. Enter the required
information. Select the check box, if required.
AutoEdit
Support

Related parameters
236
Parameter
Description
Maximum
Reruns
Determines the maximum number of times the restart or rerun specified

by the Do If Rerun parameter is performed.
Do Remedy
Used to perform the job rerun when Confirm is not selected and a job
rerun is required.
Do If Rerun
Subparameters
Parameter
Description
From
Step at which the job must be restarted. Mandatory.

Valid values:
pgmstep Program step within the job stream.
pgmstep.procstep Program step within the called procedure.
$FIRST First step of the job.
$ABEND Step of the job that ended NOTOK due to system abend,
user abend, condition code C2000 (PL/1 abend) or JFAIL (job failed on
JCL error). $ABEND is a subset of $EXERR (below).
$FIRST.$ABEND First step of the abended procedure.
$FIRST.$CLEANUP This reserved keyword instructs CONTROL-M
to run a CONTROL-M/Restart data set cleanup for the job. Data set
cleanup is performed from the first step of the job. The job itself is not
restarted.
$EXERR Job step that ended with any error, including an abend, or
that ended with a condition code that is redefined using the On and
DO statements as ENDED NOTOK.
Note: For both From and To steps, pgmstep is the name of the step (EXEC
statement) that executes the program from which to begin or end the
restart:
// pgmstep EXEC PGM= program
procstep is the name of the step (EXEC statement) that invokes the
procedure from which the above pgmstep program is executed:
// procstep EXEC procedure
pgmstep and procstep values can each be from 1 through 8 characters,
and must not contain blanks.
When specifying a procstep when the procedures are nested, the
innermost procstep in which the program is included must be specified.
To
Step at which the restarted job must terminate. Optional.

Valid values are:
Note: Non-English characters are invalid for this subparameter.
pgmstep Program step within the job stream
pgmstep. procstep Program step within the called procedure.
If not specified, the restarted job terminates at the last job step that would
normally be executed.
Note: For both From and To steps, pgmstep is the name of the step (EXEC
statement) that executes the program from which to begin or end the
restart:
// pgmstep EXEC PGM= program
procstep is the name of the step (EXEC statement) that invokes the
procedure from which the above pgmstep program is executed:
// procstep EXEC procedure
pgmstep and procstep values can each be from 1 through 8 characters,
and must not contain blanks.
When specifying a procstep when the procedures are nested, the
innermost procstep in which the program is included must be specified.
237
Do If Rerun
Parameter
Description
Confirm
Specifies whether a manual confirmation is required before the job is

restarted.
When the check box in the Job Editing form is clear, no confirmation is
required. The job restart can be automatically submitted (by the Do
Rerun parameter) without a manual confirmation. Default.
When the check box in the Job Editing form is selected, confirmation is
required. The job restart is not submitted unless the job is confirmed
manually from the CONTROL-M/EM flow diagram.
Non-English characters are invalid for this subparameter.
General information
When a Do If Rerun statement is specified, the rerun is performed by the
CONTROL-M/Restart facility using the specified restart subparameters.
When Do If Rerun is specified with a Confirm parameter value of No (Confirm

check box is clear):
If a Do If Rerun statement follows, the job is automatically submitted for rerun.
If a Do If Rerun statement does not follow, the job is not automatically rerun.
Instead, the job remains displayed with its error status in the CONTROL-M/EM
GUI.
In this case, to submit the job for rerun or restart, rerun the job from the
CONTROL-M/EM GUI. The Rerun (with Restart) Confirmation window is
displayed. Request the restart or rerun from the window.
When Do If Rerun is specified with a Confirm parameter value of Yes (the

Confirm check box is selected), the job appears in the CONTROL-M/EM GUI with
a WAIT CONFIRMATION (WITH RESTART) status and is not restarted unless
confirmed. Confirm the job to restart it.
When a job is submitted for restart, if $FIRST is specified in the From subparameter,
a $FIRST step specification is passed as is to the CONTROL-M/Restart step. If
$ABEND or $EXERR is specified, the specified $ABEND or $EXERR value is first
resolved to the appropriate step by the CONTROL-M monitor and then passed to the
CONTROL-M/Restart step.
If $FIRST.$ABEND is specified, the CONTROL-M monitor determines which
procedure abended and then passes the $FIRST step specification for that procedure
to the CONTROLR step. For information regarding the CONTROL-M/Restart step,
refer to the CONTROL-M/Restart User Manual.
The Max Rerun parameter determines the maximum number of times the restart or
rerun can be performed. For more information, see Maximum Reruns on page 163.
238
Do If Rerun
Availability
This parameter is available only if CONTROL-M/Restart is installed on a

CONTROL-M for z/OS site.
The Do If Rerun and Rerun Member parameters cannot be specified together.

Alternate names for the Do If Rerun parameter are listed below.
Component
Parameter Name
DOIFRERUN
CONTROL-M for z/OS
DO IFRERUN
CONTROL-M/EM API
do_ifrerun

Alternate formats for the Do If Rerun parameter are listed below.
Component
Format
CONTROL-M/EM
Utilities
DOIFRERUN is composed of the following subparameters:

CONFIRM
Valid values:
0 (No confirmation. Default)
1 (Confirm)
FPGMS
First program step in the range. 1-8

character string.
FPROCS
First process step in the range. 1-8

character string.
TPGMS
Last program step in the range. 1-8

character string.
TPROCS
Last process step in the range. 1-8

character string.
CONTROL-M for z/OS Do IFRERUN is composed of the following subparameters:

FROM
First program or process step in the range.

1-8 character string.
TO
Last program or process step in the range.

CONFIRM
Valid values:
N (No confirmation. Default)
Y (Confirm)
239
Do Mail
Do Mail
The Do Mail parameter specifies a message to be sent (mailed) to an e-mail address
when the specified On Statement/Code criteria are satisfied.
Format
Usage
Optional
Format
Select Mail from the Do list box in the Job editing form.
To, Subject, and Message text boxes are displayed.
To send a brief message, enter the required information.
To send a more detailed message and/or a message that is sent to more
than one recipient, Click Details=.... The Mail dialog box is displayed.
Invalid Characters z/OS, except for Message subparameter: Non-English characters

AutoEdit Support

Subparameters
Parameter
Description
To
E-mail addresses for recipients of the mail message. Multiple addresses

can be specified, separated by semicolons ;.
Mandatory.
Note: Only physical addresses or AutoEdit variables can be specified.
Logical addresses (as specified for the Do Shout parameter) are not
supported for Do Mail.
Length
Computers other than z/OS: 1 through 255 characters

Case Sensitive
Yes
Invalid
Characters

marks
z/OS: Blanks; non-English characters
AutoEdit
Support
240
Yes. An AutoEdit variable or expression can be

specified as all or part of the value for this parameter.
Do Mail
Parameter
Description
CC
E-mail addresses that should be CCed for the mail message. Multiple
addresses can be specified, separated by semicolons ( ; ). Optional.
Note: On some UNIX computers, all recipients are shown in the To field
because the CC field is not supported.
Length

Case Sensitive
Yes
Invalid
Characters

marks
z/OS: Blanks; non-English characters
AutoEdit
Support
Subject
No. An AutoEdit variable or expression cannot be

Subject line for the message.

Length

Case Sensitive
Yes
Invalid
Characters
Computers other than z/OS: Single quotation marks; do

not use - as the first character.
AutoEdit
Support
message
Urgency
No. An AutoEdit variable or expression cannot be

Text of the mail message.

Length

z/OS: 1 through 255 lines, each containing 1 through 70
characters
However, do not exceed 4000 characters in the Job
Editing Form.
Case Sensitive
Yes
Invalid
Characters

z/OS: None
AutoEdit
Support
Yes. An AutoEdit variable or expression can be

Select from the following buttons, which indicate a level of urgency for the
message:
Regular Indicates that the message should have a regular level of urgency.
Urgent Indicates messages with a high priority. Urgent message are sent
with a special indication so that the recipient of the message is aware of
the urgency.
Very Urgent Indicates that the message should have the highest level of
urgency. For CONTROL-M/Server utilities, only.
241
Do Mail
Parameter
Description
Attach Sysout
Specifies at the job level whether the sysout should be sent as an email
attachment.
Format
List
Values
Yes: Send the jobs sysout as an attachment

No: Do not send the jobs sysout as an attachment
Default: Refers to the ADD SYSOUT TO EMAIL
value in the config.file to determine whether to send
the jobs sysout as an attachment.
General information
The mail message specified by this parameter is sent to the indicated e-mail addresses
when the condition specified by the On Statement/Code parameter is satisfied.
Mail messages can also be sent using a Do Shout parameter. However:
When using the Do Shout parameter, email addresses must be defined in the
dynamic destination table.
Do Mail can specify two fields of e-mail addresses: TO contains up to 96 characters
(in z/OS environments, up to 9999); CC contains up to 99 characters (in z/OS
environments, up to 9999. Do Shout allows only 16 characters.
Do Mail can specify up to 4096 characters in the message (in z/OS environments,
up to 255 lines each containing up to 70 characters). Do Shout allows only 255
characters.
The specified message is sent to the addresses specified in the CC field in the same
way that it is sent to the addresses in the To field.

Alternate names for the Do Mail parameter are listed below.
242
Component
Parameter Name
CONTROL-M/EM
Utilities
DOMAIL
CONTROL-M/Server
-domail
CONTROL-M for z/OS
DO MAIL
CONTROL-M/EM API
do_mail
Do NOTOK
Example: Send a message when a job completes OK

The following example illustrates how a message is sent to an e-mail address when a
specified job completes successfully. When FIRST_JOB completes successfully,
condition FIRST_OK is created, as specified in FIRST_JOBs Out Conditions
parameter. Do Mail then sends the message to the specified e-mail address.
Job Name
Mem Name
Mem Lib
Owner
Application
Out Conditions
Do Mail
FIRST_JOB
Job_1
W$DISK:
Thomas
Payroll
FIRST_OK
To: [email protected]
"The FIRST_JOB finished OK."
Do NOTOK
The Do NOTOK parameter assigns a completion status of NOTOK to a job when the
On Statement/Code criteria are satisfied, regardless of the jobs actual completion
status.
Table 12
Format - Do NOTOK Parameter
Usage
Optional
Format
Select NOTOK from the Do list box. No additional information is

required.
AutoEdit Support

Related parameters
Do OK
Do OK overrides or can be overridden by the Do NOTOK parameter.

When both are specified, the one specified last takes effect.
General information
For most jobs:
If DO OK and DO NOTOK are both specified, and are implemented, the last
statement to be implemented determines the status assigned to the job.
For information about the Do OK parameter, see Do OK on page 245.
243
Do NOTOK
For z/OS jobs:

Do NOTOK overrides the completion status of a job and changes it to NOTOK.
Do NOTOK cannot be specified together with Do Rerun or Do OK for the same
codes-event.
When:
Do OK, Do NOTOK, and/or Do Rerun are specified for different codes-events in a job
processing definition.
-andMore than one of the codes-events is executed, including the codes-event specifying
Do OK.
Then:
Do OK is overridden by Do NOTOK and/or Do Rerun, regardless of the order in
which the codes-events are executed.

Alternate names for the Do NOTOK parameter are listed below.
Component
Parameter Name
NOTOK
Reporting Facility
CONTROL-M/Server
-donotok
CONTROL-M for z/OS
DO NOTOK
CONTROL-M/EM API
do

Alternate formats for the Do NOTOK parameter are listed below.
244
Component
Parameter Name
CONTROL-M/EM
Utilities
NOTOK is a valid value for the DO parameter. It is not a

parameter itself.
CONTROL-M for z/OS
NOTOK is a valid value of the DO parameter. It is not itself a

parameter.
Do OK
Do OK
The Do OK parameter assigns the completion status of OK to a job, regardless of its
actual completion status.
Format
Usage
Optional
Format
Select OK from the Do list box. No additional information is required.
AutoEdit
Support

Related parameters
Do NOTOK
Do NOTOK overrides or can be overridden by the Do OK parameter.

When both are specified, the one specified last takes effect.
General information
For most jobs:
If DO OK and DO NOTOK are both specified, and are implemented, the last
statement to be implemented determines the status assigned to the job.
For z/OS jobs:

Do NOTOK overrides the completion status of a job and changes it to NOTOK.
Do NOTOK cannot be specified together with Do Rerun or Do OK for the same
codes-event.
When:
Do OK, Do NOTOK, and/or Do Rerun are specified for different codes-events in a
job processing definition.
-andMore than one of the codes-events is executed, including the codes-event specifying
Do OK.
245
Do OK
Then:

Alternate names for the Do OK parameter are listed below.
246
Component
Parameter Name
OK
CONTROL-M/Server
-dook
CONTROL-M for z/OS
DO OK
CONTROL-M/EM API
do
Do Remedy
Do Remedy
Opens a ticket in the Remedy Help Desk.
Format
Usage
Optional
Format
Consists of subparameters, described below.
Invalid Characters
The following special characters are not permitted in the Do Remedy

parameter or its subparameters.
Single quotation mark ()
Double quotation marks ()
Equals (=)
Less than (<)
Greater than (>)
Ampersand (&)
Backslash (\)
AutoEdit Support
No
Click
to open a dialog box that enables you to view and edit the entire contents of
the Subject and Message subparameters and specify AutoEdit variables.
Subparameters
Subparameter
Description
Urgency
The urgency level of the ticket that will be opened in Remedy.

Mandatory. Valid values are:
L = Low (Default)
M = Medium
H = High
U= Urgent
C = Clear
Summary
A brief summary is displayed in Remedy. By default, a summary of

the problem appears using AutoEdit variables. For more information
on the fields characteristics, refer to Remedy documentation.
Description
A detailed description is displayed in Remedy. By default, a

description of the problem appears using AutoEdit variables. For
more information on the fields characteristics, refer to Remedy
documentation.
247
Do Rerun
General information
The action parameter DO Remedy is applicable on CONTROL-M Server and on jobs
within the batch service.
Do Rerun
Indicates if an automatic rerun should be performed when the On Statement/Code
criteria are satisfied.
No values or subparameters are specified for this parameter.
Related parameters
Do OK
OK status can act as a trigger for job reruns specified with Do Rerun.
Do NOTOK
NOTOK status can act as a trigger for job reruns specified with Do Rerun.
Interval
Time between job runs specified with the Do Rerun parameter.
Maximum
Reruns
Number of job runs that can be specified with the Do Rerun parameter.
Rerun From
Indicates whether the interval between job runs begins with the start or
the end of the previous job run. Default: start
Shout RERUN
Sends a message if the jobs completion status was set to Rerun.
General information
Do Rerun specifies that the job should be rerun according to the criteria specified in
the Max Rerun and Interval parameters. These parameters must be specified before a
Do Rerun action can be defined.
NOTE
Do Rerun cannot be used to rerun Group Scheduling entities.
For most jobs:

If Do Rerun is specified, and DO OK or DO NOTOK is specified, and implemented,
the last statement to be implemented determines the status assigned to the job.
248
Do Rerun
For z/OS jobs:

When a Do Rerun action is specified for a job, the jobs completion status is set to
NOTOK, even if it was previously specified as OK.
Availability
For z/OS jobs:
Cyclic jobs cannot contain a Do Rerun parameter.
Do Rerun cannot be specified together with Do OK or Do NOTOK for the same

codes-event.
When:
Do OK, Do NOTOK, and/or Do Rerun are specified for different codes-events in a
job processing definition.
-andMore than one of the codes-events is executed, including the codes-event
specifying Do OK.
Then:

Alternate names for the Do Rerun parameter are listed below.
Component
Parameter Name
RERUN
-dorerun
CONTROL-M for z/OS
DO RERUN
CONTROL-M/EM API
do
249
Do Shout
Do Shout
Specifies a message to be sent (shouted) to a destination when the
On Statement/Code criteria are satisfied.
Format
Usage
Optional.
Format
Select Shout from the Do list box. The controls described below in
Subparameters are displayed.
AutoEdit
Support

Subparameters
Parameter
Description
Destination
Destination of the Shout message (1-16 characters, case sensitive). This

parameter is required. For a detailed explanation, see Shout on
page 293.
MSG
Text of the Shout message, up to 255 characters (spaces allowed). This

parameter is required. Use of AutoEdit variables is supported. For more
information about this field, see Shout on page 293.
Urgency
Level or urgency for the Shout Message. Choose the option button for
the appropriate urgency level:
250
Regular (Default)
Urgent
Very urgent
Do Shout

Alternate names for the Do Shout parameter are listed below.
Component
Parameter Name
CONTROL-M/EM
Utilities
DOSHOUT
CONTROL-M/Server
-doshout
CONTROL-M for z/OS
DO SHOUT
CONTROL-M/EM API
do_shout

Alternate formats for the Do Shout parameter are listed below.
Component
Format
CONTROL-M/EM
Utilities
DOSHOUT is composed of the DEST (destination) URGENCY,

and MESSAGE subparameters.
Example:
<DOSHOUT DEST="Wkstn2" URGENCY="R" MESSAGE="Job5
completed OK"/>
251
Do Stop Cyclic
Do Stop Cyclic
When specified, this parameter prevents subsequent iterations of the current cyclic
job.
No values or subparameters are specified for this parameter.
Related parameters
Cyclic
Cyclic is overridden by the Do Stop Cyclic parameter.
General information
Cyclic jobs normally run a regular intervals for as long as specified scheduling criteria
are satisfied.
If the related On Statement/Code criteria are satisfied, Do Stop Cyclic prevents future
iterations of the current cyclic job.
If the current job is not a cyclic job, this parameter has no effect on job processing.
If a cyclic job is terminated by a Do Stop Cyclic parameter, the View Details screen
displayed by option Z in the ctmpsm utility contains Cyclic:T where T indicates
Terminated.

Alternate names for the Do Stop Cyclic parameter are listed below.
252
Component
Parameter Name
SPCYC
CONTROL-M/Server
-dostopcyclic
CONTROL-M for z/OS
DO STOPCYCL
CONTROL-M/EM API
do
Do Sysout
Do Sysout
Indicates how the jobs output should be handled when the On Statement and Code
criteria are satisfied.
Format
Usage
Optional
Format
Select Sysout from the Do list box and specify the relevant subparameters.
The following subparameters are available for this parameter:
Option
Indicates what to do with the SYSOUT data.

The options that can be selected in this list box are:
None
Copy
Delete
Move
Release
z/OS:
None
Change jobs class
Delete output
Copy output
Move output
Each value is described in detail in Table 21 on page 304.
Prm
Contains additional information, depending on which

value is specified for the Option parameter.
The format for this parameter is the same as specified for Sysout Handling.
For more information about this parameter, see SYSOUT Handling on
page 303.
AutoEdit
Support
AutoEdit variables and expressions cannot be specified as all or part of the

values for this parameter.
Related parameters
SYSOUT
Handling
Sysout Handling specifies how to handle a SYSOUT when the job ended OK.
253
Do Sysout
General information
If no Sysout Handling is specified (or the job does not end OK), and no Do Sysout
statement is activated, the jobs log is placed in the default location specified by
CONTROL-M until the New Day procedure performs its cleanup.
NOTE
The default destination of the Job log is determined by a CONTROL-M system parameter on
each computer. For more information, see your CONTROL-M administrator.
The Automatic Log Copy CONTROL-M system parameter is not affected in any way
by the function of Do Sysout.

Alternate names for the Do Sysout parameter are listed below.
Component
Parameter Name
DOSYSOUT
CONTROL-M/Server
-dosysout
CONTROL-M for z/OS
DO SYSOUT
CONTROL-M/EM API
do_sysout

Alternate formats for the Do Sysout parameter are listed below.
Component
Format
CONTROL-M/EM
Utilities
DOSYSOUT is composed of the parameters below.

Example
<DOSYSOUT OPTION=ChangeClass PAR=F FROM=C/>
OPTION
Indicates what to do with the SYSOUT data.

Mandatory.
Valid values:
Release
Delete
Copy
Move
Note: Copy and Move are not used with z/OS.
254
Do Sysout
Component
Format
CONTROL-M/EM
Utilities continued
PAR
Certain OPTION values require that you supply

additional information (such as Release, NewDest).
The PAR parameter holds that information as a
string.
FROM
Limits the SYSOUT handling operation to only

SYSOUTs from the specified class.
CONTROL-M for z/OS
DO Sysout is composed of the parameters below.

OPT
SYSOUT option code. Mandatory.

Valid values:
C Change the class of the job output.
D Delete (purge) the job output.
F Copy the job output to file.
N Change destination of job output.
R Release the job output.
data
Relevant SYSOUT data. Mandatory and valid only if

the specified OPT value is C, F, or N.
Valid values depend on the OPT value, as follows:
F File name. String comprised of from 1
through 44 characters. All characters are valid
except blanks.
C New class (1 character). Any character is
valid except blank, but an asterisk (*) indicates
the original MSGCLASS of the job.
N New destination (1 through 8 characters).
All characters are valid except blanks.
FRM
FROM class. Optional. Limits the SYSOUT handling

operation to only SYSOUTs from the specified class.
255
On statement
On statement
Job processing step and code event, and job SYSOUT criteria that determine whether
the accompanying DO statements are performed.
NOTE
On Sysout statements are only available for jobs that run under CONTROL-M for z/OS
z/OS and non-z/OS jobs

There are important differences in the way the On statement functions between jobs
running in z/OS environments and jobs running on other computers. In this section,
the two types of jobs will be described separately.
Jobs running on computers other than z/OS

In the case of jobs running on computers other than z/OS, the On statement specifies
a codes event as the criteria for specified Do statements to be performed. A codes
event can be one of the following types:
operating system completion code

a combination of statements and error codes
Each of these types is described in detail below.
256
Format
Usage
Optional.
Type
Operating system completion code:

Statement An asterisk must be specified in this field.
Code This field must contain one of the following:
OK
NOTOK
JLOST, indicating a completion status for the job
a string in one of the following formats:
{COMPSTAT|RUNCOUNT|RERUNNO} operator completionCode
In this string
operator is one of the following:
= or EQ (equal)
< or LT (less than)
> or GT (greater than)
! or NE (not equal)
completionCode must be one of the following:
the number of the code returned by the operating system
EVEN (the field is considered satisfied by an even return code
ODD (the field is considered satisfied by an odd return code
Note: If one of the following 2-letter abbreviations, EQ, LT, GT, or NE, is used as
the value of operator, the abbreviation must be preceded and followed by
blanks.
Combination of statements and error codes:
Statement a character string, from 1 through 132 characters in length,
containing a statement from the job script file
The specified string can be a portion of the statement.
Code a character string, from 1 through 132 characters in length, to be
compared to the operating systems response to the specified statement
The Statement subparameter is optional. However when it is specified, the Code
subparameter is also required.
Statement and Code character strings can each contain mask characters. Valid
mask characters are:
* represents any number of characters (including no characters)
$ represents any single character
? represents any single character
Note for Chinese, Japanese and Korean character sets: The ? and $ wildcards
are not supported. The * wildcard is supported only as a standalone value or as
a suffix to another value; it cannot be embedded in, or act as a prefix to, another
value.)
AutoEdit
Support
No. AutoEdit variables or expressions cannot be specified as all or part of the

257
General information
Each On statement is combined with subsequent Do statements. Their implied
relationship is:
IF: Codes-event criteria (specified in an On statement) are satisfied,
THEN: Perform the actions (specified in the Do statements).
Any number of sets consisting of an On statement and Do statements can be specified

for a job. Each On statement can be combined with an unlimited number of Do
statements.
The following topics are discussed in this section:
Operating system completion code
Combination of statements and error codes
Considerations when defining conditional postprocessing actions
Defining conditional criteria
Understanding how On statements are processed
Order of processing of On Statement/Code combinations
Formatting of On statements from SYSOUT
Utilization of exit codes

Table 13 describes how the On statement is used to test for an operating system
completion code or CONTROL-M completion status.
258
Table 13
Completion code
or status
Description
Completion code
Upon termination of a job, the reserved word COMPSTAT contains the

completion code of the job. The user can compare the completion code
to a fixed value or test for an even or odd completion code using one of
the listed logical operators. For example, COMPSTAT>4 indicates that
dependent Do statements are executed if the job terminates with a
completion code of 5 or above.
Number of runs
Upon termination of a job, RUNCOUNT indicates the number of times

the job has been submitted for execution.
Number of reruns Upon termination of a job, RERUNNO indicates the number of times the
job has been submitted for execution due to DO RERUN.
Completion status Specifying OK or NOTOK in the Status parameter indicates that
dependent Do statements are executed based on the OK or NOTOK
termination status of the job.
JLOST
Specifying JLOST in the Status parameter indicates that dependent Do

statements are executed if the SYSOUT of the job cannot be found.
Combination of statements and error codes

The On statement functions as follows:
The SYSOUT of the job is divided into sets, each consisting of a job script statement
and operating system responses to the statement (if any). If no response exists for a
specific script statement (that is, the statement executed successfully), a null
message is paired with the script statement.
The statement set is compared to the On statements defined for the job. If the Code
parameter is specified as the * mask character, it can match even a null error
message record successfully.
If there is a match between the On statements and a statement set from the jobs
log, the corresponding Do action statements are executed. Otherwise,
CONTROL-M proceeds to the next statement set.
Considerations when defining conditional postprocessing actions

Conditional postprocessing actions are performed following job processing. To define
postprocessing actions that are conditional on the job processing results, use the Set
tab to define On statements and accompanying Do statements. These statements are
described as follows:
On statementsidentify the job processing results that determine if the

accompanying conditional (Do) actions are going to be performed.
259
Do statementsidentify the actions to perform when the On statement criteria are

satisfied.
Defining conditional criteria

When filling in On criteria, supply two values:
statement
code
On criteria can be defined to depend on values returned from any of the following
job SYSOUT
job completion code
job completion status
To be able to fill in the On statement and codes values appropriately, you must
understand how the job results are processed.
Understanding how On statements are processed

Whenever CONTROL-M/Server submits a job under CONTROL-M/Agent, the
agent determines the completion code and completion status of the job based on the
processing results and the instructions and definitions in the job script. The agent
always passes this information to the server (even if an On statement does not
depend on that information).
So that it can determine if On criteria that depend on the SYSOUT of a job have been
satisfied, CONTROL-M/Server passes such On criteria to the CONTROL-M/Agent
at the time of job submission. After job execution (that is, after the job has ended or
timed out), the agent must determine which On statements that depend on the jobs
SYSOUT have been satisfied, and which have not.
Job SYSOUT is divided into sets of data. Each set consists of the following:
a job script statement
operating system responses to the job script statement.

There can be multiple responses (lines). For example, for a job script statement
requesting a list of the files in a directory, each listed file would constitute an
operating system response line. (If no response exists for a specific script
statement, a null message is paired with the job script statement.)
CONTROL-M/Agent does not directly access the SYSOUT. Instead, it calls the
Control Module which accesses the SYSOUT. The processing logic is as follows:
260
1. CONTROL-M/Agent calls the Control Module requesting SYSOUT data.

2. The Control Module reads one set of the SYSOUT data (beginning with the first
set), and formats it as follows
job script statement

operating system response 1
operating system response 2
operating system response 3, and so on
3. The Control Module sends job script statements to the agent and one operating
system response (beginning with the first response).
4. CONTROL-M/Agent checks the data sent by the Control Module against the On
statement.
If the job script statement does not match one of the On statements, there is no
match to that set of On criteria.
It the job script statement and operating system response match the On
statement and code criteria, CONTROL-M/Agent considers the On statement
criteria to be satisfied.
If the job script statement matches the On statement, but the operating system
response does not match the code criteria, CONTROL-M/Agent asks to see the
next operating system response in the set, and repeats this process until there is
a match or until there are no more operating system responses in the set, in
which case there is no match.
5. As long as there are remaining On Statements and sets of data in the SYSOUT,
CONTROL-M/Agent repeats the process from step 1. The agent requests that the
control module check the next set of data, beginning with its job script statement
and first operating system response.
When the process is complete, CONTROL-M/Agent sends CONTROL-M/Server the
following information about the job:
list of On statements (relating the SYSOUT) that have been satisfied

list of On statements (relating to the SYSOUT) that have not been satisfied
completion status of the jobdetermined by the script of the job and processing
results
completion code of the jobdefined in, and determined by, the script of the job
CONTROL-M/Server examines this information, then determines and performs

appropriate post processing.
261
EXAMPLE
How On statements relating to the SYSOUT are processed
A job script requests (among other functions) that the operating system run the following
commands (the operating system does run the commands):
pwd
ls
(this is a request to run a Dir command on the specified directory)

(this is a request to list the files found in the Dir request)
The SYSOUT of the job contains the following results from these requests.
+pwd
/data/wrkfle
+ls
file1
file2
dir1
dir2
The job processing definition contains the following On (and Do) statement:
On statement stmt= ls code=dir*
Do ...
Following job processing, CONTROL-M/Agent issues calls to the Control Module to see if the
On criteria have been satisfied. The list below indicates the call# , data formatted and returned
by the Control Module, the SYSOUT set, and analysis of the results by CONTROL-M/Agent:
Call
data returned by the Control Module
Set
Call1: statement= pwd code=/data/wrkfle 1st set
Call2: statement=ls code= file1
2nd set
Call3: statement=ls code=file2
2nd set
Call4: statement=ls code=dir1
2nd set
results according to the agent

No match on the statement
Match on statement. No match on code
Match on statement. No match on code
Match on statement. Match on code.
CONTROL-M/Agent has determined that there is a match on the On criteria. It issues no

more calls, and notifies CONTROL-M/Server that the On criteria are satisfied. (It also sends
CONTROL-M/Server the completion code and completion status.)
Because On statement SYSOUT criteria are matched against SYSOUT data as

formatted and returned by the Control Module, you must specify SYSOUT-related
On criteria using the formatting that the Control Module uses, to respond to calls
from CONTROL-M/Agent.
262
Order of processing of On Statement/Code combinations

CONTROL-M processes On Statement/Code combinations in the following order:
1. On Statement/Code combinations related to completion codes, for example:
ON "*" "COMPSTAT>0"
2. On Statement/Code combinations related to SYSOUT, for example:
ON "*cp aaa bbb*" "*not found*"
3. On Statement/Code combinations based on the OK/NOTOK state of the job, for
example:
ON "*" "NOTOK"
Formatting of On statements from SYSOUT

Scripts that are analyzed by CONTROL-M/Server as part of the post-processing of a
job should comply with the following requirements:
Begin the script with the echo on command. This ensures that job script statements
will be written to the SYSOUT file.
End each prompt with a > or ] character. These characters and embedded spaces
should not be used inside the prompt text string.
Table 14 describes how the On Statement/Code job processing parameter interprets

script lines from SYSOUT.
Table 14
Describing formatting of statements from SYSOUT
Item
Description
Analysis of the Sysout Text in a SYSOUT file that follows a > prompt or ] prompt is
for On Statement/Code treated by CONTROL-M/Server as part of the job script. All other
text is treated as part of the operating system response.
When specifying an On Statement/Code statement in a job
processing definition, place text that follows either of these
prompts in the Stmt parameter.
Place other text in the Code parameter.
Continuation Lines
CONTROL-M/Server does not process continuation lines for

comparison with text in a Stmt subparameter. Therefore, do not
specify script continuation line text in the Stmt subparameter.
Length of Script
Statement
CONTROL-M/Server compares the first 512 characters of a script

statement with the text in subparameter Stmt. Text after the first
512 characters of a script statement should not be in subparameter
Stmt.
The maximum length of the On Code parameter is 1024 characters.
263
Utilization of exit codes

Both DOS .bat scripts and REXX .cmd scripts can return an exit code to CONTROLM/Server upon completion. The _exit script utility is used by .bat scripts. For more
information about script utilities, see the CONTROL-M Administrator Guide.
CONTROL-M/Server can distinguish between exit codes by using the following
expression in the Code subparameter of the On Statement/Code job processing
parameter:
COMPSTAT=<value>
Example 1: Using exit codes

In this example, a REXX script exits with an exit code of 5, as displayed below:
exit 5
This condition can be detected by defining the following On Statement/Code

parameter:
Stmt: *
Code: COMPSTAT=5
Example 2: Job ends with a status of NOTOK

Using the following commands, any completion code other than 2 causes the job to
end with a status of NOTOK.
On
Statement *
Code COMPSTAT!2
Do NOTOK
Example 3: Job ends with a status of OK

Using the following commands, any even completion code causes the job to end with
a status of OK.
On
Statement *
Code COMPSTAT EQ EVEN
Do OK
264
Example 4: Create a condition on NOTOK

Using the following commands, a completion status of NOTOK causes
CONTROL-M to create a condition.
On
Statement *
Code NOTOK
Do Cond PRKZ_NOTOK ODAT
Example 5: Output from an OpenVMS job

Assume that the following messages are issued from an OpenVMS job:
$ SET NOON
$ MOU/SYS/OVER=ID MUA0:
$ COPY JWINFO_2507.DAT mua0:ACCOUNT.DAT
%COPY-E-OPENIN, error opening
J$DSK:[USR1]JWINFO2507.DAT; as input
-RMS-E-FNF, file not found
$SH
%DCL-W-INSFPRM, missing command parameters supply
all required parameters
USER1
Job terminated at 10-AUG.-1997 09:01:42.07
Accounting information:
Buffered I/O count:43Peak working set size:375
Direct I/O count:24Peak page file size:2485
Page faults:495Mounted volumes:0
Charged CPU time:0 00:00:00.61Elapsed time:0 00:00:02.63
The following On statement would be triggered by the preceding messages:

On
Statement COPY JWINFO_$$$$.*
Code %COPY-E-OPENIN, error opening J$DSK:[USR1]*
Do NOTOK
Example 6: Output from a UNIX Job

Assume that the following messages are issued from a UNIX job:
+ date
Mon Mar 20 10:30:58 IST 2006
+ pwd
/export/users/ctmagent
+ ls
BMCINSTALL
ctm
265
installed-versions.txt
lsagent.sh
The following On statement would be triggered by the preceding messages:

ON
Statement ls
Code lsagent*
Do NOTOK
Example 7: Rerunning a job (for Microsoft Windows)

Assume that the following is the SYSOUT from a batch job:
copy job411.dat tempt.dat
File not found - JOB411.DAT
0 file(s) copied
The following On statement would be triggered by the preceding job output:

On
Statement copy job411.dat
Code File not found
Do Rerun
Example 8: Assign NOTOK status for an iSeries (AS/400) job

Assume that the following is the SYSOUT from an iSeries (AS/400) job:
*NOnE Request 21/11/05 16:41:07 QWTSCSBJ QSYS
02FF TEST
CMTST
0009
Message . . . . : -CALL PGM(CMTST)
CPD0170 Diagnostic 30 21/11/05 16:41:07 QCLCLCPR QSYS
02FF
TEST
CMTST
009
Message . . . . : Program CMTST in library *LIBL not found.
Cause
. . . . . : The Program specified on the CALL command
cannot be found.
The following On statement would be triggered by the preceding job output:

On
Statement *CALL PGM (CMTST)*
Code *Program CMTST in library *LIBL not found.*
Do NOTOK
266
Example 9: Issue a shout

In this example a shout is issued to the administrator if the word error is displayed
anywhere in the SYSOUT.
On
Statement stmt= * code= *error*
Do Shout To= Adman Urgn= High Msg= Potential error in Job %%jobid
Example 10: Using completion codes other than 2

A completion code other than 2 causes the job to end NOTOK.
On
Statement stmt= * code= COMPSTAT !2
Do NOTOK
Example 11: Using even completion codes causes the job to end OK
Any even completion code causes the job to end OK.
On
Statement stmt= * code= COMPSTAT EQ Even
Do OK
Example 12: Trigger a second job after the first job ends NOTOK
If a job ends NOTOK, add a condition that triggers a job that now becomes necessary.
On
Statement stmt= * code= NOTOK
Do Condition Name=JobX_NotOK Date= odat sign= +
Example 13: Set the status of a job to NOTOK under certain conditions
Set the status of a job to NOTOK if the SYSOUT indicates that the password directory
is not found, In such a case, the SYSOUT of the UNIX job contains text similar to the
following:
cp /etc/passwd /tmp
cp /etc/passwdx /tmp
cp: /etc/passwdx: No such file or directory
cp /etc/passwd /usr/kvm/xyzzy
cp: /usr/kvm/xyzzy: Permission denied
exit 12
On
267
Jobs running in z/OS environments
Statement stmt= cp/etc/passwdx/tmp code= cp*no*file

Do NOTOK
Example 14: Rerun a job under certain conditions

Rerun the job if the SYSOUT indicates that a particular file to be copied was not
found:
On
Statement stmt= copy job411.dat code= File not found
Do Rerun

Format
Usage
Optional
Length
For more information, see Subparameters below.
AutoEdit
Support

Related parameters
268
Do CTBRule
Can be specified as a Do PGMST step.
Step Range
Specifies a range of steps in the larger step range specified by the On

parameter. An action can be specified for the range that is selected.
Subparameters
Stmt
On statement that causes CONTROL-M to check the execution results of a job

step or procedure against the specified codes criteria.
PGMST
Job step. The execution results of the job step are checked against the
specified codes criteria. Mandatory if the On Stmt option is selected.
Valid values are:
pgmstep
*rangename
ANYSTEP
+EVERY
These values are described in Table 15 on page 273.
Length
Invalid
Characters
Blanks.
Note: If the first character of PGMST is * (asterisk), it must be followed

by the range name of a defined Step Range consisting of up to 7
characters.
Stmt
PROCST Procedure step (EXEC statement) that invokes a procedure from
continued
which the specified PGMST program is executed. Optional.
Valid values are:
blank
procstep
+EVERY
These values are described in Table 16 on page 274.

Length
Invalid
characters
Blanks
Codes
Return codes or statuses that can satisfy the step or code event criteria
if returned upon termination of the specified job steps. At least one
code must be specified. Codes can be condition codes, user abend
codes, system abend codes, various end codes and statuses, and
certain keywords. Codes are described in Code values on page 274.
And/Or
Optional. Specifying either And or Or opens a new On statement in

the On block (described later) and links the new statement to the
statement containing the And/Or specification, as follows:
And indicates AND logic between the two On statements.

On block criteria are satisfied only if both On statements are
satisfied.
Or indicates OR logic between the two On statements.

On block criteria are satisfied if either (or both) On statements are
satisfied.
269
Sysout
On statement that defines a string and the location to be checked. When the job
runs, if this string is found in the specified location within the SYSOUT of the job,
the action defined in the accompanying Do statement is performed.
Note: This option is available only for jobs running under CONTROL-M for z/OS
Sysout
Pattern
Sysout
From
continued Column
Length
Invalid
characters
Blanks
A number from 001 through 132, indicating the column at which the
search should start.
If this field is blank, the value 001 is assumed.
The value in this field must be lower than that in the To Column field.
To
Column
A number from 001 through 132, indicating the column at which the
search should end.
If this field is blank, the value 132 is assumed.
The value in this field must be higher than that in the From Column
field.
And/Or
Optional. Specifying either And or Or opens a new On statement in

the On block (described later) and links the new statement to the
statement containing the And/Or specification, as follows:
And indicates AND logic between the two On statements.

On block criteria are satisfied only if both On statements are
satisfied.
Or indicates OR logic between the two On statements.

On block criteria are satisfied if either (or both) On statements are
satisfied.
General information
On statements define event criteria that identify either specific CONTROL-M job
steps and possible codes that result from the execution of those job steps, or specific
strings in the SYSOUT of a job.
On statements are usually, but not necessarily, followed by user-specified Do actions.
The implied relationship between On statements and associated Do statements is:
270
IF: Codes-event criteria (specified in an On Stmt statement) are satisfied, or the

string specified in an On Sysout statement is found in the SYSOUT,
THEN: Perform the actions (specified in the Do statements).
The combination of On Stmt statements and Do statements enables you to specify

post-processing actions the performance of which depends on the execution results of
job steps executed under CONTROL-M.
The combination of On Sysout statements and Do statements enables you to specify
post-processing actions that are to be performed if the SYSOUT of jobs contain
specific strings.
Multiple On Statements and On Blocks

In a new job scheduling definition, an empty On statement is followed by an empty
DO statement. Additional On statements can be opened in the job scheduling
definition as follows:
Each On and DO statement is independent. Multiple On and DO statements are

not logically connected to the preceding On and DO statements.
Multiple On blocks are normally interpreted sequentially. If the conditions of an
On block are satisfied, the accompanying DO actions are performed. The
conditions of more than one On block can be satisfied; therefore more than one set
of DO statements can be performed.
Example 1: Multiple On Stmt Do Blocks

One On block specifies STEP1 as the program step, and >C0004 as the code. A second
On block specifies ANYSTEP as the program step, and >C0008 as the code.
If STEP1 results in a condition code of C0016, the On step and code event criteria for
both On statements are satisfied, and the DO actions accompanying both On blocks
are performed.
When you fill in the And/Or subparameter of an On statement, an empty On

statement is opened immediately (that is, before the accompanying DO statement).
The specified And/Or value logically connects the new On statement to the
preceding On statement. These two On statements constitute a single On block.
Example 2: Related On Statements

For the DO SHOUT action to be performed, Step1 must end with a condition code of
C0004, and Step5 must end with system abend S0C4.
271
Inserting additional On statements from CONTROL-M for z/OS

When using the z/OS interface, to add an empty On statement between two existing
On statements, type the > character over the first letter in the On PGMST value of the
previous On line, and press Enter.
Example 3: Insert an On Statement

If the program step name is STEP1
ON PGMST >TEP1
adds an empty On line after the current On statement. The STEP1 step name is
restored to its original value when Enter is pressed (that is, the > character
disappears).
To delete unwanted On statements, specify appropriate Line Editing commands in
the Edit environment. For more information about Line Editing commands, see the
CONTROL-M for z/OS User Guide.
Using all runs of a job including restarts

When processing On blocks, CONTROL-M can incorporate the results of all previous
runs and restarts, filtering them for jobs restarted with the RESTART, RECAPTURE
CONDITION, and ABEND CODES parameters. CONTROL-M/Restart searches
previous runs to determine which steps must be considered part of the restarted job.
For example, if one step finished successfully during its original run, and another
step finished successfully after a restart, the On block check for the successful finish
for both steps produces a TRUE result and the On statement is satisfied.
Activation of this facility in CONTROL-M/Restart requires that the ALLRUNS
parameter in the CTRPARM member be set to YES. When activated, this facility can
apply to any specified step, step range, or to the step value +EVERY.
272
Step values
Table 15 describes the PGMST Step Range values.
Table 15
PGMST step values (part 1 of 2)
Step Value
Description
pgmst
In an On statement, the specified step is generally a program step, specified

in the PGMST field. It may be a program executed directly within the job
stream, in which case no PROCST value is specified, or it may be a program
executed by a called procedure, in which case the called procedure is
specified in PROCST.
If the JCL contains nested procedures, the name of the EXEC procedure
statement that invokes the most deeply nested procedure (that is, the
procedure that immediately invokes the PGM step) must be specified in
PROCST.
The same step name can appear in different On statements in the same On
block (or different On blocks).
*rangename
To check codes in a range of steps, first define the step range and assign it a
name in the Step Range statement. Then specify the name, preceded by an
asterisk, in the PGMST field. The * indicates that the specified name is a
range name, not a step name. The range of steps is displayed, and you can
check the codes that are displayed within the defined range.
If CONTROL-M adds a CONTROLR step to a job (for example, a job is
restarted by CONTROL-M/Restart or PREVENT NCT2 is specified in the
job scheduling definition), the CONTROLR step is processed like all other
job steps.
Example
In the Step Range statement, the name DF2, is assigned to the range of
program steps STEP20 through STEP29A.
If *DF2 is specified in On PGMST, the On step and code criteria is satisfied
if any of the codes result from any of the steps in the range STEP20 through
STEP29A.
273
Table 15
PGMST step values (part 2 of 2)
Step Value
Description
ANYSTEP
The ANYSTEP value can be specified in the PGMST field. In general, it

indicates that the DO statements must be performed if the specified codes
are found in any steps.
However, if ANYSTEP is specified with the codes OK, NOTOK, EXERR,
JLOST, JNRUN, JSECU, JNSUB, or *UKNW, the On criteria are satisfied
only if the entire job ends with the specified code criteria.
If ANYSTEP is specified with the FORCE code, no other codes can be
specified in the same On block, and the PROCST field must be left blank.
+EVERY
The +EVERY value is used without being accompanied by limiting step

values when the code criteria must be satisfied for every step. The following
examples all have the same impact the code criteria must be satisfied for
every step in the job without exception.
The PROCST Step Range values are described in Table 16.

Table 16
PROCST step values
Step Value
Description
blank
When left blank, matching program step names (PGMST) are checked
regardless of whether they are directly from the job or from a called
procedure. Default.
The On statement is satisfied if the PGMST criteria are satisfied from
any procedure directly from the job.
procstep
Name of a specific procedure step:

//procstep EXEC procedure
If a specific procedure step is specified, only program steps from the
invoked procedure are checked to see if they satisfy the code criteria.
Program steps directly from the job are not checked.
+EVERY
The +EVERY value is used without being accompanied by limiting step

values when the code criteria must be satisfied for every step. The
following examples all have the same impact the code criteria must be
satisfied for every step in the job without exception.
Code values
Codes can be condition codes, user abend codes, system abend codes, various end
codes and statuses, and certain keywords. They can also be prefaced by certain
qualifiers. All of these are described below.
A maximum of 245 codes can be specified for any On step statement, as follows:
274
Each line of an On statement contains fields for specification of up to four codes.
Whenever a fourth code on a line is specified, and Enter is pressed, a new line
within the same On statement is opened, allowing specification of up to another
four codes.
NOTE
If a DO OK statement is specified in the job scheduling definition, it is ignored for steps for
which any of the following codes apply: JNRUN, JNSUB, *REC0, *UKNW.
Code values are described in Table 17.

Table 17
Code values (part 1 of 2)
Value
Description
Cnnnn
Step condition code, where nnnn is a 4-digit value.
Sxxx
Step system abend code, where xxx is a 3-character hex value.
Unnnn
Step user abend code, where nnnn is a 4-digit value.
*****
Any step that executes, including steps with JCL errors and steps
returned with an ABEND code. For reasons of backward compatibility,
the ***** code does not include steps with the FLUSH code or SNRUN
(described below). The ***** code does, however, include jobs not
submitted and jobs whose SYSOUT was lost if On PGMST ANYSTEP is
specified.
FORCE
This code applies when a Job is Forced OK from the CONTROL-M

Active Environment screen (Screen 3).
To specify a code of FORCE, all of the following must apply:
No other code can be specified in the same statement.
The PGMST value must be ANYSTEP.
No PROCST value can be specified.
No other On statements can appear in the On block.
Valid DO statements for the FORCE code are:
DO SHOUT
DO COND
DO FORCEJOB
DO SETVAR
DO MAIL
JLOST
Job SYSOUT was lost. This value can be specified only with the
ANYSTEP step value.
JNRUN
Job was canceled during execution or re-execution. This value can be

specified only with the ANYSTEP step value.
JFAIL
Job failed due to JCL error.
JSECU
Job failed due to security requirements (only under ACF2). This value
can be specified only with the ANYSTEP step value.
275
Table 17
Code values (part 2 of 2)
Value
Description
JNSUB
Job not submitted. Submission of a job or initiation of a started task

failed for any reason. This value can be specified only with the
ANYSTEP step value.
OK
A PGM step finished executing OK (by default with a condition code of

C0004 or less). This value can be specified only with the ANYSTEP step
value.
Note: Through parameter MAXCCOK in member CTMPARM in the
IOA PARM library, the default condition code can be set to C0000.
If a job is FORCED OK, the DO statements following an On PGMST
ANYSTEP... CODES OK statement are processed only if the
FRCOKOPT parameter in the CTMPARM member in the IOA PARM
NOTOK
A PGM step (or the job) finished executing NOTOK. This code covers
all types of failures, including non-execution errors (for example, job
not run, JCL error, job not submitted), and (by default) any condition
code greater than C0004. This value can only be specified with the
ANYSTEP step value.
Note: You can use the MAXCCOK parameter in the CTMPARM
member in the IOA PARM library to set the default condition code to
C0000.
EXERR
Any type of execution error. It is the same as NOTOK, but is triggered

only if the job has actually started executing. This value can only be
specified as the ANYSTEP step value.
*NCT2
A NOT CATLGD 2 or NOT RECATLGD 2 event occurred in the job

step. The default result of this event is a NOTOK status for the step. A
message containing the data set name is written to the IOA Log file.
Note: If you do not want to be alerted to NOT RECATLGD 2 events, see
your INCONTROL administrator.
*TERM
Job terminated by CMEM due to an NCT2 event.
REC0
Rerun (recovery) is needed, but no more reruns are available.

Note: REC is followed by a zero (0), not a letter O.
*UNKW
An unknown error occurred, usually as a result of a computer crash

during job execution. This value can only be specified with the
ANYSTEP step value.
$EJ
Job was queued for re-execution.
FLUSH
A JCL COND or JCL IF/THEN/ELSE statement caused a step to not

run. This code is described in more detail in FLUSH, below.
SNRUN
A step did not run. This code is described in more detail in SNRUN
on page 277.
FLUSH
The FLUSH code generally applies when a step does not run but no error is indicated.
This code is assigned when:
276
A JCL COND or JCL IF/THEN/ELSE statement caused the step not to run.
CONTROL-M detects code FLUSH steps by the IEF272I message (Step was not
executed).
If a job was restarted by CONTROL-M/Restart, and CONTROL-M is to consider

all job runs during post-processing (ALLRUNS is set to YES in the CTRPARM
member), a step is defined as FLUSH if both the following statements are true:
Either the step did not previously run, or CONTROL-M/Restart did not
recapture a completion or abend code from a previous run
Either of the following statements is also true:
It was not executed during the RESTART run because of a JCL COND or JCL
IF/THEN/ELSE statement.
It was not executed due to a RESTART decision (the CTR103I message).
Because a code of FLUSH does not indicate that an error occurred during job
execution, assignment of this status does not cause a job status of NOTOK.
If a JCL statement other than the COND or IF/THEN/ELSE statement caused the
step not to run, it is not defined as a FLUSH step.
If the failure of a step causes subsequent steps not to be executed, these subsequent
steps are not defined as FLUSH steps.
For reasons of backward compatibility (that is, to ensure that the application of the
***** code remains unchanged), the ***** code does not include FLUSH steps.
SNRUN
A step is defined as code SNRUN if it did not run. This code includes:
Any step with a code of FLUSH.

Any step that does not appear in the job.
Instances where a step does not run because of a JCL error in a prior step (the step
with the JCL error does not have a status of SNRUN)
If a job was restarted by CONTROL-M/Restart, and CONTROL-M is to consider
all job runs during post-processing (the ALLRUNS parameter is set to YES in the
CTRPARM member), a step is defined as SNRUN if both the following statements
are true:
Either the step did not previously run, or CONTROL-M/Restart did not
recapture a completion or abend code from a previous run.
The step was not executed during the RESTART run.
277
SNRUN cannot be specified together with ANYSTEP. (Because SNRUN includes

steps that do not exist in a job, and ANYSTEP includes all step names even if they do
not exist in a job, specifying both in the same job would cause a condition that
SNRUN could not process.).
A status of SNRUN does not indicate that an error occurred during a job execution,
nor does it cause a job status of NOTOK. It only indicates that it did not run.
For backward compatibility (that is, to ensure that the application of the ***** code
remains unchanged), the ***** code does not include SNRUN steps.
Code qualifiers and relationships

Any character in a condition code, system abend code or user abend code may be
replaced by an asterisk (*). An asterisk means any value for the character it
replaces. For example, if S*13 is specified, the code criteria for the step is satisfied by
codes S013, S613, S913, and so on.
The additional qualifiers in Table 18 can be used in specific circumstances.
Table 18
Qualifiers
Qualifier
Description
>
Greater than. Valid as a qualifier for condition codes and user abend
codes.
<
Less than. Valid as a qualifier for condition codes and user abend codes.
Specifies not to perform the accompanying DO statements if the specified

code exists in the step. Valid as a qualifier for condition codes, user abend
codes and system abend codes.
NOTE
The N qualifier indicates that the DO statements must not be performed if the specified
condition exists. It does not indicate that the DO statements must be performed if the specified
condition does not exist.
The relationship between multiple codes in an On statement is OR (that is, the

appearance of any of the codes in the specified step satisfies the On criteria), except
for range specifications (for example, >10 <40).
However, code criteria qualified by N take precedence over all other code criteria. If a
code that is specified with an N qualifier is generated by the specified step,
accompanying DO actions are not performed even if other On code criteria are
satisfied.
278
EXAMPLE
If Step1 ends with a condition code of C0004 and Step 5 ends with system abend code S0C4,
perform the indicated Shout.
On Statement PGMST= Step1 PROCST=
Codes=C0004
AND
On Statement PGMST= Step5 PROCST=
Codes=S0C4
Do Shout
To=emuser
Urgn=Regular
Msg= Backup operations ...

Alternate names for the On statement are listed below.
Component
Parameter Name
ON
-on
e-Trigger
on_do_statement
CONTROL-M/EM API
on_statement

Alternate formats for the On parameter are listed below.
Component
Parameter name
CONTROL-M/EM
Utilities
ON is composed of the STMT, CODE, PGMS, PROCS, and AND_OR

subparameters.
STMT is a 1-132 character string, used only when you are specifying
an On statement value.
CONTROL-M/EM
API
on_statement is composed of the following subparameters:
and_or
code
procedure_step
program_step
statement
279
Reten Days
Reten Days
Number of days to retain the job in the History Jobs file. For z/OS jobs only.
NOTE
At sites that do not use the History Jobs file, this parameter is not relevant and is not
displayed.
Format
Usage
Optional
Format
001 - 999 days.

Note: When the Reten Days field is left blank, History Jobs file information
is kept as specified by the Reten Gen parameter. For more information, see
Reten Gen on page 282.
AutoEdit
Support

Related parameters
Reten Gen
Reten Days cannot be specified when Reten Gen is specified.

Note: When specifying a value for RETENTION: # OF DAYS TO KEEP
(Reten Days) from the CONTROL-M for z/OS interface, leave
RETENTION: # OF GENERATIONS TO KEEP blank.
General information
Jobs in the History Jobs file are easier to restore to the Active Jobs file (for example,
for restart) than jobs archived to CDAM. Therefore, it may be desirable to retain a job
in the History Jobs file for a period of time.
Using Reten Days you can specify a fixed number of days to keep the job in the
History Jobs file. Once the specified number of days is reached, the job is
automatically deleted from the History Jobs file during the next New Day processing.
Reten Days and Reten Gen are mutually exclusive. A value can be specified for either,
but not both.
280
Reten Days
NOTE
When changing job criteria from Reten Days to Reten Gen (or the reverse), previous job
criteria are lost and are not acted upon.
For retention criteria to hold across job executions, the jobs must be identical in all respects.
(For example, if a job is transferred to a different group, it is treated as a different job for
purposes of retention. In this case, retention values are reset, and retention is calculated from
the moment of transfer.)

Alternate names for the Reten Days parameter are listed below.
Component
Parameter Name
CONTROL-M/EM
Utilities
RETEN_DAYS
Reporting Facility
RETEN DAYS
CONTROL-M for z/OS
RETENTION: # OF DAYS TO KEEP
CONTROL-M/EM API
reten_days
281
Reten Gen
Reten Gen
Maximum number of generations of the job to keep in the History Jobs file. For z/OS
jobs, only.
NOTE
At sites that do not use the History Jobs file, this parameter is not relevant and is not
displayed.
Format
Usage
Optional.
Format
00 - 99 generations.
Note: When the Reten Gen field is left blank, History Jobs file information
is kept as specified by the Reten Days parameter. For more information,
see Reten Days on page 280.
AutoEdit
Support

Related parameters
Reten Days
Reten Gen cannot be specified when Reten Days is specified.

Note: When specifying a value for RETENTION: # OF GENERATIONS
TO KEEP (Reten Gen) from the CONTROL-M for z/OS interface, leave
RETENTION: # OF DAYS TO KEEP blank.
General information
Jobs in the History Jobs file are easier to restore to the Active Jobs file (for example,
for restart) than jobs archived to CDAM. Therefore, it may be desirable to retain
several of the most current generations of the job in the History Jobs file.
Reten Gen enables specification of the number of generations of the job to keep in the
History Jobs file. Once the specified number of generations has been reached, as a
new generation is added to the History Jobs file, the earliest remaining generation is
deleted.
Reten Days and Reten Gen are mutually exclusive. A value can be specified for either,
but not both.
282
Reten Gen
NOTE
When changing job criteria from Reten Days to Reten Gen (or the reverse), previous job
criteria are lost and are not acted upon.
For retention criteria to hold across job executions, the jobs must be identical in all respects.
(For example, if a job is transferred to a different group, it is treated as a different job for
purposes of retention. In this case, retention values are reset, and retention is calculated from
the moment of transfer.)

Alternate names for the Reten Gen parameter are listed below.
Component
Parameter Name
CONTROL-M/EM
Utilities
RETEN_GEN
Reporting Facility
RETEN GEN
CONTROL-M for z/OS
RETENTION: # OF GENERATIONS TO KEEP
CONTROL-M/EM API
reten_gen
283
Step Range
Step Range
Specifies a range of steps in the steps of an On PGMST statement.
NOTE
For z/OS jobs only.
Format
Usage
Optional
Format
Consists of the Name, From, and To subparameters described below.
Related parameters
On
statement
284
Specifies a range of steps within an On parameter statement. Specific actions

can be associated with the specified range of steps, instead of the full range
specified in the On parameter statement.
Step Range
Subparameters
Name
Name for the range. 1through 7 characters. Only trailing blanks are allowed in
this field.
From
First pgmstep or pgmstep,procstep in the range.

Note: pgmstep is the step name in the EXEC statement that identifies the
program to be executed:
//pgmstep EXEC PGM= pgmname
procstep is the step name in the EXEC statement that invokes the procedure: //
procstep EXEC procname
pgmstep values and procstep values can each be from 1 through 8 characters in
length, and must not contain blanks.
Non-English characters not allowed.
To
Last pgmstep or pgmstep,procstep in the range.

Note: The To subparameter is optional. If blank, its value defaults to the last
step in the job.
Non-English characters not allowed.
For more information, see the note for the From subparameter.
General information
Whenever a Step Range statement is specified, it eliminates the need to define
separate On PGMST, On PROCST, and On Codes statements and accompanying Do
actions for each step in the range. The defined Step Range Name can be used (without
redefining the range) in subsequent On PGMST, On PROCST, and On Codes
statements, by specifying the Step Range Name, preceded by an asterisk (*), in the On
PGMST field.
Any number of step ranges can be specified. After entering a Step Range parameter,
another Step Range parameter line is automatically displayed.
Using all runs of a job including restarts

When processing On blocks, CONTROL-M can incorporate the results of all previous
runs and restarts, filtering them for jobs restarted with the CONTROL-M for z/OS
RESTART, RECAPTURE CONDITION or ABEND CODES parameters.
CONTROL-M/Restart searches previous runs to determine which steps must be
considered part of the restarted job.
285
Step Range
For example, if one step finished successfully during its original run and another step
finished successfully after a restart, the On block check for the successful finish for
both steps produces a TRUE result and the On statement is satisfied.
Activation of this facility requires that the CONTROL-M for z/OS ALLRUNS
parameter in the CTRPARM member be set to YES. When activated, this facility may
apply to any specified step, step range, or to the +EVERY step value.

Alternate names for the Step Range parameter are listed below.
Component
Parameter Name
CONTROL-M/EM
Utilities
STEP_RANGE
Reporting Facility
Composed of the FROM PGMST, FROM PROCS

TO PGMSTEP, and TO PROCSTEP parameters.
CONTROL-M for z/OS
STEP RANGE
CONTROL-M/EM API
step_range

Alternate formats for the Step Range parameter are listed below.
Component
Parameter Name
CONTROL-M/EM
Utilities
STEP_RANGE is composed of the following parameters:
CONTROL-M for z/OS
286
NAME
FPGMS
First program step in the range. 1-8

character string.
FPROCS
First process step in the range. 1-8

character string.
TPGMS
Last program step in the range. 1-8

character string.
TPROCS
Last process step in the range. 1-8

character string.
STEP RANGE consists of the following subparameters

STEP RANGE
Equivalent to Name.
FR (PGM,PROC)
First program or process step in the

range. 1-8 character string.
TO
Last program or process step in the

range. 1-8 character string.
Step Range
Example 1: CONTROL-M/EM Job Editing Form

Define program steps STEP20 through STEP29A as step range DF2. If any of these
steps produce any system or user abend (except user abend U2030), rerun the job and
shout a message to TSO-P43.
Example 2: CONTROL-M for z/OS interface

Define program steps STEP20 through STEP29A as step range DF2. If any of these
steps produce any system or user abend (except user abend U2030), rerun the job and
shout a message to TSO-P43.
JOB: PRDKPL01 LIB CTM.PROD.SCHEDULE TABLE: PRODKPL
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------+
===========================================================================
OUT
AUTO-ARCHIVE Y SYSDB Y MAXDAYS MAXRUNS
RETENTION: # OF DAYS TO KEEP 030 # OF GENERATIONS TO KEEP
SYSOUT OP (C,D,F,N,R) FROM
MAXRERUN RERUNMEM INTERVAL FROM
STEP RANGE DF2 FR (PGM.PROC) STEP20 . TO STEP29A .
STEP RANGE FR (PGM.PROC) . TO .
ON PGMST *DF2 PROCST CODES S**** U**** NU2030 A/O
DO RERUN
DO SHOUT TO TSO-P43 URGENCY R
= JOB PRDKPL03 ABENDED, THE JOB IS RERUN
DO
ON PGMST PROCST CODES A/O
DO
SHOUT WHEN TO URGN
MS
======= >>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>> END OF SCHEDULING PARAMETERS <<<<<<<<<<<<<<<< =====
287
Step Range
288
Chapter

The parameters in this chapter determine what to do with the data resulting from a
job run.
Table 19
Job Output parameters summary
Parameter
Description
Auto-Archive
Determines whether SYSDATA (job output) is to be archived.
Shout
Specifies messages to be sent (shouted) to various destinations

on various occasions.
SYSOUT Handling
Specifies how the jobs log should be handled after the job
completes with a completion status of OK.
Chapter 8 Job Output parameters
289
Auto-Archive
Auto-Archive
The Auto-Archive parameter determines whether SYSDATA (job output) should be
archived.
NOTE
The Auto-Archive parameter is relevant only for jobs to be run in z/OS environments or
OpenVMS computers. The parameter is displayed only if CONTROL-R is selected in the
CONTROL-M Definition window in CONTROL-M/Desktop.
Format
Usage
Optional
Format
Check box in the CONTROL-M/EM Job Editing form.
When this check box is selected, job output is archived.
When this check box is cleared, job output is not archived. In this case,
CONTROL-R cannot restart the job, and SYSDATA viewing under
CONTROL-M for z/OS is not possible.
When the Auto-Archive check box is selected, the subparameters described below
can also be specified.
AutoEdit No. An AutoEdit variable or expression cannot be specified as all or part of the
Support value for this parameter.
Subparameters
290
Parameter
Description
SYS DB
A check box in the CONTROL-M/EM Job editing form:
If this check box is selected, a single data set is used for archiving the
SYSDATA of all jobs until it is full. When the first archive data set is full,
another SYSDATA data set is allocated and used. BMC Software
recommends this method.
If this check box is cleared, a separate data set is created for the SYSDATA
of each job run.
Max Days...
A number from 00 through 99.

Indicates the maximum number of days to retain the SYSDATA archive data
set for jobs that ended NOTOK.
Max Runs...
Indicates the maximum number of job runs to retains the SYSDATA archive
data set for jobs that ended NOTOK. Valid values:
a number from 00 through 99
blank (there is no maximum number of job runs)
Auto-Archive
General information
The Auto-Archive parameter enables you to decide whether to archive job output
(SYSDATA). SYSDATA refers to all information in the job log, the expanded JCL (job
script), and to the output messages of the job.
While archiving SYSDATA is normally desirable, it might not be desirable for cyclic
jobs, started tasks, or frequently repeated jobs that do not require restart.
BMC Software recommends that you select the SYSDB check box. BMC Software does
not recommend creating a separate data set for each run because:
Creating many data sets consumes a large amount of space in the disk VTOC.
Each data set is allocated on a track basis. If the SYSDATA does not completely fill
the track, large amounts of disk space may be wasted.
When archiving SYSDATA, BMC Software recommends that value 99 not be

specified for the Max Wait parameter for cyclic jobs or started tasks. Otherwise, these
jobs, which are never automatically deleted from the Active Jobs file, can cause the
disk to fill up with unnecessary archived SYSDATA. For more information, see Max
Wait on page 159.
NOTE
Specified parameters take effect only during execution of the New Day procedure
(CONTDAY) or the CONTROL-M CTMCAJF utility. Therefore, it is possible to find more
generations of the same job than the current value of Max Runs.
Whenever a job is deleted from the Active Jobs file and does not reside in the History
file, its SYSDATA is deleted regardless of Max Days or Max Runs.
The Max Days and Max Runs parameters define retention criteria for the archived
SYSDATA of jobs that ended NOTOK. Defaults for these parameters are defined
using CONTROL-M/Restart installation parameters. Max Days and Max Runs values
in a job definition are used to override the CONTROL-M/Restart defaults. If both
parameters are specified, retention is limited by the parameter that is satisfied first.
The Auto-Archive parameter is relevant only for jobs to be run in z/OS environments
or OpenVMS computers.
291
Auto-Archive

Alternate names for the Auto-Archive parameter are listed below.
292
Component
Parameter Name
AUTOARCH
Reporting Facility
AUTO ARCHIVE
CONTROL-M for z/OS
AUTO-ARCHIVE
CONTROL-M for z/OS

Utilities
AUTOARC
CONTROL-M/EM API
auto_archive
sys_db
arch_max_days
arch_max_runs
Shout
Shout
The Shout parameter gives you the ability to create a message that may be sent
(shouted) to one or more specified destinations when certain conditions are
encountered.
Format
Usage
Optional
Format
The Shout parameter consists of the subparameters described in Table 20 on

page 294.
AutoEdit
Support

Related parameters
Parameter
Description
Do Shout
The Do Shout parameter specifies a message to be sent (shouted) to a

destination when the On Statement/Code criteria are satisfied. For more
information, see Do Shout on page 250.
293
Shout
Subparameters
Table 20
Shout subparameters (part 1 of 5)
Parameter
Format
When
States what should cause the Shout message to be sent.

Choose one of the following values:
Exectime
Send the message if the jobs elapsed runtime is outside a specified limit. The limit is
specified in the Time field. A limit can be expressed as the actual elapsed minutes of the job
run, or as a deviation from the jobs (statistical) average runtime. The limit for Exectime
can be expressed in any of the following formats:
>n The message is sent if the elapsed runtime of the job is greater than n minutes. in
z/OS environments, n is a number from 0 through 999. On other computers, n is a number
from 1 through 999.
<n The message is sent if the elapsed runtime of the job is less than n minutes. n is a
number from 1 through 999.
+n The message is sent if the elapsed runtime of the job exceeds its average execution
time by at least n minutes. n is a number from 1 through 999.
+n% The message is sent if the elapsed runtime of the job exceeds its average
execution time by at least n%. n is a number from 1 through 900.
-n The message is sent if the elapsed runtime of the job is at least n minutes less than
its average execution time. n is a number from 1 through 999.
-n% The message is sent if the elapsed runtime of the job is at least n% less than its
average execution time. n is a number from 1 through 99.
Note: A job processing definition can contain more than one Shout parameter with a When
of Exectime. For more information, see examples of the use of Exectime below.
Late Sub
Send the message if the job is still not submitted and cannot be submitted at the time
specified in the accompanying Parm (time) field.
Specify the time in hhmm format. (In CONTROL-M for z/OS, you can alternatively specify
an * for the time; this results in use of the jobs calculated DUE IN time to determine if the
job was not submitted on time.) By default, a valid time must be in the range of 00:00
through 23:59. However, if Time Synonym (in Tools/Options) is checked, a valid time
must be in the range from NewDay time until NewDay Time-plus-23:59. For example, if
New Day time is 8:00 A.M., the range of valid times is from 08:00 until 31:59.
The message is sent only if the job is actually not submittable. That is, if a runtime criterion
(in condition, quantitative resource, and so on) is not met at the given time.
However, if a job is ordered after the specified time but starts running immediately
because it meets all runtime criteria, the Late Sub parameter doesn't apply.
294
Shout
Table 20
Parameter
When
continued

Format
Late Time
Send the message if the job does not finish executing by the time specified in the
accompanying Parm (time) field. In CONTROL-M for z/OS, this parameter appears as
LATE.
Specify the time in hhmm format. (In CONTROL-M for z/OS, you can alternatively specify
an * for the time; this results in use of the jobs calculated DUE OUT time to determine if
the job is late.) By default, a valid time must be in the range of 00:00 through 23:59.
However, if Time Synonym (in Tools/Options) is checked, a valid time must be in the
range from New Day time until New Day Time-plus-23:59. For example, if New Day time
is 8:00 A.M., the range of valid times is from 08:00 until 31:59.
Note: No message is sent if the job is being rerun.
Parm
NOTOK
Send the message if the job terminates with a completion status of NOTOK.
OK
Send the message if the job terminates with a completion status of OK.
RERUN
Send the message if the jobs completion status was set to Rerun (not valid for scheduling
group entities).
Used to specify additional parameters required for the When options Exectime, Late Sub, and
Late Time.
295
Shout
Table 20
Parameter
Format
Days Offset Sets the number of days relative to the ODAT by which the sending of the Shout message is
offset. The value of this parameter is relevant only for the LateTime and LateSub parameters
(see Late Sub).
[Only for jobs running under CONTROL-M for z/OS version 6.2.00 or later.]
Valid values:
a number from 0 through 120
blank no offset. If the Parm (time) value is *, leave this field blank.
To
Logical destination of the Shout message. Mandatory.

Destination is the name of an entry in the Shout Destination table.
Valid values
a user logged onto the CONTROL-M installation
a users mail in the CONTROL-M installation
a specific terminal
system console
alerts window in all CONTROL-M/EM workstations connected to the specified
CONTROL-M installation
Note: The CONTROL-M/EM workstations to which an alert is issued may be limited by
user authorizations. For more information, see the security chapter in the CONTROL-M
CONTROL-M log
All Shout messages are recorded in the CONTROL-M log. Select the log as a destination
only when you do not wish to send the message to an additional destination.
296
Length
Case Sensitive
Yes
Shout
Table 20
Parameter
Format
To
continued
Invalid Characters
AutoEdit Support

z/OS:
The following are valid values for Destination:
U-userid
Writes the message to the IOA Log file

userid is a user ID consisting of 1 through 8 characters but containing no
blanks
OPER [-n]
Sends a scrollable message to the operator console

n is an optional 2-digit route code
If a route code is not specified, the default routes are Master Console
and Programmer Information (1 and 11). For more information
regarding route codes, refer to the IBM publication Routing and
Descriptor Codes, GC38-1102.
OPER2[-n]
Sends an unscrollable message to the operator console

n is an optional 2-digit route code
If a route code is not specified, the default routes are Master Console
and Programmer Information (1 and 11). For more information
regarding route codes, refer to the IBM publication Routing and
Descriptor Codes, GC38-1102.
297
Shout
Table 20
Parameter
Format
Destination TSO - logonid or

continued
T - logonid
Where logonid is one of the following:

a valid logon identity consisting of 1 through 7 characters
a valid group identity found within the IOA Dynamic Destination
Table
An optional second value, indicating the computer or node of the TSO
logonid, can be specified, as follows:
Under JES2:
;Nn, ;Mm or ;NnMm, where
m is the ID of the computer in JES2 (not the 4-character SMF
system ID)
n is the 1- to 2-character JES/NJE node ID
Under JES3:
Lname, where Lname is the logical JES name of the computer (that
is, the name as used in the JES3 command *T, not the SMF system
ID)
Note: A Shout to a TSO user preforms a TSO SEND command, which
may require authorization at the receiving end.
Urgency
U-M: mail_ name_

prefix
Sends a message to the recipient identified by mail_name_prefix, a mail

name prefix consisting of 1 through 12 characters (z/OS platform: 1
through 8 characters)
U-ECS
Sends a message that is displayed in the CONTROL-M/EM Alerts

window
Urgency of the Shout message directed to the Alerts window. Urgency assigned to the Shout
message affects the appearance of the message in the Alerts window.
Urgency levels are:
R - Regular (Default)
U - Urgent
V - Very Urgent
Message
298
Text of the Shout message.

Length

Case Sensitive
Yes
Invalid Characters
None
AutoEdit Support
Yes. The message can include AutoEdit variables, including any

combination of text, CONTROL-M system variables, job submission
variables and User variables (created using the AutoEdit Assignment
parameter). However, the length of the message after decoding cannot
exceed the length specified above. For more information, see
Chapter 15, AutoEdit facility.
Shout
General information
A Shout message is a message sent to one or more destinations when the condition
specified by the When parameter is satisfied.
The Do Shout parameter (described in Do Shout on page 250) can be used to issue
Shout messages conditioned by an On Statement/Code parameter.
Shout messages can also be issued from the data center using the CTMSHOUT utility.
For more information, see the Utilities chapter in your CONTROL-M Administrator
Guide.
When Exectime values are specified with a + or sign (that is, when elapsed runtime
is compared to average runtime), the Shout applies only if there are current statistics
data for the job (containing statistics for at least one of the last 20 runs of the job).
If current job statistics data exists, all available elapsed-time statistics for the last 20
job runs are averaged to generate the average runtime, and the current runtime is
compared to this figure according to the specified criteria.
If no job statistics data exist, or if the data is not current (there are no elapsed-time
statistics for any of the last 20 job runs), the Shout parameter is not applied.
More about Exectime

The following additional considerations apply to the use of Exectime:
When Exectime values are negative (for example, -n; -n%), the check can be
performed only after the job has finished running.
When Exectime values are positive (for example, +n; +n%), the check can be
performed (and if the elapsed runtime limits are exceeded, the message can be
shouted) before the job has finished running.
Relative Exectime limits should not exceed 24 hours. When relative Exectime
limits exceed 24 hours (that is, if +n(%) of the average runtime exceeds 24 hours),
the message is shouted if and when processing reaches 24 hours.
If a relative Exectime is not specified prior to job submission, but is specified

afterwards (for example, the job is Held, the parameters changed, and the job then
Freed), the Exectime value is ignored.
299
Shout
More about destinations

When the destination is a user, the message is also sent to the users mail.
If not found in the Shout Destination table, the destination is assumed to be a user
name. In this instance, the Shout message is sent to the users terminal and the users
mail.
The Shout Destination table is maintained by the CONTROL-M administrator.
Several such tables may exist. Each table contains the same logical destinations, but
the physical (actual) destinations can vary from table to table.
Only one table is in use (active) at any time, as determined by the administrator.
A Shout message sent to a logical destination is directed by CONTROL-M to the
corresponding physical destination listed in the active Shout Destination table.
Availability
For z/OS jobs
Cyclic jobs cannot contain the Shout When Rerun parameter.

Alternate names for the Shout parameter are listed below.
Component
Parameter Name
SHOUT
-shout
CONTROL-M for z/OS
SHOUT
CONTROL-M/EM API
shout
Example 1: Sends Shout message to a specified user when

job ends OK
Shout Statements:
When OK
Destination SHIFTMNGR
Urgency R
Message NIGHTSHIFT RUN COMPLETED
The message is sent to CONTROL-M logical destination SHIFTMNGR.

300
Shout
Example 2: Sends Shout message to CONTROL-M/EM when

job terminates NOTOK
If the job terminates with a status of NOTOK, send a message to CONTROL-M/EM,
indicating the completion code:
Shout Statements:
When NOTOK
Destination ECS
Urgency U
Message Job NOTOK Completion code=%%COMPSTAT
The message is sent to the CONTROL-M/EM Alerts window.
Example 3: Sends Shout message when job runtime is less

than expected
Given that a job whose average run time is 50 minutes completes in 40 minutes.
The job processing definition contains a Shout statement with When Exectime.
The following table indicates which Time parameter values would and which would
not cause a Shout message to be issued:
Shout Message Issued
Shout Message Not Issue
>39
>40
<41
<40
-10
-11
-20%
-21%
301
Shout
Example 4: No Shout message although job runtime is

more than expected
Given that a job whose average run time is 50 minutes completes in 90 minutes.
The job processing definition contains a Shout statement with When Exectime.
The following table indicates which Time parameter values would and which would
not cause a Shout message to be issued:
302
Shout Message Issued
Shout Message Not Issue
>89
>90
<91
<90
+41
+40
+79%
+80%
SYSOUT Handling
SYSOUT Handling
The SYSOUT Handling parameter indicates how the jobs log file (SYSOUT) should
be handled after the job ends with a status of OK.
Format
Usage
Optional
Note: This parameter is sometimes referred to as the Option and Prm
parameters.
Format
List box in the Job Editing form.

Valid values:
None
Change job class (z/OS only)
Delete output
Copy output
Move output
Release for printer
Each value is described in detail in Table 21.

For most of these options, a second field is displayed. This second field is
sometimes referred to as the Prm parameter.
The format of the Prm parameter is as follows:
Length
Computers other than z/OS: Up to 255 characters.
z/OS: Up to 44 characters, as follows:

File Name (Copy): up to 44 characters
New Class Name (Change job class): 1 character
New Destination (Move): up to 8 characters
Case sensitive Yes

Invalid
Characters
Blanks
AutoEdit
Support
Yes. An AutoEdit variable or expression can be specified as all

or part of the value for this parameter.
NOTE
Some SYSOUT Handling options (those that are selected from the SYSOUT Handling list)
require you to supply additional input. When such an option is selected from the PostProc
panel, an additional text box is be displayed. The label for this text box is different for each
SYSOUT Handling option that is selected. When an additional text box is displayed, enter the
appropriate information in it.
303
SYSOUT Handling
Table 21
SYSOUT Handling formatting (part 1 of 4)
Value
Description
Delete
Deletes the log file.
Copy
Copies the log file.

Note: SYSOUTs should not be copied to a CONTROL-M internal directory or
subdirectory (for example, a subdirectory underneath the SYSOUT
directory).
Specify the log file name and full path to which the log file must be copied in
the File Name text box. The following can occur:
Log file name
Full path
Remark
Specified
Specified
The log file is copied as specified in the

File Name text box.
Specified
Not specified The log file is copied to the job owners

home directory using the file name
specified. For jobs executed on remote
hosts, the log file is copied to the agent
home directory through which the job
was submitted.
Not specified
Specified
Not specified
Not specified The log file is copied to the job owners

home directory using the default file
name determined according to the
considerations below. For jobs executed
on remote hosts, the log file is copied to
the agent home directory through which
the job was submitted
The log file is copied to a default file

considerations below, to the full path
specified.
File name considerations

For Microsoft Windows:
<Mem_Name>|<Job_Name>_<order_num>_<rerun_num>.DAT
For OpenVMS:
<Mem Name>.TXT
For UNIX:
<Mem_Name>|<Job_Name>.LOG<order_num>.<rerun_num>
For OS/2, the full path name must be specified.
304
SYSOUT Handling
Table 21
Value
Description
Copy
(continued)
File name considerations (continued)

Special notes for iSeries (AS/400) computers:
This second field is mandatory. It indicates the database file to which the job
log is copied.
The file must be specified in one of the following formats:
library/file
*LIBL/file
file
Release
If the specified file does not exist, it is created. The job log is placed in the
file as member CM<AS/400_Job Number> (the first line of the member
contains details that identify the job).
If the specified file already exists, and its record length is 132 or more, the
job log is placed in the file as a new member identified as above.
If the specified file already exists, and its record length is less than 132,
the job log is truncated and placed in the file as a new member identified
as above.
Releases the log file for printing on the specified printer/output queue.
A second field is displayed for the printer queue to which the log file should
be released.
Note: The default printer/output queue and the SYSOUT directory are
determined by CONTROL-M system parameters on each computer. For
more information, see your CONTROL-M administrator.
Special notes for iSeries (AS/400) computers:
If an output queue is not specified, the output of the job is sent to the
queue specified by the CONTROL-M Default Output Queue system
parameter.
The name of the output queue must be specified in one of the following
formats:
library/outq
*LIBL/outq
outq
If outq (without library) or *LIBL/outq is specified, the specified outq is

taken from the *LIBL (Library list) of CONTROL-M. If the specified outq
is not found in the Library list, the Release option is not executed.
If library/outq is specified, the output queue is taken from the specified

library. If the specified outq is not found in the specified library, the
Release option is not executed.
305
SYSOUT Handling
Table 21
Value
Description
Move
Moves the log file and deletes it from the CONTROL-M SYSOUT directory.
The New Destination text box is displayed for the location to which the log
file should be moved.
Note: SYSOUTs should not be moved to a CONTROL-M internal directory
or subdirectory (for example, a subdirectory underneath the SYSOUT
directory).
Specify the log file name and full path to which the log file must be moved in
the File Name text box. The following can occur:
Log file name
Full path
Remark
Specified
Specified
The log file is moved as specified in the

File Name text box.
Specified
Not specified The log file is moved to the job owners

home directory using the file name
specified. For jobs executed on remote
hosts, the log file is moved to the agent
home directory through which the job
was submitted.
Not specified
Specified
Not specified
Not specified The log file is moved to the job owners

home directory using the default file
considerations below. For jobs executed
on remote hosts, the log file is moved to
the agent home directory through which
the job was submitted
The log file is moved to a default file

considerations below, to the full path
specified.
File name considerations

For Microsoft Windows:
<Mem_Name>|<Job_Name>_<order_num>_<rerun_num>.DAT
For OpenVMS:
<Mem Name>.TXT
For UNIX:
<Mem_Name>|<Job_Name>.LOG<order_num>.<rerun_num>
For OS/2, the full path name must be specified.
306
SYSOUT Handling
Table 21
Value
Description
Move
(continued)
File name considerations (continued)

For iSeries (AS/400) and UNISYS computers:
The second field indicates the outq (output queue) to which the job log spool
file should be moved.
Change Jobs
Class
If an output queue is not specified, the job log spool file is moved to the
queue specified by the CONTROL-M Default Output Queue system
parameter.
The name of the output queue must be specified in one of the following
formats:
library/outq
*LIBL/outq
outq
If outq (without library) or *LIBL/outq is specified, the specified outq is

taken from the *LIBL (Library list) of CONTROL-M. If the specified outq
is not found in the Library list, the Move option is not executed.
If library/outq is specified, the output queue is taken from the specified

library. If the specified outq is not found in the specified library, the
Move option is not executed.
Changes the class of job output. [z/OS only]

The New Class Name text box and From Class text box are displayed.
Enter the new class name (1 character) in the text box (Mandatory). An
asterisk (*) indicates the jobs original MSGCLASS.
Optionally, you can specify a class in the From Class text box. If a class is
specified, SYSOUT Handling is limited to only SYSOUTs from the specified
class.
Related parameters
Parameter
Description
Do Sysout
The Do SYSOUT parameter specifies how the jobs output should be

handled when the On Statement/Code criteria are satisfied. For more
information, see Do Sysout on page 253.
General information
SYSOUT Handling is specified in the Postproc panel of the Job Editing form.
307
SYSOUT Handling
If no SYSOUT handling is specified (or the job does not end OK), and no Do Sysout
statement (in the On Statement/Code parameters) is activated, the jobs log file is
placed in the location determined by CONTROL-M until it removed by the New Day
procedure.
NOTE
Note: The CONTROL-M Automatic Log Copy system parameter is not affected in any way by
specified SYSOUT Handling.

Alternate names for the SYSOUT Handling parameter are listed below.
Component
Parameter Name
Reporting Facility
SYSOUT Handling is composed of two sub parameters:

SYSOPT
Equivalent to the SYSOUT handling text

box.
PARM
Equivalent to the variously-named text

boxes that are displayed when specific
SYSOUT Handling options are chosen.
CONTROL-M/Server
Utilities
-SYSOUT
CONTROL-M for z/OS
SYSOUT
CONTROL-M/EM API
SYSOUT handling is composed of three subparameters:

sysout_from_
class
Equivalent to From Class
sysout_option
Equivalent to Option.
sysout_
parameter
Equivalent to Parameter.
Formats in other CONTROL-M components

Alternate formats for the Auto-Archive parameter are listed below.
308
Component
Format
Reporting Facility
The values for SYSOPT and PARM are strings.
SYSOUT Handling
Component
Format
CONTROL-M/Server
Utilities
Two values are supplied for -SYSOUT:

<option>
<parameter>
CONTROL-M for z/OS
RELEASE
DELETE
COPY
MOVE
The appropriate value, depending on the

<option> value specified. String.
SYSOUT is composed of the following subparameters:

OP
Type of SYSOUT handling to perform.

Mandatory. Valid values are:
data
Relevant SYSOUT data. Mandatory and valid

only if the specified OP value is F, C, or N.
Valid values depend on the OP value:
FRM
C Change the class of the job output.

[z/OS, only.]
D Delete the job output.
F Copy the job output to file.
N Change the destination of the job
output.
R Release the job output.
F File name. String comprised of from 1

through 44 characters. All characters are
valid except blanks.
C New class (1 character). Any character
is valid except blank, but an asterisk (*)
indicates the original MSGCLASS of the
job.
N New destination (1 through 8
characters). All characters are valid except
blanks.
1-character value that identifies the class of job

output to process. Selected when C is the value
of OPT. [z/OS, only.] Optional.
Note: If a FRM class is not specified, all
SYSOUT classes are treated as a single, whole
unit.
Examples
All of the following examples presume a job completion status of OK.
309
SYSOUT Handling
Example 1: Release the Log file to the default printer

Sysout Handling
Option: Release
Example 2: [iSeries (AS/400)] Release the Log file to the

specified output queue
Sysout Handling
Option: Release
Parm: MYLIB/MYOUTQ
Example 3: OpenVMS and UNIX: Move the Log file

Move the log file to a file called test.log in the job owners home directory.
Sysout Handling
Option: Move
Parm: test.log
Example 4: UNIX: Copy the Log file to a directory

Copy the log file to a directory called prg2/test/. Use the default file name.
Sysout Handling
Option: Copy
Parm: prg2/test/
Example 5: UNIX: Copy the Log file to a file

Copy the log file to a file. The name of the log file is determined by the Job Name.
Sysout Handling
Option: Copy
310
Parm: prg2/%%JOBNAME
Chapter
Status parameters
The parameters in this chapter describe information that is collected as the result of a
job run. They have the following common characteristics:
These parameters are accessible only from the active environment.
Most of the values for these parameters are supplied by CONTROL-M, and many
cannot be modified by the user.
Most parameters are displayed in CONTROL-M/EM in the Active panel of the Job
Editing form.
These parameters can be used as filter criteria for selecting job definitions using the
CONTROL-M/EM utilities and the Reporting facility.
Their values can be displayed in reports generated by the Reporting facility.
Status parameters summary

The status parameters are summarized in Table 22.
Table 22
Status parameters summary (part 1 of 2)
Parameter
Description
Average Run Time
Average time taken, in minutes, for the job to run. This statistic is
compiled from the last successful runs of the job.
Current Status
Indicates the completion status of the job (for example,

Ended Not OK).
Deleted
Indicates if the job was deleted.
Chapter 9 Status parameters
311
Status parameters summary
Table 22
Status parameters summary (part 2 of 2)
Parameter
Description
Due In
Time and day at which the next run of the job should start executing.
+ num days
Due Out
312
The number of days that the start of job

execution is extended after the ODAT.
This subparameter is relevant only for jobs
running under CONTROL-M for z/OS
Time and day by which the next run of the job should stop executing.
Format
HHMM, where HH is a 2-digit number from

00 through 24.
+ num days
The number of days that the end of job

execution is extended after the ODAT.
This subparameter is relevant only for jobs
running under CONTROL-M for z/OS
Elapse
Length of time (in minutes) that the job is expected to run.
End Time
Indicates the time that the last run of the job ended.
From Proc
For z/OS jobs only with CONTROL-M/Restart: Procedure step from

which the job should be rerun.
From Step
For z/OS jobs only with CONTROL-M/Restart: Step from which the
job should be rerun.
Hold
Indicates if the job is currently being held.
Job ID
Unique serial number assigned to the job by the CONTROL-M

server.
Next Time
Indicates the next time that the job runs. For reruns or cyclic jobs that
use the Interval option.
NJE
Indicates that the job was sent for execution to a computer that is
connected to CONTROL-M through NJE (the node does not have a
shared spool with CONTROL-M).
NJE Node
Node ID of the NJE terminal.
Rerun Counter
Indicates how many times the job was run.
Restart
Indicates if the job was restarted.
Search Count
Number of times CONTROL-M has looked for the job.
Standard Deviation
Standard deviation from the average runtime. This statistic is

compiled from the last successful runs of the job.
Start Time
Indicates the time that the last run of the job started.
To Proc
For z/OS jobs only with CONTROL-M/Restart: Procedure step until

which the job should be rerun.
To Step
For z/OS jobs only with CONTROL-M/Restart: Step until which the
job should be rerun.
Chapter
10
10
SAP parameters
The parameters described in this chapter are for the CONTROL-M/Control Module
for SAP panels and windows available in the Job Editing form when the CONTROLM/CM for SAP panel is imported into CONTROL-M/EM and CONTROLM/Desktop. These are as follows:
SAP panel, listed in Table 23

Add ABAP window, listed in Table 24
Add External Program window, listed in Table 25
Add External Command window listed in Table 26
SAP Data Archiving panel, listed in Table 27
SAP-BW (Business Warehouse) panel, listed in Table 28, Table 29, and Table 30.
NOTE
The SAP parameter format is as follows:
SAPR3-<parameter_name>
SAP parameters that describe an action that can occur more than once in a session are
enumerated, as follows. The <nn> below represents a numerical value:
SAPR3-<parameter_name><nn>
Certain parameters that are described in this chapter as Mandatory are mandatory
only when using the SAP panel in CONTROL-M/Desktop.
When submitting jobs differently, the default value may be used by CONTROLM/CM for SAP.
NOTE
Certain parameters are displayed in the SAP panels after a job has been submitted. These
parameters are for notification purposes only, and have a read-only status.
The parameter descriptions are in alphabetical order.
Chapter 10 SAP parameters
313
Table 23
SAP panel parameters summary
Parameter
Description
Account
The name of the Account.
Copy From Step
Indicates from which ABAP or External Program step in the original

job to begin the copying procedure.
Detect Spawned Jobs A spawned job is a job created by another (parent) job, and which is
monitored by CONTROL-M. This parameter indicates whether to
detect and monitor jobs that were spawned by the current SAP job.
Job Class
The job submission priority (in SAP).
Job Count
A unique SAP job ID number.
Job Mode
Determines the task that the job performs.
Job Name
The name of the job to be monitored or submitted.
Job Type
Read-only fields that indicate the nature of the SAP job in Active job
mode. The type is indicated by the check boxes that are selected.
Only relevant for jobs extracted by the Extractor process.
New Job Name
The name of the newly created job (in copy mode).
Output Management The location to which the spool and joblog should be copied.
QID
The Batch Input Session Queue ID number. Relevant only in Batch

Input mode.
SAP Job Status
The status of the job in SAP. Relevant only after job submission,
while in Active Job Mode.
Spool List Recipient
Recipient of the print job.
Spool List Type
Type of the recipient of the print job.
Start Condition
Specifies whether the job should run

with the ASAP option
immediately
after an event
Steps
The steps (actions) to be performed as part of the SAP job.
Step Type
Specify that a job should only run when there are resources available.
Target Group
The Application Server on which the job runs.
Target Server (1)
The host computer on which the external program runs.
Table 24
314
Add ABAP window parameters (part 1 of 2)
Parameter
Description
ABAP Program
The name of the program
Archive ID
The SAP ArchiveLink Storage system ID
Archive Text
A free text description of the archive location
Authorization
A user with print authorization
Columns
The maximum number of characters on an output line
Delete After Print
Indicates whether the report is deleted after printing
Department
The spool department
Document Type
The archive object document type
Table 24
Add ABAP window parameters (part 2 of 2)
Parameter
Description
Event
The event ID that indicates the event name of the After Event start
condition
Event Parameter
The event parameter for a specific event ID
Information Field
Archive information
Job Name
A read-only field that displays the job name
Language
The language of the ABAP step
Layout
The print layout format
Name
The spool list name
New Spool Request
Indicates whether to request a new spool
Number of Copies
The number of copies to print
Object Type
The archive object type
OS Cover Sheet
Type of cover page for output
Output Device
The designated printer logical name
Owner
The step owner
Print Archive Mode
Determines whether the spool of the step is printed to an output

device, to the archive, or both
Print Expiration
The number of days after which the print job expires.
Recipient
The name of the recipient of the job output
Rows
The maximum number of rows per page
SAP Cover Page
The type of cover page for output
Selection Cover Page Indicates whether a cover page should be used

Time of Print
Indicates whether to print the job output immediately, print the job
later, or send the job to the spooler
Titles
The spool list titles
Use ABAP Program

Default
A check box that exists for both the Rows and Columns parameters.
Indicates whether the ABAP program default should be used, rather
than a number in the Rows or Columns box
Variant Name
The Variant name
Table 25
Add external program window parameters (part 1 of 2)
Parameter
Description
Activate Traces
Indicates whether SAP activates traces
External Program
The external program name
Job Waiting for

External
Termination
Indicates whether SAP waits for the external program to end
Log External
Errors in Joblog
Indicates whether SAP writes the error in a joblog
315
Table 25
Parameter
Description
Log External
Output to Joblog
Indicates whether SAP writes the output in a joblog
Parameters
The parameters for an external program
Owner
The step owner
Target Host
The host computer on which the external program runs
Table 26
Add external command window parameters
Parameter
Description
Activate Traces
Indicates whether SAP activates traces
External Program
The external program name
Job Waiting for

External
Termination
Indicates whether SAP waits for the external program to end
Log External
Errors in Joblog
Indicates whether SAP writes the error in a joblog
Log External
Output to Joblog
Indicates whether SAP writes the output in a joblog
Operating sys
List of operating systems
Owner
The step owner
Parameters
The parameters for an external program
Target Server (1)
The server on which the external command runs
Table 27
316
Add external program window parameters (part 2 of 2)
SAP panel for data archiving parameters (part 1 of 2)
Parameter
Description
Account
The name of the Account
Archiving Object
The name of the archiving object in SAP
Check Sessions
Enables the user to check if an incomplete archiving session

exists for a specific archiving object
Check Variant
Enables the user to check if a Write job already exists with

the specific variant for the archiving object defined for this
job
Copy Spool To
The name and path of the file to which the spool should be
copied
Detect Spawned Jobs
Monitors the spawned jobs of an original SAP job
Job Class
The job submission priority (in SAP)
Job Mode
Determines the task that the job performs
Job Name
The name of the job to be monitored or reported
Print Parameters
For more information, see Table 24 on page 314
Session Number
Indicates the archiving session number in SAP
Table 27
SAP panel for data archiving parameters (part 2 of 2)
Parameter
Description
Start Condition
Specifies that a job should run only when there are SAP
resources available
Target Server (1)
The Application Server on which the job runs
Variant Name
The name of the Variant
Table 28
SAP-BW General panel parameters
Parameter
Description
Account
The name of the Account
CONTROL-M Job Name
For more information, see Job Name
SAP-BW Business Process

Type
Determines the task that the job performs. The option

selected (Process Chain or InfoPackage) determines which
subparameters are available
Table 29
SAP-BW panel, Process Chain parameters
Parameter
Description
Process Chain Description
Describes a Process Chain
Process Chain ID
A unique BW-generated ID of a Process Chain
Process Chain Log ID
A unique BW-generated ID for the Process Chain running

session. Relevant only after job submission, in Active Job
Mode
Rerun Options
Indicates how the Process Chain should be rerun
Table 30
SAP-BW panel, InfoPackage parameters
Parameter
Description
Background Job Name
The name of the InfoPackage's background job name
InfoPackage Description
A description of the InfoPackage.
InfoPackage RNR
A unique BW-generated ID for the InfoPackage's running

session. Relevant only after job submission, in Active Job
Mode
InfoPackage Tech. Name
A unique BW-generated InfoPackage ID
Job Count
The InfoPackages background job count. Relevant only after

job submission, in Active Job Mode
317
ABAP Program
ABAP Program
The name of the ABAP program.
Format
Usage
Mandatory
Availability
Add ABAP window in Create job mode
Format
Text box
Valid Values
1-40 characters
Case Sensitive
Uppercase only
Invalid Characters
Special characters not permitted

Blanks permitted
Variable Name
318
%%SAPR3-STEP-S<nn>-PROGRAM
Account
Account
The name of the Account.
Format
Usage
Mandatory
Format
Text box
Valid Values
1-30 characters
Case Sensitive
Uppercase only
Invalid Characters
Blanks
Variable Name
%%SAPR3-ACCOUNT
General information
This parameter is mapped to the CONTROL-M/EM Owner parameter.
The Account is a profile. The remaining parameters are predefined according to the
Account, when the Account is created.
The Account parameter must be specified for every SAP job.
319
Activate Traces
Activate Traces
Indicates whether SAP activates traces.
Format
Usage
Optional
Availability
Add External Program window or Add External Command window

in Create job mode
Format
Check box
Valid Values
320
X: (Selected) - active
N: (Cleared) - not active
Default
X (Selected)
Variable Name
%%SAPR3-STEP-S<nn>-ACTIVATE_TRACE
Archive ID
Archive ID
SAP ArchiveLink Storage system ID.
Format
Usage
Availability
Optional
Print Parameters window in Write job mode (SAP Data

Archiving panel)
Only enabled if Print Archive Mode is set to Archive or Print &

Archive
Format
Text box
Valid Values
2 characters
Default
ZZ
Case Sensitive
Yes
Invalid Characters
Only trailing blank spaces permitted
Variable Name
%%SAPR3-STEP-S<nn>-ARCH_ID
XBP Interface
This parameter is functional in:
XBP 2.0, or
XBP 1.0 with CONTROL-M Function Modules installed (when

Use Extended is selected)
321
Archive Text
Archive Text
A free text description of the archive location.
Format
Usage
Availability
322
Optional

Archiving panel)

Archive
Format
Text box
Valid Values
1-40 characters
Case Sensitive
Yes
Invalid Characters
Blanks
Variable Name
%%SAPR3-STEP-S<nn>-ARCH_TEXT
XBP Interface
XBP 2.0, or

Archiving Object
Archiving Object
The name of the archiving object in SAP Data Archiving jobs.
Format
Usage
Mandatory
Format
Text box
Valid Values
1-10 characters
Case Sensitive
Uppercase only
Invalid Characters
Blanks
Variable Name
%%SAPR3-DA_ARC_OBJ
General information
The Archiving Object parameter is only relevant for SAP Data Archiving jobs.
323
Authorization
Authorization
User with print authorization.
Format
Usage
Availability
324
Optional

Archiving panel)
Format
Text box
Valid Values
1-12 characters
Case Sensitive
Yes
Invalid Characters
None
Variable Name
%%SAPR3-STEP-S<nn>-PRINT_AUTH
Background Job Name
Background Job Name

Name of the InfoPackage background job name.
Format
Usage
Optional
Availability
InfoPackage SAP-BW Business Process Type
Format
Text box
Valid Values
1-25 characters
Note: The BI_BTCH prefix is automatically added to the beginning of
the job name in SAP-BW.
If no value is entered, SAP-BW generates a name for the background job
Case Sensitive
No
Invalid Characters None

Variable Name
%%SAPR3-BACKJOBNAME
325
Check Sessions
Check Sessions
Enables the user to check if an incomplete archiving session exists for a specific
archiving object. An incomplete archiving session is one for which not all Delete jobs
ended successfully.
Format
Usage
Optional
Availability
Write job mode in the SAP Data Archiving panel
Format
Check box
Valid Values
X: (Selected) - perform a check
N: (Cleared) - do not perform a check
Default
N (Cleared)
Variable Name
%%SAPR3-DA_CHECK_SESSIONS
General information
If an incomplete archiving session is found, a message is displayed, and a Data
Archiving write job is not created.
The Check Sessions parameter is only relevant for SAP Data Archiving jobs.
326
Check Variant
Check Variant
Enables the user to check if a Write job already exists with the specific variant for the
archiving object defined for this job.
Format
Usage
Optional
Availability
Format
Check box
Valid Values
X: (Selected) - perform a check
N: (Cleared) - do not perform a check
Default
N (Cleared)
Variable Name
%%SAPR3-DA_CHECK_VARIANT
General information
If such a Write job is found, a message is displayed, and a new Write job is not
created.
The Check Variant parameter is only relevant for SAP Data Archiving jobs.
327
Columns
Columns
The maximum number of characters in an output line.
Format
Usage
Availability
Mandatory

Archiving panel)
Format
Text box and check box
Valid Values
Integer. Any value from 1 through 255.
-1
(Use ABAP Program Default check box is selected)
Special value indicating that the number of columns is obtained
from the ABAP program code.
Default
80
Variable Name
%%SAPR3-STEP-S<nn>-PRINT_NUMCOLUMNS
Related parameters
Use ABAP Program
Default
328

than the number in the Columns box. If selected, the variable
%%SAPR3-STEP-S<nn>-PRINT_NUMCOLUMNS is set to -1.
Copy From Step
Copy From Step

Indicates from which ABAP or External Program step in the original job to begin the
copying procedure.
Format
Usage
Mandatory
Availability
Copy job mode
Format
Text box
Valid Values
Integer between 1-99
Default
Variable Name
%%SAPR3-START_STEP
329
Copy Spool To
Copy Spool To
The name and path of the file to which the spool should be copied.
Format
Usage
Optional
Format
Text box
Valid Values
1-214 characters
Case Sensitive
Yes
Invalid Characters
Blanks
Variable Name
%%SAPR3-SPOOL
General information
The Copy Spool To parameter can be specified only for SAP Data Archiving jobs.
NOTE
If *SYSOUT is specified, the spool is copied into the job SYSOUT.
330
Delete After Print
Delete After Print

Indicates whether the report is deleted after printing.
Format
Usage
Availability
Format
Valid Values
Optional

Archiving panel)
Check box
X: (Selected) - delete after printing
N: (Cleared) - do not delete after printing
Default
N (Cleared)
Variable Name
%%SAPR3-STEP-S<nn>-PRINT_RELEASE
331
Department
Department
Spool department.
Format
Usage
Availability
332
Optional

Archiving panel)
Format
Text box
Valid Values
1-12 characters
Case Sensitive
Yes
Invalid Characters
None
Variable Name
%%SAPR3-STEP-S<nn>-DEPT
XBP Interface
XBP 2.0, or

Detect Spawned Jobs
Detect Spawned Jobs

A spawned job is a job created by another (parent) job, and monitored by CONTROLM. This parameter indicates whether to detect and monitor jobs that were spawned
by the current SAP job.
Format
Usage
Optional
Format
Option buttons and text box, and a read-only check box
Valid Values
For %%SAPR3-DETECT_OPTION
1: (No Detection Needed)
2: (Parent (current) Job definition)
3: (A specific Job definition)
For %%SAPR3-DETECT_CHILD_JOBNAME
Name of the parent job (for option 2)

Name of the specific job (for option 3)
For %%SAPR3-DETECT_CHILD_TABLE
Name of the scheduling table in which the parent exists

For option 2 or 3 always set the value
%%SCHEDTAB
For %%SAPR3-GROUP_ORDID
The Order ID of the group scheduling table

For option 2 or 3 always set the value %%GROUP_ORDID
For %%SAPR3-DETECT_CHILD_RELEASE
Variable Names
Specify whether to start spawned jobs that have a status of

Scheduled.
For option 2 or 3, set the following values:

Y - Start Spawned Jobs
N - Do not start Spawned Jobs
%%SAPR3-DETECT_OPTION
%%SAPR3-DETECT_CHILD_JOBNAME
%%SAPR3-DETECT_CHILD_RELEASE
%%SAPR3-DETECT_CHILD_TABLE
Related Variable
%%SAPR3-GROUP_ORDID
333
Detect Spawned Jobs
General information
The following options are available:
No Detection needed: Do not detect spawned jobs of the current job.
Detect and Create According to:

Parent (current) job definition: Detect spawned jobs of the current job and
extract these jobs to CONTROL-M, with identical properties to the parent job.
A specific job definition:
A field is displayed, in which you can enter a specific SAP-type job name.
Detected spawned jobs of the current job are extracted to CONTROL-M with
identical properties to the specified (not the current) job.
Important: The specified job must exist in the same scheduling table as the current
job.
334
Document Type
Document Type
Archive object document type.
Format
Usage
Availability
Optional

Archiving panel)

Archive
Format
Text box
Valid Values
1-10 characters
Case Sensitive
Yes
Invalid Characters
None
Variable Name
%%SAPR3-STEP-S<nn>-ARCHIVE_OBJECT
335
Event
Event
The event ID that indicates the event name of the After Event start condition.
Format
336
Usage
Mandatory for the After Event start condition
Availability
Create job mode when the "start after event" start condition is
selected.
Format
Text box
Valid Values
1-32 characters
Variable Name
%%SAPR3-EVENT_ID
Related Parameter
%%SAPR3-EVENT_PARAM
Event Parameter
Event Parameter
The event parameter for a specific event ID.
Format
Usage
Optional
Availability
Create job mode when the "start after event" start condition is
selected.
Format
Text box
Valid Values
1-64 characters
Related Parameter
%%SAPR3-EVENT_ID
Variable Name
%%SAPR3-EVENT_PARAM
337
External Command
External Command
The name of the external command.
Format
338
Usage
Optional
Availability
Add External Command window in Create job mode
Format
Text box
Valid Values
1-128 characters
Case Sensitive
Yes
Invalid Characters
None
Variable Name
External Program
External Program
The name of the external program.
Format
Usage
Optional
Availability
Add External Program window in Create job mode
Format
Text box
Valid Values
1-128 characters
Case Sensitive
Yes
Invalid Characters
None
Variable Name
339
A description of the InfoPackage.
Format
340
Usage
Mandatory
Availability
Format
Text box
Valid Values
1-60 characters
Case Sensitive
Yes
Invalid Characters
None
Variable Name
%%SAPR3-InfoPackage_Desc
InfoPackage RNR
InfoPackage RNR
A unique BW-generated ID for the InfoPackage's running session. Relevant only in
Active Job Mode, after job submission.
Format
Usage
Read-only
Availability
Format
Read-only text box
Variable Name
%%SAPR3-InfoPackage_RNR
341

A unique BW-generated InfoPackage ID.
Format
342
Usage
Mandatory
Availability
Format
Text box
Valid Values
30 characters
Case Sensitive
Yes
Invalid Characters
None
Variable Name
%%SAPR3-InfoPackage_TechName
Information Field
Information Field
Archive information.
Format
Usage
Availability
Optional

Archiving panel)

Archive
Format
Text box
Valid Values
1-3 characters
Case Sensitive
Yes
Invalid Characters
None
Variable Name
%%SAPR3-STEP-S<nn>-ARCHIVE_INFO
343
Job Class
Job Class
The job submission priority (in SAP). The Job Class parameter can be specified for
both SAP R/3 jobs and SAP Data Archiving jobs.
Format
Usage
Availability
Format
Valid Values
Default
344
Mandatory
Create job mode
List
A - most urgent
B - urgent
C - least urgent
For SAP R/3 jobs: C
For SAP Data Archiving jobs: A
Variable Name
%%SAPR3-JOBCLASS
XBP Interface
The A and B values of this parameter are only functional in one of the
following
XBP 2.0

Job Count
Job Count
A unique SAP job ID number.
In the SAP-BW panel, the Info Package Job Count parameter is relevant only in Active
Job Mode, after job submission.
Format
Usage
Mandatory
Availability
Copy, Original, or External job mode
Format
List for special values

Text box for digits
Valid Values
For %%SAPR3-JOB_COUNT:
Job count of a specific job
- Specific_Job
If this value is set, the value for %%SAPR3-JOBCOUNT must be
an 8-digit number.
Special values:
- FIRST
- FIRST_SCHEDULED
- LAST
- LAST_SCHEDULED
For %%SAPR3-JOBCOUNT:
Job count of a specific job
- An 8-digit number
Only if Specific_Job is set for the value of or
%%SAPR3-JOB_COUNT
Special values:
The same special value set for or %%SAPR3-JOB_COUNT
Note:
In Copy job mode, these parameters can be set for either a
specific job, or as one of the special values.
Variable Names
In Original job mode, these parameters can be set for either a

specific job, or as either the FIRST_SCHEDULED or
LAST_SCHEDULED special values.
In External job mode, only a specific job can be set.
%%SAPR3-JOB_COUNT
%%SAPR3-JOBCOUNT
345
Job Mode
Job Mode
Format
Usage
Mandatory
Format
Option buttons
Valid Values
Valid values for SAP R/3 jobs:
Create - Create and run a new job in SAP

- CREATE
Original - Run an existing job in SAP

- RUN_ORG
Copy - Copy an existing job in SAP and run the new job
- RUN_COPY
External - Monitor the status of a job that runs in SAP

- EXTERNAL
Batch Input - Run a Batch Input session

- BATCHINPUT
Valid values for SAP Data Archiving jobs:
Write - Create and run a Data Archiving Write job

- DA_WRITE
Detect Delete - Detect a Data Archiving Delete job created in SAP

- DA_DETECTOR
The %%SAPR3-DA_JOB_TYPE parameter should be set to
DELETE.
Detect Store - Detect a Data Archiving Store job created in SAP

- DA_DETECTOR
The %%SAPR3-DA_JOB_TYPE parameter should be set to
STORE.
Variable Name
%%SAPR3-JOB_MODE
Related Variable
%%SAPR3-DA_JOB_TYPE
The Job Mode parameter must be specified for both SAP R/3 jobs and SAP Data
Archiving jobs. For SAP-BW jobs, see SAP-BW Business Process Type on page 374.
346
Job Name
Job Name
The name of the job to be monitored or submitted (in Batch Input job mode also called
Map Name).
Format
Usage
Mandatory
Format
Text box
Valid Values
1-32 characters
Case Sensitive
No
Invalid Characters
None
Variable Name
%%SAPR3-JOBNAME
Related Variable
%%SAPR3-JOB_COPY_TARGET_VAL
General information
This parameter is mapped to the CONTROL-M/EM Job Name parameter.
347
Job Type
Job Type
Read-only fields that indicate the nature of the SAP job in Active job mode. The type
is indicated by the check boxes that are selected. Only relevant for jobs extracted by
the Extractor process.
Format
Usage
Mandatory
Availability
Active job mode
Format
Check boxes and text boxes
Valid Values
XBP Interface
348
Extracted - An SAP job extracted from SAP to CONTROL-M by

the Extractor process for monitoring and managing purposes
Intercepted - A job that was intercepted by SAP, extracted to

CONTROL-M by the Extractor process, activated by
CONTROL-M/Enterprise Manager, and is now being monitored
in CONTROL-M
Spawned - A job that was created in SAP by a job created or

monitored in CONTROL-M, extracted from SAP by the Extractor
process and is now being monitored in CONTROL-M
- Parent Name - If the job type is Spawned, the name of the
parent job is displayed in this field.
- Parent ID - If the job type is Spawned, the SAP job count of the
parent job is displayed in this field.
These parameters are functional only in:
XBP 2.0, or

Job Waiting for External Termination
Job Waiting for External Termination

Indicates whether SAP waits for the external program to end before starting the next
step, or before exiting.
Format
Usage
Optional
Availability

in Create job mode
Format
Check box
Valid Values
X: (Selected) - wait
N: (Cleared) - do not wait
Default
X (Selected)
Variable Name
%%SAPR3-STEP-S<nn>-WAIT_FOR_TERM
349
Language
Language
The language of the ABAP step.
Format
Usage
Availability
Optional

Archiving panel)
Format
Text box
Valid Values
1 alphanumeric character
Example: D for German; d for Serbo-Croatian.
Case Sensitive
Yes
Invalid Characters
Blanks
Special characters
Variable Name
350
%%SAPR3-STEP-S<nn>-LANGU
Layout
Layout
The print layout format.
Format
Usage
Availability
Optional

Archiving panel)
Format
Text box
Valid Values
1-16 characters
Case Sensitive
Uppercase only
Invalid Characters
Blanks
Variable Name
%%SAPR3-STEP-S<nn>-PRINT_LAYOUT
XBP Interface
XBP 2.0, or

351
Log External Errors in Joblog
Log External Errors in Joblog

Indicates whether SAP logs external errors in the joblog.
Format
Usage
Optional
Availability

in Create job mode
Format
Check box
Valid Values
352
X: (Selected) - external errors written in the log
N: (Cleared) - external errors not written in the log
Default
X (Selected)
Variable Name
%%SAPR3-STEP-S<nn>-LOG_STDERR
Log External Output to Joblog
Log External Output to Joblog

Indicates whether SAP logs external output in the joblog.
Format
Usage
Optional
Availability

in Create job mode
Format
Check box
Valid Values
X: (Selected) - output written in the log
N: (Cleared) - output not written in the log
Default
X (Selected)
Variable Name
%%SAPR3-STEP-S<nn>-LOG_STDOUT
353
Name
Name
The spool list name.
Format
Usage
Availability
354
Optional

Archiving panel)
Format
Text box
Valid Values
1-12 characters
Case Sensitive
Uppercase only
Invalid Characters
None
Variable Name
%%SAPR3-STEP-S<nn>-LIST_NAME
XBP Interface
This parameter is functional in one of the following
XBP 2.0

New Job Name
New Job Name

The name of the newly created job (in copy mode).
Format
Usage
Optional
Format
Text box
Valid Values
1-32 characters
Variable Name
%%SAPR3-JOB_COPY_TARGET_VAL
355
New Spool Request
New Spool Request

Indicates whether to request a new spool.
Format
Usage
Availability
Format
Valid Values
356
Optional

Archiving panel)
Check box
X: (Selected) - request a new spool
N: (Cleared) - do not request a new spool
Default
X (Selected)
Variable Name
%%SAPR3-STEP-S<nn>-NEW_LIST_ID
XBP Interface
XBP 2.0, or

Number of Copies
Number of Copies
The number of copies to be printed.
Format
Usage
Availability
Optional

Archiving panel)
Format
Text box
Valid Values
A three-digit integer between 001-255
Default
001
Variable Name
%%SAPR3-STEP-S<nn>-PRINT_COPIES
357
Object Type
Object Type
The archive object type.
Format
Usage
Availability
358
Optional

Archiving panel)

Archive
Format
Text box
Valid Values
1-10 characters
Case Sensitive
Yes
Invalid Characters
None
Variable Name
%%SAPR3-STEP-S<nn>-ARCHIVE_SAPOBJECT
Operating sys
Operating sys
Available for external commands. This indicates the operating system.
Format
Availability
Add External command window in Create job mode
Format
List or free text
Valid Values
1-10 characters
Case Sensitive
Yes
Invalid Characters
None
Variable Name
%%SAPR3-STEP-S<nn>-OPERSYS
359
OS Cover Sheet
OS Cover Sheet
Type of cover page for output.
Format
Usage
Availability
Optional
Format
Valid Values

Archiving panel)
List
D: (Default Setting) - use the default setting from SAP
X: (Print) - print the cover page
N: (Do Not Print) - do not print the cover page
Default
Variable Name
%%SAPR3-STEP-S<nn>-PRINT_HOST_BANNER
NOTE
In SAP 4.6D, this parameter can return different values, depending on specific SAP
user-definitions. This is a known SAP problem.
360
Output Device
Output Device
The logical name of the designated printer.
Format
Usage
Availability
Optional

Archiving panel)
Format
Text box
Valid Values
1-4 characters
Case Sensitive
Uppercase only
Invalid Characters
Blanks
Variable Name
%%SAPR3-STEP-S<nn>-PRINT_DEST
General information
If the device does not exist, SAP adds a $ sign before the device name.
361
Output Management
Output Management
For job log and spool.
Format
Usage
Optional
Format
Option button
Valid Values
1-214 characters
To copy to a file, enter the full-path file name
To copy to SYSOUT, enter *SYSOUT.
If you do not wish to copy the job log or the spool, do not set this
variable.
Default
Variable Name
SYSOUT - for joblog

Dont copy - for spool
%%SAPR3-JOBLOG - for joblog

%%SAPR3-SPOOL - for spool
362
Owner
Owner
The authorized step owner.
Format
Usage
Availability
Optional

Archiving panel)
Format
Text box
Valid Values
1-12 characters
Case Sensitive
Uppercase only
Invalid Characters
Blanks
Variable Name
%%SAPR3-STEP-S<nn>-OWNER
General information
If left unspecified, the value is taken from the Account owner field.
363
Parameters
Parameters
The parameters for an external program or an external command.
Format
364
Usage
Optional
Availability
Add External Program and Add External Command windows in

Create job mode
Format
Text box
Valid Values
1-214 characters
Case Sensitive
Yes
Invalid Characters
None
Variable Name
%%SAPR3-STEP-S<nn>-VAR-NAME
Print Archive Mode
Print Archive Mode

Determines whether the spool of the step is printed to an output device, to the
archive, or both.
Format
Usage
Availability
Format
Valid Values
Optional

Archiving panel)
List
PRINT: (Print)
ARCHIVE: (Archive)
PRINT_ARCHIVE: (Print & Archive)
Default
Print
Variable Name
%%SAPR3-STEP-S<nn>-PRINT_ARCHMODE
365
Print Expiration
Print Expiration
The number of days after which a print job expires.
Format
Usage
Availability
366
Optional

Archiving panel)
Format
List
Valid Values
Single-digit number:
1-8 - a specific number of days
9 - a special value that signifies Do Not Delete
Default
Variable Name
%%SAPR3-STEP-S<nn>-PRINT_EXPIRATION

Describes a Process Chain.
Format
Usage
Optional
Availability
Process Chain SAP-BW Business Process Type
Format
Text box
Valid Values
1-60 characters
Case Sensitive
Yes
Invalid Characters
None
Variable Name
%%SAPR3-ProcessChain_Desc
367
Process Chain ID
Process Chain ID
A unique BW-generated ID of a Process Chain.
Format
368
Usage
Mandatory
Availability
Format
Text box
Valid Values
30 characters
Case Sensitive
Uppercase only
Invalid Characters
Blanks
Variable Name
%%SAPR3-ProcessChain_ID

A unique BW-generated ID for the Process Chain running session. Relevant only in
Active Job Mode, after job submission.
Format
Usage
Read-only.
Availability
Format
Read-only text box
Variable Name
%%SAPR3-ProcessChain_LogID
369
QID
QID
The Batch Input Session Queue ID number.
Format
Usage
Optional
Availability
Batch Input job mode
Format
Text box
Valid Values
20-digit number
Variable Name
%%SAPR3-QID
General information
Batch Input jobs that are deleted after they run are not monitored. The status of jobs
marked for deletion is not displayed. If left unspecified, the oldest defined session is
scheduled.
370
Recipient
Recipient
The name of the recipient of the job output.
Format
Usage
Availability
Optional

Archiving panel)
Format
Text box
Valid Values
1-12 characters
Case Sensitive
Yes
Invalid Characters
None
Variable Name
%%SAPR3-STEP-S<nn>-PRINT_RECIPIENT
371
Rerun Options
Rerun Options
If an SAP-BW job fails, indicates how the Process Chain should be rerun.
Format
Usage
Mandatory
Availability
When SAP-BW Business Process Type is set to Process Chain, in

Active mode, and the job is in Hold status (Zoom and Save action)
Format
Option buttons
Valid Values
Default
372
Restart from point of failure
Rerun from start
Restart from point of failure
Rows
Rows
Maximum number of rows per page.
Format
Usage
Availability
Format
Valid Values
Mandatory

Archiving panel)
Text box and check box
-1
Use ABAP Program Default check box is selected)
Special value indicating that the number of rows is obtained
from the ABAP program code.
Default
65
Variable Name
%%SAPR3-STEP-S<nn>-PRINT_NUMLINES
Related parameter
Use ABAP Program
Default

than the number in the Rows box. If selected, the variable
%%SAPR3-STEP-S<nn>-PRINT_NUMLINES is set to -1.
373
SAP-BW Business Process Type
SAP-BW Business Process Type

Format
Usage
Mandatory
Format
Option buttons
Valid Values
374
PC_RUN_ORG (Process Chain)
IP_RUN_ORG (InfoPackage)
Default
IP_RUN_ORG (InfoPackage)
Variable Name
%%SAPR3-JOB_MODE
SAP Cover Page
SAP Cover Page

Type of cover page for output.
Format
Usage
Availability
Format
Valid Values
Optional

Archiving panel)
List
D: (Default Setting) - use the default setting from SAP
X: (Print) - print the cover page
Blank space: (Do Not Print) - do not print the cover page
Default
Variable Name
%%SAPR3-STEP-S<nn>-PRINT_BANNER
NOTE
In SAP 4.6D, this parameter can return different values, depending on specific SAP
user-definitions. This is a known SAP problem.
375
SAP Job Status
SAP Job Status

A read-only field that indicates the status of the SAP CCMS job, in SAP. Relevant only
in Active Job Mode, after job submission.
Format
Usage
Read-only
Displayed only in Active Job Mode
Availability
Active job mode
Format
Text box
Valid Values
SCHEDULED
RELEASED
READY
ACTIVE
CANCELED
FINISHED
Variable Name
None
XBP Interface
XBP 2.0, or

General information
This parameter is updated when the Job Editing form is opened. However, the status
is not refreshed automatically.
376
SAP Spool Recipient Attribute
SAP Spool Recipient Attribute

Indicates whether to create a new SAP spool.
Format
Usage
Optional
Availability
Create Job mode
Format
Check box
Valid Values
X (Selected): Request a new spool
N (Not selected): Do not request a new spool
Default
N (Not selected)
Variable Name
%%SAPR3_RECIP_COPY
%%SAPR3_RECIP_BLIND_COPY
%%SAPR3_RECIP_EXPRESS
%%SAPR3_RECIP_NO_FORWARDING
Note: You can use either %%SAPR3_RECIP_COPY or
%%SAPR3_RECIP_BLIND_COPY at any one time.
377
Selection Cover Page
Selection Cover Page

Indicates whether a cover page should be used.
Format
Usage
Availability
Format
Valid Values
378
Optional

Archiving panel)
Check box
X: (Selected) - use cover page
N: (Cleared) - do not use cover page
Default
N (Cleared)
Variable Name
%%SAPR3-STEP-S<nn>-PRINT_BANNER_PAGE
Session Number
Session Number
Indicates the archiving session number in SAP.
Format
Usage
Optional
This parameter should be specified when either of the following
occur:
The Write job was not created by CONTROL-M
The Write job and the Detect job are not part of the same group
scheduling table.
This parameter should not be specified if the Write job and the
Detect job are part of the same group scheduling table.
Availability
Delete or Store job mode in the SAP Data Archiving panel
Format
Text box
Valid Values
6-digit number
Variable Name
%%SAPR3-DA_SESSION_NUMBER
379

Recipient of the print job.
Format
380
Usage
Optional
Availability
Create job mode
Format
Name - 214 characters
Valid Values
Any string value, up to 214 characters
Variable Name
%%SAPR3_RECIPIENT
Related Parameters
%%SAPR3_RECIP_TYPE
%%SAPR3_RECIP_COPY
Spool List Type
Spool List Type

Type of the recipient of the print job.
Format
Usage
Optional
Availability
Create job mode
Format
Type - List of single characters
Valid Values
A - External
B - Username
C - Shared distribution
P - Private distribution
Variable Name
%%SAPR3_RECIP_TYPE
Related Parameters
%%SAPR3_RECIPIENT
%%SAPR3_RECIP_COPY
381
Start Condition
Start Condition
Specifies whether the job should run with the ASAP option, immediately, or after
event.
Format
Usage
Availability
Format
Valid Values
Optional
Create, Original, or Copy job mode
All job modes in the SAP Data Archiving panel
Option buttons
X - ASAP
N - Immediate
E - After Event
Default
N (Immediate)
Variable Name
%%SAPR3-SUBMIT_ASAP
Related Variables
%%SAPR3_EVENT_ID, %%SAPR3_EVENT_PARAM
General information
If the ASAP option is selected, the job runs as soon as a background work process is
available for it in SAP. If the job cannot start immediately, it is transformed in SAP
into a time-based job.
If the Immediate option is selected, the job either runs immediately, or fails in case
there are no work processes available to run it.
If the After Event option is selected, the job waits for the event to be triggered.
382
Step Type
Step Type
Type of step to be performed.
Format
Usage
Optional.
Length
1 character. Valid values:
A: ABAP program step

C: External Command step
E: External Program step
F: Fax Number
L: Telex Number
U: Internet Address
X: X.400 Address
R: Remote Mail Address
Case-Sensitive
Uppercase only.
Variable Name
%%SAPR3_STEP-S<nn>-STEP_TYPE
General information
The variable described above must be specified for every single step in a job.
383
Steps
Steps
A read-only field that displays the job steps (actions) to be performed as part of the
SAP job.
Format
Usage
Read-only
Availability
Create job mode
Format
Read-only text list
Valid Values
You can specify any number of steps from 1 through 99 steps
ABAP Program - Add an ABAP program
External command - Add an external command
External Program - Add an external program
Case Sensitive
No
Invalid Characters
Blanks
Related Variables
All step parameters must use the following prefix:

%%SAPR3-STEP-S<nn>-
General information
When the specified Job Mode is Create, at least one step must be specified in an SAP
job definition. This job definition can consist of one or more ABAP program steps, or
External program steps, or both.
In the AutoEdit variables given for each of the Add ABAP Window parameter
descriptions in this chapter, S<nn> represents a logical number between S01 and S99.
384
Target Group
Target Group
The application server on which the job runs. The Target Group parameter can be
specified for SAP R/3 jobs only.
Format
Usage
Optional
Availability
Create, Original, or Copy job mode
Format
Text box
Valid Values
1-20 characters
Case Sensitive
Yes
Invalid Characters
Blanks
Variable Name
%%SAPR3-TARGET_SERVER
Related Parameter
%%SAPR3-SERVER_OR_GROUP_TYPE
Valid values are:
G - Group
S - Server
General information
If left unspecified, SAP determines a value for this parameter during runtime.
Not supported in ctmr3req in job define mode (-SAPR3-ACTION job_define).
385
Target Host
Target Host
The host computer on which the external program runs.
Format
386
Usage
Mandatory
Availability
Format
Text box
Valid Values
1-32 characters
Case Sensitive
Yes
Invalid Characters
Blanks
Variable Name
%%SAPR3-STEP-S<nn>-TARGET_HOST
Target Server (1)
Target Server (1)

The application server on which the job runs. The Target Server parameter can be
specified for both SAP R/3 jobs and SAP Data Archiving jobs.
Format
Usage
Availability
Optional
Create, Original, Copy, or Batch Input job mode
All job modes in the SAP Data Archiving panel
Format
Text box
Valid Values
1-20 characters
The following (full) format must be used:
hostname_SYSID_sysnumber
Case Sensitive
Yes
Invalid Characters
Blanks
Variable Name
%%SAPR3-TARGET_SERVER
Related Parameter
%%SAPR3-SERVER_OR_GROUP_TYPE
Valid values are:
G - Group
S - Server
General information
If left unspecified, SAP determines a value for this parameter during runtime.
Not supported in ctmr3req in job define mode (-SAPR3-ACTION job_define).
387
Target Server (2)
Target Server (2)

The application server on which the external command runs.
Format
388
Usage
Mandatory
Availability
Format
Text box
Valid Values
1-32 characters
Case Sensitive
Yes
Invalid
Characters
Blanks
Variable Name
%%SAPR3-STEP-S<nn>-TARGET_HOST
Time of Print
Time of Print
Indicates when to print the job output.
Format
Usage
Availability
Optional
Format
Valid Values

Archiving panel)
List
N: Send to SAP spooler
X: Print out immediately
A: Print later
Default
Send to SAP spooler
Variable Name
%%SAPR3-STEP-S<nn>-PRINT_IMMED
389
Titles
Titles
The spool list titles.
Format
Usage
Availability
390
Optional

Archiving panel)
Format
Text box
Valid Values
1-68 characters
Case Sensitive
Yes
Invalid Characters
None
Variable Name
%%SAPR3-STEP-S<nn>-LIST_TEXT
XBP Interface
XBP 2.0, or

Use ABAP Program Default
Use ABAP Program Default

Indicates whether the ABAP program default should be used, rather than a number
entered in the Rows or Columns box.
For details, see the related parameters.
Related parameters
Rows
If selected, the Rows box is not available. If not selected, enter a

number in the Rows box.
Columns
If selected, the Columns box is not available. If not selected, enter a

number in the Columns box.
391
Variant Name
Variant Name
Available for SAP R/3 and SAP Data Archiving jobs. Specify a variant for the
specified ABAP program or Archiving Object.
Format
Usage
Optional for SAP R/3 jobs.

Mandatory for SAP Data Archiving Write jobs.
Availability
392
Format
Text box
Valid Values
1-14 characters
Case Sensitive
Uppercase only
Invalid Characters
None
Variable Name
%%SAPR3-STEP-S<nn>-VAR-NAME
Chapter
11
11

The parameters described in this chapter are for the OAP panel of the Job Editing
form.
These parameters are only relevant if CONTROL-M/CM for Oracle E-Business Suite
is installed and Oracle E-Business Suite forms are loaded in CONTROL-M/EM.
Table 31
OAP parameters summary (part 1 of 2)
Parameter
Description
Advanced Options
Enables various advanced options to be modified.
Application
The application short name associated with the responsibility name.
Application Instance Oracle E-Business Suite instance connection information.

Application Name
The application long name associated with the concurrent program.
Application Short
Name
The application short name associated with the concurrent program.
Description
Description of a request.
Include Child Status When specified, child jobs are monitored.

Include Output
If specified, the output of the Oracle job is appended to SYSOUT.
Include Log
When specified, the request log is copied to the CONTROL-M

sysout.
Notifications
Generates a selection list containing all Oracle workflow roles.
Output Language
The job output language.
Parameter Validation All specified parameter values are validated. If no value is specified,
the default value is retrieved.
Parent
Parent of the job or process.
Phase
Phase of the job or process.
Print
Determines print settings.
Priority
Priority of the job or process.
Profiles
Specify or modify the print profile name and value.
Request ID
Oracle E-Business Suite request ID number.
Request Type
Indicates whether the request is a Request Set or Single Request.
Chapter 11
393
Table 31
394
OAP parameters summary (part 2 of 2)
Parameter
Description
Responsibility
Authorization for accessing data and running programs or requests,

or both.
Security Group
The security group assigned to the username.
Status
Status of the job or process.
Upon completion
Enables various tasks to be performed upon completion of a job.
User Name
Authorized Oracle E-Business Suite user who has at least one

responsibility.
Wait Child
If an Oracle job spawned multiple child jobs, the CONTROL-M job

tracks status of all child jobs. If not, CONTROL-M only checks
original job status, stopping as soon as it finishes.
Advanced Options
Advanced Options
Enables various advanced options to be modified.
Format
Usage
Optional.
Format
Button. When clicked, the Advanced Options window is displayed.
The following parameter settings can be modified in the Advanced Options window:
Profiles on page 411

Include Log on page 402
Include Output on page 403
Parameter Validation on page 406
Wait Child on page 421
Include Child Status on page 401
Chapter 11
395
Application
Application
The application short name associated with the responsibility name.
Format
396
Usage
Mandatory
Length
1 - 50 characters
Case Sensitive
Uppercase only
Invalid Characters
Blanks
Variable Name
%%OAP-RESPAPP
Application Instance
Application Instance
Oracle E-Business Suite instance connection information.
Format
Usage
Mandatory
Length
1 - 214 characters
Case Sensitive
Yes
Invalid Characters
Blanks
Variable Name
%%OAP-INSTANCE
Chapter 11
397
Application Name
Application Name
The application long name associated with the concurrent program.
Format
398
Usage
Optional.
Default
None
Length
1 - 214 characters
Case Sensitive
Yes
Invalid
Characters
Blanks
Variable Name
%%OAP-APPDESP
Application Short Name
Application Short Name

The application short name associated with the concurrent program.
Format
Usage
Mandatory.
Length
1 - 50characters
Case Sensitive
Yes (uppercase only)
Invalid Characters
Blanks
Variable Name
%%OAP-APPNAME
Chapter 11
399
Description
Description
Text description of a request.
Format
Usage
Optional.
Length
1 - 214 characters
Case Sensitive
Yes
Invalid Characters
None
Variable Name
%%OAP-DESCRIPTION
Displayed only when the Request Type is Single Request.
400
Include Child Status
Include Child Status

If selected, child jobs are monitored. If one ends in error, the CONTROL-M job status
is also error. If unspecified, CONTROL-M job status is determined only by parent job
ending status.
Format
Usage
Optional.
Format
Check box.
Default: Selected (Child jobs monitored)
Located on the Advanced Options window accessed from the OAP
panel.
Variable Name
%%OAP-SUBSTATUS
Chapter 11
401
Include Log
Include Log
When specified, the request log is copied to the CONTROL-M sysout.
Format
Usage
Optional
Format
Check box
panel.
402
Default
Selected
Variable Name
%%OAP-DISPLAY_LOGFILE
Include Output
Include Output
When specified, the output of the Oracle job is appended to SYSOUT.
Format
Usage
Optional.
Format
Check box.
panel.
Default
Not selected
Variable Name
%%OAP-DISPLAY_OUTPUT
Chapter 11
403
Notifications
Notifications
Generates a selection list containing all Oracle workflow roles.
NOTE
For Oracle E-Business Suite 11 and 11i only.
Format
Usage
Optional.
Format
List generated by CONTROL-M/EM.

Located on the Upon Completion window accessed from the OAP
panel.
404
Length
1-214 characters
Case Sensitive
Yes
Variable Name
%%OAP-NOTIFICATIONS-Nn-NAME
Output Language
Output Language
The job output language.
Format
Usage
Optional.
Format
<LANGUAGE>_<TERRITORY>
Located on the Upon Completion window accessed from the OAP
panel.
Default
If no value is set, default is AMERICAN_AMERICA
Length
1-60 characters
Variable Name
%%OAP-LANGUAGE
Chapter 11
405
Parameter Validation
Parameter Validation
All specified parameter values are validated. If no value is specified, the default value
is retrieved.
Format
Usage
Optional.
Format
Check box.
Default: Selected (parameter values are validated).
panel.
Variable Name
406
%%OAP-PARAM_VALIDATION
Parent
Parent
Parent of the job or process.
Format
Usage
Optional
Format
Number, 1-15 digits in length.

Displayed only in the Job Editing form active environment (in the
CONTROL-M/EM GUI).
Variable Name
%%OAP-ACTIVE_ATTRn-PARENT
General information
The value of this parameter is supplied by the Oracle E-Business Suite and cannot be
modified.
Chapter 11
407
Phase
Phase
Phase of the job or process.
Format
Usage
Optional
Length
1 - 50 characters
Case Sensitive
Uppercase only
Invalid Characters
Blanks
Variable Name
%%OAP-ACTIVE_ATTRn-PHASE
modified.
This parameter is displayed only in the Job Editing form active environment (in the
CONTROL-M/EM GUI).
408
Print
Print
Determines print settings.
Format
Usage
Optional
Format
Composed of the Printer (Load), No. of Copies, and Style subparameters,

described below.
Located on the Upon Completion window accessed from the OAP panel.
Subparameters
Printer (Load)
No. of copies
Style
Causes the Oracle E-Business Suite server to generate a list in real time of
all available printers. Select required printer for job output.
Usage
Optional
Length
1-100 characters
Case sensitive
Yes
Invalid Characters
None
Variable Name
In Single Request:
%%OAP-PRINTERS-P<n>-NAME
In Request Set:
%%OAP-SETPROG-P<n>-PRINTERNAME
Required number of copies.

Usage
Optional
Format
Integer. 1-4 digits.
Variable Name
In Single Request:
%%OAP-PRINTERS-P<n>-VALUE
In Request Set:
%%OAP-SETPROG-P<n>-PRINTCOPIES
Format in which job output is printed.

Usage
Optional. Mandatory if a value is supplied for the

Printer (Load) parameter.
Length
1-20 characters
Case sensitive
Yes
Invalid Characters
None
Variable Name
%%OAP-PRINTSTYLE
Chapter 11
409
Priority
Priority
Priority of the job or process.
Format
Usage
Optional.
Format
Number, 0-100.
CONTROL-M/EM GUI).
Variable Name
%%OAP-ACTIVE_ATTR<n>-PRIORITY
Related parameters
Priority
CONTROL-M priority (described on page 174) determines submission the

priority of the job in CONTROL-M, whereas Priority under Oracle EBusiness Suite determines the priority of the job in Oracle E-Business Suite.
General information
There are two Priority settings for an Oracle E-Business Suite job that is scheduled in
the CONTROL-M data center.
The priority of a job in CONTROL-M is first used to determine when CONTROLM/EM schedules the job for execution.
After the job is submitted for execution in the Oracle E-Business Suite, the Oracle EBusiness Suite Priority of the job determines when it is run in the Oracle E-Business
Suite.
410
Profiles
Profiles
Specify or modify the print profile name and value.
Format
Usage
Optional.
Format
Profile Name and Value text boxes, described below.

panel.
Subparameters
Profile Name
Profile internal name.

Usage
Optional
Length
1-214 characters
Case sensitive
Yes
Invalid Characters
None
Variable Name
%%OAP-PROFILES-P<n>-NAME
Usage
Optional
Length
1-214 characters
Case sensitive
Yes
Invalid Characters
None
Variable Name
%%OAP-PROFILES-P<n>-VALUE
Value
Chapter 11
411
Request ID
Request ID
Oracle E-Business Suite request ID number.
Format
Usage
Optional
Format
Number, 1-15 digits in length.

CONTROL-M/EM GUI).
Variable Name
%%OAP-ACTIVE_ATTR<n>-REQUEST_ID
General information
modified.
412
Request Type
Request Type
Indicates whether the request is a Request Set or Single Request.
Format
Usage
Mandatory
Format
Option buttons.
Valid values:
Request Set
Single Request
Note: Each option has subparameters.

Default
Request Set
Variable Name
%%OAP-TASKTYPE
General information
Each Request Type option is composed of subparameters.
Request Set
Specifies a number of requests.
Table 32
Request Set subparameters (part 1 of 2)
Application Name
For more information, see Application Name on page 398.
Application Short
Name
For more information, see Application Short Name on page 399.
Request Set
Request Set long name.

Usage
Optional
Length
1-214 characters
Case sensitive
Yes
Invalid
Characters
None
Variable Name
%%OAP-SETDESP
Chapter 11
413
Request Type
Table 32
Request Set subparameters (part 2 of 2)
Request Set
Parameters
Click the Request Set button to cause the Oracle E-Business Suite
server to generate a list, in real time, of all concurrent programs in
the request set. Each program is listed in a table displaying Program
and Stage. Select an item from the generated list to enter in the form.
Usage
Optional
Variable Name
OAP-SETPROG-P<n>-PARMS-PARM
<m>-NAME
OAP-SETPROG-P<n>-PARMS-PARM
<m>-VALUE
Request Set Code

(Load)
Request Set short name. Causes the Oracle E-Business Suite server to
generate a list, in real time, that satisfies relevant criteria. Select an
item from the generated list to enter in the form.
Usage
Mandatory
Length
1-30 characters
Case sensitive
Yes (uppercase)
Invalid
Characters
Blanks
Variable Name
%%OAP-SETNAME
Single Request
Specifies a single request.
Table 33
414
Single Request subparameters (part 1 of 2)
Application Name
For more information, see Application Name on page 398.
Application Short
Name
For more information, see Application Short Name on page 399.
Description
For more information, see Description on page 400.
Program Short Name

(Load)
The concurrent program short name. Causes the Oracle E-Business

Suite server to generate a list in real time that satisfies relevant
criteria. Select an item from the generated list to enter in the form.
Usage
Mandatory
Length
1-30 characters
Case sensitive
Yes (uppercase)
Invalid Characters
Blanks
Variable Name
%%OAP-PROGNAME
Request Type
Table 33
Single Request subparameters (part 2 of 2)
Program long Name
Request Parameters
Descriptive program name.

Usage
Optional
Length
1-214 characters
Case sensitive
Yes
Invalid Characters
None
Variable Name
%%OAP-PROGDESP
Opens Single Request Parameter form.

You can specify parameter values for the specified concurrent
program.
Note: All fields must be specified, or the default value is used. If
no default value is specified in CONTROL-M, default is
automatically NULL.
Usage
Optional
Format
Parameters:
Organization ID
BOM or ENG
Item Selection
Specific Item
Revision
Date
Items From
Items To
Category Set
Category Structure
Categories From
Categories To
For more information on these parameters,

see the CONTROL-M/CM for Oracle
E-Business Suite Administrator Guide.
Variable Name
OAP-PARMS-P<n>-NAME
OAP-PARMS-P<n>-VALUE
Chapter 11
415
Responsibility
Responsibility
Authorization for accessing data and running programs or requests, or both.
Format
416
Usage
Mandatory
Length
1-100 characters
Case Sensitive
Yes
Invalid Characters
Blanks
Variable Name
%%OAP-RESPNAME
Security Group
Security Group
The security group assigned to the username.
NOTE
For Oracle E-Business Suite 11i only.
Format
Usage
Optional
Length
1-80 characters
Case Sensitive
Yes
Invalid Characters
None
Variable Name
%%OAP-SECURITY_GROUPNAME
Chapter 11
417
Status
Status
Oracle E-Business Suite status of the job or process.
Format
Usage
Optional
Format
CONTROL-M/EM GUI).
Variable Name
%%OAP-ACTIVE_ATTR<n>-STATUS
There are two statuses (whether it is Held or Free, and so on) for an Oracle E-Business
Suite job that is scheduled in the CONTROL-M data center.
The status of a job in CONTROL-M (whether it is Held or Free, and so on) can be
modified from the CONTROL-M/EM GUI.
After the job is submitted for execution in the Oracle E-Business Suite, its Oracle EBusiness Suite Status determines how the job is handled (whether it is Held or Free,
and so on) in the Oracle E-Business Suite.
NOTE
modified.
418
Upon completion
Upon completion
Enables various tasks to be performed upon completion of a job.
Format
Usage
Optional.
Format
Button. When clicked, the Upon Completion window is displayed.
The following parameter settings can be modified in the Upon Completion window:
Notifications on page 404

Print on page 409
Output Language on page 405
Chapter 11
419
User Name
User Name
Authorized Oracle E-Business Suite user who has at least one responsibility.
Format
420
Usage
Mandatory
Length
1-100 characters
Case Sensitive
No
Invalid Characters
Blanks
Variable Name
%%OAP-USERNAME
Wait Child
Wait Child
If an Oracle job spawned multiple child jobs, the CONTROL-M job tracks the status of
all child jobs. If not, CONTROL-M only checks the original job status, stopping as
soon as it finishes.
Format
Usage
Optional.
Format
Check box.
Default: Selected (Tracks child job status)
panel.
Variable Name
%%OAP_WAITCHILD
Chapter 11
421
Wait Child
422
Chapter
12
12

This chapter describes the parameters in the FILE_TRANS panel that are used to run
Advanced File Transfer (AFT) jobs. This panel is displayed in the Job Editing form
when CONTROL-M/CM for Advanced File Transfer is installed at your data center.
The basic CONTROL-M parameters for AFT jobs are summarized in the following
tables, and each parameter is described in detail in the remainder of this chapter.
Parameter descriptions are in alphabetical order.
NOTE
Other CONTROL-M job parameters are available for additional processing of AFT jobs. They
are described in the other chapters in this guide.
Table 34
FILE_TRANS panel parameterssummary
Parameter
Description
Account
Set of parameters that define both sides of a file transfer connection.
Binary/ASCII
Select either Binary or ASCII mode for file transfer.
File Transfer Direction Source and destination computers.

Number of Retries
Number of times CONTROL-M/CM for Advanced File Transfer

tries to re-establish a failed connection.
Rerun from Point of

Failure
Indicates whether file transfer jobs should be rerun from the point
of failure (from the specific point in the file transfer where the job
failed).
Transfer Location
Source and destination locations on the host computers.
Use Configuration
Default
Use the number of retries defined in the configuration file.
NOTE
Parameters displayed in the FILE_TRANS panel after a job has been submitted are
informational only.
Chapter 12
423
Table 35
FILE_TRANS panel parametersnotification purposes only
Parameter
Description
Host Name
The name of the host computer.
OS Type
The operating system of the host computer.
User Name
The user name of the host computer.
NOTE
The following parameters are displayed in the General, OpenSystems/OS400, MVS, Security,
and FTP Commands panels of the Advanced window.
Table 36
FILE_TRANS panel - Advanced window parametersgeneral
Parameter
Description
Indicates whether the source file is to be left as is, deleted, or

After the completion
renamed upon completion of a successful file transfer.
of a successful file
transfer the source file
is
Continue on Failure
Specifies whether a multi-file transfer should continue if a specific

file transfer fails or if an entire multi-file transfer job fails.
If a file of the same

name as the
destination file
already exists
When a file is specified to be transferred to a location already

containing a file of the same name, the value for this parameter
determines:
whether the file transfer is aborted or skipped
or
the destination file is appended or overwritten
Rename Destination
file
Specifies the new file name pattern for the destination file.
Temporary File Prefix
A temporary prefix that is prepended to the file name during the

transfer. If a directory is being transferred, this prefix is prepended
to the names of all the files in that directory. Upon completion of a
successful file transfer, the prefix is removed. The original name of
the file (or all the files in the directory) is restored.
Table 37
424
FILE_TRANS panel - Advanced window parametersOpenSystems/OS400
Parameter
Description
Recursive
Specifies whether a directory transfer includes all its subdirectories.
Rename Destination
file
Specifies the new file name pattern for the destination file.
Trailing blanks
Specify how trailing blanks are handled during OS/400

transfers.
Table 38
FILE_TRANS panel - Advanced window parametersMVS
Parameter
Description
Additional Options
Additional z/OS FTP server parameters to be defined prior to

performing the file transfer.
Allocation Units
Value of the allocation units for the z/OS data set.
Block Size
Block size of the z/OS data set to be allocated.
DBCS Encoding
Specifies the DBCS encoding for the MVS dataset.
Logical Record Length Logical record length of the z/OS data set to be allocated.
Primary Allocation
Primary allocation amount for the z/OS data set to be allocated.
Record Format
Record format of the z/OS data set to be allocated.
Secondary Allocation
Secondary allocation amount for the z/OS data set to be allocated.
Template Name
Name of the template with which you intend to work.
Translate Table
File containing the translation tables for the data connection.
Unit
Value of the allocation units for the z/OS data set.
Volume
Volume on which the z/OS data set is allocated.
Table 39
FILE_TRANS panel - Advanced window parameterssecurity
Parameter
Description
Compression
Defined separately for host 1 and host 2. Indicates whether

compression is to be used for file transfers using Secure File Transfer
(SFTP). For the specific file transfer, overrides the setting for the
account. (Security)
Encryption Algorithm Defined separately for host 1 and host 2. The encryption algorithm
to be used for file transfers using SFTP. For a specific file transfer,
this parameter overrides the Encryption Algorithm setting for the
account.
Table 40
FILE_TRANS panel - Advanced window parametersFTP Commands
Parameter
Description
Host1 pre command
Specifies the pre command for host 1.
Host1 first pre

command parameter
Specifies the first parameter for pre command for host 1.
Host1 second pre

command parameter
Specifies the second parameter for pre command for host 1.
Host1 post command
Specifies the post command for host 1.
Host1 first post

command parameter
Specifies the first parameter for post command for host 1.
Host1 second post

command parameter
Specifies the second parameter for post command for host 1.
Host2 pre command
Host2 first pre

command parameter
Chapter 12
425
Table 40
426
FILE_TRANS panel - Advanced window parametersFTP Commands
Parameter
Description
Host2 second pre

command parameter
Host2 post command
Host2 second post

command parameter
Account
Account
Name of a set of parameters that define both sides of a file transfer connection.
Format
Usage
Mandatory
Format
Text box
Length
Up to 64 characters
Case Sensitive
Yes
Special
Requirement
Must begin with a letter and can contain alphanumeric characters and
underscores. Must not contain blanks.
Default
None
Variable Name
%%FTP-ACCOUNT
Chapter 12
427
Additional Options
Additional Options
Specifies additional z/OS FTP server parameters that can be defined prior to
performing the file transfer. Additional options that are specified are used by the
SITE command.
Format
Usage
Optional
Format
Text box. Free text according to FTP server SITE commands. Up to 214
characters
Variable Name
%%FTP-ADDOPTxy
Note: x is either 1 or 2 and indicates the z/OS host (1 refers to the host
defined on the left side of the Account Details dialog box, and 2 refers
to the host defined on the right side of the Account Details dialog
box).
y indicates a value from 1 through 5, according to the sequential
transfer number
For example, when performing a file transfer from one z/OS host to
another z/OS host, the variable:
%%FTP-ADDOPT21
contains additional options to set for the connection to the z/OS host
defined on the right side of the Account Details dialog box, in the first
file transfer.
428
After the completion of a successful file transfer the source file is
After the completion of a successful file

transfer the source file is
Indicates whether the source file is to be left as is, deleted, or renamed upon
completion of a successful file transfer.
Format
Usage
Optional
Format
Option button and File Name text box for the Renamed option
Valid Values
Left as is
Deleted
Renamed (enter new name in the File Name text box))
Default
Left as is
Variable Name
%%FTP-SRCOPTx
Note: x indicates a value between 1-5, according to the sequential
transfer number
Subparameter
File Name
If the Renamed option is selected, a text box for entering the new file
name is available. The file name must be a valid name for the operating
system of the host computer.
Usage
Optional
Format
Text box
Valid Values
1-256 characters
Case sensitive
Yes
Invalid Characters
Operating system dependent
Variable Name
%%FTP-NEWNAMEx
Note: x indicates a value between 1-5, according to
the sequential transfer number.
Chapter 12
429
Allocation Units
Allocation Units
Specifies the value of the allocation units for the z/OS data set.
Format
Usage
Optional
Format
List
Valid Values
Blocks
Cylinders
Tracks
Default
N/A
Variable Name
%%FTP-ALLOCUNITSx
transfer number
430
Binary/ASCII
Binary/ASCII
Determines the mode in which files are transferred.
Format
Usage
Mandatory
Format
Option button
Valid Values
Binary
ASCII
Default
Binary
Variable Name
%%FTP-TYPEx
transfer number.
Chapter 12
431
Block Size
Block Size
The block size of the z/OS data set to be allocated.
Format
Usage
Optional
Format
Text box
Valid Values
Default
N/A
Variable Name
%%FTP-BLKSIZEx
transfer number.
432
Compression
Compression
Determines whether the current SFTP file transfer uses compression. This parameter
is defined for each host in the account.
Format
Usage
Optional
If this value is unspecified, the Compression parameter defined for
the account is used.
For host computers that are not defined to use SFTP, this field is
disabled.
Format
List
Valid Values
No (0) - Compression off

Yes (1) - Compression on
Default
Yes
Variable Name
%%FTP-COMPRESSIONxy
box).
y indicates a value between 1-5, according to the sequential transfer
number
%%FTP-COMPRESSION21
contains the compression value to set for the connection to the z/OS
host defined on the right side of the Account Details dialog box, in the
first file transfer.
General information
The value of this parameter is defined separately for each host computer.
The setting for this parameter on the Security panel of the Advanced window of the
FILE_TRANS panel affects only the current file transfer. For more information about
how to change the security settings for the account, see the CONTROL-M/Control
Module for Advanced File Transfer Administrator Guide.
For host computers that are not defined to use SFTP, this field is disabled. For more
information, see the CONTROL-M/Control Module for Advanced File Transfer
Chapter 12
433
Continue on Failure
Continue on Failure
Specify whether a multi-file transfer continues if a specific file transfer fails or if an
entire multi-file transfer fails.
Format
Usage
Optional
Format
Check box
Valid Values
0 Stop on failure
1 Continue on failure
Default
Unchecked
Variable Name
%%FTP-CONT_EXEx
transfer number
434
DBCS Encoding
DBCS Encoding
Specifies the DBCS encoding for the MVS dataset.
Format
Usage
Optional
Format
List
Valid Values
EUCKANJI (Extended UNIX Code Kanji)

HANGEUL
BIG5 (IBM Big-5)
SJISKANJI (JIS Kanji)
JIS83KJ (JIS 1983 Kanji)
JIS78KJ (JIS 1978 Kanji)
KSC5601 (Korean Standard Code KSC-5601)
SCHINESE (Simplified Chinese)
TCHINESE (Traditional Chinese (5550))
Default
N/A
Variable Name
%%FTP-DBCSx
transfer number
Chapter 12
435
Encryption Algorithm
Encryption Algorithm
The encryption algorithm that the current SFTP file transfer uses. This parameter is
defined for each host in the account.
Format
Usage
Optional.
If this value is left unspecified, the encryption parameter defined for
the account is used.
For host computers that are not defined to use SFTP, this field is
disabled.
Format
List
Valid Values
Blowfish
DES
3DES
AES
Default
Blowfish
Variable Name
%%FTP-ENCRYPTIONxy
box).
y indicates a value between 1-5, according to the sequential transfer
number
%%FTP-ENCRYPTION21
contains the encryption value to set for the connection to the z/OS
host defined on the right side of the Account Details dialog box, in the
first file transfer.
General information
The value of this parameter is defined separately for each host computer.
The setting for this parameter on the Security panel of the Advanced window of the
FILE_TRANS panel affects only the current file transfer. If you want to change the
security settings for the account, see the CONTROL-M/Control Module for Advanced
File Transfer Administrator Guide.
For host computers that are not defined to use SFTP, this field is disabled. For more
information, see the CONTROL-M/Control Module for Advanced File Transfer
436
File Transfer Direction
File Transfer Direction

Indicates the source and destination computers for the file transfer.
Format
Format
Valid Values
Arrow button
Variable Name
0 = Right to left
1 = Left to right
%%FTP-UPLOADx
transfer number
Chapter 12
437
Host Name
Host Name
The name of the host computer.
Format
Usage
Read-only
Format
Text
Variable Name
%%FTP-LHOST
%%FTP-RHOST
438
Host1 pre command
Host1 pre command

Format
Usage
Optional
Format
List
Valid Values
chmod
Mkdir
rename
rm
rmdir
Default
N/A
Variable Name
%%FTP-PRECOMM1x
transfer number
Chapter 12
439
Host1 first pre command parameter

Format
Usage
Optional
Format
Text
Valid Values
file mode for chmod command

Full directory to create for Mkdir command
Old file name for rename command
File name to delete for rm command
Directory name to delete for rmdir command
Default
N/A
Variable Name
%%FTP-PREPARAM11x
transfer number
440
Host1 second pre command parameter

Format
Usage
Optional
Format
Text
Valid Values
File name to change mode

New file name for rename command
N/A for Mkdir, rm and rmdir commands.
Default
N/A
Variable Name
%%FTP-PREPARAM11x
transfer number
Chapter 12
441
Host1 post command
Host1 post command

Format
Usage
Optional
Format
List
Valid Values
chmod
Mkdir
rename
rm
rmdir
Default
N/A
Variable Name
%%FTP-POSTCOMM1x
transfer number
442
Host1 first post command parameter

Format
Usage
Optional
Format
Text
Valid Values

Default
N/A
Variable Name
%%FTP-POSTPARAM11x
transfer number
Chapter 12
443
Host1 second post command parameter

Format
Usage
Optional
Format
Text
Valid Values
file name to change mode

N/A for Mkdir, rm and rmdir commands
Default
N/A
Variable Name
%%FTP-POSTPARAM12x
transfer number
444
Host2 pre command
Host2 pre command

Format
Usage
Optional
Format
List
Valid Values
chmod
Mkdir
rename
rm
rmdir
Default
N/A
Variable Name
%%FTP-PRECOMM2x
transfer number
Chapter 12
445

Format
Usage
Optional
Format
Text
Valid Values

Default
N/A
Variable Name
%%FTP-PREPARAM21x
transfer number
446

Format
Usage
Optional
Format
Text
Valid Values

Default
N/A
Variable Name
%%FTP-PREPARAM22x
transfer number
Chapter 12
447
Host2 post command
Host2 post command

Format
Usage
Optional
Format
List
Valid Values
chmod
Mkdir
rename
rm
rmdir
Default
N/A
Variable Name
%%FTP-POSTCOMM2x
transfer number
448

Format
Usage
Optional
Format
Text
Valid Values

Default
N/A
Variable Name
%%FTP-POSTPARAM21x
transfer number
Chapter 12
449

Format
Usage
Optional
Format
Text
Valid Values

Default
N/A
Variable Name
%%FTP-POSTPARAM22x
transfer number
450
If a file of the same name as the destination file already exists
If a file of the same name as the destination

file already exists
This parameter determines whether the file transfer is aborted or skipped, or whether
the destination file is appended or overwritten if a file with the same name already
exists at the specified destination
Format
Usage
Mandatory
Format
Option button
Valid Values
Abort - 0
Overwrite - 1
Append - 2
Skip - 4
Default
Overwrite
Variable Name
%%FTP-IF-EXISTx
transfer number
Chapter 12
451
Logical Record Length
Logical Record Length

The logical record length of the z/OS data set to be allocated.
Format
Usage
Optional
Format
Text box
Valid Values
Default
N/A
Variable Name
%%FTP-LRECLx
transfer number
452
Number of File Transfers
Number of File Transfers

Represents the number of file transfers in a CONTROL-M/CM for Advanced File
Transfer job. This is an internal variable that is set by the form, not by the user. It
determines how many rows appear in the form for file transfers.
Format
Usage
N/A
Format
N/A
Valid Values
Integer between 1-5
Default
N/A
Variable Name
%%FTP-TRANSFER_NUM
Chapter 12
453
Number of Retries
Number of Retries
The number of times CONTROL-M/CM for Advanced File Transfer tries to reestablish a failed connection.
Format
Usage
Mandatory
Format
Text field, with incremental arrows
Valid Values
Default
Variable Name
%%FTP-NUM_RETRIES
General information
When the FTP server is running on an z/OS operating system, this field is disabled.
If you are working online, the Retrieve button is available and you can click it to
automatically set this parameter to the default value defined in configuration.
454
OS Type
OS Type
The operating system associated with the Host Name.
Format
Usage
Read-only
Format
Text
Valid Values
Variable Name
Windows
UNIX
MVS
Tandem
OpenVMS
OS2200
OS400
%%FTP-LOSTYPE
%%FTP-ROSTYPE
Chapter 12
455
Primary Allocation
Primary Allocation
The primary allocation amount for the z/OS data set to be allocated.
Format
Usage
Optional
Format
Text box
Valid Values
Integer between 1 - 16777215
Default
N/A
Variable Name
%%FTP-PRIMARYx
transfer number
456
Record Format
Record Format
The record format of the z/OS data set to be allocated.
Format
Usage
Optional
Format
List
Valid Values
FB
VB
Default
N/A
Variable Name
%%FTP-RECFMx
Note: x indicates a value 1-5, according to the sequential transfer
number.
Chapter 12
457
Recursive
Recursive
Specifies whether a directory transfer includes all its subdirectories.
Format
Usage
Optional
Format
Check box
Valid Values
0 - non-recursive
1 - recursive
Default
Unchecked
Variable Name
%%FTP-RECURSIVEx
transfer number
458
Rename Destination file
Rename Destination file

Specifies the new file name pattern for the destination file. The renaming happens
after a successful transfer. The pattern can contain strings, Autoedit variables and the
variable $$AFTFILE$$.
Format
Usage
Optional
Length
1-256 characters
Valid Values
Dependent on operating system
Case sensitive
Yes
Blanks permitted
No
Default
N/A
Variable Name
%%FTP-DEST-NEWNAMEx
transfer number
Chapter 12
459
Rerun from Point of Failure
Rerun from Point of Failure

Indicates whether failed file transfer jobs should be restarted from the point of failure
(from the specific file transfer that failed within the job).
Format
Usage
Optional
Format
Check box
Valid Values
460
Checked - a failed file transfer restarts from the point of failure
Cleared - a failed file transfer restarts from the beginning of the

first file in the file transfer
Default
Checked
Variable Name
%%FTP-RPF
The secondary allocation amount for the z/OS data set to be allocated.
Format
Usage
Optional
Format
Text box
Valid Values
Integer between 0 -16777215
Default
N/A
Variable Name
%%FTP-SECONDARYx
transfer number
Chapter 12
461
Template Name
Template Name
The name of the template to be used for the job.
Format
Usage
Optional
Format
Text box
Length
Up to 64 characters
Case Sensitive
Yes
Blanks
No
Default
None
Variable Name
%%FTP-TEMPLATEx
transfer number
462

A temporary prefix that is prepended to the file name during the file transfer. If a
directory is being transferred, this prefix is prepended to the names of all the files in
the directory. Upon completion of a successful file transfer, the prefix is removed. The
original name of the file (or all file names in the directory) is restored.
Format
Usage
Optional
Format
Text box
Length
Up to 99 characters
Valid Values
Operating system dependent
Case Sensitive
Yes
Blanks
No
Default
None
Variable Name
%%FTP-FILE-PFXx
transfer number
General information
The temporary file name that is created by prepending the prefix must be a valid file
name for the operating system of the destination host computer.
Chapter 12
463
Trailing blanks
Trailing blanks
Specify how trailing blanks are handled during OS/400 transfers. This option is
relevant only for files that are transferred in ASCII mode.
Format
Usage
Optional
Format
Option button
Valid Values
464
0 Send trailing blanks.

1 Do not send Trailing blanks for Database file with file structure
2 - Do not send Trailing blanks for all Database files
Default
1 - Do not send Trailing blanks for Database file with file structure
Variable Name
%%FTP-TRIMx
transfer number
Transfer Location
Transfer Location
The source or destination location for files being transferred to or from a host
computer.
Format
Usage
Mandatory
Format
Text box
Length
Up to 255 characters
Case Sensitive
Yes
Blanks
Yes
Default
None
Variable Name
%%FTP-RPATHx
%%FTP-LPATHx
transfer number
Chapter 12
465
Translate Table
Translate Table
Specifies a file on an z/OS system containing translate tables for the data connection.
Format
Usage
Optional
Format
Text box
Valid Values
1-8 characters
Default
None
Variable Name
%%FTP-TRANSTABx
transfer number
466
Unit
Unit
The Unit on which the z/OS data set is allocated.
Format
Usage
Optional
Format
Text box
Length
1-8 characters
Default
None
Variable Name
%%FTP-UNITx
transfer number
Chapter 12
467
Use Configuration Default
Use Configuration Default

This parameter can be selected if you are working offline and want to use the default
number of retries defined in the configuration file.
Format
Usage
Optional
Format
Check box
Valid Values
468
Checked - use the value defined in configuration
Unchecked - use the value defined in the Number of Retries

parameter
Default
Unchecked
Variable Name
%%FTP-USE_DEF_NUMRETRIES
User Name
User Name
The user name of the host computer.
Format
Usage
Read-only
Format
Text
Variable Name
%%FTP-LUSER
%%FTP-RUSER
General information
User name of the host computer. The User Name must include the domain when
the host has an operating system type of Microsoft Windows, and CONTROLM/Agent is running on it.
the host has an operating system type of Microsoft Windows. CONTROLM/Agent is not running on it, but the server installed on it requires the domain for
login.
Chapter 12
469
Volume
Volume
The Volume on which the z/OS data set is allocated.
Format
Usage
Optional
Format
Text box
Length
1-6 characters
Default
None
Variable Name
%%FTP-VOLUMEx
transfer number
470
Chapter
13
13
This chapter describes the parameters in the PS8 panel for PeopleSoft jobs. This panel
is displayed in the Job Editing form when CONTROL-M/CM for PeopleSoft is
installed on your data center. The basic CONTROL-M parameters for PeopleSoft jobs
are summarized in Table 41. Each parameter is described in this chapter. For more
information, see your PeopleSoft Process Scheduler manual.
NOTE
Other CONTROL-M job parameters are available for additional processing of PeopleSoft jobs.
For more information, see the other chapters in this guide.
Table 41
PeopleSoft panel parameters summary
Parameter
Description
Connection Profile Name for a set of attributes that define a connection between
CONTROL-M/CM for PeopleSoft and a PeopleSoft application server.
Email Subject
Indicates the subject line for an email message that is sent by the job.
Email Text
Message text to be displayed in the body of an email message.
Email With Log
Indicates that Structured Query Report (SQR) program log files are
attached to an email message.
Format
Output type for the process or job.
Process Name (I)
Name of a PeopleSoft process.
Process Name (II)
Name of a job (collection of PeopleSoft processes).
Process Type
Type of process for the process or job definition.
Rerun From Step
Process number from which a job that failed previously should be rerun
(generally the process where the job previously failed).
Run Control ID
Set of run control attributes to be associated with a job or process.
Server Name
Name of the PeopleSoft Server.
Type
Output destination type of a process or job.
User ID
PeopleSoft user ID name to be used for the job.
Userdef1/2/3
User-defined parameters that are made available to the PeopleSoft

process or job by CONTROL-M/CM for PeopleSoft.
Chapter 13 PeopleSoft parameters
471
Connection Profile
Connection Profile
Name for a set of attributes that define a connection between CONTROL-M/CM for
PeopleSoft and a PeopleSoft application server.
Format
Usage
Mandatory
Length
1 - 30 characters
Case Sensitive
Yes
Invalid Characters
Blanks
Default
None
Variable Name
%%PS8-CON_PROFILE
General information
A connection profile defines the connection attributes between CONTROL-M/CM
for PeopleSoft and a PeopleSoft environment. The connection profile must exist
before it is specified in a job. Click Select next to the Connection Profile text box to
display a list of profiles that have been defined.
The connection profile contains the following parameters:
Connection profile name

PeopleSoft user name
PeopleSoft password
PeopleSoft server name
PeopleSoft server port
PeopleTools version
The PeopleSoft user name specified in the profile must have authorization to handle
all PeopleSoft jobs and processes in the PeopleSoft environment.
To manage connection profiles, specify the psftcm profcfg CONTROL-M/CM for
PeopleSoft command. For more information about this command, see the CONTROLM/Control Module for PeopleSoft Administrator Guide.
TIP
During the CONTROL-M/CM for PeopleSoft installation, an existing CONTROL-M Option
for PeopleSoft environment file can be converted to a connection profile.
472
Email Subject
Email Subject
Indicates the subject line for an email message that is sent by the job.
Format
Usage
Optional. Available if the Type parameter is set to Email.
Length
1- 50 characters
Case Sensitive
No
Variable Name
%%PS8-EMAIL_SUBJECT
Related parameters
Parameter
Description
Email Text
Specifies the message text for the body of the email.
Email With Log
Indicates that SQR program log files should be included as an

attachment to the email message.
Type
Specifies the output destination type of a process or job.
General information
When the Type parameter in the Distribution window is set to Email, use the Email
Subject parameter to enter the subject line for the email message produced by the job.
The text must not exceed 50 characters. For more information, see Type on
page 483.
473
Email Text
Email Text
Use this parameter to enter the body of an email message that is sent by the job.
Format
Usage
Case Sensitive
No
Variable Name
%%PS8-EMAIL_TEXT
Related parameters
Parameter
Description
Email Subject
Contains the subject line of the email message.
Email With Log

Type
General information
Text parameter to enter the message text for the email message produced by the job.
The text must not exceed 250 characters. For more information, see Type on
page 483.
474
Email With Log
Email With Log

Use this parameter to attach log files generated by the SQR program to an email
message that is sent by the job.
Format
Usage
Variable Name
When this option is selected, the email message is sent with an SQR
log file attachment.
When this option is not selected, the email message is sent without
an SQR log file attachment. Default.
%%PS8-EMAIL_ATTACH_LOG
Related parameters
Parameter
Description
Email Subject
Email Text
Process Type
The process type selected determines what output destination types are
available for the Type parameter.
Type
General information
With Log parameter to include log files as an attachment to the email message
produced by the job. These log files result from the Structured Query Report (SQR)
program when SQR is selected as the Process Type for the job.
475
Format
Format
Indicates the output format for all processes in a job.
Format
Usage
Optional
Variable Name
%%PS8-OUTDESTFORMAT
Related parameters
Parameter
Description
Process Type
The process type selected determines what output destination types are
available for the Type parameter.
Type
General information
Lists the format types that are available for the specified Process Type and Type
parameters.
NOTE
Valid values for this parameter correspond to values for a PeopleSoft job. For more
information about the Format parameter, see your PeopleSoft Process Scheduler manual.
EXAMPLE
If SQR is specified for the Process Type parameter and PRINTER is specified for the Type
parameter, valid values for the Format parameter are:
HP
LP
PS
WP
476
Process Name (I)
Process Name (I)

Name of the process to be scheduled.
Format
Usage
Mandatory
Length
1 - 8 characters
Case Sensitive
Uppercase only
Invalid Characters
Blanks
Variable Name
%%PS8-PRCSNAME
Related parameters
Parameter
Description
Process Name (II)
Identifies the name of the job to be scheduled.
General information
Enter a name in the text box field or click Select and Edit to display a list of process
names that have been defined.
EXAMPLE
If SQR is specified for the Process Type parameter and the process produces a report named
RESULTSQR.SQR, the value of Process Name (I) is RESULTSQR.
477
Process Name (II)
Process Name (II)

Name of the job to be scheduled.
Format
Usage
Mandatory
Length
1 - 12 characters
Case Sensitive
Uppercase only
Invalid Characters
Blanks
Variable Name
%%PS8-JOBNAME
Related parameters
Parameter
Description
Process Name (I)
Identifies the name of the process to be scheduled.
General information
Enter a name in the text box field or click Select and Edit to display a list of job names
that have been defined.
EXAMPLE
If SQR is specified for the Process Type parameter and the job produces a report named
REPORTSQR.SQR, the value of Process Name (II) is REPORTSQR.
478
Process Type
Process Type
Indicates the type of process for the process or job definition.
Format
Usage
Mandatory
Length
1 - 30 characters
Case Sensitive
Yes
Invalid Characters
None
Variable Name
%%PS8-PRCSTYPE
Related parameters
Parameter
Description
Type
The selected Process Type determines what output destination types

are available. Use the Type parameter to specify the output destination
type of a process or job.
General information
A global definition under which related processes or jobs definitions are grouped.
Enter a name in the text box field or click Search to display a list of process types.
Examples of process types are COBOL, Crystal, SQR, and Application Engine.
479
Rerun From Step
Rerun From Step

Rerun a job from a specific process number.
Format
Usage
Optional
Value
Integer
Variable Name
%%PS8-FAILEDSTEP
General information
The process or job must have run and ended. Jobs that ended successfully can be
started to run again.
Jobs that contain more than one process, and did not end successfully, can be rerun
from a specified process number. For more information about rerunning a job from a
failed process, see the CONTROL-M/Control Module for PeopleSoft Administrator Guide.
480
Run Control ID
Run Control ID
Run control attributes that are associated with a process or job.
Format
Usage
Mandatory
Length
1 - 30 characters
Case Sensitive
Yes
Variable Name
%%PS8-RUNCONTROLID
Related parameters
Parameter
Description
Server Name
Identifies the name of the server that the application is scheduled

to run on.
User ID
Identifies the PeopleSoft user ID of the user authorized to submit

the process or job.
General information
The Run Control ID parameter, together with the User ID parameter, uniquely
identifies the process that is running. It enables required parameters to be available
for a process when it runs. Enter an ID in the text box field or click Search to display a
list of IDs.
481
Server Name
Server Name
Identifies the name of the server to be used for running the process or job.
Format
Usage
Optional
Length
1 - 8 characters
Case Sensitive
Yes
Invalid Characters
Blanks
Default
None
Variable Name
%%PS8-SERVERNAME
Related parameters
Parameter
Description
Run Control ID
Set of run control attributes associated with a process or job.
Connection Profile
Set of attributes that define a connection between

CONTROL-M/CM for PeopleSoft and a PeopleSoft application
server.
User ID
Identifies the PeopleSoft user ID of the user authorized to submit

the process or job.
General information
The name of the server depends on the Connection Profile parameter. The Server
Name parameter identifies the name of the application server on which the process or
job is scheduled to run.
To specify the Server Name parameter, enter a name in the text box field or click
Select to display a list of existing server names.
482
Type
Type
Output destination type, specifying the file path, printer destination, URL, or email
address.
Format
Usage
Optional
Default
File
Variable Name
%%PS8-OUTDESTTYPE
Related parameters
Parameter
Description
Email Subject
Email Text
Email With Log

Format
Selects the output format for all processes in a job.
Process Type
The process type selected determines what output destination

types are available for the Type parameter.
General information
The output destination types available for the Type parameter depend on the process
specified with the Process Type parameter. For example, if SQR is specified for the
Process Type parameter, you can select one of the following output destination types:
Email
File
Printer
Web
Additional distribution information must be specified when the output type is either
Email or Web. When the output type is Web, select a folder name to which the output
should be distributed.
Use the Format parameter to select the output format for the specified Type
parameter. For more information, see Format on page 476.
483
User ID
User ID
PeopleSoft user ID of the user authorized to submit the process or job.
Format
Usage
Mandatory
Length
1 - 30 characters
Case Sensitive
Yes
Invalid Characters
Blanks
Variable Name
%%PS8-USERID
Related parameters
Parameter
Description
Run Control ID
Identifies a set of run control attributes to be associated with a

process or job.
Server Name
Identifies the name of the server where the application is scheduled

to run.
General information
The PeopleSoft user with the specified User ID must be authorized to run the
specified process or job.
CONTROL-M has a security mechanism that insures that requestors cannot submit a
job that they are not authorized to submit. In addition, when building a job
processing definition, the selection list of possible jobs and processes is limited by the
users privileges in PeopleSoft.
This parameter is mapped to the CONTROL-M/EM Owner parameter. For more
information, see Owner on page 64.
484
Userdef1/2/3
Userdef1/2/3
Specify CONTROL-M data to be shared with PeopleSoft processes or jobs.
Format
Usage
Optional
Length
1 - 30 characters
Case Sensitive
No
Invalid Characters
None
Variable Name
%%PS8-USERDEF1/2/3
General information
This parameter enables you to specify and share data from CONTROL-M with
PeopleSoft processes or jobs. You can enter AutoEdit variables or constants,
according to your requirements (for example, filename).
User-defined values are made available to your application by accessing userdef(x) in
the CONTROLM record.
EXAMPLE
You can create a number of CONTROL-M/CM for PeopleSoft jobs that correspond to the
same process, but with different parameters.
485
Userdef1/2/3
486
Chapter
14
14

The parameters described in this chapter are for the WIN panel of the Job Editing
form. These parameters are only relevant if CONTROL-M/Agent Microsoft
Windows version 6.0.0x or later is installed in your data center.
Table 42
Parameter
Description
Job Execution Time
Maximum amount of elapsed execution time, in seconds, for the job.
Job Memory
Maximum amount of memory, in megabytes, allowed for the job.
Max Work Set Size
Maximum RAM, in megabytes, for all processes of the job.
Min Work Set Size
Minimum RAM, in megabytes, for all processes of the job.
Priority Class
Highest priority class the job and its children can receive.
Process Execution
Time
Maximum amount of elapsed execution time, in seconds, for each

process in a job.
Process Memory
Maximum amount of memory, in megabytes, allowed for each

process in a job.
Scheduling Class
Scheduling class for all processes of a job.
NOTE
The job fails if the maximum value set for a parameter is exceeded. The OSCOMPSTAT will
equal -3.
Chapter 14
487
Job Execution Time
Job Execution Time

Maximum amount of elapsed execution time, in seconds, for the job.
Format
Usage
Optional
Format
CPU time, in seconds. Min: 0.1 Max: 1.8 x 1012
Variable Name
%%WIN2K-PER_JOB_USER_TIME_LIMIT
NOTE
BMC Software recommends entering application data using the required panel in the
CONTROL-M/EM Job Editing form.
488
Job Memory
Job Memory
Maximum amount of memory, in megabytes, allowed for the job.
Format
Usage
Optional
Format
Memory, in megabytes. Min: 0.1 Max: 4200.0
Variable Name
%%WIN2K-JOB_MEMORY_LIMIT
Chapter 14
489
Max Work Set Size
Max Work Set Size

Maximum RAM, in megabytes, for all processes of the job.
Format
490
Usage
Optional.
Format
RAM, in megabytes. Min.: 0.1 Max.: 4200.0
Variable Name
%%WIN2K-MAXIMUM_WORKING_SET_SIZE
Min Work Set Size
Min Work Set Size

Minimum RAM, in megabytes, for all processes of the job.
Format
Usage
Optional
Format
RAM, in megabytes. Min.: 0.1 Max.: 4200.0
Variable Name
%%WIN2K-MINIMUM_WORKING_SET_SIZE
Chapter 14
491
Priority Class
Priority Class
Highest priority class the job and its children can receive.
Format
Usage
Optional
Format
List box.
Valid values:
Variable Name
IDLE_PRIORITY_CLASS
BELOW_NORMAL_PRIORITY_CLASS
NORMAL_PRIORITY_CLASS
ABOVE_NORMAL_PRIORITY_CLASS
HIGH_PRIORITY_CLASS
REALTIME_PRIORITY_CLASS
%%WIN2K-PRIORITY_CLASS
General information
The calling process must enable the SE_INC_BASE_PRIORITY_NAME privilege so
that the calling process is allowed to boost the scheduling priority of a process.
492
Process Execution Time
Process Execution Time

Maximum amount of elapsed execution time, in seconds, for each process in a job.
Format
Usage
Optional
Format
CPU time, in seconds. Minimum: 0.1 Maximum: 1.8 x 1012
Variable Name
%%WIN2K-PER_PROCESS_USER_TIME_LIMIT
General information
If the user-mode time for any process exceeds the specified amount, that process is
terminated.
Chapter 14
493
Process Memory
Process Memory
Maximum amount of memory, in megabytes, allowed for each process in a job.
Format
494
Usage
Optional
Format
Memory, in megabytes. Minimum: 0.1 Maximum: 4200.0
Variable Name
%%WIN2K-PROCESS_MEMORY_LIMIT
Scheduling Class
Scheduling Class
Scheduling class for all processes of a job.
Format
Usage
Format
Valid values: 0 9.
0 - provides the minimum resources
9 - provides the maximum resources
Default
Variable Name
%%WIN2K-SCHEDULING_CLASS
General information
To use a scheduling class greater than 5, the calling process must enable the
SE_INC_BASE_PRIORITY_NAME privilege. If the Logon as user option is turned off,
no special change is needed. If the Logon as user option is turned on, Increase
Scheduling Priority must be granted to the owner of the job.
Chapter 14
495
Scheduling Class
496
Chapter
15
15
AutoEdit facility
The AutoEdit facility consists of a group of special variables and functions that can be
used to make your job processing definitions more dynamic. This facility also enables
you to define your own variables.
NOTE
Certain AutoEdit functions and variables work differently for z/OS jobs. Although some of
these differences are described in this chapter, BMC recommends that you consult the
CONTROL-M for z/OS User Guide for a more complete description of AutoEdit functionality
for z/OS jobs.
Using AutoEdit variables and functions, you can
access information about the system under which a job is running

pass information to a job or modify working parameters of the job
pass information in a Shout message or a Do Mail message to a user when the job
ends
You cannot include application-specific job parameters in the values of AutoEdit

variables. The names of application-specific job parameters are prefixed by two
percent signs, the applications abbreviation and a hyphen (%%SAPR3- for SAP,
%%OAP- for Oracle, and so on).
AutoEdit variables in a job processing definition are resolved immediately before the
job is submitted, in the order in which they appear in the job processing definition.
NOTE
If a job is rerun, the AutoEdit statements specified in the Auto Edit Assignment parameter are
resolved before those specified using the Do AutoEdit parameter.
Table 43 describes job parameters that can accept AutoEdit variables or expressions
as values.
Chapter 15 AutoEdit facility
497
For more information about variable types, see AutoEdit variables on page 499. For
more information about AutoEdit functions, see AutoEdit Expressions on page 513.
Table 43
Parameters that accept AutoEdit variables and expressions
AutoEdit
Assignment
Modifies working parameters for a job and/or passes parameters to a

job when the job is submitted.
Defines variables that can be displayed in a Shout message or Do Mail

message when a job completes.
Note: This parameter is called Setvar in certain CONTROL-M/Server

utilities and in CONTROL-M/Desktop.
Command
AutoEdit variables can be used as part of the command string.
Do AutoEdit
Enables the user to specify AutoEdit statements to be resolved (in

addition to those specified for AutoEdit Assignment) depending on how
a job ended. These can be local variables to be used if the job is rerun, or
they can be global variables to be used by other jobs.
Path
AutoEdit variables can be used in this parameter to indicate the name of

the library or directory in which the file described in the Path parameter
is located.
(Mem Lib)
File Name
AutoEdit variables can be used in this parameter to indicate the name of

the file containing the job commands or job script.
(Mem Name)
Over Lib
AutoEdit variables can be used in this parameter to provide the name of

an alternate library or directory in which to search for the file that was
specified using the MEMNAME parameter.
Shout
or Do Shout
AutoEdit variables can be used in a Shout or Do Shout message to pass

job parameters or other data to a user.
Sysout
Handling or
Do Sysout
AutoEdit variables can be used in the field which provides

supplementary information about the handling of the jobs SYSOUT (for
example, a filename) when the job ends OK.
The AutoEdit Assignment and Do AutoEdit parameters can also use the
%%LIBMEMSYM variable to reference a list of AutoEdit expressions in a separate
text file. For more information, see Variable lists on page 511.
498
AutoEdit variables
AutoEdit variables
All AutoEdit variables are identified by the %% prefix. If %% is included in the value
for a job processing parameter, CONTROL-M assumes that it is referring to an
AutoEdit variable or function.
NOTE
A special %%# prefix can be used to indicate that an AutoEdit variable or function should not
be resolved. In these cases, the actual name of the AutoEdit variable or function (minus the #
sign) is output. For example, Do Shout Variable %%#PARM1 is greater than 100
issues the following message:
Variable %%PARM1 is greater than 100.
For more information about AutoEdit variable prefixes, see Table 51 on page 509.
AutoEdit variables are divided into the following types:
Job Submission variables pass parameters to a job or set the jobs working
parameters. For more information, see Job submission variables on page 499.
System variables are automatically assigned values using system information

available at the time of job submission (for example, %%DATE contains the
current system date). For more information, see CONTROL-M system variables
on page 504.
User-defined variables can be defined in a number of different ways for inclusion

in various job processing parameters. For more information, see User-defined
variables on page 508.
Variable lists. The %%LIBMEMSYM special variable can be used to point to a file
containing a list of AutoEdit assignments statements to be applied to a job. This
variable enables you to create one or more lists of AutoEdit assignment statements
that can be applied to many job processing definitions. For more information, see
Variable lists on page 511.
Job submission variables

Job submission variables pass parameters to a job or set the jobs working parameters.
Certain job submission variables are available only for certain computers. Table 45
through Table 48 describe variables that are computer-specific.
499
NOTE
All job submission variable names must be specified using uppercase letters.
Table 44
General job submission variables
Name
Description
%%PARMn
Job submission parameter, where n represents the parameter

number. This variable can be used to pass parameters to all types of
jobs.
On OpenVMS computers %%PARMn is used to represent the

P1 through P8 parameters.
For other computers, n can be a number between 1 and 32.
Note that for CONTROL-M version 2.1x on an iSeries (AS/400)

computer, the value for variable %%PARMn must not include
single quotation marks. If quotation marks are necessary, use
double quotation marks only.
%%OVERLIB
Table 45
string
Over Lib (name of an alternate library/directory in which

job script is stored) of the job.
OpenVMS job submission parameters
Name
Description
%%QUEUE
Name of the batch queue to which the job is submitted.

For VMS cluster configurations: Specify only those queues that are
defined in the systems queue manager where CONTROL-M runs.
The variables described in Table 46 correspond to parameters of the iSeries (AS/400)

Submit Job command. For more information about the valid values for these
parameters, see your iSeries (AS/400) SBMJOB command documentation.
Table 46
iSeries (AS/400) job submission parameters (part 1 of 3)
Name
Description
%%ACGCDE
Accounting code for the job.

Valid values are in the <accountingCode> format or one of the
following special values:
*USRPRF, *USER, *JOBD, *NOCHG, or *NONE
Note: This variable is relevant only for CONTROL-M/Agent for
iSeries (AS/400) version 2.25 or later.
%%CURLIB
500
Name of the current library associated with the job being run.
Table 46
Name
Description
%%DATE
Date that is assigned to the job when it is started.
%%HOLD
Whether the job is held at the time that it is put on the job queue.
%%INQMSGRPY
Manner in which pre-defined messages issued as a result of running

this job are answered.
%%JOBD
Job description.
Valid values are in the <library>/<jobDescription> format or the
value:
*USRPRF
%%JOBPTY
Job queue scheduling priority.
%%QUEUE
Name of the batch queue to which the job is submitted.

Valid values are in the <library>/<jobQueue> format or the value:
*JOBD
%%JOBQ
Same as %%QUEUE.
%%LDA
Local data areas (see Expressions for %%LDA [iSeries (AS/400)

only] on page 520).
%%LIBL
Library list.
or
Note: The %%INLLIBL variable is relevant only for CONTROL-M/

Agent for iSeries (AS/400) version 2.25 or later.
%%INLLIBL
%%LOG
Message logging values used to determine the amount and type of

information sent to the job log by the job.
%%LOGCLPGM
Whether the commands that are run in a control language program

are logged to the job log through the message queue of the CL
program.
%%MSGQ
Name of the message queue to which a completion message is sent

when the submitted job has completed execution.
Valid values are in the <library>/<messageQueue> format or one of
the following special values:
*USRPRF, *WRKSTN, or *NONE
Note: CONTROL-M/Agent for iSeries (AS/400) version 2.25 or later
uses a specific message queue as an event mechanism for job
completion. If the message queue for a job is changed using the
%%MSGQ variable, the event driven mechanism for this job is
disabled.
%%OUTPTY
Output priority for spooled output files produced by the job.
501
Table 46
Name
Description
%%OUTQ
Qualified name of the output queue used for spooled files that
specify OUTQ(*JOB).
Valid values are in the <library>/<outputQueue> format or one of the
following special values:
*CURRENT, *USRPRF, *DEV, or *JOBD
%%PRTDEV
Qualified name of the default printer device for this job.
%%PRTTXT
Up to 30 characters of text that is printed at the bottom of each page

of printed output and on separator pages.
%%RTGDTA
Routing data used to start the first routing step in the job.
%%SWS
Job switches.
%%SYSLIBL
System portion of the initial library list that is used by the submitted
job.
%%HEX
Indicates that the value that immediately follows is a hexadecimal

value, such as %%PARMn=%%HEX2AF4.
This function ensures that the value is transferred to iSeries
(AS/400) in the appropriate format.
Indicates that the value that immediately follows is a packed
decimal value, such as, %%PARMn=%%DEC1289.
%%DEC
This function ensures that the value is transferred to iSeries

(AS/400) in the appropriate format.
Table 47
UNISYS job submission parameters (part 1 of 2)
Name
Description
%%ACCOUNT
Account ID for the job run.
%%ADDRUN
Execution statement to be inserted before the execution of the user's

job. Examples: %%ADDRUN="@prt,i" or %%ADDRUN="@add
myqual*myfile.myelt" CONTROL-M/Agent inserts the specified
command before the user job's runstream prior to job submission.
%%DEADLINE
Deadline assignment for the job.
%%INJOBPR
Flag that indicates if a job contains programs that print or direct

standard output to the PR print queue.
%%NODEID
Node ID of the UNISYS computer to which the job is submitted.

If specified, the value for %%NODEID overrides the contents of the
job processing parameter Node ID. If this variable is assigned the
value CTMLOCAL, the job is submitted on the
CONTROL-M/Server computer.
Note: Do not use this variable in a group scheduling table definition.
%%OPTION
502
Options to be appended to the @START command.
Table 47
UNISYS job submission parameters (part 2 of 2)
Name
Description
%%PROJECT
Project ID for the job run.
%%RUNTIME
Estimated run time for the job.
Table 48
Tandem job submission parameters
Name
Description
%%TANDEM_ASSIGN_xxx
Enables the user to specify a TANDEM ASSIGN as

an AutoEdit variable to be used in a CONTROL-M
job environment.
Where xxx is the name of the Tandem ASSIGN
variable.
%%TANDEM_BYPASS_JOB
Enables the user to simulate running a dummy job.
%%TANDEM_CPU
Specifies a CPU on which a job should run.
%%TANDEM_DEFINE_xxx
Enables the user to specify a TANDEM DEFINE

variable as an AutoEdit variable to be used in a
CONTROL-M job environment.
Where xxx is the name of the Tandem DEFINE
variable.
%%TANDEM_INPUT_FILE
Name of a file containing a script to run in a detached

job.
%%TANDEM_PARAM_xxx
Enables the user to specify a TANDEM PARAM

variable as an AutoEdit variable to be used in a
CONTROL-M job environment.
Where xxx is the name of the Tandem PARAM
variable.
503
CONTROL-M system variables

Table 49 describes the available AutoEdit system variables. These reserved variables
can be used to include system information in job processing parameter values.
Please note the following:
Start of the week depends upon user preferences specifying whether 1 = Sunday or
1 = Monday. Descriptions in Table 49 that refer to day of the week presume that 1=
Sun. Consult your CONTROL-M administrator to determine which standard is
used at your site.
All System variable names must be specified using uppercase letters.
Certain system variables can be referenced only after job completion (in
postprocessing parameters). These variables are listed separately in Table 50 on
page 507.
Table 49
CONTROL-M system variables (part 1 of 4)
Name
Format
Description
%%$DATE
yyyymmdd
Current system date (4-digit year).
%%$NEXT
yyyymmdd
Next scheduling date for the job (4-digit year).
%%$ODATE
yyyymmdd
Original scheduling date of the job (4-digit

year).
%%$OYEAR
yyyy
Original scheduling year of the job (4-digit

year).
%%$PREV
yyyymmdd
Previous scheduling date for the job (4-digit

year).
%%$RDATE
yyyymmdd
Installation current working date (4-digit year).
%%$RYEAR
yyyy
Installation current working year (4-digit year).
%%$YEAR
yyyy
Current system year (4-digit year).
%%APPLGROUP
string
Name of the group to which the job belongs.
%%APPLIC
string
Name of the Application to which the jobs

group belongs.
Note: For z/OS jobs the %%APPL variable is
used to reference the Application name.
504
%%BLANKn
n spaces
Resolves to n blanks, where n is a number

between 1 - 214.
%%CENT
yy
First two digits in the current year (for example,

20 in year 2006).
Table 49
Name
Format
Description
%%CYCLIC
Y|N
This variable is used in the command line of the

ctmorder utility to override the Cyclic
parameter in cases where the user wishes to
order a single run of a job that is defined as
cyclic.
Y job is cyclic
N job should be run only once.
%%DATACENTER
string
Name of the data center for the current

CONTROL-M installation.
Note: This variable is available on certain
CONTROL-M computers as of
CONTROL-M version 2.20. However, prior to
CONTROL-M/EM version 6.1.02,
%%DATACENTER returned the host name for
the current CONTROL-M/Server.
%%DATE
yymmdd
Current system date.
%%DAY
dd
Current system day.
%%GROUP_ORDID
nnnnnn
Order ID of the group to which the job belongs.

Note: This variable is valid only for jobs in a
group scheduling table and it is evaluated in
base 10.
%%JOBNAME
string
Name of the submitted job. This variable can be

used to override the value specified for the
JOBNAME parameter (for example, in the
ctmorder utility).
Note: On a Microsoft Windows computer,
JOBNAME must comply with Microsoft naming
conventions (for example, it cannot contain /
and \ characters).
%%JULDAY
nnn
Current system day of the year (Julian format).
%%MEMLIB
string
Mem Lib (name of the library or directory in

which job script is stored) of the job.
%%MONTH
mm
Current system month.
%%NEXT
yymmdd
Next scheduling date for the job.
%%ODATE
yymmdd
Original scheduling date of the job.
%%ODAY
dd
Original scheduling day of the job.
%%OJULDAY
nnn
Original scheduling day of the year (Julian

format).
For example, 36 for February 5th.
%%OMONTH
mm
Original scheduling month of the job.
505
Table 49
Name
Format
Description
%%ORDERID
nnnnnn
Unique job order ID under CONTROL-M.
%%OWDAY
Original scheduling day of the week of the job

(1= Sun., 2= Mon., and 0=Sat.).
%%OWNER
string
Owner (user ID) associated with the job.
%%OYEAR
yy
Original scheduling year of the job.
%%POSTCMD
command
Specifies a command to run immediately after

running the job defined by MEMNAME. The
return code is ignored.
Note: Not relevant for z/OS jobs. Relevant only
for CONTROL-M/Server version 6.0.01 or later,
or (without SYSOUT) for any job submitted by
CONTROL-M/Agent for Microsoft Windows
2000 version 6.0.01 or later. This variable is not
used with group scheduling tables.
%%PRECMD
command
Specifies a command to run immediately before

running the job defined by MEMNAME. The
return code is ignored.
Note: Not relevant for z/OS jobs. Relevant only
for CONTROL-M/Server version 6.0.01 or later,
or (without SYSOUT) for any job submitted by
CONTROL-M/Agent for Microsoft Windows
2000 version 6.0.01 or later. This variable is not
used with group scheduling tables.
%%PREV
yymmdd
Previous scheduling date for the job.
%%RDATE
yymmdd
Installation current working date.
%%RDAY
dd
Installation current working day.
%%RJULDAY
nnn
Installation current working day of the year

(Julian format).
For example, 36 for February 5th.
%%RMONTH
mm
Installation current working month.
%%RUNCOUNT
nnnn
Number of times the job order has been

submitted for execution (that is, the first time
the job is being submitted, this variable returns
a value of 1).
%%RWDAY
Installation current working day of the week

(1=Sun., 2=Mon., and 0=Sat.).
%%RYEAR
yy
Installation current working year.
%%SCHEDTAB
string
Name of the jobs Scheduling table.

Note: This variable is available on certain
CONTROL-M computers as of
CONTROL-M version 2.2x.
%%TIME
506
hhmmss
Time of day.
Table 49
Name
Format
Description
%%WDAY
Current system day of the week (1=Sun.,

2=Mon., and 0=Sat.).
%%YEAR
yy
Current system year.
The following variables are not assigned values until after the job is submitted or
completes execution. These variables can be used only for the Shout, Do Shout, Do
Mail, and Do AutoEdit parameters.
NOTE
AutoEdit variables that return runtime statistics for a job must be resolved before the
variables can return any values. AutoEdit variables for job statistics: %%AVG_CPU,
%%AVG_TIME, %%SD_CPU, and %%SD_TIME.
Run the ctmjsa utility to compile data in the Statistical Details table before specifying the
required AutoEdit statistics variable. For more information, see Runtime Statistics and
ctmjsa in the CONTROL-M Administrator Guide.
Table 50
Post-processing system variables
Name
Format
Description
%%AVG_CPU
numeric
Average CPU time (in seconds) for previous runs of the

current job. Note: Do not use this variable in a group
scheduling table definition.
%%AVG_TIME
numeric
Average run time (in seconds) for previous runs of the

current job or group scheduling table.
%%COMPSTAT
numeric
Completion code assigned to the job by the

operating system of the computer that executes the job.
Initial value: 0.
%%JOBID
string
Identification assigned to the job by the operating system

of the computer that executes the job. Note: Do not use
this variable in a group scheduling table definition.
%%NODEID
string
Node ID of agent computer that submitted the job. Note:

This variable is available for certain computers as of
CONTROL-M version 2.2x.
%%SD_CPU
numeric
Standard deviation of the CPU time (in seconds) from the

average CPU time for previous runs of the current job.
Note: Do not use this variable in a group scheduling table
definition.
%%SD_TIME
numeric
Standard deviation of the elapsed run time (in seconds)

from the average elapsed run time for previous runs of
the current job or group scheduling table.
507
User-defined variables
A user-defined variable is created when it is assigned a value using the AutoEdit
Assignment parameter or the Do AutoEdit parameter. User variables can also be
defined for all jobs in a group scheduling table using the Set panel of the Group
Editing form. For more information about assigning a value to a variable, see
AutoEdit Expressions on page 513.
User-defined variables can be used to
store intermediate values in a series of AutoEdit parameters

store values to be included in a command string in the Command parameter
store information to be included in a Shout message
store information to be included in an e-mail message created with a Do Mail
parameter
NOTE
Global variables can be used to pass information between jobs in a data center. For example,
job A can set global variable %%A to Yes, and job B on another agent in the same data center
can reset %%A to No in response. Global variables can also be created and modified using the
CTMVAR utility. For more information about this utility, see the CONTROL-M Administrator
Guide. For more information about global variables, see Scope on page 510.
Resolution of each user variable depends on the specified prefix, and the scope of the
specified variable. Each of these concepts is described below.
Syntax
Valid names for user variables are any alphanumeric string (up to 38 characters in
length) preceded by a prefix of %%. Blanks are not allowed in a user variable name.
The following characters cannot be included as part of the name of a User-defined
AutoEdit variable: < > [ ] { } ( ) = ; ` ~ | : ? . + - * / & ^ # @ ! , " '.
NOTE
Application-specific job parameters may not be specified in AutoEdit variable values. The
names of application-specific job parameters are prefixed by two percent signs, the
applications abbreviation and a hyphen (%%SAPR3- for SAP, %%OAP- for Oracle, and so
on).
Names and values for User variables are case sensitive. For example, %%TEST and
%%Test are regarded as two separate variables.
508
NOTE
Names of AutoEdit variables in CONTROL-M for z/OS must always be in uppercase.
All AutoEdit variables are prefixed by %%. In addition to the %% prefix, certain
characters can be added to determine special characteristics. These special prefixes
are described in Table 51.
Table 51
%%\
Variable Prefixes
Indicates that a variable is global for the data center (CONTROL-M/Server and all its
connected agents).
This prefix is used only when creating or modifying the variable. When the variable is
referenced (for example, in a Do Shout message) it is referenced without the \. For more
information about global variables, see Scope on page 510.
%%#
Indicates that the variable should not be resolved.

This prefix enables inclusion of a variable name as text in job output. The # symbol is stripped
from the output, and the remaining AutoEdit variable name is included as text in the
appropriate location.
For example, a Do Shout message of
Job Daily returned a value for variable %%#PARM1
is output as:
Job Daily returned a value for variable %%PARM1
%%@
Indicates that the variable should contain a value to be resolved by each job that uses it.
For example:
%%\PARM1 = %%@TIME
Indicates that whenever a job uses Global variable %%PARM1, it should be resolved to the
execution time of the job (that is, the time at which the variable is referenced).
If the above parameter is specified without the @ sign (%%\PARM1 = %%TIME), it always
resolves to the execution time of the job that set the variable (that is, the time at which the
variable was created).
Note: This prefix is relevant only for Global variables whose values contain AutoEdit
variables.
%%
For Windows agents: When specifying AutoEdit variables in the CMDLINE or COMMAND
parameters on CONTROL-M/Agent for Windows, the AutoEdit prefix must be specified as
%%.
Note: If you use an agent utility (such as ctmcreate) in a batch file to specify an AutoEdit
variable, ensure that the prefix is %%%%.
509
Examples
%%A=%%ODATE
The %%A variable is resolved to the original scheduling date of the

job. %%A is local to the job.
%%\A=%%ODATE
Global variable %%\A is assigned to the original scheduling date of

the job. %%A can be referenced by CONTROL-M/Server or any
agent in the data center. All references to variable %%A resolve to
the %%ODATE value for the job in which %%A was set.
%%\A=%%@ODATE
Global variable %%\A is resolved to the original scheduling date of

the job. If %%A is referenced by CONTROL-M/Server or a job in
any agent in the data center, it resolves to the current value of
variable %%ODATE.
Note: @ indicates that %%\A should contain a value to be resolved
by each job that uses it (in this case, ODATE).
%%# A
%%# A is not resolved. The text string %%A is returned.
Scope
The scope of a variable is the extent to which it is available to other jobs. As
mentioned above, each variable can be
local for a specific job

common to all jobs in a group scheduling table
global for an entire data center (a CONTROL-M/Server and all its agents)
system AutoEdits which are predefined and available for any job in the data center
Multiple variables (each with a different scope) can have the same name. If more than
one variable with the same name has been defined, the variable with the narrowest
scope is used.
NOTE
The exception to this rule occurs when the AutoEdit variable is distributed from the
CONTROL-M/Server to the CONTROL-M/Agent. The variable from the narrowest scope
may not be the one that is used by the CONTROL-M/Agent.
Depending on the value of the AUTOEDIT_INC_SEC variable of the CONTROL-M/Server,
duplicate variables from different scopes can be distributed to the agents. For more
information, see the CONTROL-M Administrator Guide.
510
Variable lists
To determine which AutoEdit variable value to use:

CONTROL-M uses the following logic to determine which value to use when a
variable is specified in a job processing definition.
1. CONTROL-M checks if a local variable (for the job) has been defined with the
specified name. If a local variable exists, the value specified for that variable is
used.
2. If no local variable exists with the specified name, and the job is in a group
scheduling table, CONTROL-M checks for a variable with the specified name in
the Group definition. If the variable is defined in the Group definition, that value is
used.
3. If the job is not in a group scheduling table, or the variable is not defined in the
Group definition, CONTROL-M searches for a Global variable with the specified
name.
4. If no definition is found for a specified variable, the variable is resolved to the
reserved word CTMERR.
Variable lists
The %%LIBMEMSYM AutoEdit variable can be used in the AutoEdit Assignment or
Do AutoEdit parameters to indicate a text file containing a list of AutoEdit
assignments. This variable enables you to create a central file containing AutoEdit
assignment statements that can be read by many job processing definitions.
NOTE
Multiple LIBMEMSYM statements can be included in a single job processing definition. In this
way you can maintain groups of local or global variables that are relevant to certain jobs, and
allow more than one such group to be applied to a job. However, if a variable is defined in
more than one list, the last list defined overrides previous lists.
The format for the %%LIBMEMSYM variable:

%%LIBMEMSYM=path_name
path_name is the full (case sensitive) path name of a text file containing AutoEdit
assignment statements. This file must be accessible to CONTROL-M. The file must
contain a single assignment on each line.
For the AutoEdit Assignment parameter, the specified file is accessed at the time
the job is submitted for execution by CONTROL-M.
511
Variable lists
If a %%LIBMEMSYM statement is specified using the Do AutoEdit parameter,

local variables defined in the specified file are relevant only during a rerun of the
job if and when the On Statement/Code conditions are satisfied.
NOTE
For z/OS jobs, a variable list can be specified using the %%LIBSYM and %%MEMSYM
variables. If a %%LIBMEMSYM variable is specified for an z/OS job, it is treated as a
user-defined variable, and does not reference a variable list.
Example
If a job processing definition contains the following specifications for the AutoEdit
Assignment parameter:
%%a=5
%%LIBMEMSYM=/controlm/ctm/autoedit.common1
%%PARM1=%%c
And the file /controlm/ctm/autoedit.common1 contains the following entries:

%%b=%%CALCDATE %%DATE -%%a
%%yy=%%SUBSTR %%b 1 2
%%mm=%%SUBSTR %%b 3 2
%%dd=%%SUBSTR %%b 5 2
%%c=%%dd/%%mm/%%yy
When the job is submitted for execution by CONTROL-M, AutoEdit variables are
resolved as if the AutoEdit Assignment parameter contained the following entries:
%%a=5
%%b=%%CALCDATE %%DATE -%%a
%%yy=%%SUBSTR %%b 1 2
%%mm=%%SUBSTR %%b 3 2
%%dd=%%SUBSTR %%b 5 2
%%c=%%dd/%%mm/%%yy
%%PARM1=%%c
512
AutoEdit Expressions
AutoEdit Expressions
An AutoEdit expression consists of any of the following:
An elementary expression. Elementary expressions on page 513

A numeric expression consisting of AutoEdit variables and/or numeric constants
using AutoEdit operators. Numeric expressions on page 514
A string expression formed by concatenating AutoEdit variables and/or
alphanumeric strings. String Expressions on page 516
An AutoEdit function. AutoEdit functions on page 518
A special expression that can be used to specify Local Data Areas for iSeries
(AS/400) jobs. Expressions for %%LDA [iSeries (AS/400) only] on page 520
NOTE
AutoEdit variables can also be used to represent part of the name of an existing AutoEdit
variable in an expression. When this method is used the name of the variable is resolved and
then the contents of that variable are used for further resolution of the expression. (For more
information, see the examples later in this chapter.)
A Shout message can include an AutoEdit expression as part of its text; however, it
cannot assign a value to an AutoEdit variable.
The following syntax rules apply to AutoEdit expressions:
Only one expression can be placed on a line.

No spaces are allowed before the =.
Spaces that immediately follow the = are ignored.
Variable names and values are case sensitive.
Strings of alphanumeric characters do not require quotation marks.
If quotation marks are used, they are considered part of the string.
Elementary expressions
An elementary expression has the following format:

variable=value
variable is any user variable or job submission variable.
value is any numeric or alphanumeric string up to 214 characters in length.
The following expression assigns a value of 100 to the %%Result variable:

%%Result=100
513
Numeric expressions
The following expression assigns the string Job PRDKCZ finished OK to the
%%Completion variable:
%%Completion=Job PRDKCZ finished OK
Numeric expressions
A numeric expression has the following format:
result=operand operator operand
The components of this expression are described in the following table:

result
Any user variable or job submission variable.
operand
Any AutoEdit variable, or a numeric constant.
operator
One of the following AutoEdit operators:

%%PLUS represents the + operator
%%MINUS represents the - operator
Syntax rules
The following syntax rules apply to a numeric expression:
Only one operator can be used in each expression.

There should be no spaces immediately before or after the =.
There must be spaces before and after the operator.
NOTE
When specifying AutoEdit functions that return dates, such as %%$CALCDATE or %%$DATE,
there should be no spaces between the + (plus) or - (minus) sign and the number of days to
add or subtract. In this case, the + and - signs are not considered numeric expression operators
and are not related to the rules specified here. For more information, see %%CALCDATE
and %%$CALCDATE on page 518.
EXAMPLE
In the following example, %%YESTERDAY resolves to 0 on July 1:
%%YESTERDAY=%%DAY %%MINUS 1
514
Numeric expressions
EXAMPLE
In the following example, %%PARM1 resolves to 46 on February 5th:
%%X=%%RJULDAY %%MINUS %%DAY
%%PARM1=%%X %%PLUS 15
515
String Expressions
String Expressions
A string expression has the following basic format:
<variable>=<value>[.]<value>...

<variable>
<value>
Any AutoEdit variable, or alphanumeric string.
. (period)
If specified, indicates that the values before and after the

period should be concatenated.
Syntax rules
The following syntax rules apply to a string expression:
516
Any spaces in the expression (including those immediately following the =) are
regarded as part of the string and are included in the result.
A period is used to concatenate two variables. No concatenation character is

required to link two strings.
To include a period as part of the string between two concatenated variables, use
two consecutive periods (see example below).
Any number of variables or strings can be concatenated in an expression.
If one variable follows another with no period in between, the two variables are
combined to form the name of a third variable (see example below). Concatenation
progresses from right to left until the entire expression is resolved.
String Expressions
Examples
%%X resolves to 0312:
%%X=%%DAY.%%MONTH
%%Y resolves to 03.12:

%%Y=%%DAY..%%MONTH
%%Z resolves to Today is 03/12/05:

%%Z=
Today
is
%%DAY/%%MONTH/%%YEAR
The following sequence passes a value to %%PARM1 based on the day of the month.
This example illustrates building the name of a variable in the expression:
%%BackupTape_01=301
%%BackupTape_02=302
%%BackupTape_03=303
%%PARM1=%%BackupTape_%%DAY
The %%BackupTape_%%DAY expression is resolved in two steps (from right to

left):
1. Given that the system date is Dec. 3, %%DAY resolves to 03. The resulting
expression is:
%%PARM1=%%BackupTape_03
2. Next, CONTROL-M resolves the %%BackupTape_03 variable. Since the value of
this variable is 303, the resulting expression is:
%%PARM1=303
517
AutoEdit functions
AutoEdit functions
An AutoEdit function performs an action or process on the specified user variable or
job submission variable. AutoEdit functions are used instead of another expression.
The following functions are available:
Table 52
AutoEdit Functions
Function
Description
%%CALCDATE and
%%$CALCDATE
Adds or subtracts a specified number of days from a specified

date. Same as %%CALCDATE, but handles 4-digit years.
%%GETENV
<environment variable>
Retrieves the value of an environment variable.
%%SUBSTR
Extracts a substring from a specified string.
%%CALCDATE and %%$CALCDATE

%%CALCDATE is a numeric function that adds or subtracts a quantity of days from a
given date. This function has the following format:
result=%%CALCDATE date +|-quantity

result
date
Date or variable in yymmdd (yyyymmdd for %%$CALCDATE) format.

This value must be preceded and followed by a space.
quantity
Number (or variable that resolves to a number) of days to add or subtract

from the date.
EXAMPLE
On July 2, 2005, %%A resolves to 050630 in any of the following expressions:
%%A=%%CALCDATE %%DATE -2
%%A=%%CALCDATE 050702 -%%DAY
%%A=%%CALCDATE 050628 +2
EXAMPLE
On July 2, 2005, %%A resolves to 20050630 in any of the following expressions
%%A=%%$CALCDATE %%$DATE -2
%%A=%%$CALCDATE 20050702 -%%DAY
%%A=%%$CALCDATE 20050628 +2
518
AutoEdit functions
%%SUBSTR
%%SUBSTR is a string function that is used to extract a substring from within a larger
string. This function has the following format:
result=%%SUBSTR variable startpos length

result
variable
Any AutoEdit variable.
startpos
Numeric literal or variable that indicates the first position in the original
string from which to extract the substring. The first character is position 1.
length
A number or variable, indicating the length of the substring to extract.
NOTE
The values specified for both <startpos> and <length> must be (or resolve to) a number
greater than zero.
EXAMPLE
In the following series of expressions, %%Number resolves to TWO:
%%Nstring=ONETWOTHREE
%%Start=4
%%Number=%%SUBSTR %%Nstring %%Start 3
%%GETENV <environment variable>

This function retrieves the value of an environment variable. It has the following
format: result=%%GETENV <environment variable>.
EXAMPLE
%%A=%%GETENV HOME
%%A resolves to the CONTROL-M/Server user home directory.
519
Expressions for %%LDA [iSeries (AS/400) only]
Expressions for %%LDA [iSeries (AS/400) only]

%%LDA is a special variable that can be used to specify Local Data Areas for iSeries
(AS/400) jobs.
The following format can be used when specifying an expression to assign a value to
job submission variable %%LDA for a job:
%%LDA[_startpos[_length] [_dec]]=AutoEdit_exp

startpos
A number indicating the starting position in the LDA at which to

place the results of the specified expression.
length
A number, indicating how many positions in LDA to reserve for the

results of the expression.
dec
A number indicating how many decimal places to include in the

packed decimal value passed to the LDA.
AutoEdit_exp
The AutoEdit expression whose resolved value should be placed in

the indicated location in the LDA.
EXAMPLE
Assuming that the system date is December 15, the following expression:
%%LDA_2_3=%%DAY
is submitted to iSeries (AS/400) as:
CHGDTAARA *LDA(2 3) VALUE(15)
The following expression inserts the packed value of 00123.40 into the LDA starting in
position 11 for a decimal length of 7 (Actual Packed length of 4):
%%LDA_11_7_2=123.4
520
Chapter
16
CONTROL-M Business Process

Integration Suite parameters
16
This chapter describes the parameters in the various CONTROL-M/Control Module

for BPI panels, in the Job Editing form. This panel is displayed in the Job Editing form
when CONTROL-M/CM for BPI is installed on your data center. Basic CONTROL-M
parameters for CONTROL-M/CM for BPI jobs are summarized in the following
tables. Each of these parameters is described in detail in the remainder of this chapter.
The parameter descriptions are in alphabetical order.
NOTE
Other CONTROL-M job parameters and variables can be used to apply additional processing
to CONTROL-M/CM for BPI jobs. For more information about these parameters, see the
other chapters in this guide.
Table 53
JAVA panel parameters summary (part 1 of 2)
Parameter
Description
Account
(CONTROL-M/CM
for BPI Java
Applications)
A profile that is used to create and execute an EJB or Java Class job.
Mandatory.
Object
Name of the EJB or Java Class according to which the Method

parameter value is specified. Mandatory.
Method
A method applicable to the specified Java Application class.

Mandatory.
Exclude Job Output An option to exclude information about job output from the Sysout at
(CONTROL-M/CM the end of a job execution. Optional.
for BPI Java
Applications)
No Sysout Banner
(CONTROL-M/CM
for BPI Java
Applications)
Specifies whether a Sysout banner is written to the Sysout at the end of

a job execution. Optional.
Chapter 16 CONTROL-M Business Process Integration Suite parameters
521
Table 53
JAVA panel parameters summary (part 2 of 2)
Parameter
Description
Parameter Name
Specify the name of the parameter for the chosen method. Mandatory
if the method requires parameters.
Parameter Value
Specify the value of the parameter for the chosen method. Mandatory
if the method requires parameters.
Parameter Alias
Specify the alias of the parameter for the chosen method. Optional.
Table 54
WS panel parameters summary
Parameter
Description
Account (CONTROLM/CM for BPI Web

Services)
The Account is a profile that is used in order to create and execute a

Web Services job.
Business
A company or business that provides web services.
WSDL
A URL or fully qualified filename pointing to the WSDL of the web

service
Service
A service provided by the company or business specified in the

Business field.
Operation
An operation available for the service specified in the Service field.
Use Parameters from

Input File
An option to invoke the target web service with predefined SOAP

message from the specified input file, in place of input parameters
Add SOAP Header

From File
An option to add the predefined SOAP Header to the final web

service invocation SOAP request, when applicable.
Input parameters
Specify values for each selected parameter.
Output parameters
Specify the outcome of selected output parameters.
Array Size
Specifies a number of items in an input parameter array when

applicable
Exclude Job Output

An option to exclude information about job output from the
SYSOUT at the end of a job execution. Optional.
(CONTROL-M/CM
for BPI Web Services)
No Sysout Banner
Specifies whether a Sysout banner is written to the Sysout at the end
of a job execution. Optional.
(CONTROL-M/CM
for BPI Web Services)
Table 55
MSG panel parameters summary (part 1 of 2)
Parameter
Description
Account (CONTROLA profile that is used to create and execute a Messaging job.
M/CM for BPI Messaging)
522
Assign Job Output to the

following AutoEdit
Upon job completion, saves the reply message into a chosen

AutoEdit variable.
Assign Job Output to the

following file
Upon job completion, saves the reply message into a chosen file,
located on the computer on which CONTROL-M/CM for
Messaging is installed.
Table 55
MSG panel parameters summary (part 2 of 2)
Parameter
Description
Destination queue/Topic
Destination queue/topic name of the message queue to which

the outgoing messages are sent.
No Sysout Banner
(CONTROL-M/CM for
BPI Messaging)
Specifies whether a Sysout banner is written to the Sysout.
Exclude Job Output

(CONTROL-M/CM for
BPI Messaging)
An option to exclude information about job output from the

Sysout.
Expiration Time
The amount of time until the outgoing message expires (in

seconds).
Use Free Text Message
The content of the free text message.
Priority
The Outgoing message priority within the queue.
No Sysout Banner
(CONTROL-M/CM for
BPI Messaging)
Property key name to be added to an outgoing message.
Parameter Value
Property value corresponding to the Property Name parameter.
Property Value
Optional. The property value corresponding to the Property

Name parameter.
Reply Queue
Message queue to which message replies will be sent.
Time to Wait
The amount of time to wait for incoming messages in the reply

message queue.
Use Predefined Message
Select to use a previously defined text or binary file as the

content of the message, rather than entering free text.
Wait for Reply
An option to enable waiting for messages in the reply message

queue.
523
Account (CONTROL-M/CM for BPI Java Applications)
Account (CONTROL-M/CM for BPI Java

Applications)
A profile that is used to create and execute an EJB or Java Class job.
Format
Usage
Mandatory
Length
Up to 30 characters
Case Sensitive
Yes (Uppercase only)
Valid Characters
Integers between 0 and 9

_ (underscore)
- (dash, hyphen)
A-Z characters
Blank spaces
Not permitted
Default
None
Variable Name
%%JAVA-PROFILE
General information
No special characters should be included within the name definition.
524
Account (CONTROL-M/CM for BPI Web Services)
Account (CONTROL-M/CM for BPI Web

Services)
A profile that is used in order to create and execute a Web Services job.
Format
Usage
Mandatory
Length
Up to 50 characters
Case Sensitive
Valid Characters
Integers between 0 and 9

_ (underscore)
- (dash, hyphen)
Alphabetical characters between A - Z (inclusive)
Blank spaces
Not permitted
Default
None
Variable Name
%%WS-ACCOUNT
General information
525
Account (CONTROL-M/CM for BPI Messaging)
Account (CONTROL-M/CM for BPI Messaging)

Mandatory. A profile that is used to create and execute a CONTROL-M/CM for BPI
Messaging job.
Format
Length
Up to 30 characters
Case Sensitive
Valid Characters
A string including any alphanumeric character, and underscore and

hyphen.
Blank spaces
Not permitted
Default
None
Variable Name
%%MSG-ACCOUNT
General information
526
Add SOAP Header From File
Add SOAP Header From File

Select this option to add predefined SOAP Header to the invocation of the target web
service SOAP message as taken from a file specified in the Header File field.
Format
Format
Valid characters
Check box
X: (Selected) Add predefined SOAP header from file

N: (Cleared) Do not add any predefined SOAP header (default)
Valid Values
Any integer up to 99
Variable name
%%WS-ADDSOAPHEADERFROMFILE
Header Entry File Requirements

Valid Values
Any character string representing the file name including its full path.
Variable name
%%WS-SOAPHEADERFILE
Length
General Information
An example of a SOAP header:
<SOAP-ENV:Header>
<user>J2EE_ADMIN</user>
<language>English</language>
</SOAP-ENV:Header>
527
Array Size
Array Size
Specifies a number of items in an input parameter array applicable to the Input
parameters of the web services invocation when necessary.
Format
528
Usage
Optional
Valid Values
Any integer up to 99
Variable name
%%WS-ARRAYSIZE
Default
Length
Up to two digits
Assign Job Output to the following AutoEdit
Assign Job Output to the following AutoEdit

Optional. Upon job completion, saves the reply message into a chosen AutoEdit
variable.
Format
Format
Valid Characters
Variable Name
Check Box
X: (Selected) Save reply message to AutoEdit variable
N: (Cleared) Do not save reply message to AutoEdit variable

(default)
%%MSG-ASGOUTPUTTOAUTOEDIT
AutoEdit Entry Requirements

Valid Values
Any alphanumeric character, and underscore and hyphen. Spaces and

special characters are not permitted.
Variable name
%%MSG-JOBOUTPUTAUTOEDIT
Length
Up to 38 characters
The AutoEdit variable into which the job output is saved can be configured in the
following formats:
AutoEdit Type
Format
AutoEdit
%%<autoedit_name>
Global AutoEdit
%%\<autoedit_name>
Global AutoEdit
<autoedit_name>
General information
Cannot be selected if Assign job output to the following file is specified.
529
Assign Job Output to the following file
Assign Job Output to the following file

Optional. Upon job completion, saves the reply message into a chosen file, located on
the computer on which CONTROL-M/EM Web Services API is installed.
Format
Format
Valid Characters
Variable Name
Check Box
X: (Selected) Save reply message to file
N: (Cleared) Do not save reply message to file (default)
%%MSG-ASGOUTPUTTOFILE
File Entry Requirements

Valid Values
Any character string representing the file name including its full path.
Variable name
%%MSG-JOBOUTPUTFILE
Length
General information
Cannot be selected if Assign job output to the following AutoEdit is specified.
530
Business
Business
A company or business that provides web services.
For UDDI, this means any business registered in the specific UDDI server.
For WS_FS, this means the path to the specific WSDL file in the directory.
For WS_URL, this means the URL to the specific WSDL file.
Format
Usage
Mandatory
Format
Text field
Length
Case Sensitive
Yes
Default
None
Variable Name
%%WS-BUSINESS
531
Optional. Name of the message queue to which the outgoing messages are sent.
Format
532
Length
Valid characters
Use default or a string including any alphanumeric character, and

underscore and hyphen.
Blank spaces
Not permitted
Default
Use Default
Variable Name
%%MSG-DESTINATIONQUEUE
Exclude Job Output (CONTROL-M/CM for BPI Java Applications)
Exclude Job Output (CONTROL-M/CM for BPI

Java Applications)
Optional. An option to exclude information about job output from the SYSOUT at the
end of a job execution.
Format
Format
Valid Values
Check box
X: (Selected) - exclude job output
N: (Cleared) - include job output
Default
N (Cleared)
Variable Name
%%JAVA-SYSOUTSKIP
533
Exclude Job Output (CONTROL-M/CM for BPI Web Services)

Web Services)
Selecting this option means that an output message is not created at the end of the job
execution.
Format
Format
Valid Values
Check box
534
X: (Selected) - exclude job output message (SYSOUT file)

N: (Cleared) - include job output message (SYSOUT file)
Default
N (Cleared)
Variable Name
%%WS-SYSOUTSKIP
Exclude Job Output (CONTROL-M/CM for BPI Messaging)

Messaging)
Optional. An option to exclude all information from the SYSOUT.
Format
Format
Valid characters
Check box
Variable Name
X: (Selected) - exclude job output

N: (Cleared) - do not exclude job output (default)
%%MSG-SYSOUTSKIP
535
Expiration Time
Expiration Time
Optional. The amount of time (in seconds) until the outgoing message expires.
536
Length
Up to 10 digits
Valid characters
Use default or any digit representing unit of seconds
Blank spaces
Not permitted
Default
Use default
Variable name
%%MSG-OUTGOINGMSGEXPTIME
Input parameters
Input parameters
Specify values for each selected parameter.
NOTE
Certain parameters are mandatory, and an indication is displayed to this effect. Failure to
select mandatory parameters may cause your job to fail.
Format
Length
Case Sensitive
Yes
Variable Name
%%WS-PARMS-P00n-NAME
NOTE: Where n refers to the nth parameter of the corresponding
method. For example, if there were two parameters for a particular
method, the first parameter would use
P001(%%WS-PARMS-P001-NAME), and the second parameter would
use P002 (%%WS-PARMS-P002-NAME).
537
Method
Method
A method applicable to the specified Java Application class.
Format
538
Usage
Mandatory
Length
Case Sensitive
Yes
Valid Characters
Alphanumeric string. Cannot begin with a number. Blank spaces not

permitted.
Default
None
Valid Values
Any method specified within the Object. For more information see
Object on page 542
Variable Name
%%JAVA-METHOD
No Sysout Banner (CONTROL-M/CM for BPI Java Applications)
No Sysout Banner (CONTROL-M/CM for BPI

Java Applications)
Optional. Specifies whether a Sysout banner is written to the Sysout at the end of a job
execution.
Format
Format
Valid Values
Check box
X: (Selected) - exclude Sysout banner
N: (Cleared) - include Sysout banner
Default
N (Cleared)
Variable Name
%%JAVA-NOSYSOUTBANNER
539
No Sysout Banner (CONTROL-M/CM for BPI Web Services)

Web Services)
Optional. Specifies whether a Sysout banner is written to the Sysout at the end of a job
execution.
Format
Format
Valid Values
Check box
540
X: (Selected) - exclude Sysout banner

N: (Cleared) - include Sysout banner
Default
N (Cleared)
Variable Name
%%WS-NOSYSOUTBANNER
No Sysout Banner (CONTROL-M/CM for BPI Messaging)

Messaging)
Optional. Specifies whether a Sysout banner is written to the Sysout.
Format
Format
Valid Values
Check box
Variable Name
X: (Selected) - exclude SYSOUT banner

N: (Cleared) - include SYSOUT banner (default)
%%MSG-NOSYSOUTBANNER
541
Object
Object
Name of the EJB or Java Class according to which the Method parameter value is
specified.
Format
542
Usage
Mandatory
Length
Case Sensitive
Yes
Valid Characters

permitted.
Default
None
Variable Name
%%JAVA-JAVA
Operation
Operation
An operation available for the service specified in the Service field.
Format
Usage
Mandatory
Format
Text field
Length
Case Sensitive
Yes
Default
None
Variable Name
%%WS-OPERATION
543
Output parameters
Output parameters
Specify the outcome of selected output parameters.
NOTE
When selecting the global AutoEdit variable option, the maximum length criteria applies.
However, if you select that the output parameter value should be saved to a file, there is no
maximum length limitation.
You can specify the outcome of certain output parameters that exist as a result of the job once
it has been run. The output parameters can be specified as one of the following syntaxes:
Global AutoEdit variable name, for example, COMPANY
A path to a file in which the value is to be saved.
For example, FILE://D:\company.txt These values can also be used to define an input
parameter of another job.
Format
544
Length
Case Sensitive
Yes
Parameter Value
Variable Name
%%WS-PARMS-P001-VALUE
NOTE: P001 represents the number of the parameter for the chosen
method, the second parameter would use P002 instead of P001
(%%WS-PARMS-P002-VALUE).
Parameter Alias
Parameter Alias
Optional. Specify the alias of the parameter for the chosen method. For more
information see Method on page 538.
Format
Length
Case Sensitive
Yes
Parameter Alias
Variable Name
%%JAVA-PARMS-P001-ALIAS
(%%JAVA-PARMS-P002-ALIAS).
545
Parameter Name
Parameter Name
Mandatory for those methods that require parameters. Specify the name of the
parameter for the chosen method. For more information see Method on page 538.
Format
Length
Case Sensitive
Yes
Variable Name
%%JAVA-PARMS-P00n-NAME
NOTE: Where n refers to the nth parameter of the corresponding
method, the first parameter would use
P001(%%JAVA-PARMS-P001-NAME), and the second parameter
would use P002 (%%JAVA-PARMS-P002-NAME).
546
Parameter Value
Parameter Value
Mandatory for those methods that require parameters. Specify the value of the
parameter for the chosen method. For more information see Method on page 538.
Format
Length
Case Sensitive
Yes
Parameter Value
Variable Name
%%JAVA-PARMS-P001-VALUE
(%%JAVA-PARMS-P002-VALUE).
547
Priority
Priority
Optional. The level for prioritizing the messages that are to be routed to the
Destination queue/Topic.
Format
Valid values
548
Use Default
Any digit between 0 and 9
Default
Use Default
Variable Name
%%MSG-PRIORITY
Property Name
Property Name
Optional. Property key name to be added to an outgoing message.
Format
Valid values
Any alphanumeric character, underscore, hyphen.
Length
Between 1 - 212 characters
Case Sensitive
Yes
Variable Name
%%MSG-PARMS-P00n-NAME
Note: Where n refers to the nth property. For example, if you want to
define two properties, the first property would be
%%MSG-PARMS-P001-NAME, and the second property would be
%%MSG-PARMS-P002-NAME.
Related parameters
Parameter Value
549
Property Value
Property Value
Optional. The property value corresponding to the Property Name parameter.
Format
Length
Case Sensitive
Yes
Variable Name
%%MSG-PARMS-P00n-VALUE
Note: Where n refers to the nth property value. For example, if you
want to specify two property values, the first value would be
%%MSG-PARMS-P001-VALUE, and the second value would be
%%MSG-PARMS-P002-VALUE.
550
Reply Queue
Reply Queue
Optional. Enabled if Wait For Reply is selected. The message queue to which
message replies will be sent.
Format
Length
Case sensitive
Yes
Valid characters
Use default or a string including any alphanumeric character, and

underscore and hyphen.
Blank spaces
Not permitted
Default
Use default
Variable name
%%MSG-REPLYQUEUE
Related parameters
Wait for Reply
Time to Wait
551
Service
Service
A service provided by the company or business specified in the Business field.
For UDDI, this means any service registered for the business in the specific UDDI
server.
For WS_FS, this means any service specified in the WSDL file.
For WS_URL, this means any service specified in the WSDL URL.
Format
552
Usage
Mandatory
Format
Text field
Length
Case Sensitive
Yes
Default
None
Variable Name
%%WS-SERVICE
Time to Wait
Time to Wait
Optional. Enabled if Wait For Reply is selected. The amount of time in seconds to
wait for incoming messages in the reply message queue.
Format
Length
Up to 10 digits
Valid characters
Use default or any numeral value representing unit of seconds
Default
Use default
Variable name
%%MSG-TIMETOWAIT
Related parameters
Wait for Reply
Reply Queue
553
Use Parameters from Input File
Use Parameters from Input File

An option to invoke the target web service with predefined SOAP message from the
specified input file, in place of input parameters.
Format
Format
Valid Values
Variable Name
Check box
X: (Selected) Use predefined SOAP message request from file
N: (Cleared) Do not use predefined SOAP message (default)
%%WS-USEINPARMFILE
Input File Entry Requirements

Valid values
Any character string representing the file name including its full
path..
Length
Variable Name
%%WS-INPUTPUTFILE
General information
An example of an web service invoking a SOAP request:
<SOAP-ENV:Envelope
xmlns:SOAP-ENV="http://schemas.xmlsoap.org/soap/envelope/">
<SOAP-ENV:Body>
<ctmem:request_change_alert_status
xmlns:ctmem="http://www.bmc.com/ctmem/schema620">
<ctmem:alert_id>12345</ctmem:alert_id>
<ctmem:status>Handled</ctmem:status>
</ctmem:request_change_alert_status>
</SOAP-ENV:Body>
</SOAP-ENV:Envelope>
554

Mandatory if Use Predefined Message is not selected. The content of the free text
message.
Format
Valid Values
X: (Selected) - Use free text message
Variable Name
%%MSG-USEFREETEXT
Free Message Text Requirements

Format
Logical name specific to the predefined message.
Valid Values
Any alphanumeric and special characters
Variable Name
%%MSGMSGTEXTPARMS-Pxxx-SUBMSG, where xxx is a 3-digit

starting from 001 (through N if the message is longer than 212
characters and/or N multiple of 212 characters)
Example:
%%MSG-MSGTEXTPARMS-P001-SUBMSG,
%%MSG-MSGTEXTPARMS-P002-SUBMSG, etc
Related parameters
555

Optional. Select to use a previously defined text or binary file as the content of the
message, rather than entering free text.
Format
Valid Values
Variable Name
X: (Selected) - Use predefined message
N: (Cleared) - Use free text message (default)
%%MSG-USEPREDEFINEDMSG
Message Name Requirements
556
Format
Logical name specific to the predefined message
Valid values
Any alphanumeric character, underscore, hyphen
Maximum length
30 characters
Variable Name
%%MSGMESSAGENAME
Wait for Reply
Wait for Reply

Optional. An option to enable waiting for messages in the reply message queue.
Format
Valid Values
Use default
Yes
No
Default
Use default
Variable Name
%%MSG-WAITREPLY
Related parameters
Time to Wait
Reply Queue
NOTE
A reply message must be a text message.
557
WSDL
WSDL
A URL or fully qualified filename pointing to the WSDL of the web service.
Format
558
Usage
Mandatory
Length
Case Sensitive
Yes
Valid Characters

permitted.
Valid Values
A string that starts with http:// pointing to a url of a valid WSDL

or starting with file:// pointing to a fully qualified pathname of a
valid WSDL file
Default
None
Variable Name
%%%%WS-WSDL
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
Index
Symbols
backslash 247
# symbol 509
$ symbol 212, 215
$EJ code value 276
$HOME keyword 46
%% prefix
AutoEdit Assignment parameter 35
global variables 509
variable syntax 508
%%# prefix
AutoEdit variables 499
variable resolution 509
%%%% AutoEdit on Windows 40, 509
%%@ prefix
%%variablename. See specific parameter or variable
(without %%)
& ampersand 247
**** date reference
Do Cond parameter 228
In conditions 199
***** code value 275
*CURLIB
iSeries (AS/400) job documentation 46
job script file (iSeries AS/400) 66
Path parameter 66
*FILE keyword
job documentation (AS/400) 47
*LIBL
iSeries (AS/400) job documentation 46
job script file (iSeries AS/400) 66
Path parameter 66
*NCT2 code value 276
*rangename PGMST value of the On parameter 273
*TERM code value 276
*UNKW code value 276
+ num Days
subparameter of Due Out parameter 154
+ num days
subparameter of Time From, Time Until parameter
189
+EVERY PGMST value
On parameter 274
< less than 247
= equals 247
> greater than 247

@ symbol
in a variable prefix 509
Quantitative resources 212, 215
@START command for UNISYS jobs 502
double quotes 247
single quote 247
A
ABAP Program parameter (SAP) 318
abbreviations used in this document 23
ABOVE_NORMAL_PRIORITY_CLASS
Priority Class parameter 492
absolute job dependency 90
Abu Dhabi time zone 130
Account
parameter (FTP) 427
parameter (Java Applications) 524
parameter (messaging) 526
parameter (SAP) 319
parameter (Web Services) 525
accounting codes for iSeries (AS/400) jobs 500
ACCOUNTvariable for UNISYS jobs 502
ACGCDE variable for iSeries (AS/400) jobs 500
Activate Traces parameter (SAP) 320
Active From - To date
parameter 83
Active From Date
ACTIVE_FROM_DATE parameter alias 86
-DATEFROM parameter alias 86
DEFINITION ACTIVE FROM parameter alias 86
subparameter of Schedule Tag parameter 124
Active From Date, component aliases
CONTROL-M for z/OS 86
CONTROL-M/EM Utilities 86
CONTROL-M/Server Utilities 86
Active Jobs file
prioritizing job processing 174
removing jobs 159
retroactive job scheduling 119
Active Panel parameters 311
Active To Date
ACTIVE_To_DATE parameter alias 86
-DATEUNTIL parameter alias 86
Index
559
DEFINITION ACTIVE UNTIL parameter alias 86
Active To Date, component aliases
Add ABAP window parameters 314
Add External Program parameters (SAP) 315, 316
adding
prerequisite conditions 227
addition
AutoEdit expressions 514
dates 518
Additional Options parameter (FTP) 428
ADDRUN variable for UNISYS jobs 502
Adjust Condition parameter 89
ADJUST CONDITION parameter alias 90
Adjust Conditions parameter alias 90
ADJUST_COND parameter alias 90
-adjust_cond parameter alias 90
adjust_condition parameter alias 90
Adjust Condition, component aliases
CONTROL-M for z/OS Utilities 90
CONTROL-M/EM API 90
Reporting Facility 90
Advanced Options parameter (OAP) 395, 419
After the completion of a successful file transfer parameter
(FTP) 429
AKL time zone 131
alerts
defining urgency 298
Allocation Units parameter (FTP) 430
analyzing job output 221
analyzing ob output 231
ANC time zone 130
Anchorage Standard Time 130
And/Or
-cal_andor parameter alias 92
DAYS_AND_OR parameter alias 92
in On parameter 269
parameter 91, 92
subparameter of In Condition parameter 199
And/Or, component aliases
and_or subparameter 279
ANYSTEP PGMST value, On parameter 274
APPL
parameter 27, 28
variable (CONTROL-M for z/OS jobs) 504
APPLGROUP variable 504
APPLIC
parameter 27
variable 504
560
Application
parameter 27
parameter (OAP) 396
Application Instance parameter (OAP) 397
Application Name parameter (OAP) 398
application node group, selecting 29
Application Short Name parameter (OAP) 399
Application Type parameter 29
APPL_TYPE parameter alias 30
application_type parameter alias 30
appltype parameter alias 30
availability 30
Application Type, component aliases
CONTROL-M/EM API 30
e-Trigger 30
Application Version parameter 31
APPL_VER parameter alias 32
application_version parameter alias 32
-applver parameter alias 32
Application Version, component aliases
CONTROL-M/EM API 32
e-Trigger 32
Application, component aliases
CONTROL-M/EM API 28
Archive ID parameter (SAP) 321
Archive Text parameter (SAP) 322
archiving
job output 290
SYSDATA 290
Archiving Object parameter (SAP) 323
ARG subparameter of Do CTBRule parameter 230
ARGUMENTS subparameter of the CTB Step parameter
222
AS/400. See iSeries (AS/400)
ASCII parameter (FTP) 431
ASSIGN
command for OpenVMS 37
variable for Tandem jobs 503
Assign Job Output to the following AutoEdit parameter
(messaging) 529
Assign Job Output to the following file parameter
(messaging) 530
AT subparameter of the CTB Step parameter 221
ATL time zone 130
Atlantic Standard Time 130
Auckland time zone 131
Author parameter 33
Author, component aliases
Authorization parameter (SAP) 324
authorization. See security
authorizations
job owner 64
Security Group parameter 417
AuthorSecurity parameter 33
Auto-Archive parameter 290
arch_max_days parameter alias 292
arch_max_runs parameter alias 292
AUTO ARCHIVE parameter alias 292
auto_archive parameter alias 292
AUTOARC parameter alias 292
AUTOARCH parameter alias 292
AUTO-ARCHIVE parameter alias 292
sys_db parameter alias 292
Auto-Archive, component aliases
CONTROL-M/EM API 292
AutoEdit
AUTOEDIT parameter alias 37
-autoedit parameter alias 37
parameter alternate formats 37
SET VAR parameter alias 37
Setvar parameter alias 37
AutoEdit Assignment
AutoEdit support 498
parameter 35
versus Do AutoEdit 497
AutoEdit facility
description 497
expressions 513
functions 518
strings 516
variable lists 511
AutoEdit variables
%%# prefix 499
assigning a value 513
defining when rerunning jobs 224
description 497
in a command line 40
in CMDLINE parameter 40, 509
in Do Shout messages 507
in job parameters 498
in Remedy action parameter 247
in Shout messages 298, 507
iSeries (AS/400) 500
job submission variables list 500
OpenVMS variables list 500
post-processing variables list 507
prefixes 509
resolving 224
scope 510
specifying 35, 224

support in job parameters 36
system variables list 504
Tandem variables list 503
UNISYS variables list 502
user-defined variables 508
variable types 499
AutoEdit, component aliases
CONTROL-M/EM API 37
automatic job rerun 182
Automatic Log Copy parameter
SYSOUT handling 308
with Do Sysout 254
Average Run Time parameter 311
AVG_CPU variable 507
AVG_TIME variable 507
B
Background Job Name parameter (SAP) 325
Bangkok time zone 130
basic scheduling criteria and the Relationship parameter
117
BELOW_NORMAL_PRIORITY_CLASS
Binary parameter (FTP) 431
BKK time zone 130
BLANKn variable 504
Block Size parameter (FTP) 432
BMC Software, contacting 2
Bourne shell commands 39
broadcasting
to CONTROL-M/Agents 166
using the Multi Agent parameter 166
Business parameter (Web Services) 531
Business Process Type parameter (SAP) 374
Business Warehouse parameters 317
BW General parameters 317
bypassing Tandem jobs 503
C
CALCDATE function 518
calendars, defining 106, 139
calling process
Priority Class 492
Scheduling Class 495
case-sensitivity in job processing parameters 24
CC subparameter of Do Mail parameter 241
CENT variable (century) 504
Central European Time 130
Index
561
Central Standard Time 130
CET time zone 130
character mask support in the File Name parameter 52
Check Sessions parameter (SAP) 326
Check Variant parameter (SAP) 327
cleanup of data sets 170
cmdline parameter for AutoEdit variables 40, 509
code
qualifiers 278
relationships 278
subparameter 279
code values
$EJ 276
***** 275
*NCT2 276
*TERM 276
*UNKW 276
Cnnnn 275
EXERR 276
FLUSH 276
FORCE 275
JFAIL 275
JLOST 275
JNRUN 275
JNSUB 276
JSECU 275
NOTOK 276
OK 276
On parameter 274
REC0 276
SNRUN 276
Sxxxx 275
Unnnn 275
Codes option in On parameter 269
Columns parameter (SAP) 328
Command
CMD LINE parameter alias 40
CMDLINE parameter alias 40
-cmdline parameter alias 40
command parameter alias 40
option for AutoEdit support 498
parameter 39
Command, component aliases
CONTROL-M/EM API 40
commands
iSeries (AS/400) command syntax 39
POSTCMD variable 506
PRECMD variable 506
syntax for iSeries (AS/400) 39
task type 76, 77, 78
completion
codes 507
modifying status 243, 245, 248, 252
statuses for post processing 219
562
component aliases 42
Active From -To date 86
Adjust Condition 90
And/Or 92
Application 28
Application Type 30
Application Version 32
Author 34
Auto-Archive 292
AutoEdit 37
Command 40
Confcal 95
Confirm 145
CONTROL Module Version 41
Control Resource 213
Critical 148
CTB Step 222
Cyclic 153
Dates 99
Days 104
Days Calendar 108
Description 44
Do AutoEdit 225
Do Cond 229
Do CTBRule 231
Do Forcejob 234
Do If Rerun 239
Do Mail 242
Do NOTOK 244
Do OK 246
Do Rerun 249
Do Shout 251
Do Stop Cyclic 252
Do Sysout 254
Doc Lib 46
Doc Mem 48
File Name 53
Form Name 55
Group 57
In Condition 201
Interval 158
Job Name 59
Max Wait 160
Maximum 165
Minimum 111
Months 113
Multi Agent 167
Node ID/Group 169
On 279
Out Condition 209
Over Lib 63
Owner 64
Path 67
PDS 116
Prevent NCT2 172
Priority 175
Quantitative Resource 217
Relationship 118
Request NJE Node 177
Rerun From 179
Rerun Member 183
Reten Days 281
Reten Gen 283
Retro 120
Scheduling Environment 185
Scheduling Table Lib 72
Scheduling Tag 125
Shout 300
Step Range 286
SYSOUT Handling 308
System Affinity 187
Table 73
Task Type 78
Time From and Time Until 191
Time Zone 132
Units 194
Week Days 137
Weeks Calendar 140
Compression parameter (FTP) 433
COMPSTAT variable 507
AutoEdit facility 507
On statements 259
concatenation of AutoEdit expressions 516
Condition subparameter of Do Cond parameter 227
conditional job dependency 90
conditions
adding and deleting 227
In 198
Out 206
Conditions Panel parameters 197
Confcal parameter 93
CONF_CAL parameter alias 95
CONFCAL parameter alias 95
-confcal parameter alias 95
Confcal, component aliases
Confirm
CONFIRM parameter alias 145
-confirm parameter alias 145
confirm_flag parameter alias 145
parameter 145
subparameter of Do If Rerun parameter 238
Confirm, component aliases
Connection Profile parameter (PS8) 472
constructing On-Do statements 271
control language statements, file name 51
CONTROL Module Version parameter 41
application_cm_version parameter alias 41

CM VER parameter alias 41
CM Version parameter alias 41
CM_VER parameter alias 41
-cmver parameter alias 41
CONTROL Module version, component aliases
CONTROL-M/EM API 41
e-Trigger 41
Control Resource parameter
CONTROL parameter alias 213
-control parameter alias 213
control_resource parameter alias 213
RESOURCE parameter alias 213
Control Resource, component aliases
Control Resources parameter 212
Control subparameter of Control Resources parameter 213
CONTROL-M 42
AutoEdit system variables 504
executing operating system commands 39
parameter 42
CONTROL-M for z/OS
data sets 69
CONTROL-M, component aliases
CONTROL-M/EM API 42
CONTROL-M/Analyzer
CTB Step parameter 221
rules 230
runtime environment 231
specifying steps 222
CONTROL-M/EM 209
CONTROL-M/Restart
archiving job output 290
archiving SYSDATA 290
Do If Rerun parameter 236, 239
Rerun Member parameter 181
converting from another job scheduling product 43
Copy From Step parameter (SAP) 329
Copy Spool To parameter (SAP) 330
Critical parameter 147
critical path jobs 147
Critical, component aliases
CST time zone 130
Index
563
CTB Step parameter
arguments 221
CONTROL-M/Analyzer 221
ctb_step parameter alias 222
CTB Step, component alias CONTROL-M/EM API 222
CTM_ADJUST_COND_SCOPE
configuration parameter 89
CTM_GROUP_ADJUST_DUMMY
configuration parameter 89
CTMERR variable resolution 511
CTMPARM library 184
CTMRPLN utility 98, 103, 107, 112
CTMWORK 231
CURLIB variable (iSeries (AS/400) jobs) 500
Current Status parameter 311
customer support 3
Cyclic
Interval parameter 194
parameter 150
Task Type value in CONTROL-M for z/OS 153
Units parameter 194
variable 151
cyclic job
CYCLIC_MAXWAIT 159
Interval parameter 156
making non-cyclic 151
specified with Task Type parameter 75
stopping 252
terminating 152
CYCLIC variable 505
Cyclic, component aliases
CYCLIC_MAXWAIT parameter 152, 159
D
DAC time zone 130
Dacca time zone 130
Data Archiving parameters (SAP) 316
DATA CENTER parameter 42
data centers variable (%%DATACENTER) 505
data set management
Auto-Archive parameter 290
cleanup 170
number of free tracks for partitioning 110
partitioning 110, 116
PDS parameter 116
Prevent NCT2 parameter 170
DATACENTER
parameter 42
variable 505
564
Date
subparameter of Do Cond parameter 228
subparameter of Do Forcejob parameter 234
subparameter of Out Condition parameter 207
DATE variable 505
dates
adding 518
DATE variable 505
DATE variable for iSeries (AS/400) jobs 501
Julian date variables 505
RDATE variable 506
subtracting 518
Dates parameter 98
DATE parameter alias 99
-date parameter alias 99
DATES parameter alias 99
DATES_STR parameter alias 99
Dates, component aliases
DATEvariable 504
DAY variable 505
Days
CONTROL-M for z/OS format 103
parameter 100
parameter rules 102
RDAY variable 506
related parameters 102
relationship with Days Calendar parameter 107
Days Calendar
DAYS_CAL parameter alias 108
DAYSCAL parameter alias 108
-dayscal parameter alias 108
DCAL parameter alias 108
parameter 106
parameter rules 107
Days Calendar, component aliases
days offset in Shout parameter 296
Days parameter
DAY_STR parameter alias 104
DAYS parameter variable 104
-days parameter variable 104
Days, component aliases
Ddays
DAY variable 505
ODAY variable 505
DEADLINE variable for UNISYS jobs 502
DEC function for (iSeries (AS/400) 502
decimal values for iSeries (AS/400) jobs 502
DEFINE
command (OpenVMS) 37
variable (Tandem) 503
defining
calendars 106, 139
job dependencies in Group Scheduling tables 89
jobs for time zones 131
On Codes statements 285
process steps 285
program steps 285
Delete After Print parameter (SAP) 331
Deleted parameter 311
deleting
Over Lib parameter specification 62
SAP Batch input jobs 370
SAP Reports 331
Department parameter (SAP) 332
DESC parameter 44
Description
parameter 43
parameter (OAP) 400
subparameter for Do Remedy parameter 247
Description, component aliases
Destination
subparameter of Do Shout parameter 250
subparameter of the Shout parameter 296
Destination queue/Topic parameter (messaging) 532
detached jobs in the Tandem input script 503
Detached task type
iSeries (AS/400) 78
Microsoft Windows 76
OpenVMS 77
Detect Spawned Jobs parameter (SAP) 333
Disable SYSOUT Banner parameter (messaging) 541
DO 229
Do AutoEdit
Do Set var parameter alias 225
do_autoedit parameter alias 225
DOAUTOEDIT parameter alias 225
-doautoedit parameter alias 225
parameter 224
subparameters and related parameters 225
versus AutoEdit Assignment 497
Do AutoEdit, component aliases
CONTROL-M/Desktop 225

DO COND parameter alias 229
do_cond parameter alias 229
DOCOND parameter alias 229
-docond parameter alias 229
Do Cond, component aliases
Do CTBRule parameter 230
DO CTBRULE parameter alias 231
do_ctbrule parameter alias 231
DOCTBRULE parameter alias 231
Do CTBRule, component aliases
Do Forcejob parameter 233
DO FORCEJOB parameter alias 234
do_forcejob parameter alias 234
DOFORCEJOB parameter alias 234
-doforcejob parameter alias 234
Do Forcejob, component aliases
CONTROL-M/Server 234
Do If Rerun parameter 236
DO IFRERUN parameter alias 239
do_ifrerun parameter alias 239
DOIFRERUN parameter alias 239
general information 238
Do If Rerun, component aliases
Do Mail
comparison with Do Shout parameter 242
DO MAIL parameter alias 242
do_mail parameter alias 242
DOMAIL parameter alias 242
-domail parameter alias 242
parameter 240
Do Mail, component aliases
Do NOTOK
DO NOTOK parameter alias 244
do parameter alias 244
-donotok parameter alias 244
parameter 243
Index
565
Do NOTOK, component aliases
Do OK
parameter 245
DO OK parameter 246
Do OK, component aliases
do parameter 246
Do Remedy parameter (BIM) 220, 247
Do Rerun
DO RERUN parameter alias 249
-dorerun parameter alias 249
parameter 151, 248
RERUN parameter alias 249
Do Rerun, component aliases
Do Shout
comparison with Do Mail parameter 242
DO SHOUT parameter alias 251
do_shout parameter alias 251
DOSHOUT parameter alias 251
-doshout parameter alias 251
On parameter 299
parameter 250
Do Shout, component aliases
Do Stop Cyclic parameter 252
DO STOPCYCL parameter alias 252
-dostopcyclic parameter alias 252
SPCYC parameter alias 252
Do Stop Cyclic, component aliases
Do Sysout parameter 253
DO SYSOUT parameter alias 254
do_sysout parameter alias 254
DOSYSOUT parameter alias 254
-dosysout parameter alias 254
Do Sysout, component aliases
566

Doc Lib parameter 45
DOC LIB parameter alias 46
doc_lib parameter alias 46
DOCLIB parameter alias 46
-doclib parameter alias 46
formats 46
Doc Lib, component aliases
CONTROL-M/EM API 46
Doc Mem parameter 47
doc_member parameter alias 48
DOCMEM parameter alias 48
-docmem parameter alias 48
Doc Mem, component aliases
CONTROL-M/EM API 48
CONTROL-M/EM Utilites 48
Document Type parameter (SAP) 335
documentation
accessing online 18
accessing the job documentation file (specified in Doc
Mem) 45, 47
conventions 23
online 17
printed 17
related publications 16
Due In parameter 312
Due Out parameter 154, 312
Dummy task type (Microsoft Windows) 76, 77, 78
DXB time zone 130
E
Eastern European Time 130
Eastern Standard Time 130
EET time zone 130
EJB/Class parameter (Java Applications) 542
Elapse parameter 312
email
attachment 475
in Do Shout parameter 250
subject line 473
Email Subject parameter (PS8) 473
Email Text parameter (PS8) 474
Email With Log parameter (PS8) 475
Encryption Algorithm parameter (FTP) 436
End Time parameter 312
environment file for PeopleSoft 472
equations in AutoEdit expressions 514
EST time zone 130
Event parameter (SAP) 336
Event Parameter parameter (SAP) 337
examples
AutoEdit string expressions 517
AutoEdit variable lists 512
AutoEdit variable prefixes 510
Shout statements 300
Exclude Job Output parameter
(Java Applications) 533
Messaging 535
Web Services 534
EXECTIME
Shout parameter value 294
values 299
Execution Panel parameters 143
EXERR code value 276
Expiration time parameter (Messaging) 536
expressions (AutoEdit) 513
External Command parameter (SAP) 338
External Program parameter (SAP) 339
external program parameters (SAP) 315, 316
External task type (Microsoft Windows) 76
extracting substrings 519
Extractor process 348
F
File Name
character mask support 52
mem_name parameter alias 53
MEMNAME parameter alias 53
-memname parameter alias 53
parameter 51
subparameter of After the completion of a successful
file transfer parameter 429
Task Types Job and Detached 51
File Name, component aliases
CONTROL-M/EM API 53
File Transfer Direction parameter (FTP) 437
File Transfer Protocol, FTP 423
filenames in job script 65
FLUSH code value 276
FORCE code value 275
forcing a job using Job Name parameter 58
Form Name parameter 54
APPL_FORM parameter alias 55
-applform parameter alias 55
Form Name, component aliases
CONTROL-M/EM API 55
Format parameter (PS8) 476
format. See specific parameter or variable
formatting printing in SAP 351
From
subparameter of Do If rerun parameter 237
subparameter of Step Range parameter 285
From Proc field, updating 312
From Step field, updating 312
FTP (File Transfer Protocol) 423
FTP-ACCOUNT variable 427
FTP-ADDOPTxy variable 428
FTP-ALLOCUNITSx variable 430
FTP-BLKSIZEx variable 432
FTP-COMPRESSIONxy variable 433
FTP-CONT_EXEx variable 434
FTP-DBCSx variable 435
FTP-DEST-NEWNAMEx variable 459
FTP-ENCRYPTIONxy variable 436
FTP-FILE-PFXx variable 463
FTP-IF-EXISTx variable 451
FTP-LHOST variable 438
FTP-LOSTYPE variable 455
FTP-LPATHx variable 465
FTP-LRECLx variable 452
FTP-LUSER variable 469
FTP-NEWNAMEx variable 429
FTP-NUM_RETRIES variable 454
FTP-POSTCOM2x variable 448
FTP-POSTCOMM1x variable 442
FTP-POSTPARAM11x variable 443
FTP-POSTPARAM12x variable 444, 445
FTP-PRECOMM1x variable 439
FTP-PREPARAM11x variable 440, 441
FTP-PREPARAM21x variable 446
FTP-PREPARAM22x variable 447
FTP-PRIMARYx variable 456
FTP-RECFMx variable 457
FTP-RECURSIVEx variable 458
FTP-RHOST variable 438
FTP-ROSTYPE variable 455
FTP-RPATHx variable 465
FTP-RPF variable 460
FTP-RUSER variable 469
FTP-SECONDARYx variable 461
FTP-SRCOPTx variable 429
FTP-TEMPLATEx variable 462
FTP-TRANSFER_NUM variable 453
FTP-TRANSTABx variable 466
FTP-TRIMx variable 464
FTP-TYPEx variable 431
FTP-UNITx variable 467
FTP-UPLOADx variable 437
FTP-USE_DEF_NUMRETRIES variable 468
Index
567
FTP-VOLUMEx variable 470
G
General Panel parameters 25
generating Oracle workflow roles selection list 404
global variables
description 510
prefixes 509
GMT time zone 130
Greenwich Mean Time 130
Group parameter 56
GROUP NAME parameter alias 57
GROUP parameter alias 57
-group parameter alias 57
used in ViewPoint hierarchy 56
Group Scheduling tables
post-processing 219
Schedule Tag parameters 220
scheduling 117
scheduling tags 124
GROUP variable 504
Group, component aliases
GROUP_ORDID variable 505
H
handling job output 253
HAW time zone 130
Hawaii time zone 130
HEX function for iSeries (AS/400) jobs 502
HIGH_PRIORITY_CLASS
History Jobs file
Reten Days parameter 280
Reten Gen parameter 282
HKG time zone 130
HNL time zone 130
HOLD variable for iSeries (AS/400) jobs 501
Hong Kong time zone 130
Honolulu time zone 130
Host Name parameter (FTP) 438
I
identifying
jobs 43
SAP jobs 345
IDLE_PRIORITY_CLASS
If a file of the same name parameter (FTP) 451
568
If-Then relationships in On-Do statements 258

In Condition parameter 198
CONDITION parameter alias 201
IN parameter alias 201
in_condition parameter alias 201
-incon parameter alias 201
INCOND parameter alias 201
In Condition, component aliases
Include Child Status parameter (OAP) 401
Include Output parameter (OAP) 403
InfoPackage Description parameter (SAP) 340
InfoPackage parameters (SAP) 317
InfoPackage RNR parameter (SAP) 341
InfoPackage Tech.Name parameter (SAP) 342
Information Field parameter (SAP) 343
INJOBPR variable for UNISYS jobs 502
INLLIBL variable for iSeries (AS/400) library list 501
Input parameters (Web Services) 537
INPUT script for Tandem jobs 503
INQMSGRPY variable for iSeries (AS/400) jobs 501
Interval
Cyclic parameter 194
days value 156
hours value 156
INTERVAL parameter alias 158
-interval parameter alias 158
minutes value 156
parameter 156
rerun_interval parameter alias 158
Interval, component aliases
iSeries
AutoEdit example 38
File Name format 52
iSeries (AS/400)
%%PARMn variable syntax 500
*CURLIB library 66
*LIBL library 66
command syntax 39
job documentation 46
job documentation member/file 47
Job Name parameter format 58
job submission parameters 500
message queue 501
parameters list 500
J
JAVA panel
Account parameter 524
EJB/Class parameter 542
Exclude Job Output parameter 533
Method parameter 538
No Sysout Banner option parameter 539, 540
Parameter Alias 545
Parameter Name 546
Parameter Value 547
JAVA-JAVA variable 542
JAVA-METHOD variable 538
JAVA-NOSYSOUTBANNER variable 539
JAVA-PARMS-P001-ALIAS variable 545
JAVA-PARMS-P001-VALUE variable 547
JAVA-PARMS-P00n-NAME variable 546
JAVA-PROFILE variable 524
JAVA-SYSOUTSKIP variable 533
JCL
command to follow a job 506
command to precede a job 506
for a rerun job 182
JES network
specifying 176
specifying JES2 and JES3 scheduling environments
184
specifying JES2 system 186
specifying JES3 processor identity 186, 187
JFAIL code value 275
JLOST
code value 275
status On statements 259
JNRUN code value 275
JNSUB code value 276
Job Class parameter (SAP) 344
Job Count parameter (SAP) 345
job documentation
Doc Mem parameter 47
file 47
iSeries (AS/400) 46
storing 45
Job Execution Time parameter (WIN2K) 487, 488
Job ID parameter 312
Job Memory parameter (WIN2K) 487, 489
Job Mode parameter (SAP) 346
Job Name
subparameter of Do Forcejob parameter 233
Job Name parameter 58
iSeries (AS/400) format 58
JOB NAME parameter alias 59
job_name parameter alias 59
-jobname parameter alias 59
JOBNAMEparameter alias 59
prohibited characters 58
SAP format 347
job name, AutoEdit variable (%%JOBNAME) 505

Job Name, component aliases
CONTROL-M/EM API 59
job output
analyzing 221, 231
archiving 290
handling 253
include Oracle Applications output 403
parameters 289
print immediately (SAP) 389
job parameters
AutoEdit variable support 498
case-sensitivity 24
job scheduling, prioritizing 147, 174
job script
cancelling override 62
location 65
pathname 65
using Over Lib parameter to supply temporary file 62
Job Status parameter (SAP) 341, 345, 369, 376
job statuses
deleted 311
for Oracle Applications jobs 418
Hold 312
Rerun 163
rerunning a job 248
Restart 312
WAIT USER 145
job submission
iSeries (AS/400) parameters 500
variables 499
variables for Tandem jobs 503
variables for UNISYS jobs 502
variables list 500
Job task type
iSeries (AS/400) 78
Microsoft Windows 76
OpenVMS 76
z/OS 78
Job Type
parameter 60
parameter SAP format 348
Job Waiting for External Termination parameter (SAP) 349
JOBD variable for iSeries (AS/400) jobs 501
JOBID variable 507
JOBNAME variable 58, 505
JOBPTY variable for iSeries (AS/400) jobs 501
JOBQ variable for iSeries (AS/400) jobs 501
jobs
dependency on Control resources 213
dependency on Quantitative resources 217
forcing with Job Name parameter 58
ordering retroactively with User Daily 119
Index
569
owner 64
rerunning 179
restarting with the Do If rerun parameter 236
JSECU code value 275
JULDAY variable 505
Julian dates
JULDAY variable 505
OJULDAY variable 505
RJULDAY variable 506
K
Karachi time zone 130
KEEP value for the CYCLIC_MAXWAIT parameter 152
KHI time zone 130
L
Language parameter (SAP) 350
LATESUB Shout parameter value 294
LATETIME Shout parameter value 295
Layout parameter (SAP) 351
LDA
variable 520
LDA variable
for iSeries (AS/400) jobs 501
LIBL variable for iSeries (AS/400) jobs 501
LIBMEMSYM variable 511
libraries
iSeries (AS/400) jobs 500
iSeries (AS/400) library list 501
LIBSYM variable (CONTROL-M for z/OS) 512
load balancing
resources for a job 216
specifying node groups 168
local AutoEdit variables 510
Log External Errors in Joblog parameter (SAP) 352
Log External Output to Joblog parameter (SAP) 353
LOG variable for iSeries (AS/400) 501
LOGCLPGM variable for iSeries (AS/400) 501
logical naming
in the DCL file (OpenVMS) 37
Logical Record Length parameter (FTP) 452
M
MAINVIEW Batch Organizer 69
managing SYSDATA 290
Max Days subparameter of Auto-Archive parameter 290
Max Runs subparameter of Auto-Archive parameter 290
Max Wait
behavior with cyclic jobs 159
behavior with non-cyclic jobs 159
effects 160
570
parameter 159
Max Wait parameter
MAX WAIT parameter alias 160
max_wait parameter alias 160
MAXWAIT parameter alias 160
-maxwait parameter alias 160
Max Wait, component aliases
Max Work Set Size parameter (WIN2K) 487, 490
Maximum parameter 163
CONTROL-M for z/OS behavior 164
MAX RERUN parameter alias 165
MAXRERUN parameter alias 165
-maxrerun parameter alias 165
Rerun completion status 163
rerun_max parameter alias 165
Maximum, component aliases
MAXRERUN parameter 164, 182
MEL time zone 131
Melbourne time zone 131
Mem Lib
parameter 65
Mem Name parameter 51
member, job script location 65
MEMLIB variable 505
Memlib, AutoEdit support 498
MemName, AutoEdit support 498
MEMSYM variable (CONTROL-M for z/OS) 512
Message
subparameter of Shout parameter 298
Message Content parameter (messaging) 538
messages
destinations 300
Do Shout parameter 250
iSeries (AS/400) message queue 501
sending 240
subparameter of Do Mail parameter 241
Method parameter (Java Applications) 538
Microsoft Windows
parameters list 487
Min Work Set Size parameter (WIN2K) 487, 491
Minimum parameter 110
Minimum, component aliases
MINUS operator, AutoEdit Expressions 514
modifying
job completion status 243, 245, 248, 252
job script file 62
MONTH variable 505
Months
MONTH variable 505
OMONTH variable 505
parameter 112
relationship to Dates parameter 112
relationship with Days Calendar parameter 107
RMONTH variable 506
z/OS format 137
Months, component aliases
Mountain Standard Time 130
MSG Panel
Destination queue/Topic parameter 532
Disable SYSOUT Banner parameter 541
Exclude Job Output parameter 535
Expiration time parameter 536
Priority parameter 548
Reply Queue parameter 551
Time to Wait parameter 553
Use Predefined Messages parameter 556
Wait for Reply parameter 557
MSG subparameter of Do Shout parameter 250
MSG-ACCOUNT variable 526
MSG-ASGOUTPUTTOAUTOEDIT variable 529
MSG-ASGOUTPUTTOFILE variable 530
MSG-DESTINATIONQUEUE variable 532
MSG-JOBOUTPUTAUTOEDIT variable 529
MSG-JOBOUTPUTFILE variable 530
MSG-MESSAGENAME variable 556
MSG--MSGTEXTPARMS-Pxxx-SUBMSG variable 555
MSG-NOSYSOUTBANNER variable 541
MSG-OUTGOINGMSGEXPTIME variable 536
MSG-PRIORITY variable 548
MSGQ variable for iSeries (AS/400) 501
MSG-REPLYQUEUE variable 551
MSG-SYSOUTSKIP variable 535
MSG-TIMETOWAIT variable 553
MSG-USEFREETEXT variable 555
MSG-USEPREDEFINEDMSG variable 556
MSG-WAITREPLY variable 557
MST time zone 130
Multi Agent parameter 166
Multi Agent, component aliases
multiagent parameter 167
multiple
On statements 271
MULTY_AGENT parameter 167
N
Name
parameter (SAP) 354
subparameter of Control Resources parameter 212
subparameter of Do AutoEdit parameter 225
subparameter of Do CTBRule parameter 230
subparameter of Quantitative Resources parameter
215
subparameter of the CTB Step parameter 221
New Day procedure 119
cyclic jobs 152
retroactive job scheduling 119
time zone support 132
New Job Name parameter (SAP) 355
New Spool Request parameter (SAP) 356
NEXT date reference in the Do Cond parameter 228
Next Time parameter 312
NEXT variable 504, 505
NJE Node parameter 312
NJE parameter 312
No Sysout Banner option parameter (Java Applications)
539, 540
No. of Copies subparameter of the Print parameter 409
Node ID
AutoEdit variable 507
parameter 169
variable for UNISYS jobs 502
Node ID/Group
broadcasting 166
in the active environment 169
node_group parameter alias 169
NODE_ID parameter alias 169
NODEGROUP parameter alias 169
-nodegrp parameter alias 169
NODEID parameter alias 169
parameter 168
Node ID/Group, component aliases
NODEID
variable 507
variable for UNISYS jobs 502
non-periodic (regular) calendar
Days parameter 100
Week Days parameter 135
NORMAL_PRIORITY_CLASS
NOT KEEP value for CYCLIC_MAXWAIT parameter 152
Index
571
NOT_KEEP value 160
Notifications parameter (OAP) 404
NOTOK
code value 276
parameter 244
status for Group Scheduling tables 219
status for Max Wait parameter 159
status for On statements 259
status for Shout parameter 295
NOU time zone 131
Noumea time zone 131
Number of Copies parameter (SAP) 357
Number of File Transfers parameter (FTP) 453
Number of Retries parameter (FTP) 454
numbers AutoEdit expressions 514
O
OAP
Panel parameters 393
workflow roles selection list 404
OAP_WAITCHILD variable 421
OAP-ACTIVE_ATTR-PARENT variable 407
OAP-ACTIVE_ATTR-PHASE variable 408
OAP-ACTIVE_ATTR-PRIORITY variable 410
OAP-ACTIVE_ATTR-REQUEST_ID variable 412
OAP-ACTIVE_ATTR-STATUS variable 418
OAP-APPDESP variable 398
OAP-APPNAME variable 399
OAP-DESCRIPTION variable 400
OAP-DISPLAY_LOGFILE variable 402
OAP-DISPLAY_OUTPUT variable 403
OAP-INSTANCE variable 397
OAP-LANGUAGE variable 405
OAP-NOTIFICATIONS-N-NAME variable 404
OAP-PARAM_VALIDATION variable 406
OAP-PARMS-P-NAME variable 415
OAP-PARMS-P-VALUE variable 415
OAP-PRINTERS-P-NAME 409
OAP-PRINTERS-P-VALUE 409
OAP-PRINTSTYLE variable 409
OAP-PROFILES-P-NAME variable 411
OAP-PROFILES-P-VALUE variable 411
OAP-PROGDESP variable 415
OAP-PROGNAME variable 414
OAP-RESPAPP variable 396
OAP-RESPNAME variable 416
OAP-SECURITY_GROUPNAME variable 417
OAP-SETDESP variable 413
OAP-SETNAME variable 414
OAP-SETPROG-P-PARMS-PARM -NAME variable 414
OAP-SETPROG-P-PARMS-PARM-VALUE variable 414
OAP-SETPROG-P-PRINTCOPIES 409
OAP-SETPROG-P-PRINTERNAME 409
OAP-SUBSTATUS variable 401
OAP-TASKTYPE variable 413
572
OAP-USERNAME variable 420

Object Type parameter (SAP) 358
ODAT date reference
In conditions 199, 207
ODATE variable 504, 505
time zone support 131
Odate
Do Forcejob statement 234
in Max Wait parameter 160
ODAY variable 505
OJULDAY variable 505
OK
code value 276
parameter 246
status for Group Scheduling tables 219
status for On statements 259
status for Shout parameter 295
OMONTH variable 505
On
blocks 271
code qualifiers 278
code relationships 278
Do Shout message use 299
parameter 256
statements and processing in blocks 285
statements testing for completion codes 259
On Codes statements, no need to define 285
On Fail
subparameter of Control Resources parameter 213
subparameter of Quantitative Resources parameter
216
On OK subparameter of Quantitative Resources parameter
216
ON PGMST ANYSTEP, runtime environment and DO
CTBRULE 231
On statement
ON parameter alias 279
-on parameter alias 279
on_do_statement parameter alias 279
on_statement parameter alias 279
On Statement/Code
processing order 263
On Statement/Code, criteria 224
On, component aliases
e-Trigger 279
On-Do statements 270
OpenVMS
archiving job output 290
AutoEdit example 37
File Name format 52
logical names in a DCL file 37
P1-P8 parameters 500
QUEUE parameter 500
variables list 500
Operating sys parameter (SAP} 359
operating system
commands 39
completion codes 258
Operation parameter (Web Services) 543
operators in AutoEdit Expressions 514
OPTION variable for UNISYS jobs 502
Order ID groups 505
ORDERID variable 506
ordering
job using Job Name parameter 58
jobs 119
OS
application type 29
panel parameters 487
OS Cover Sheet parameter (SAP) 360
OS Type parameter (FTP) 455
Out Condition parameter 206
CONDITION parameter alias 209
OUT parameter alias 209
out_condition parameter alias 209
-outcon parameter alias 209
OUTCOND parameter alias 209
Out Condition, component aliases
OUTPTY variable for iSeries (AS/400) jobs 501
Output Device parameter (SAP) 361
Output Management parameter (SAP) 362
Output parameters (Web Services) 544
OUTQ variable for iSeries (AS/400) jobs 502
Over Lib
alternative to Path parameter 62
deleting specification 62
OVER LIB parameter alias 63
over_lib parameter alias 63
OVERLIB parameter alias 63
-overlib parameter alias 63
OVERLIB variable 63
parameter 62
prohibited characters 62
prohibited strings 62
used to supply temporary job script file 62
Over Lib, component aliases
CONTROL-M/EM API 63
overriding cyclic job specification 151
OWDAY variable 506
Owner
parameter 64
parameter (SAP) 363
OWNER variable 506
Owner, component aliases
OYEAR variable 504, 506
P
Pacific Standard Time 130
PARAM variables for Tandem jobs 503
Parameter Alias parameter (Java Applications) 545
parameter aliases
Active From - To date 86
Adjust Condition 90
And/Or 92
Application 28
Application Type 30
Application Version 32
Author 34
Auto-Archive 292
AutoEdit 37
Command 40
Confcal 95
Confirm 145
CONTROL Module Version 41
Control Resource 213
CONTROL-M 42
Critical 148
CTB Step 222
Cyclic 153
Dates 99
Days 104
Days Calendar 108
Description 44
Do AutoEdit 225
Do Cond 229
Do CTBRule 231
Do Forcejob 234
Do If Rerun 239
Do Mail 242
Do NOTOK 244
Do OK 246
Do Rerun 249
Do Shout 251
Do Stop Cyclic 252
Do Sysout 254
Doc Lib 46
Doc Mem 48
File Name 53
Form Name 55
Group 57
Index
573
In Condition 201
Interval 158
Job Name 59
Max Wait 160
Maximum 165
Minimum 111
Months 113
Multi Agent 167
Node ID/Group 169
On 279
Out Condition 209
Over Lib 63
Owner 64
Path 67
PDS 116
Prevent NCT2 172
Priority 175
Quantitative Resource 217
Relationship 118
Request NJE Node 177
Rerun From 179
Rerun Member 183
Reten Days 281
Retro 120
Scheduling Environment 185
Scheduling Table Lib 72
Scheduling Tag 125
Shout 300
Step Range 286
SYSOUT Handlilng 308
System Affinity 187
Table 73
Task Type 78
Time From and Time Until 191
Time Zone 132
Units 194
Week Days 137
Weeks Calendar 140
Parameter format (SAP) 313
Parameter Name (Java Applications) 546
Parameter Validation parameter (OAP) 406
Parameter Value (Java Applications) 547
parameters
Active Panel 311
Conditions Panel 197
Execution panel 143
FTP Panel 423
General panel 25
JAVA Panel 521
OAP Panel 393
OS Panel 487
PeopleSoft Panel 471
PostProc Panel 289
post-processing 220
PS8 Panel 471
Resources Panel 211
Reten Gen 283
574
SAP Panel 313

Scheduling Panel 81
Steps Panel 219
Parameters parameter (SAP) 364
Parent parameter (OAP) 407
Parentheses subparameter of In Condition parameter 199
parm subparameter in Shout parameter 295
PARMn variable 500
partitioning data sets 110
Path
MEM LIB parameter alias 67
mem_lib parameter alias 67
MEMLIB parameter alias 67
-memlib parameter alias 67
Microsoft Windows format 66
OpenVMS format 66
Over Lib as alternative directory 62
parameter 65
parameter, prohibited characters 65
UNIX format 66
Path, component aliases
CONTROL-M/EM API 67
PDS
parameter 115
parameter relationship to Minimum parameter 115
relationship to Minimum parameter 110
PDS Name parameter 116
PDS, component aliases
PDSE libraries 116
PDSNAME parameter 116
PeopleSoft
connection profile 472
environment file 472
Panel parameters 471
periodic calendars
Days parameter 101
Days values 101
Statistics Period parameter 129
permission. See security
PGMST, in On parameter 269
Phase parameter (OAP) 408
Pipe parameter 69
PLUS operator, AutoEdit Expressions 514
POSTCMD variable 506
post-processing
of AutoEdit variables 507
parameters 219, 220
PostProc Panel parameters 289
variables list 507
PRECMD variable 506
prefixes in AutoEdit variables 35, 509
PREV date reference
PREV variable 504, 506
Prevent NCT2 parameter 170
data set management 170
PREVENT NCT2 parameter alias 172
prevent_nct2 parameter alias 172
PREVENT-NCT2 parameter alias 172
PREVENTNCT2 parameter alias 172
Prevent NCT2, component aliases
Primary Allocation parameter (FTP) 456
Print Archive Mode parameter (SAP) 365
Print Expiration parameter (SAP) 366
Print parameter
No. of Copies subparameter 409
OAP format 409
Printer subparameter of the Print parameter 409
Priority
parameter 174
parameter (Messaging) 548
parameter (messaging) 548
parameter (OAP) 410
PRIORITY parameter alias 175
-priority parameter alias 175
priority
Critical parameter 174
iSeries (AS/400) job output 501
iSeries (AS/400) job queue 501
job scheduling 147, 174
of Microsoft Windows jobs 492
of SAP jobs 344
Priority Class
calling process 492
Priority Class parameter (WIN2K) 487, 492
Priority, component aliases
procedure_step subparameter 279
Process Chain Description parameter (SAP) 367
Process Chain ID parameter (SAP) 368
Process Chain Log ID parameter (SAP) 369
Process chain parameters (SAP) 317
Process Execution Time parameter (WIN2K) 487, 493
Process Memory parameter (WIN2K) 487, 494
Process Name (I) parameter (PS8) 477
Process Name (II) parameter (PS8) 478
process step 285

Process Type parameter (PS8) 479
processing On statements in blocks 285
processing order
On Statement/Code 263
PROCST
in On parameter 269
product support 3
profcfg utility 472
Profile Name, subparameter of the Profiles parameter 411
Profiles parameter
OAP format 411
Profile Name subparameter 411
Value Name subparameter 411
program step 285
program_step subparameter 279
PROJECT variable for UNISYS jobs 503
PRTDEV variable for iSeries (AS/400) jobs 502
PRTTXT variable for iSeries (AS/400) jobs 502
PS8-CON_PROFILE variable 472
PS8-EMAIL_ATTACH_LOG variable 475
PS8-EMAIL_SUBJECT variable 473
PS8-EMAIL_TEXT variable 474
PS8-FAILEDSTEP variable 480
PS8-JOBNAME variable 478
PS8-OUTDESTFORMAT variable 476
PS8-OUTDESTTYPE variable 483
PS8-PRCSNAME variable 477
PS8-PRCSTYPE variable 479
PS8-RUNCONTROLID variable 481
PS8-SERVERNAME variable 482
PS8-USERDEF1/2/3 variable 485
PS8-USERID variable 484
psftcm utility 472
PST time zone 130
Q
QID parameter (SAP) 370
Quantitative Resources parameter 215
QUANTITATIVE parameter alias 217
-quantitative parameter alias 217
quantitative_resource parameter alias 217
RESOURCE parameter alias 217
Quantitative Resources, component aliases
Quantity subparameter of Quantitative Resouces
parameter 215
QUEUE
parameter for OpenVMS batch queue 500
variable for Series (AS/400) jobs 501
Index
575
R
RDATE variable 504, 506
RDAY variable 506
REALTIME_PRIORITY_CLASS
REC0 code value 276
Recipient parameter (SAP) 371
Record Format parameter (FTP) 457
Recursive parameter (FTP) 458
regular calendars Days values 100
Relationship parameter 117
RELATION parameter alias 118
RELATIONSHIP parameter alias 118
-relationship parameter alias 118
TAG_RELATIONSHIP parameter alias 118
Relationship, component aliases
removing
from Active Jobs file 159
replacing data sets 69
Reply Queue parameter (messaging) 551
Request ID parameter (OAP) 412
Request NJE Node parameter 176, 177
NJE NODE parameter alias 177
request_nje parameter alias 177
Request NJE Node, component aliases
Request Set
subparameters of Request Type parameter 413
Request Type parameter (OAP) 413
request types
request set 413
single request 414
rerun
interval 179
RUNCOUNT variable 506
Shout parameter value 295
Rerun Counter parameter 312
Rerun From parameter 179
count_cyclic_from parameter alias 179
IND CYCLIC parameter alias 179
IND_CYCLIC parameter alias 179
-intervalfrom parameter alias 179
Rerun from Point of Failure parameter (FTP) 460
Rerun From Step parameter (PS8) 480
Rerun From, component aliases
Rerun Member parameter 181
576
RERUN MEM parameter alias 183

rerun_member parameter alias 183
RERUNMEM parameter alias 183
Rerun Member, component aliases
Rerun Options parameter (SAP) 372
rerunning
automatically 182
jobs 150, 179
Maximum parameter 163
RERUNNO variable for On statements 259
resolving AutoEdit variables 224
Resources Panel parameters 211
Responsibility parameter (OAP) 416
Restart parameter 312
restarting
job with CONTROL-M/Restart 236
jobs with Do If Rerun parameter 236
Reten Days parameter 280
RETEN DAYS parameter alias 281
RETEN_DAYS parameter alias 281
reten_days parameter alias 281
RETENTION # OF DAYS TO KEEP parameter alias
281
Reten Days, component aliases
Reten Gen parameter 282
RETEN GEN parameter alias 283
RETEN_GEN parameter alias 283
reten_gen parameter alias 283
RETENTION # OF GENERATIONS TO KEEP
parameter alias 283
Reten Gen, component aliases
Retro parameter 119
New Day procedure 119
User Daily jobs 119
Retro, component aliases
Rio de Janiero time zone 130
RIO time zone 130
RJULDAY variable 506
RMONTH variable 506
Rows parameter (SAP) 373
RTGDTA variable for iSeries (AS/400) 502
rules
CONTROL-M/Analyzer 230
Days parameter 102
Run Control ID parameter (PS8) 481
run time (jobs)
Due In parameter 312
Due Out parameter 312
Elapse parameter 312
Start Time parameter 312
RUNCOUNT
variable 506
variable for On statements 259
RUNTIME variable for UNISYS jobs 503
RWDAY variable 506
RYEAR variable 504, 506
S
SAC parameter 122
aliases 123
SAP
BW General parameters 317
BW InfoPackage parameters 317
BW Process Chain parameters 317
Data Archiving parameters 316
deleting reports 331
External program 315, 316
External program parameters 315, 316
panel parameters 313
parameter format 313
parameters list 314
SAP Cover Page parameter (SAP) 360, 375
SAP Job Status parameter (SAP) 376
SAP-BW Business Process Type parameter (SAP) 374
SAPR3_EVENT_ID variable 382
SAPR3_EVENT_PARAM variable 382
SAPR3_STEP-S-STEP_TYPE variable 383
SAPR3-ACCOUNT variable 319
SAPR3-BACKJOBNAME variable 325
SAPR3-DA_ARC_OBJ variable 323
SAPR3-DA_CHECK_SESSIONS variable 326
SAPR3-DA_CHECK_VARIANT variable 327
SAPR3-DA_JOB_TYPE variable 346
SAPR3-DA_SESSION_NUMBER variable 379
SAPR3-DETECT_CHILD_JOBNAME variable 333
SAPR3-DETECT_CHILD_TABLE variable 333
SAPR3-DETECT_OPTION variable 333
SAPR3-EVENT_ID variable 336, 337
SAPR3-EVENT_PARAM variable 336, 337
SAPR3-GROUP_ORDID variable 333
SAPR3-InfoPackage_Desc variable 340
SAPR3-InfoPackage_RNR variable 341
SAPR3-InfoPackage_TechName variable 342
SAPR3-JOB_COPY_TARGET_VAL variable 347, 355
SAPR3-JOB_COUNT variable 345
SAPR3-JOB_MODE variable 346, 374
SAPR3-JOBCLASS variable 344

SAPR3-JOBCOUNT variable 345
SAPR3-JOBLOG variable 362
SAPR3-JOBNAME variable 347
SAPR3-ProcessChain_Desc variable 367
SAPR3-ProcessChain_ID variable 368
SAPR3-ProcessChain_LogID 369
SAPR3-QID variable 370
SAPR3-SERVER_OR_GROUP_TYPE variable 385, 387
SAPR3-SPOOL variable 330, 362
SAPR3-START_STEP variable 329
SAPR3-STEP-S- variable 384
SAPR3-STEP-S-ACTIVATE_TRACE variable 320
SAPR3-STEP-S-LOG_STDERR variable 352
SAPR3-STEP-S-LOG_STDOUT variable 353
SAPR3-STEP-Snn-ARCH_ID variable 321
SAPR3-STEP-Snn-ARCH_TEXT variable 322
SAPR3-STEP-Snn-ARCHIVE_INFO variable 343
SAPR3-STEP-Snn-ARCHIVE_OBJECT variable 335
SAPR3-STEP-Snn-ARCHIVE_SAPOBJECT variable 358
SAPR3-STEP-Snn-DEPT variable 332
SAPR3-STEP-Snn-LANGU variable 350
SAPR3-STEP-Snn-LIST_NAME variable 354
SAPR3-STEP-Snn-LIST_TEXT variable 390
SAPR3-STEP-Snn-NEW_LIST_ID variable 356
SAPR3-STEP-Snn-OWNER variable 363
SAPR3-STEP-Snn-PRINT_ARCHMODE variable 365
SAPR3-STEP-Snn-PRINT_AUTH variable 324
SAPR3-STEP-Snn-PRINT_BANNER variable 375
SAPR3-STEP-Snn-PRINT_BANNER_PAGE variable 378
SAPR3-STEP-Snn-PRINT_COPIES variable 357
SAPR3-STEP-Snn-PRINT_DEST variable 361
SAPR3-STEP-Snn-PRINT_EXPIRATION variable 366
SAPR3-STEP-Snn-PRINT_IMMED variable 389
SAPR3-STEP-Snn-PRINT_LAYOUT variable 351
SAPR3-STEP-Snn-PRINT_NUMCOLUMNS variable 328
SAPR3-STEP-Snn-PRINT_NUMLINES variable 373
SAPR3-STEP-Snn-PRINT_RECIPIENT variable 371
SAPR3-STEP-Snn-PRINT_RELEASE variable 331
SAPR3-STEP-Snn-PROGRAM variable 318, 339
SAPR3-STEP-Snn-TARGET_HOST variable 386
SAPR3-STEP-Snn-VAR-NAME variable 364, 392
SAPR3-STEP-snn-WAIT_FOR_TERM variable 349
SAPR3-STEP-S-OPERSYS variable 359
SAPR3-STEP-S-PRINT_HOST_BANNER variable 360
SAPR3-STEP-S-PRINT_NUMCOLUMNS variable 328
SAPR3-STEP-S-PRINT_NUMLINES 373
SAPR3-STEP-S-PROGRAM variable 338
SAPR3-STEP-S-TARGET_HOST variable 388
SAPR3-SUBMIT_ASAP variable 382
SAPR3-TARGET_SERVER variable 385, 387
SCD Table, subparameter of Do Forcejob parameter 233
SCHEDTAB variable 506
scheduling
dates, PREV variable 506
overriding environment 184
panel parameters 81
Index
577
specifying work days 94
table, Job Name parameter 58
table, Job Name requirements for z/OS 58
tag parameters 220
Time Zone parameter 131
validating dates 94
Scheduling Class
calling process 495
Scheduling Class parameter (WIN2K) 487, 495
Scheduling Environment parameter 184
SCHEDULE ENV parameter alias 185
schedule_environment parameter alias 185
SCHEDULING_ENVIRONMENT parameter alias 185
SCHENV parameter alias 185
Scheduling Environment, component aliases
Scheduling Table
name parameter 73
parameter 72
Scheduling Table Lib, component aliases
Scheduling Tag parameter 124
criteria 117
SCHEDULE TAG parameter alias 126
-tag parameter alias 126
TAG_NAME parameter alias 126
Scheduling Tag, component aliases
scope of AutoEdit variables 510
SD_CPU variable 507
SD_TIME variable 507
SE_INC_BASE_PRIORITY_NAME
Scheduling Class parameter 492, 495
Search Count parameter 312
Secondary Allocation parameter (FTP) 461
security
Author parameter 33
Owner parameter identification mechanism 64
Security Group parameter (OAP) 417
Selection Cover Page parameter (SAP) 378
sending messages 240
Server Name parameter (PS8) 482
Service parameter (Web Services) 552
Session Number parameter (SAP) 379
Set Var parameter 35
Shift Num subparameter of Confcal parameter 94
Shift subparameter of Confcal parameter 94
Shout parameter 293
SHOUT parameter alias 300
578
-shout parameter alias 300

Shout, component aliases
Sign
subparameter of Do Cond parameter 228
Single Request subparameters of the Request Type
parameter 414
SNRUN code value 276
special characters
Over Lib prohibited characters 62
Over Lib prohibited strings 62
prohibited in Job Name parameter 58
prohibited in Path parameter 65
specifying
AutoEdit variable values 224
AutoEdit variables and expressions 58
blanks with the BLANKn variable 504
Calendars 93
CONTROL-M/Analyzer rules 230
CONTROL-M/Analyzer steps 222
CPU in Tandem jobs 503
cyclic job 150
cyclic jobs 75
data center 42
JES network 176
JES2 scheduling environment 184
JES2 system 186
JES3 processor identity 186
job description 43
job execution priority 147
multiple CONTROL-M/Agent nodes 166
multiple Scheduling tags 125
new Job Name using ctmorder 58
operating system commands 39
Over Lib parameter as variable 63
scheduled work days 94
Standard Deviation parameter 312
Start Condition parameter (SAP) 382
Start Time parameter 312
Started Task
Path parameter 66
task type (z/OS) 78
started tasks
Minimum parameter 111
STAT date reference
statement subparameter 279
Statistics Calendar parameter 127
aliases 128
Statistics Period parameter 129
Status parameter (OAP) 418
status parameters 311
STC task type for z/OS 78
Step Range parameter 284
From subparameter 285
Name subparameter 285
STEP RANGE parameter alias 286
STEP_RANGE parameter alias 286
step_range parameter alias 286
To subparameter 285
Step Range, component aliases
Step Type parameter (SAP) 383
Step values for the On parameter 273
Steps Panel parameters 219
Steps parameter (SAP) 384
Stmt subparameter of On parameter 269
stopping cyclic job runs 252
storage buffers, pipes to replace data sets 69
storing job documentation 45
strings
substring function 519
Style subparameter of the Print parameter 409
Subject
Submit Job with ASAP Option parameter (SAP) 382
submitting
job to CONTROL-M/Agent nodes 168
job to multiple CONTROL-M/Agent nodes 166
jobs during a fixed time frame 190
Substr function 519
subtraction
AutoEdit Expressions 514
dates 518
Summary subparameter for Do Remedy parameter 247
support, customer 3
SWS variable for iSeries (AS/400) 502
Sxxx code value 275
SYD time zone 131
Sydney time zone 131
syntax
AutoEdit string expressions 516
user-defined variables 508
syntax. See specific parameter or variable
SYS DB subparameter of Auto-Archive parameter 290
SYSDATA archiving 290
SYSLIBL variable for iSeries (AS/400) jobs 502
SYSOUT Handling parameter 303, 498
PARM parameter alias 308
SYSOPT parameter alias 308
-sysout parameter alias 308
sysout_from_class alias subparameter 308
sysout_option alias subparameter 308
sysout_parameter alias subparameter 308

SYSOUT Handling, component aliases
SYSOUT parameter 308
System Affinity parameter 186
JES2 186
specifying JES3 processor identity 186
SYS AFFINITY parameter alias 187
SYSTEM ID parameter alias 187
SYSTEM_AFFINITY parameter alias 187
system_affinity parameter alias 187
System Affinity, component aliases
system variables
AutoEdit facility 504
list 504
specifying 35
T
TABLE NAME parameter 73
Table parameter 73
Table, component aliases
TABLE_DSN parameter 72
TABLE_NAME parameter 73
Tandem ob submission variables list 503
TANDEM_ASSIGN_ xxx variable 503
TANDEM_BYPASS_JOB variable 503
TANDEM_CPU variable 503
TANDEM_DEFINE_ xxx variable 503
TANDEM_INPUT_FILE variable 503
TANDEM_PARAM_xxx variable 503
Target Group parameter (SAP) 385
Target Host parameter (SAP) 386
Target Server (1) parameter (SAP) 387
Target Server (2) parameter (SAP) 388
Task Type parameter 75
cyclic jobs 75
Microsoft Windows format 76
OpenVMS format 76
TASK_TYPE parameter alias 78
task_type parameter alias 78
TASKTYPE parameter alias 78
-tasktype parameter alias 78
Index
579
UNIX format 76
Task Type, component aliases
CONTROL-M/EM API 78
technical support 3
Template Name parameter (FTP) 425, 462
terminating cyclic job 152
Time From and Time Until, component aliases
Time From parameter 189
FROM TIME parameter alias 191
TIME FROM parameter alias 191
time_from parameter alias 191
TIMEFROM parameter alias 191
-timefrom parameter alias 191
Time of Print parameter (SAP) 389
Time to Wait parameter (messaging) 553
Time Until parameter 189
TIME UNTIL parameter alias 191
time_until parameter alias 191
TIMETO parameter alias 191
-timeuntil parameter alias 191
TO TIME parameter alias 191
TIME variable 506
Time Zone parameter 130
time zone support in utilities 131
Time Zone, component aliases
TIMEZONE parameter 132
Titles parameter (SAP) 390
To
subparameter of Do If rerun parameter 237
To Proc field, updating 312
To Step field, updating 312
TOK time zone 131
Tokyo time zone 131
Transfer Location parameter (FTP) 465
Translate Table parameter (FTP) 425, 466
TYO time zone 131
Type parameter (PS8) 483
TYPE subparameter of the CTB Step parameter 222
U
UNISYS job submission variables list 502
580
Unit parameter (FTP) 425, 467

Units parameter 194
Units, component aliases
UNIX
AutoEdit Assignment example 38
Bourne shell commands 39
File Name format 52
Unnnn code value 275
Urgency
subparameter for Do Remedy parameter 247
subparameter of Do Shout parameter 250
subparameter of Shout parameter 298
Use ABAP Program Default parameter (SAP) 391
Use Configuration Default parameter (FTP) 468
Use In-Stream JCL parameter
aliases 50
Use Predefined Message parameter (messaging) 556
User Daily jobs 119
User ID parameter (PS8) 484
user ID, Author parameter 33
User Name
parameter (FTP) 469
parameter (OAP) 420
userdef(x) 485
Userdef1/2/3 parameter (PS8) 485
user-defined variables 35, 508
V
validating scheduling dates 94
Value Name subparameter of the Profiles parameter 411
Value subparameter of Do AutoEdit parameter 225
values. See specific parameter or variable
variables
in job parameters 498
specifying 224
Variant Name parameter (SAP) 392
Volume parameter (FTP) 425, 470
W
W_DAY_STR parameter 137
Wait Child parameter (OAP) 421
Wait for Reply parameter (messaging) 557
Wait For Termination parameter (SAP) 320, 349, 352, 353
WAIT USER status 145
WCAL parameter 140
WDAY variable 507
WDAYS parameter 137
Web Services panel
Business parameter 531
Exclude Job output parameter 534
Input parameters 537
Operation parameter 543
Output parameters 544
Service parameter 552
Week Calendar, component aliases
non-periodic (regular) calendar formats 135
periodic calendar formats 134
Week Days, component aliases
weekdays
OWDAY variable 506
RWDAY variable 506
WDAY variable 507
Weeks Calendar parameter 139
rules 140
WCAL parameter alias 140
-weekcal parameter alias 140
WEEKS_CAL parameter alias 140
WEEKSCAL parameter alias 140
Western European Time 130
WET time zone 130
When subparameter of Shout Parameter 294
WIN2K-JOB_MEMORY_LIMIT variable 489
WIN2K-MAXIMUM_WORKING_SET_SIZE variable 490
WIN2K-MINIMUM_WORKING_SET_SIZE variable 491
WIN2K-PER_JOB_USER_TIME_LIMIT variable 488
WIN2K-PER_PROCESS_USER_TIME_LIMIT variable 493
WIN2K-PRIORITY_CLASS variable 492
WIN2K-PROCESS_MEMORY_LIMIT variable 494
WIN2K-SCHEDULING_CLASS variable 495
Windows AutoEdit variables 40, 509
working days 100, 133
WS-ACCOUNT variable 525
WS-ADDSOAPHEADERFILE variable 527
WS-ADDSOAPHEADERFROMFILE variable 527
WS-ARRAYSIZE variable 528
WS-BUSINESS variable 531
WS-NOSYSOUTBANNER variable 540
WS-OPERATION variable 543
WS-PARMS-P001-VALUE variable 544
WS-PARMS-P00n-NAME variable 537
WS-SERVICE variable 552
WS-SYSOUTSKIP variable 534
WS-WSDL variable 558
Y
YEAR variable 504, 507
years
four-digit Odate 504
four-digit working year 504
RYEAR variable 506
YEAR variable 507
Z
z/OS
DO NOTOK parameter 244
Do OK parameter 245
File Name format 52
note on Command parameter 39
Index
581
582
Notes
*94076*
*94076*
*94076*
*94076*
*94076*

CONTROL-M Parameter Guide

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

CONTROL-M Parameter Guide

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

CONTROL-M Parameter Guide

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What information can be found on the BMC website?

What information can be found on the BMC website?

What are the different ways to contact BMC customer support?

What are the different ways to contact BMC customer support?

CONTROL-M Parameter Guide

Contacting BMC Software

United States and Canada

BMC SOFTWARE INC

713 918 8800 or

(01) 713 918 8000

713 918 8000

Outside United States and Canada

(01) 713 918 8800

Copyright 2008 BMC Software, Inc.

Restricted rights legend

Support by telephone or e-mail

Before contacting BMC

operating system and environment information

sequence of events leading to the issue

commands and options that you used

product error messages